Quarterly reports of principal investigators for July-September

Environmental 

Assessment 

of the 

Alaskan 

Continental Shelf 

July - September 1975 quarterly reports from Principal Investigators participating 

in a multi-year program of environmental assessment related to petroleum 

development on the Alaskan Continental Shelf. The program is directed by the. 

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration under the sponsorship of the 

Bureau of Land Management. 

ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES / Boulder, Colorado / 1975

CONTENTS 

VOLUME I 

IAMMALS 1 

BIRDS 79 

PLANKTON, BENTHOS, LITTORAL 381 

iii4 

A

MARINE MAMMALS 

A

MARINE MAMMALS 

Research 

Unit Proposer Title 

Page 

13 James A. Estes 

USFWS 

14 James A. Estes 

USFWS 

34 G. Carleton Ray 

Douglas Wartzok 

Johns Hopkins U. 

67 Clifford H. Fiscus 

Alton Y. Roppel 

NWFC/NMFS 


George Y. Harry 

NWFC/NMFS 


W. Bruce McAlister 

NWFC/NMFS 

70 Willman M. Marquette 

George Y. Harry 

NWFC/NMFS 

194 

229 

230 

231 

232 

240 

Francis H. Fay 

IMS/U. of Alaska 

Kenneth W. Pitcher 

ADF&G 

John J. Burns 

ADF&G 

John J. Burns 

Samuel J. Harbo, Jr. 

ADF&G 

John J. Burns 

ADF&G 

Karl Schneider 

ADF&G 

Behavior and Reproduction of the 

Pacific Walrus 

Distribution of the Pacific Walrus 

Analysis of Marine Mammal Remote 

Sensing Data 

Baseline Characterization: Marine 

Mammals 

Abundance and Seasonal Distribution 

of Marine Mammals in the Gulf of 

Alaska 

Resource Assessment: Abundance and 

Seasonal Distribution of Bowhead and 

Belukha Whales - Bering Sea 

Abundance and Seasonal Distribution 

of Bowhead and Belukha Whales - 

Beaufort Sea, Northeastern Chukchi 

Sea 

Morbidity and Mortality of Marine 

Mammals 

Biology of the Harbor Seal - Phoca 

vitulina richardi 

The Natural History and Ecology of 

the Bearded Seal, Erignathus barbatus 

and the Ringed Seal, Phoca (Pusa) 

hispida 

An Aerial Census of Spotted Seals, 

Phoca vitulina largha 

Trophic Relationships Among Ice 

Inhabiting Phocid Seals 

Assessment of the Distribution and 

Abundance of Sea Otters Along Kenai 

Peninsula, Kamishak Bay and the 

Kodiak Archipelago 

7 

9 

11 

13 

19 

25 

29 

35 

43 

47 

57 

59 

65

Research 

Unit 

241 

243 

248 

249 

Proposer 


ADF&G 


Kenneth Pitcher 

ADF&G 

John J. Burns 

ADF&G 

Francis H. Fay 


Lewis H. Shapiro 

Geophys. Inst. 

U. of Alaska 

MARINE MAMMALS - Continued 

Title 

Distribution and Abundance of Sea 

Otters in Southwestern Bristol Bay 

Population Assessment, Ecology, and 

Trophic Relationships of Steller Sea 

Lions in the Gulf of Alaska 

The Relationships of Marine Mammal 

Distributions, Densities, and 

Activities to Sea Ice Conditions 

Page 

69 

71 

77

RU 13 

"Behavior and Reproduction of the Pacific Walrus" 

James A. Estes 

USFWS 

Field work to begin January 1976, no report at 

this time.

RU 14 

"Distribution of the Pacific Walrus" 

James A. Estes 

USFWS 

Field work to begin January 1976, 

no report at this time. 

9

RU 34 

"Analysis of Marine Mammal 

Remote Sensing Data" 

G. Carlton Ray & 

Douglas Wartzok 

Johns Hopkins Univ. 

Work just began -- no report at this time. 

11

SEMI-ANNUAL REPORT 

RU67 - Baseline Characterization -- Marine Mammal 

I. Task Objectives 

Identify the species of marine mammals occuring in the Bering Sea, 

determine seasonal distribution patterns, identify breeding and pupping 

rookeries, hauling grounds and feeding areas where oil spills may be 

critical to survival of species and obtain information on numbers and 

seasonal abundance of animals. 

Summarize and evaluate existing literature and unpublished data on the 

distribution, abundance, behavior, and food dependencies of marine 

mammals. 

Other programs which will be coordinated with research unit 67 are the 

aerial walrus study of Estes (RU 14) and the aerial largha study of 

Burns (RU 231) along and in the Bering Sea pack ice. Our proposed 

RU 69, Abundance and seasonal distribution of bowhead whales and 

belukha, extends the area of coverage north and westward into the 

approaches of the Gulf of Anadyr. The coastal survey of the Krenitzin 

Islands, and the north side of the Alaskan peninsula northward to Cape 

Newenham will be carried out cooperatively with sea lion surveys (RU 243) 

on the south side of the Alaskan peninsula. 

II. Field and Laboratory Activities 

1. Ms Nancy Severinghaus joined the staff 23 September 1975. She will 

make a survey of published and unpublished literature and data pertaining 

to marine mammals of the Bering Sea and prepare an annotated bibliography 

of these materials as a part of the Bering Sea Baseline Studies. 

2. The second aerial survey of the coast and islands between Cape Newenham 

on the north, south and westward along the north side of the. Alaska Peninsula, 

Unimak Island, the Krinitzen Islands, Unalaska, Umnak, Samalga and Bogoalof 

Islands was carried out from 9 to 13 August 1975. 

a. The survey aircraft was a Gruman Widgeon, chartered from 

Peninsula Airways, King Salmon,Alaska. Flights were made from 

King Salmon and Dutch Harbor. 

13

2 

b. The scientific party included: 

Clifford H. Fiscus National Marine Fisheries Service 

Marine Mammal Division 

Principal Investigator, RU 67 

Karl Schneider Alaska Department of Fish and Game 

Principal Investigator RU 243 

Don Calkins Alaska Department of Fish and Game 

c. Methods: 

Visual estimates were made of animals hauled out on shore and in the 

water. An attempt was made to photograph all marine mammal 

concentrations. Photos were taken from an open window, right side of 

plane, or through a closed window aft. Two Nikon 35mm cameras with 

motor drive units were used with 105rmm or 135 mm lens. 

Slides taken duriig the survey are being examined and the best selected 

from which to make counts of animals. The slide is projected on white 

paper and individual animals marked. Photographic counts will then be 

compared with visual estimates. 

d. See introductory paragraph and Figure 1. 

e. Data Collected or Analyzed: 

1. Approximately 950 slides of marine mammal concentrations 

were exposed. 

2. The best slides of each group of animals will be selected and counts of 

animals present will be made. 

3. Approximately 2600 miles of coastline was surveyed during the 

flights. 

f. Activities Planned for next 6 months: 

1. Photos and data obtained during June and August survey's will be 

examined and reports prepared. 

2. A third survey will be made in June 1976. 

3. Vessels operating in the Bering Sea area that recorded marine 

mammal sightings during the last quarter are listed below. 

14

3 

Vessels Dates of Operations 

M/V Tordenskjold 31 May to 10 August 1975 

Halibut Comm. 

NOAA FRV Oregon 8 June to 12 July 1975 

These date will be incorporated in the RU 67 report. 

4. Bird Observations made during the 17-20 June 1975 survey were 

forwarded to OCSEP Project Office and interested Principal Investigators. 

5. Fall Aerial Survey Northern Bering Sea: 

A. Plans were made, equipment readied and personnel were 

assigned to carry out a survey in September to October 1975 

of the northern Bering Sea and with one or two transects in the 

southern Chukchi Sea north of Bering Strait. 

B. Flight delayed to 6-13 October 1975; and will be reported on 

in the next report 

6. Aerial Survey - Spring (April) 1976: 

Aerial surveys will be made in April 1976 of the ice front zone in the 

Bering Sea from Bristol Bay northwestward past St. Matthew Island and 

transects flown across the pack inside the ice front, to determine distribution 

and abundance of marine mammals. These flights can continue in to the 

northern Bering Sea and southern Chukchi Sea on bowhead-belukha surveys 

(RU 69). 

Counts will be made visually or from photographs taken during the 

survey flights, by experienced observers, transect lines to be determined 

after location of the ice front is known. Flights will be reflowin in March- 

April 1977, if warranted. These aerial surveys are compatible with 

marine mammal research units 14, 231, 232, 243 and will use the same 

platform. Observations made on flights will be utilized by appropriate 

principal investigators. Sightings will be computerized for BLM data bank and 

other users. A marine bird observer can be accomodated on flights. 

III. Results 

Literature search in progress and ground work for preparation of annotated 

bibliography with standardized format completed. 

Methods for recording data have been prepared and data card designed. Data 

will be entered on cards, on approval after the 16 October OCSEPData 

Management meeting. 

3

16 

Smooth Log Books of the 9-13 August aerial survey have been completed and 

preliminary breakdown of slides by frames to specific pods of animals has 

been completed. 

Species observed during the survey are listed below: 

Sea Otter 

Enhydra lutris 

Northern Sea Lion Eumetopias jubatus 

Walrus 

Odobenus rosmarus divergens 

Harbor Seal 

Phoca vitulina richardii 

Gray Whale 

Eschrichtius robustus 

Minke Whale 

Balaenoptera acutorostrata 

Harbor Porpoise Phocoena phocoena 

Some areas not surveyed in June because of fog were surveyed during the 

August survey. Areas surveyed only in August were southside Unalaska 

Island, south side Umnak and adjacent islets including Ogchul, Vsevidof, 

Samalga, Adugak, and Bogoslof Islands. 

IV. Preliminary Interpretation of Results 

None 

V. Problems Encountered/Recommended Changes 

Weather conditions - Fog, high winds, rain and other factors all affect the 

success of survey flights. When possible during flights, routing is changed 

to obtain the best weather conditions over each area to be surveyed. In 

future planning, sufficient time should be allowed for delays caused by 

weather. 

Tidal conditions - Tide tables should be examined well in advance of the 

survey and stage of tide taken under consideration when planning surveys of 

species likely to respond to the influence of tide. 

Camera gear - The importance of a second camera taking duplicate photos 

of animal concentrations was clearly demonstrated during the August flights. 

Two photographers took identical photos of walrus concentrations on Round 

Island, north of Bristol Bay. The animals were uncountable on one series 

of slides due to underexposure, but countable on those of the backup photographer. 

We plan to use two cameras on future flights to obtain better series of slides, 

to use in counting animals. 

4

VI. Estimate of Funds Expended 

1 July to 30 September 1975 

R7120804 

Actual Expenses 

Photographic film 

Processing exposed film 

Camera and lens, etc. 

Aerial Survey 8-14 August 

Charter Peninsula Airways 

Fiscus, 8-14 August 

Per diem, etc. 300. 00 

Plane fare 322. 72 

17 

$ 551.25 

106.75 

1775.57 

3290.00 

622.72 

$6346.29

Figure 1. RU 67 -- Aerial ..

OUTER CONTINENTAL SHELF ENERGY PROGRAM 

JUNEAU PROJECT OFFICE 

S P. o. BOX 1808 

Semi-Annual Report 

RU 68 -- Abundance and seasonal distribution o marine mamma1s in the 

Gulf of Alaska 

.N EGOA 


Provide information on the species of marine mammals from the Gulf of 

Alaska, their seasonal distribution, migratory patterns, critical habitats, 

and some indication of abundance. 

A literature search will be made to provide historic data on whaling and 

sealing in the area, catch statistics will be summarized, and records 

of historic seasonal distribution and abundance of species will be compiled 

where possible. 

We will continue to gather data on marine mammal distribution and abundance 

from NOAA vessels operating in the expanded area, Unimak Pass to Cross 

Sound, and from other vessels of opportunity. Ships officers will be 

trained to recognize and make sighting records of all marine mammals seen. 

Trained marine mammal observers may be placed on selected vessels 

cruising in areas of particular ihterest. 


1. Ms. Nancy Severinghaus joined the staff 23 September 1975. She will 

make a literature search to provide historic data on whaling and sealing in 

the northeastern North Pacific Ocean. An annotated bibliography of 

published and manuscript reports pertaining to the area will be prepared. 

Catch statistics will be summarized. 

2. Lt. Roger Mercer has designed data cards and format to reduce marine 

mammal observations to data cards for eventual computer printout and entry 

into the EDS data base. The program will begin soon after the Data Management 

meeting of 16 October. 

3. Designated ships officers, on NOAA vessels engaged in OCSEP programs, 

were trained to identify marine mammals and record sightings in logs 

provided by the Marine Mammal Division, Northwest Fisheries Center. 

A. Vessels recording observations during period: 

NOAA ship Surveyor Fairweather 

Rainier McArthur 

Davidson

B. Scientific Party: 

None 

Assigned Ships Officers: Ens. T. Baxter, Surveyor 

Ens. Kosinski, Fairweather 

Ltjg. R. Ellis, Rainier 

Ltjg. G. Sequr, McArthur 

Ens. M. Huestis, Davidson 

C. Methods: 

Observations of marine mammals are reported to the Marine Mammal 

Officer and recorded in Logs provided by the Marine Mammal Division, 

Northwest Fisheries Center. On receipt of Logs from vessels, 

Division staff examine and classify observations preparatory to carding 

data. 

D. All vessels listed under "A" are working at least in part in 

study area. Tracklines not currently available. 

E. Data Collected or Analyzed: 

NOAA Ship McArthur logs received from period 5 March to 17 August. 

F. Activities Planned for Next Six Months: 

1. An observer will be placed aboard the NOAA ship Miller 

Freeman for the period 9-30 November. 

2. Observers will be placed on other vessels during winter 

and early spring cruises in the Gulf of Alaska and Bering Sea. 

3. Sightings will be coded and carded for species, number seen, 

location, behavior, direction of travel, weather and perhaps other 

information. Computer printout of the data, a narrative report, 

and charts indicating location of sightings by month will be 

compiled. 

4. Distributional data will be examined through computer programs 

by month where sufficient sightings are available or by season 

(3 month periods). Sightings per unit of effort will be compared 

and displayed in a manner similar to that used in studies of pelagic 

fur seal distribution. When sufficient data have accumulated it will 

20

III. Results: 

be examined by the Post-stratified random sample method 

(Cochran, W. 1963. Sampling Methods. J. Wiley and Sons, 

N.Y. 415 pp.) to develope population indices. Since most 

ocean research is conducted in this area during late spring 

through early fall data on winter distribution and abundance 

will be minimal. 

See Section II. 

IV. Preliminary Interpretation of Results: 

None 

V. Problems Encountered/Recommended Changes: 

Minor changes will be made in Observation Log Sheets to simplify 

recording data. 

VI. Estimate of Funds Expended: 

See attached sheets. 

21 

3

n 



P. O, 80X 1808 

Semi-Annual Report JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 E 

RU 69 -- Resource assessment, abundance and seasonal distribution 

bowhead and belukha whales - Bering Sea. 

1. Task Objectives 

NEGOA 

The bowhead whale and those belukhas that summer north of Bering Strait are 

thought to winter in northern Bering Sea along the ice front and in the open 

leads and broken ice associated with the front. Polynya's occur regularly in 

the northwest part of Bering Sea and may also be wintering locations for these 

species. Scammon (1874) in describing the bowhead fishery states that the 

whalers usually worked their way north about the first of May along the 

Siberian coast, staying near shore "in order to be on the best "whale-ground" 

and to avoid the ice. " Townsend (1935) plotted from whalers log books, the 

locations where bowheads were taken each month of the season. As indicated 

on his chart most whales were taken in the western and northern Bering Sea 

in May and June. The numbers of stock is unknown. The size of the belukha 

population that winters in Bering Sea is also unknown, but according to the 

ADF&G may exceed 15, 000 animals. 

Summarize and evaluate existing literature and unpublished data on the 

distribution, abundance, behavior, and food dependencies of marine mammals. 

The survey flights will be carried out in the spring of 1976 in conjunction with 

research units 67, 14, 23, and 248 and the same platform and aerial survey 

techniques with only slight modifications will be used. Project personnel 

will interchange and cooperate as needed. 

The 1976 survey may indicate the presence of wintering populations and provide 

some information on distribution. 

II. Field or Laboratory Activities 

A. Ship of Field trip schedule 

1 scheduled for April 1976. 

B. Scientific Party: 

Tb be assigned 

C. Methods. 

1. Design of a survey plan is currently in progress. It will be based on 

the experience of the prinipal investigators projects 67, 14, 231, 

and in conjunction with biometricians of the NWFC, NMFS, and of 

25

the Univers of Washington. Sampling strategy will be modified 

deemed as appropriate during the progress of the flights. 

D.Sample Locality 

Northwestern Bering Sea including the Gulf of Anadyr. 


None 

F. Activities planned for next six months: 

1. Literature search and preparation of annotated bibliography in 

conjunction with RU 67, 68, 70. 

2. Survey planning and design. 

3. Survey to be accomplished in April-May 1976 in conjunction with 

other OCS Research Units RU 67, 14, 23, 248. 

III. Results 

None 


None 


Surveys in Northwestern Bering Sea will be discussed with our Soviet 

collegues at the US-USSR marine mammal sub-group meeting in January 1976. 

VI. Estimated Funds Expended 


R7120807 

Supplies 

(see attached sheets) 

$60.00 

26-

Outer CONTINENTAL SHELF ENERGY PROGRAM 

BOX PO 1808 

Quarterly ReportJNEAU, ALASKA 99802 

NOV 06 1975 

RU 70 -- Abundance and seasonal distribution of bowhead whales and belukha. 

.NEGOA 


To Determine the effect oil spills might have on these species during critical 

periods we must determine if their spring migration is restricted, in the 

main, to the shore lead or if there are considerable numbers passing northeastward 

in offshore leads. Information on the numbers of animals comprising 

these stocks is needed, and data on the migratory patterns both in spring 

and fall are necessary to determine times when the movement of vessel 

traffic and attendent dangers of oil spills will be the least dangerous to 

bowheads and belukha's. 

This project can share the same platform of Burns-Fay-Shapiro for the 

project "The relationships of marine mammal distributions, densities and 

activities to sea ice conditions in the Beaufort Sea." 


A. The first aerial survey of the Beaufort and northeastern Chukchi Seas 

was made from 2 September to 7 October. The survey aircraft was a 

DeHaviland Twin Otter provided by the Naval Arctic Reseaich Laboratory 

at Barrow, Alaska. All flights were made from Barrow. 

B. The scientific party included: 

Willman M. Marquette National Marine Fisheries Service 

, Marine Mammal Division 

Principal Investigator, RU 70 

Robert D. Everitt National Marine Fisheries Service 


Geoffry M. Carroll National Marine Fisheries Service 


C. Methods: 

1. Flights were made on random transects over the survey area 

which included open water and various ice covers ranging from 

one eighth to solid ice pack. Photographs (135mm color slides) were 

made of the target species). 

29

2. Ms. Nancy Severinghaus joined the staff 23 September 1975. She 

will make a survey of published and unpublished literature and data 

pertaining to bowhead whales and belukha and prepare annotated 

bibliographies on these species as a part of the study . to determine 

the abundance and distribution of bowhead whales and belukha. 

D. See introductory paragraph and Figure 1. 

E. Data collected or analyzed: 

1. Twelve flights were made over the survey area. 

2. Approximately 30 slides of marine mammals were obtained. 

3. Approximately 3,300 miles of transects were flown over the 

target area. 

F. Activities planned for next 6 months: 

1. Photos and-data obtained during September and October will be 

examined and rpports prepared. 

2. Data collected and reported by other agencies during the last 

quarter will be included in the RU 70 report. 

3. Other species observed druing the September-October 1975 aerial 

survey will be forwarded to interested Principal Investigators. 

4. A second survey will be made in May 1976, in the Beaufort and 

Chukchi Seas. 

III. Results 

A. Literature search is in progress and ground work for preparation of an 

annotated bibliography with standardized format completed. 

B. Methods for recording data have been prepared and data card designed. 

Data will be entered on cards, on approval after the 16 October OCSEP Data 

Management meeting. No species code from Juneau. 

C. The following marine mammals were sighted on this survey: 

LIVE NUMBER 

Bowhead Balaena mysticetus 2 

Whale Unidentified (probably B.mstictus) 1 

Belukha Delphinapterus leucas 0 

30

LIVE 

3 

NUMBER 

Walrus Odobenus rosmarus divergens 462 

Bearded seal Erignathus barbatus 2 

Polar bear Ursus maritimus 2 

DEAD 

NUMBER 

Whales Unidentified 2 

Seal Unidentified 1 

Walrus Odobenus rosmarus divergens 3 


None 


Fog, high winds, rain and other factors all affect the success of survey flights. 

When possible during flights, routing is changed to obtain the best weather 

conditions over each area to be surveyed. In future planning, sufficient time 

should be allowed for delays caused by weather. 

The OnTrac navigation aid in the Twin Otter Aircraft was not working 

properly and correct positions had to be obtained by use of radio beacons 

and Dewline station fixes upon our plane. 

31


A. Personnel 

SName Salary Travel Per diem Total 

Marquette N/C 410.44 1416.07 1826.51 

Everitt 730.24 410.44 842.00 1982.68 

Carroll 321. 20 145.40 428.00 894.60 

TOTALS 1051.44 966.28 2686.07 4703.79 4703.79 

B. Equipment and Supplied 

Camera Equipment 1914.52 

Binoculars, 3 each 480.00 

Cold Weather Clothing 125. 00 

TOTAL 2519.52 2519.52 

C. NARL Services 

Aircraft 

34 hours at $350 11900.00 

9 hours at $20 x 2 persons 360.00 

1/2 Laboratory at $ 5/day x 33 days 165. 00 

Clothing 15.00 

TOTAL 12440.00 12440.00 

32 

GRAND TOTAL 19663.31

Quarterly Report for Quarter Ending September 30, 1975 

Project Title: Morbidity and Mortality of Marine Mammals 

Contract Number: 03-5-022-56 

Task Order Number: 8 

Principal Investigator: Francis H. Fay 

Associate Professor 

Institute of Marine Science and 

Arctic Biology 

University of Alaska 

Fairbanks, Alaska 99701 


OUTER CONTINENTAL SHELF ENERGY PROGRAI 


P. 0. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 ... 

1. To begin a survey of the biological literature for information 

on occurrence of stranded marine mammals and 

causes of natural morbidity and mortality. 

2. To draft a dissection manual for identification and 

autopsy of marine mammals stranded in Alaska. 

3. To survey the coasts of the Alaska Peninsula (N side), 

St. Lawrence Island and Kotzebue Sound for stranded marine 

mammal carcasses and to determine the cause of death when 

possible. 

II. Field Activities 

The northern coast of the Alaska Peninsula was surveyed by 

Associate Investigator R. Dieterich via chartered aircraft from 

22 to 25 July covering the area from Bechevin Bay (C. Krenitzin) 

on the west to the mouth of the Naknck River on the east (Fig. 1). 

Ten landings were made along the way for more detailed examination 

and/or autopsy of the more intact carcasses. Additionally 

in this area, in connection with another project, the PI surveyed 

the eastern shore of Kuskokwim Bay between Chagvan and 

Jacknife Bays on 15 and 20 July via aircraft, and a smaller 

segment from C. Pierce to the southeastern part of C. Newenham 

on 18 July on foot. 

The coast of St. Lawrence Island was surveyed by the PI and 

field assistant from 4 to 23 August. About one-third of the area 

was covered on foot and one-third via chartered small boat 

(Fig. 2). The outlying Punuk Islands had been surveyed earlier 

35

-2- 

(18-23 June) by technician L. Shults in connection with another 

related project. 

The shores of Kotzebue Sound from Sheshalik to Point Hope and 

from Cape Espenberg to Wales were surveyed by L. Shults via 

chartered aircraft from 16 to 25 July. The area covered is shown 

in Fig. 3. Several landings were made on the beaches for closer 

inspection and collection of diagnostic samples from some of the 

carcasses. 

III. Results 

One hundred thirty titles of papers dealing with diseases, 

parasites, pathology and natural mortality of marine mammals 

have been accumulated thus far, and the search and review 

procedures are continuing. 

A first draft of an autopsy manual was developed for use and 

critique by project personnel during this quarter's field 

activities. Several modifications were indicated and will be incorporated 

into a second working draft in the next quarter. 

The Alaska Peninsula survey covered about 620 km (385 mi) of 

coast, on which were found the remains of 12 whales (all 

apparently very young gray Eschrichtius gibbosus, and minke 

whales, Balaenoptera acutorostrata), 16 adult walruses (Odobenus 

rosmarus), 10 young and adult hair seals (Phoca spp.) and 3 

adult sea otters (Enhydra lutris). About one-fourth of these 

were old, dried and tattered remains left from previous years; 

three-fourths were judged to have stranded no more than 3 months 

prior to the survey. The degenerate condition of most of the 

latter precluded useful autopsy. 

The Kuskokwim Bay supplement which amounted to about 83 km 

(51.5 mi), yielded no carcasses at all, and the C. Pierce-C. 

Newenham segment of about 8 km (5 mi) yielded only 1 fresh 

carcass of an adult male Steller's sea lion (Eumetopias jubatus) 

and an assortment of much older remains of walruses (2 adult, 

2 subadult males), harbor seals (Phoca vitulina, 2 adults) and 

whales (1 each of gray and minke, I killer whale, Orcinus orca 

and 1 giant bottle-nosed whale, Berardius bairdii). 

About 267 km (167 mi) of the coast of St. Lawrence Island were 

surveyed, yielding 36 whales (30 grays and minkes, 4 bowheads, 

Balaena mysticetus and 2 finbacks, Balacnoptera physalus), 

36

-3- 

3 Steller sea lions, 96 walruses, 4 harbor seals, 4 bearded 

seals (Erignathus barbatus), 20 ringed seals (Phoca hispida) 

and 1 ribbon seal (Phoca fasciata). Three-fourths of the 

whales, half of the walruses and all of the sea lions had stranded 

more than 8 months earlier; the rest of the carcasses were judged 

to have stranded no more than 3 months prior to the survey. Two 

whales, 2 walruses and 1 seal were autopsied; the remainder had 

been excessively scavenged or was too advanced in autolysis for 

diagnosis of cause of death. 

The Punuk Island supplement yielded 61 additional walruses, 7 of 

which had lain there for about 6 months and the remainder for much 

longer. These tiny islands (total area about 1/4 sq mi) are noted 

hauling grounds for walruses during the southward migration in 

autumn, and a high natural mortality is a predictable annual event 

here. As yet, there has been little opportunity to determine the 

extent or the causes of that mortality. 

The survey of Kotzebue Sound covered 434 km (270 mi). About 

half of it was in the northern, Sheshalik-Point Hope segment which 

yielded only the carcasses of 3 hair seals (Phoca ssp.). The 

southern segment, C. Espenberg-Wales, however, yielded 10 whales 

(apparently all gray whales), 89 walruses, 3 bearded seals and 10 

ringed seals. Each of these probably had stranded no more than 

2 months prior to the survey. Practically all of the pinnipeds had 

been decapitated or had been shot in the head; all of the whales 

were awash in surf that was too deep to permit access for autopsy. 

Regretably little was learned of the natural causes of mortality in 

any of the areas sampled, principally due to the scarcity of intact, 

reasonably fresh carcasses. This points up the need for earlier 

surveys as had been scheduled originally but was not feasible this 

year (due to the delay caused by prolonged contract negotiations 

and the subsequent conflict with commitments to other projects). In 

general, it seems that most of the walruses and more than half of the 

seals and sea lions had died from gunshot wounds; the remainder 

and all of the whales and sea otters probably had died from natural 

causes. The causes, as determined by our autopsies, were as follows: 

Gunshot: Five walruses and four seals had definitely been shot 

in the head and killed. 

Trauma: One walrus calf at Punuk Island was found to have a 

broken neck. 

Predation: Two gray whales at St. Lawrence Island had been killed 

and partially eaten by killer whales, 

Hemmorhage: 

One sea otter had apparently died from excessive 

post-partum loss of blood. 

Probable Bacterial Infections: 

One - *t . I | ' i 'n I ' I I r lt ; 

37 

: ' ' i

IV. Problems Encountered 

-4- 

peritonitis and possible bacteremia arising from 

ascending infection of the urachus. 

One walrus had died from a severe pneumonia 

probably derived by inhalation of exudate from a 

large dental abcess. 

One sea otter showed enlargement of spleen and 

liver with possible lesions in the latter. 

The use of chartered aircraft with hired pilot presented some 

problems in that most of the autopsies required or would have 

been greatly facilitated by having a 2-man team approach. The 

aircraft required for beach landings can accommodate only the 

pilot and one passenger, and, frequently, the hired pilot was 

unwilling to participate in the autopsy thereby hampering, prolonging 

and increasing the cost of the work. We propose to 

remedy this in the future by charter or aircraft that can be 

piloted by project personnel (i.e. by Associate Investigator, R. 

Dieterich). This will accelerate as well as improve the quality 

of the work, and it will reduce the cost per hour thereby increasing 

the time available and the coverage in the surveys. (Charter 

rates are increasing rapidly and already are expected to exceed 

the budgeted rate by about 25% in 1976). 

At St. Lawrence Island where aircraft support is not feasible, 

surveys were undertaken via chartered small boat and on foot. 

The surveys via small boat were rather unsatisfactory for detection 

of any but the largest and most recent strandings due to 

limited visibility. Surveys on foot were by far the most effective 

but were inefficient because of the low speed (8-12 mi/da). The 

best alternative for future surveys in that area combining greater 

speed with nearly the visual effectiveness of a pedestrian survey 

seems to be the use of an All-terrain Vehicle (ATV), The 

possibilities of purchase or rental of such a vehicle are currently 

being investigated. 

V. Estimate of Funds Expended 

(6 months) 

Total Budget Expended* Remaining 

Salaries & wages 39,586.00 3,184.71 36,401.29 

Staff Benefits 6,700.00 541.40 6,158.60

-5- 

(continued) (6 months) 


Equipment -0- -0- -0- 

Travel 6,000.00 244.35 5,755.65 

Other 16,300.00 408.88 15,891.12 

Total Direct 68,586.00 4,379.34 64,206.66 

Indirect 22,643.00 1,821.65 20,821.35 

Task Order Total 91,229.00 6,200.99* 85,028.01 

* Preliminary cost data, not yet fully processed. 

39

Fig. 1. The Alaska Peninsula and Kuskokwim Bay segments. Heavy line 

indicates the surveyed coastline. 

40

Fig. 2. The St. Lawrence and Punuk Island segments. Heavy lines indicate 

the areas surveyed. 

41

Fig. 3. The Kotzebue Sound segments. Heavy lines indicate the coastline 

that was surveyed. 

42

OCSEP - Research Unit #229 - Semi Annual Report - 1 November 1975 

NEGOA 

Title: Biology of the harbor seal, Phoca vitulina richardi - Gulf 

of Alaska 

Principal Investigator: Kenneth W. Pitcher 

Alaska Department of Fish and Game 

333 Raspberry Road 

Anchorage, Alaska 99502 

344-0541 


RECEIVED 

NOV 17 1975 

1. To investigate population productivity of the harbor seal in 

the Gulf of Alaska with emphasis on determining age of sexual 

maturity, age specific birth rates, age structure of the 

population and survival rates for various sex and age classes. 

2. To determine food habits and trophic relationships of the 

harbor seal in the Gulf of Alaska. 


A. Ship Schedule (Dates approximate) 

1. November 1975 MV "Montague" Prince William Sound area. 

2. February 1976 - MV "Resolution." Kenai Peninsula, outside 

coast. 

3. March 1976. MV "Resolution." Northern Kodiak, Afognak, 

Shuyak. 

4. April or May 1976. MV "Montague" or comparable charter 

vessel - Kayak Island, Controller Bay. 

5. May or June - charter vessel - Yakutat Bay, Icy Bay. 

6. June or July - charter aircraft - Tugidak Island, Southern 

Kodiak. 

B. Scientific Party 

1. Karl Schneider - Alaska Department of Fish and Game - 

P.I.#243. 

2. Donald Calkins - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game - Co. P.I. 

#243. 

3. Kenneth Pitcher - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game - P.I. 

#229, Co. P.I. #243. 

4. Various employees - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game - Field 

Assistants. 

43

C. Methods 

1. Harbor seals are being collected systematically from 

different areas and habitat types throughout the year. 

2. Standard weights and measurements are taken from each 

collected animal including: total weight, blubber 

weight, standard length, curvilinear length, axillary 

girth, maximal girth, hind flipper length and blubber 

thickness. 

3, Ages are established for each animal from cementum annulli 

of canine teeth. 

4. The ovaries and uterus are taken from each female seal 

and preserved in formalin. Standard laboratory techniques 

for reproductive analysis are used through which the 

presence or absence of a conceptus in the uterus is 

determined and a partial reproductive history is reconstructed 

by examination of ovarian structures. 

5. Testes and epididymides from each male seal are collected 

and preserved. Weights and measurements are taken in the 

laboratory and a histological examination will be made of 

a selected series. By correlating size and weight of the 

testis with presence of spermatozoa it should be possible 

to eventually establish potency by size of testis. 

6. Stomach contents from each seal are preserved in formalin. 

Weights and volumes are determined for all contents. 

Identifications of prey species are made by examination 

of recognizable individuals and skeletal materials of 

diagnostic value. Frequency of occurrence of prey species 

is then determined. 

7. Intestinal contents from each seal are strained through 

mesh sieves to recover fish otoliths. Otoliths, which 

are diagnostic to specific level, are compared to a 

reference collection and identified. 

8. A literature review is being conducted to obtain available 

data on prey species' distribution and abundance. 

D. Sample Localities 

1. Prince William Sound 

2. Kenai Peninsula - outside coast 

3. Northern Kodiak, Afognak, Shuyak 

4. Kayak Island, Controller Bay 

5. Yakutat Bay, Icy Bay 

6. Barren Islands, Portlock Banks 

7. Tugidak Island, Southern Kodiak 

44

E. Data Collected 

III. Results 

As explained in the proposal and work statement this project 

is an expansion and continuation of research begun under 

contract to the Marine Mammal Commission. To date all sampling 

has been conducted with Commission support, however beginning 

in November (see field schedule) collecting will proceed with 

O.C.S. funding. The majority of harbor seal collecting must 

be conducted during winter months in order to determine pregnancy 

rates for the population productivity task. 

As of 1 October 1975, 147 harbor seals have been collected in 

the Prince William Sound - Copper River Delta area. Specimen 

materials from 22 seals collected in Prince William Sound in 

1973 are being included for analysis in this project. Weights 

and measurements have been taken for all collected animals. 

To date, 128 canine teeth have been decalcified, thin-sectioned, 

stained and mounted on microscope slides. Ages have been 

determined for these animals. All female reproductive tracts 

have been processed and the testes from males have been partially 

processed. Stomach contents have been rough sorted and tentative 

identifications made of the more common items. A series of 

otoliths has been collected from intestinal contents and will 

be identified when a suitable reference collection is developed. 

While analysis of the reproductive material is not complete it 

appears that female harbor seals in the area sampled are attaining 

sexual maturity at 3-4 years. Pregnancy rates for mature seals 

appears to be high. 

Weight and measurement data have not yet been correlated with age 

data however our preliminary impression is that seals from the 

Prince William Sound area are smaller than animals from most other 

populations in Alaska. Seasonal body condition, as indicated by 

blubber thickness and blubber percent of body weight, shows a 

general pattern of increasing blubber from August through May with 

a rapid decrease during summer. 

Dominant food species identified to date include Alaska pollock 

(Theragra chalcogramma), herring (Clupea harengus), eulachon 

(Thaleichthys pacificus) and octopus (Octopus sp.). Other species 

identified include shrimp (Pandalus sp.), squid, salmon (Oncorhynchus 

sp.), sand lance (Ammodytes hexaptenus) and starry flounder (Platichthys 

stellatus). 

IV. Preliminary interpretation of results. 

None 

V. Problems encountered/recommended changes. 

None 

45

VI. Estimate of funds expended. 

Equipment: 

Binoculars and collecting rifle = $685.00 

VII. Recommendations for future research. 

A. All phases of the present research aimed at population 

productivity and trophic relationships should continue for a 

minimum of three years. 

B. I have several thoughts on potential harbor seal research 

which should be conducted in the Gulf. 

1. A series of aerial surveys should be conducted along the 

Gulf Coast from Cordova to Cape Fairweather to delineate 

areas of high harbor seal density, pupping areas and 

changes in seasonal distribution. This should include 

aerial photography of the Icy Bay area, in order to gain 

insight into population size. 

2. The feasibility of radio tracking both harbor seals and 

sea lions should be investigated. The successful employment 

of this technique would provide important data on movements, 

seasonal distribution, feeding areas, habitat selection 

and behavior. 

3. Tugidak Island, located south of Kodiak, has the largest 

known concentration of land breeding harbor seals, probably 

at times exceeding 10,000 animals. The area has numerous 

possibilities for research. One important factor which 

should be explored is natural mortality of pups. 

4G6

NOV 17 1975 

Semi-annual Progress Report 

Research Unit #230 N E G 0 A 

Title: The natural history and ecology of the bearded seal 

(Erignathus barbatus) and the ringed seal (Phoca hispida). 

Principal Investigators: 

John J. Burns - bearded seal Thomas J. Eley, Jr. - ringed seal 

Marine Mammals Biologist Marine Mammals Biologist 

Alaska Department of Fish Alaska Department of Fish 

and Game 

and Game 

1300 College Road 1300 College Road 

Fairbanks, Alaska 99701 Fairbanks, Alaska 99701 

I. Task objectives 

During fiscal year 1976 the following will be accomplished and 

reported on by 30 September 1976. 

1. Summarization and evaluation of existing literature and available 

unpublished data on reproduction, distribution, abundance, 

food habits and human dependence on bearded and ringed seals 

in the target areas. 

2. Acquisition of large amount of specimen material required for an 

understanding of food habits in these two species (see report 

for project #232). 

3. Identification of the major food items utilized by ringed and 

bearded seals in the Beaufort Sea (see report for project 

#232). 

4. Initial assessment of regional differences in density and 

distribution of ringed and bearded seals in relation to 

geographic areas and, to a lesser extent, in relation to 

major habitat conditions. 

5. Determination of population structure of bearded and ringed 

seals as indicated by composition of harvest taken by Eskimo 

subsistence hunters. 

6. Acquisition of additional data on productivity and fetal 

growth rate. 

7. Acquisition of additional information on seasonal migrations. 

8. Acquisition of base line data concerning parasite loads. 

47


A. Schedule 

Dates Location Activity 

April to Bering Sea and Collection of specimens 

June, 1975 Bering Straits from native hunters - 

ADF&G funded. 

June 1975 Barrow Aerial survey of ringed 

seal - ADF&G and OCS 

funded 

August, 1975present 

Fairbanks Office and laboratory 

analysis of ringed seal 

data. 

B. Methods 

This project is dependent upon a sampling program which 

is to continue, intermittently, throughout the year involving 

the acquisition of biological specimens for laboratory analysis 

and field observation of undisturbed seals. In anticipation of 

project approval a major sampling program was conducted at Eskimo 

hunting sites in the Yukon-Kuskokwim region, St. Lawrence Island 

and Bering Strait (funded by Alaska Department of Fish and Game). 

Methods of analysis during this first project year are as follows: 

1. Existing literature and unpublished data are being received 

and summarized in the traditional manner including abstracting 

pertinent papers and reports, and analyzing data already 

in hand (dating back at least 1962). 

2. Acquisition of large amounts of specimen material required 

for an understanding of the natural history and ecology 

of these two species is continuing at major hunting 

villages. We have emphasized the collection of jaws and 

claws (for age determinates), reproductive tracts, and 

stomachs. When possible weights and all standard measurements 

are taken. 

3. The preliminary analysis of food habits of bearded and 

ringed seals will involve volumetric measurement of total 

stomach contents, separation and identification of major 

food items, and determination of frequency of occurrence 

and volume of prey species (see report for project #232). 

48

4. Regional differences in seal density and distribution are 

being assessed through aerial and shipboard surveys. The 

first aerial survey was conducted in June, 1975 from 

Barrow and was jointly funded by Alaska Department of 

Fish and Came and OCS. A shipboard survey will be conducted 

at the ice edge from 15 March to 1 May 1976, hopefully 

aboard a Soviet research vessel. 

5. Population structure of ringed and bearded seals is being 

assessed through sex and age determination of samples 

obtained at coastal hunting sites and in the course of 

shipboard work. 

6. Species productivity is being determined through laboratory 

examination of all female reproductive tracts. Correlation 

of these data with age of each specimen will provide 

information on age specific productivity. Fetal growth 

is based on size correlated with time when samples are 

collected. 

7. Seasonal migration patterns are being determined through 

observations at coastal hunting sites, shipboard and 

aerial survey. 

III. Results and Preliminary Interpretation 

The results and their preliminary interpretations are considered 

tenative and are not to go outside the Project Office. 

A. Specimens 

During the 1975 hunting seaon 122 ringed seals and 81 

bearded seals were processed at 5 villages (Table 1). Measurements, 

jaws, claws, stomachs and reproductive tracts were 

obtained from most specimens. In addition, partial data are 

available from about 600 additional specimens collected from 

1962 to 1974. These specimens are being processed as rapidly 

as possible. 

Table 1. Ringed seal specimens exaMined in, the field, April-July, 1975. 

49

Table 2. Bearded seal specimens examined in the field April-July, 1975. 

among 

Rate 

seals." 

Habits 

relationships 

phocid 

"Trophic 

of 

Food Growth 

report 

B. 

Fetal inhabiting semi-annual 

See 

ice 

C. 

A knowledge 


lessen 

development. 

productivity 

hopefully, shelf 

the 

and, 

affecting continental 

assess, 

to 

outer 

factors of 

needed 

the 

is 


impacts 

seal a 


adverse 

ringed 

the 

possible 

Productivity 

species 

we of 

array age. one by 

is 

level fecundity 

an 

species. before growth appear 

August 

fertility 

by 

1) continuous 

seal 

rates. 


breeding 

this mid-April a 

formation 

proximal to delay followed 

in 

as from 

ultimately 

a 

influenced 

ringed affect: rate in approximately 

implantation 

unknown. 

the is 

on 

is the of 

month the 

survival which 

of from 

determined which 

differentiation 

pup 

fertility 1/2 

are growth 

is 

However, 

considered required 

B. Food Habits 

2) factors and 3 

affect period 

See semi-annual report produced and of the "Trophic are impregnated relationships among 

ice inhabiting phocid seals." 

ova various 

development 

influence usually 

implantation, 

Growth 

that Impregnation 

be 

C. Fetal Growth Rate 

parameters). 

the fetal is 

viable in 

fetal 

produced; which differentiation 

during to precise 

A knowledge of the factors affecting the productivity of 


pup. before 

the ringed seal and is needed to assess, and, hopefully, lessen 

and factors 

possible adverse specimens 

pups impacts of outer the continental shelf development. 

slow 

Productivity of a species the is determined ultimately by fecundity 

(number 

synergetic 

(number 


interested of viable 

development 

the ova produced appear which is influenced by an array 

of synergetic parameters parturition. 

parameters). early of months seal However, on a proximal level we 

are embryonic interested growth in the various factors which affect: 1) fertility - 

number to albeit but 

number 

the 

of pups produced; and 2) pup survival to breeding age. 

The 


The embryonic and fetal seals development of the ringed seal is one 

of the parameters birth 3-1/2 which influence fertility in this species. 

demonstrate 

zygote 

differentiation 

Embryologic to development is usually considered as a continuous 

process of 

the 

growth to and differentiation from the formation of 

the zygote up to Additional 

ringed parturition. Growth and differentiation appear 

continuous, albeit slow during the 3 1/2 month delay before 

implantation, 


and after determine 

but the factors that affect the rate of growth 

and differentiation are unknown. 

Female ringed seals appear to be impregnated in mid-April 

soon 

delay to 

soon August. September after the birth of the pup. Impregnation is followed by 

a delay of up to 3-1/2 months before implantation, approximately 

in August. Additional seal specimens are required from August 

and September to demonstrate the precise period of implantation 

and to determine early fetal growth rates. 

50 

-

Thus far, 44 ringed seal fetuses have been examined and 

measured. A 1:1 fetal sex ratio (22 males and 22 females) has 

been found. The fetal growth curve for length (Fig. 1) closely 

resembles those from ringed seals in Canada (McLaren, Fisheries 

Research Board of Canada Bulletin 118:1958). The growth curve 

for weight is similar to those for most mammals. The relative 

growth of length to weight (Fig. 3) is highest during early 

pregnancy. The growth in weight is more rapid in mid-pregnancy 

with relative growth rates leveling off in late pregnancy. 

No differences in growth rates of males and females were 

detected, however the sample size was small. 

D. Aerial Survey 

See semi-annual report of "The relationships of marine 

mammal distribution, densities and activities to sea ice." 

E. Parasite Studies 

A total of 17 marine mammals were necropsies at Wainwright, 

Alaska, during July 1975. Necropsies were performed by Mrs. 

Carol Nielsen. Field results of these necropsies are indicated 

on the following page. 

IV. Problems and changes 

No major problems have been encountered thus far and no changes are 

recommended at this time. 

We do encourage the development of a functional data bank which can 

be utilized to integrate information concerning the physical and biological 

aspects from other studies, which may relate to the biology of marine 

mammals. 

V. Expenditures 

B. Travel $287.40 

C. Contractual Services -0- 

D. Commodities 553.45 

51

MARINE MAMAL NECROPSIES 

done by Carol Nielsen at Wainwright, Alaska July 24 - August 1, 1975 

Total animals examined: 17 Erignathus barbatus- 9 

Phoca (Pusa) hispida - 6 

Odobenus rosmarus - 1 

Phoca vitulina largha - 1 

Organs examined for each animal: 

l.heart, valves, pericardium 

*2.pulmonary artery, aorta 

3.1ungs 

4.trachea & bronchi 

5. diaphragm 

**6.liver 

7.spleen 

***8.kidneys 

**9.gallbladder, bile duct 

*10.esophagus 

*****.stomach (mucosa & contents) 

12.duodenum (mucosa & contents) 

*****13.small intestine - first 10 ft. (mucosa & contents) 

14.1arge intestine (mucosa & contents) 

* not examined for 1 Odobenus rosmarus 

** not examined for 1 Erignathus barbatus 

*** not examined for 6 Erignathus barbatus 

**** to be examined in conjunction with invertebrate foods contents study 

***** not examined for 2 Erignathus barbatus 

Specimens collected from animals for later laboratory analysis & study: 

E. barbatus P.hispida P.v.largha 0. 

A. Normal tissue 

rosmarus 

1. liver slice (chemical 9 6 1 1 

analysis) 

2. caecal lymphoid tissue 

3. ilium mucosa 

4. bile duct entrance 

5. thymus 

6. duodenum mucosa 

7. lung 

2 

1 

1 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1 

1 

- 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

B. Pathological tissue 

1. diaphragm 9 6 1 1 

2. liver 1 4 1 - 

3. duodenum mucosa 2 1 - 

4. small intestine mucosa 1 1 - - 

5. large intestine mucosa - 2 - - 

6. lung - - 1 - 

C. Parasite specimens 

1. mouth & esophagus 4 1 1 - 

2. duodenum 8 4 1 1 

3. small intestine 7 4 1 - 

4. large intestine 5 6 - 1 

5. fecal specimen from rectum 8 6 1 - 

6. gallbladder & bile duct 52 8 - - 1

Figure 1. Fetal growth in length in relation to month of collection. 

53

Figure 2. Fetal growth in weight in relation to month of collection. 

54

Figure 3. Fetal growth of length in relation to weight. 

55

RU 231 

"Aerial Census Spotted Seals, Phoca vitulina largha" 

John J. Burns & 

Samuel J. Harbo 

Alaska Dept. of Fish & Game 

Work to be done in Spring 1976, no report at this time. 

57

Semi-annual progress report Project No. 232 

NOV 17 1975 

Title: Trophic relationships among ice inhabiting phocid seals N E G 0 A 

Principal Investigators: 

John J. Burns Lloyd F. Lowry 

Marine Mammals Biologist Game Biologist 

Alaska Department of Fish Alaska Department of Fish 

and Game and Game 

1300 College Road 1300 College Road 

Fairbanks, Alaska 99701 Fairbanks, Alaska 99701 


The investigation of trophic relationships among ice inhabiting 

phocids will proceed in several stages as outlined below: 

1. Summarization and compilation of existing literature and 

unpublished data on food habits of ringed seals Phoca (Pusa) 

hispida; bearded seals Erignathus barbatus; spotted seals, 

Phoca vitulina largha; and ribbon seals, Phoca (Histriophoca) 

fasciata is now underway. In addition, available information 

on distribution, abundance and natural history of potentially 

important prey species is being compiled. 

2. Collection of specimen material for stomach contents analysis 

has been underway since April 1975 and will continue throughout 

the project. Sampling is being integrated with other ongoing 

seal biology projects. 

3. Analysis of stomach contents, including identification and 

quantification of major items contained commenced on October 

22, 1975. When this phase of the task has progressed further 

we plan to be able to identify the major prey items of each 

seal species as well as to analyze for temporal, geographical 

and age, sex and species related dietary differences. This 

phase of the project will receive major emphasis until the 

present backlog of samples is processed, then will continue as 

more samples are collected. 

4. This phase of the project, comparison of observed stomach 

contents with distribution and abundance of key prey species, 

will be largely dependent on results of other OCS projects 

currently underway. Such comparisions will allow a determination 

of prey specificity and food resource utilization pattern for 

each seal species, which, when integrated with life history 

information for key prey species, will give an evaluation of 

the sensitivity of seal populations to OCS development. 

59

5. The final phase of the project, which will not be initiated 

before September of 1976, will involve an energetic evaluation 

of the relationships of seal populations to the surrounding 

marine environments. This will involve supplementary sampling 

of seal populations to determine rates of feeding and calorific 

values of major prey species, which, when compared to observed 

productivity of the seals and their prey will give a picture 

of the energy flow in one of the major trophic webs in the 

Arctic coastal ecosystem. Such a perspective is crucial in 

evaluation of possible effects of large scale ecosystem 

disruptions as may accompany OCS development. 


Table 1 summarizes the results of a shore-based sampling carried 

out between April and August 1975. The villages from which samples were 

collected are included on Figure 1. Sampling was carried out by John J. 

Burns and Thomas Eley, both Marine Mammals Biologists with the Alaska 

Department of Fish and Game, and other ADF&G employees. When seals were 

killed and available for examination, the sex and where possible weight 

of the animal was determined and a series of standard measurements 

taken. As often as practical, jaws, claws, reproductive tracts and 

stomachs were collected, labeled, preserved in formalin and shipped to 

the Department of Fish and Game office in Fairbanks. 

Table 1. Stomachs collected in shore-based sampling program 

April 22, 1975-August 11, 1975. 

Laboratory analysis of stomach collections began on 10/22/75 and 

has been done by Lloyd F. Lowry, Game Biologist, Alaska Department of 

Fish and Game. Each stomach has been weighed intact, then cut open and 

the contents put into a 2mm mesh Tyler screen and thoroughly but gently 

washed. The stomach was then reweighed and stored for later reference 

and examination. The total volume of stomach contents was determined by 

water displacement and the material was then transferred to finger bowls 

and petri dishes for examination and sorting. Parasites were separated 

from food items and the food materials were identified and sorted to the 

lowest possible taxonomic level depending on the type and condition of 

the material. The volumes of the sqrted fractions were then determined. 

To date, 6 stomachs of Phoca (Pusa) hispida and 1 stomach of Erignathus 

barbatus, all from the Wainwright collection, have been analyzed. 

60

Figure 1. Locations of villages from which samples were collected

III. Results 

Since April 1975, 93 stomachs have been collected, 28 from the 

Bering Sea, 18 from the Bering Strait, 46 from the Chukchi and Beaufort 

Seas. A breakdown of samples by collection site, species and sex is 

given in Table 1. 

The contents of the six Phoca (Pusa) hispida stomachs so far 

examined varied considerably. For example the stomach of specimen WS- 

23-75, a 14.2kg male pup, contained 2 amphipods (Gammarus wilkitakii) 

and I isopod (Saduria entomon), all intact, with a total volume of 

0.8ml. Specimen WS-47-75, a 27.2kg male, had eaten 10 mysids (Mysis 

litoralis) and 1 shrimp (Eualus gaimardii belchri) with a total volume 

of 1.7ml. Contents were intact and readily identifiable. The stomach 

of specimen WS-29-75, a 25.4kg male, contained the following: 15 shrimp 

(Sclerocrangon boreas, 12.4ml), 1 mysid (Mysis sp., 0.2ml), 4 amphipods 

(1.2ml), 17.2ml of unidentifiable crustacean remains (perhaps mostly 

Sclerocrangon boreas), 0.3ml of algae and 1.6ml of fish bones and flesh, 

probably from an arctic cod (Boreogadus saida). Invertebrates appeared 

in all stomachs examined, accounting for 89 percent of the total contents 

volume. Of this, amphipods comprised 8 percent, mysids 6 percent, 

shrimp 67 percent, cumaceans, isopods and pycnogonids 0.4 percent apiece 

and unidentified arthropod remains 9 percent. Eighteen percent of the 

total contents was fish remains and 1 percent was algae. 

The single Erignathus barbatus stomach opened (WS-38-75) came from 

a 201.3 cm standard length male. The total volume of contents was 

980ml, 60 percent of this attributable to foot portions of an as yet 

unidentified bivalve. The remainder consisted largely of crab stomachs 

and legs, gastropod remains (mostly operculae), and shrimp. The sorting 

and identification of contents from this stomach is incomplete at this 

time. 

IV. Interpretation of results 

It would appear from our limited observations that during the 

summer at Wainwright, Phoca (Pusa) hispida is utilizing mostly crustaceans 

as food, with shrimp, amphipods and mysids most important. However due 

to the small size of these organisms relative to fishes, this impression 

could change drastically if fish appeared in the next few stomachs 

examined. Organisms found indicate foraging just above the bottom and 

in the upper detrital layer. Not much can be said from cursory examinations 

of one Erignathus barbatus stomach except the types of organisms found 

were very different from those found in P. hispida and are largely of a 

more infaunal nature. These speculations are very tenative at this 

time. 

V. Problems encountered/recommended changes 

The main problem impeding progress in this project so far is the 

lack of sufficient man hours available for laboratory analysis of specimens. 

The ringed seal stomachs so far encountered have been nearly empty. 

Time required for rough sorting has ranged from a few minutes to three 

62

hours. The difficulty involved in intitial identification of organisms 

depends on their type and condition and the availability of suitable 

keys. Even after familiarity is gained with the species involved, some 

types of organisms (for example amphipods and mysids) will require 

elaborate microscopic examination of each specimen. Determination of 

volumes of sorted fractions has so far been a tedious process. Volume 

determination may soon be replace by wet weights. 

The single bearded seal stomach examined required 6 hours for rough 

sorting. Identifications of organisms will be subject to the same 

problems as with ringed seals, with the fragmentary nature of many items 

making identifications more difficult and in some cases impossible. 

Allowing 5 hours for complete processing of a ringed, spotted or 

ribbon seal stomach and 12 hours for a bearded seal, the material in 

hand represents just over 100 man days of laboratory work. It is hoped 

that by the end of fiscal year 1976 the amount of specimen material 

collected will be at least doubled. Since it is obvious all of the time 

of the principal investigators cannot be spent in the laboratory, it is 

suggested that some of the funds earmarked for contractual identification 

of food items be used to hire a laboratory technician to do rough sorting 

and aid in identifying and quantifying contents. It would be most 

useful if this person could be full time or nearly so until the present 

colleciton of samples is processed, then available at intervals thereafter 

when more samples are collected. 

VI. Estimate of funds expended 

B. Travel $1,228.10 

C. Contractual Services 460.12 

D. Commodities 1,083.78 

63

OCSEP - Research Unit #240 Semi Annual Report, 1 November 975 NOV 17 1975 

Title: Assessment of the distribution and abundance of sea otters 

along the Kenai Peninsula, Kamishak Bay and the Kodiak Archipelago. 

Principal Investigator: Karl Schneider, Research Coordinator 

Alaska Department of Fish & Game 



344-0541 


To determine the distribution and relative abundance of sea otters 

around the Kenai Peninsula, the Kodiak Archipelago and in Kamishak 

Bay. 


A. Field Trip Schedule 

Between 1 October and 7 October 1975 a helicopter survey of 

the Kenai Peninsula and the northern part of the Kodiak Archipelago 

was made. 

Future work will be done in conjunction with surveys scheduled 

under Research Unit #243. 


1. Karl Schneider - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game - PI - 

Forward observer. 

2. Donald Calkins - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game - Observer, 

recorder, photographer. 

3. Warren Ballard - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game - Offshore 

observer. 

4. Kenneth Pitcher - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game - Offshore 

observer. 

C. Methods 

A Bell 206B helicopter was used as a survey platform. A forward 

observer sat next to the pilot on the left side, an offshore 

observer sat behind the pilot and an observer-recorder sat 

behind the forward observer. The helicopter was flown along a 

track that paralleled the shoreline, circled all rocks and 

islets and areas of shallow water at an average -altitude of 150 

feet an average airspeed of 70 mph. All sea otters sighted and 

their locations were recorded. Large pods were photographed 

so that numbers could be determined more accurately. 

65

Other marine mammal sightings were also recorded. Special 

emphasis was placed on gathering information on sea lions. This 

information is covered under Research Unit #243. 

The survey started and ended at the town of Kenai, the home 

base of the helicopter. Homer, Seward and Kodiak were used 

as bases of operation. The helicopter was refueled at fuel 

caches that had been placed at Rocky Bay, Yalik Bay, Harris 

Bay and Shuyak Island. 

D. Aircraft Tracklines 

The trackline covered the entire coastline from the mouth of 

Kenai River to Cape Puget with the exception of McCarty Arm; 

portions of the coastline of Marmot Bay from Spruce Island to 

King Cove; all of the coastline and all offshore rocks from 

King Cove to Point Banks, including Marmot Island; and selected 

areas from Point Banks to Ban Island. Detailed maps of the 

trackline will be presented when analysis of the survey results 

is completed. 


III. Results 

Data from the survey have not been completely compiled. Photos 

of pods of sea otters have not been counted. A total of 38.4 

hours of flying time was logged. The data collected are visual 

counts of sea otters recorded by time of day, location, and 

visibility conditions. 

Complete results of the survey will be presented once the data 

have been compiled. The following is a general discussion of preliminary 

findings that appear to be of significance. 

A total of 540 sea otters were sighted around the Kenai Peninsula. 

This number is an unknown precentage of the total population inhabiting 

the area. Comparative counts in the Aleutian Islands indicate 

that there may be at least 1.5 to 4 times as many sea otters in 

an area as are seen on helicopter surveys. Many factors may 

influence the proportion seen including visibility conditions, type 

of habitat and distribution of animals. Since viewing conditions were 

generally less than favorable and in most areas the sea otters were 

scattered, the percentage of sea otters seen was probably comparatively 

low. 

Between Seldovia and Cape Puget sea otters appeared distributed according 

to the availability of suitable habitat. Scattered individuals 

were seen between Seldovia and Anchor Point and none were seen between 

Anchor Point and Kenai. 

In the Kodiak Archipelago somewhat less than 2000 sea otters were 

counted in the areas surveyed. The exact number will be determined 

66

when photographs of pods are examined. Since survey conditions were 

quite good in much of the area and many of the sea otters were resting 

in pods, the proportion of sea otters seen was probably much greater 

than that seen along the Kenai Peninsula. 

Only scattered individuals were seen in Marmot Bay however sea 

otters densities around the north side of Afognak Island and Shuyak 

island from Marmot Strait to Fowl Bay were high. 


The results of the survey appear to indicate several things. 

1. Repopulation of the outer Kenai coast appears to be complete. 

There may be an increase in numbers in some areas but it is 

unlikely that major shifts in distribution or relative abundance 

will occur. 

2. Repopulation of Kachemak Bay and lower Cook Inlet is now occurring. 

Sightings of sea otters in Kachemak Bay have been rare but 

have increased steadily in the last two years. The number of 

sea otters occupying Kachemak Bay is still low and there do 

not appear to be any significant concentrations but there 

appears to by a typical pattern of range expansion by the 

population currently concentrated on the outer Kenai coast. 

Small numbers now occur north of Homer. It is not known how 

far north sea otters originally occurred in Cook Inlet so it 

will be interesting to watch the growth of this population. 

3. Sea otters were observed in many of the small lagoons near the 

heads of major bays on the Kenai Peninsula including some 

recently formed by receding glaciers. Such areas are different 

from "typical" sea otter habitat although use of similar areas 

has been observed in Prince William Sound. 

4. The sea otter population inhabiting the northern end of the 

Kodiak Archipelago has been established for many years however 

growth and range expansion of this population appeared to be 

very slow. This survey indicated that the population has 

grown considerably in the past 15 years and that range expansion 

is occurring, perhaps at an accelerating rate. 


The survey required more flight time than predicted. Because the 

areas surveyed were considered the most important, the decision was 

made to devote most of the available funds to this survey. This 

will force us to reduce our efforts in the southern Kodiak, Barren 

Island and Kamishak Bay areas. We hope to be able to gather information 

from these areas as well as supplemental information from the 

67

VI. 

surveyed areas during surveys and collecting trips planned in 

conjunction with Research Units #229 and 243. A major gap that 

should be filled this year is the delineation of the southwestern 

edge of the northern Kodiak population's range. We were forced to 

terminate the survey before this was accomplished. 

It may be necessary to seek additonal funding for fixed wing aircraft 

surveys to fully attain the objectives of the project. These 

problems are fairly minor and at the present time the project can 

be considered successful. 

Helicopter charter $ 8,732 

Travel and Per Diem 750 approx. 

Fuel and fuel transportation 800 approx. 

Recommendations for Future Research 

$10,282 

Sea otters are generally believed to be the most vulnerable of all 

marine mammals to the effects of oil. A number of expanding populations 

occur along the north Pacific rim from southeast Alaska to the eastern 

Aleutians. Many are adjacent to proposed lease areas. It is a critical 

period of the recovery of a species that almost became extinct as the 

result of man's activities. At the present time offshore oil development 

and tanker traffic present the only significant threat to continued 

recovery. A knowledge of the status and distribution of sea otters may 

be important for formulating stipulations on oil and gas development. 

There are several areas in addition to those being addressed in this 

project where our knowledge is inadequate. These are the area from 

Kayak Island to Cape Spencer, Middleton Island, portions of south side 

of the Alaska Peninsula including the Semidi Islands and the eastern 

Aleutian Islands. These areas should be surveyed. Through careful 

coordination with other marine mammal studies and the use of fixed wing 

aircraft it should be possible to adequately assess the status of many 

of these populations at a relatively low cost. 

68

OCSEP - Research Unit #241 Semiannual Report - 1 November 1975 

NOV 17 1975 

Title: Distribution and abundance of sea otters in southwestern 

Bristol Bay. 

N E G A 

Principal Investigator: Karl B. Schneider, Research Coordinator 




344-0541 


To estimate the size of the population of sea otters which inhabits 

the waters north of Unimak Island and the Alaska Peninsula. 


A. Field Trip Schedule - This task will be accomplished on a single 

survey using a Dept. of Interior P2V or equivalent. The survey 

will be conducted in either spring or summer of 1976. Coordination 

with marine bird surveys in the area will determine the exact 

dates. 

The principal investigator participated in two aerial surveys 

conducted under research unit #67 which provided information 

useful in planning this task. These surveys covered portions 

of the area on 18 and 20 June 1975 and 11 and 13 August 1975. 

B. Scientific Party - See Research Unit #67 

C. Methods - See Research Unit #67 

D. Aircraft Tracklines - See Research Unit #67 

E. Data collected or analyzed - See Research Unit #67 

III. Results 

See Research Unit #67. These surveys were primarily designed to locate 

other species of marine mammals. Coverage of sea otter habitat 

was incomplete, survey conditions were frequently poor for sighting 

sea otters and no attempt was made to delineate concentrations of sea 

otters unless they were encountered on the regular trackline. A 

minimum of 225 sea otters were seen in June and 2,345 were seen 

in August. The numbers seen are not particularly important but 

the distribution of the population is of considerable interest. 

On both surveys the majority of the sea otters seen were between 

Cape Lieskof and Cape Mordvinof. Only a few stray otters were 

seen northeast of Cape Lieskof even though four tracklines were 

flown through the area. Bechevin Bay contained concentrations of 

sea otters both times it was surveyed. 

69

IV. Preliminary interpretation of results 

The results of the June and August surveys indicate that the 

distribution of the population has been altered significantly in 

recent years, probably as a result of severe sea ice conditions in 

1971, 1972 and 1974. At the present time most of the otters are 

confined to a relatively small area. 


If the distribution of the sea otter population remains restricted, 

it may be beneficial to concentrate the census between Cape Lieskof 

and Cape Mordvinof with only superficial coverage of other areas. 

This would permit a more accurate estimate of that portion of the 

population inhabiting that area. Since only a small percentage of 

the population lives outside of this area, it should be possible to 

make a more accurate estimate of the population as a whole than 

previously expected. 

VI. Estimate of Funds Expended - $0 

70

OCSEP - Research Unit 24 - Semi Annual Report - 1 November97 

NOV 1 7 1975 

Title: Population assessment, ecology and trophic relationships of 

Steller sea lions in the Gulf of Alaska 

Principal Investigator: Donald G. Calkins 




344-0541 


1. To determine numbers and biomass of Steller sea lions in the 

Gulf of Alaska. To establish sex and age composition of 

groups of sea lions utilizing the various rookeries and hauling 

grounds. To determine patterns of animal movement, population 

identity and population discreteness of sea lions in the Gulf. 

To determine changes in seasonal distribution (Task A-2). 

2. To investigate population productivity and growth rates of 

Steller sea lions in the Gulf of Alaska with emphasis on 

determining; age of sexual maturity, overall birth rates, age 

specific birth duration of reproductive activity and survival 

rates for various sex and age classes (Task A-3). 

3. To determine food habits of Steller sea lions in the Gulf of 

Alaska with emphasis on variation with season and habitat 

type. An effort will be made to relate food habits with prey 

abundance and distribution. Effects of sea lion predation on 

prey populations will be examined (Task A-3). 

4. To incidentally collect information on pathology, environmental 

contaminant loads, critical habitat and fishery depredations. 


A. Field Schedule 

1. July 9 through July 13. Sea lion pup branding at Sugarloaf 

Island, 1 day vessel charter - Sea Mac out of Kodiak. 

2. July 14 through July 17. Sea lion pup branding at Marmot 

Island. 

3. Sept. 11-12. Survey of Middleton Island sea lion hauling 

area. Twin engine aircraft charter from Chitna Air 

Service, Cordova; and Winship Airservice, Anchorage. 

71

4. Oct. 1 through Oct. 17. Survey of sea lion rookeries and 

hauling areas in the northeast Gulf of Alaska and followup 

check on branding. 

B. Scientific Parties 

1. July 9 - 13 

Donald G. Calkins - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

Al Franzmann - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

Roger Smith - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

Roger Alabaugh - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

(Temp.) 

Fred Woelkers - Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

(Temp.) 

2. July 14 - 17 

Same as (1) above 

3. Sept. 11 - 12 

Donald Calkins, Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

Karl Schneider, Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

4. Oct. 1 - 17 

Donald Calkins, Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

Karl Schneider, Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

Ken Pitcher, Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

Warren Ballard, Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game 

C. Methods 

1. & 2. Hot iron cattle type brands were applied to the left 

front shoulder of sea lion pups. The pups at Sugarloaf 

were branded with an "X" brand measuring 4.5 by 8 cm and 

the Marmot Island pups were branded with an "0" brand 

measuring 4 cm by 7.5 cm. The length of branding time 

varied per animal depending on the size of the animal and 

the amount of moisture in the fur. Generally the average 

brand time was about 5 sec. Weights and measurements 

were recorded on pups at both Marmot and Sugarloaf Islands. 

3. & 4. Photographs of animal concentrations were taken from 

low-flying aircraft using a Nikon 35 mm motor-driven 

camera with 105 mm lens and high speed Ektachrome film. 


1. Sugarloaf Island 152°4'W, 58°54'N 

2. Marmot Island 151°50'W, 88°11'N

III. Results 

Sea lion rookeries and hauling areas with visual estimates made on surveys 

Oct. 1975. 

Rookery Visual Est. Rookery Visual Est. 

1. Pinnacle Rock Not surveyed at 21. Seal Rock 155 

2. Fish Island this time (Kenai Pen.) 

3. Latouche Island " 22. Outer Island 6300 

4. The Needle " 23. Nuka Point 0 

5. Seal Rocks " 24. Gore Point 2 

(Pr. Wm. Sound) 25. East Chugach Isl. 0 

6. Porpoise Rocks " 26. Perl Island 70 

7. Fox Point " 27. Sugarloaf Isl. 4588 

8. Glacier Island " 28. Nagahut Rocks 1 

9. Knowleshead " 29. Cape Elizabeth 69 

10. Perry Island " 30. Flat Island 0 

11. Pt. Eleanor " 31. Latax Rocks 625 

12. Danger Island " 32. Tonki Cape 0 

13. Pt. Elrington " 33. Sealion Rocks 125 

14. Cape Puget 0 34. Marmot Island 7997 

15. Cape Junken 0 35. Sea Otter Isl. 290* 

16. Barwell Island 0 

17. Rugged Island 0 

18. Hive Island 0 

19. Chat Island 0 

20. Chiswell Island 3251 

* Not previously identified as sea lion hauling area. 


A. No preliminary intrepretation presently availble. 


A. None 


1. Sea lion branding 

1) Sugarloaf Island $ 2,500 

2) Marmot Island 1,500 

2. Survey Middleton Island 1,000 

3. Survey of Northeast Gulf of Alaska 4,000 

4. Permanent equipment 11,500 

5. Participation in related OCS project 1,000 

(OCS RU #67) 

6. Other costs 1,000 

(Lab. supplies and commodities to be used and general office 

costs) 

Total $22,500 

73

3. Middleton Island 146 0 18'W, 59 0 28'N 

4. The following sea lion rookeries and hauling areas were 

photographed and visual estimates were made in the Northeast 

Gulf of Alaska: 

1. Pinnacle Rock 18. Pt. Eleanor 

2. Fish Island (Lewis Isl.) 19. Danger Island 

3. Latouche Island 20. Pt. Elrington 

4. The Needle 21. Cape Puget 

5. Seal Rocks (Pr. Wm. Sound) 22. Cape Junken 

6. Porpoise Rocks 23. Barwell Island 

7. Fox Point 24. Rugged Island 

8. Glacier Island 25. Hive Island 

9. Knowles Head 26. Chat Island 

10. Perry Island 27. Chiswell Island 

11. Seal Rock (Kenai Pen.) 28. Nagahut Rocks 

12. Outer Island 29. Cape Elizabeth 

13. Nuka Point 30. Flat Island 

14. Gore Point 31. Latax Rocks 

15. East Chugach Island 32. Tonki Cape 

16. Perl Island 33. Sealion Rocks 

27. Sugarloaf Island 34. Marmot Island 

E. Data collected or analyzed 

1. Branding 

a. Sugarloaf - 373 MM 

346 FF 

b. Marmot - 320 MM 

280 FF 

2. Approximately 540 photos of rookeries are now being 

processed. 

74

VII. Recommendations for future research 

A. Our plans now call for a complete survey of sea lion rookeries 

and hauling areas to be completed in the winter of 1975-76 and 

in the spring of 1976, and an intensive branding effort at seven 

of the largest rookeries in the Gulf in June-July of 1976. 

B. Sea lion collecting trips will be made in November, February, 

March, April-May, June-July. 

75



TO: W. M. Sackinger DATE: 6 October 1975 

OCS Coordinator 

Geophysical Institute FILE NO: 


TELEPHONE NO: 

FROM: John J. Burns, Marine Mammals SUBJECT: Quarterly Report 

Biologist Task Order #9 


Fairbanks 

This report covers the work conducted from June to the present on projects 

RU #248 and 249; "The Relationships of Marine Mammal Distributions, 

Densities and Activities to Sea Ice Conditions." During the period 9 to 

19-June, extensive aerial surveys- of ringed seals were under taken in 

areas of land fastice between Barter Island and Point Lay. These 

surveys were conducted through joint OCS and ADF&G funding. Procedures 

employed were the same as those used in 1970 (Burns and Harbo 1972, 

Arctic 25:279-290), and the results are directly comparable. The necessity 

of conducting these surveys was based on observations during the winter 

of 1974-75, which indicated unusually high densities of ringed seals in 

the Chukchi Sea and the reverse in the Beaufort Sea. Observations for 

the Beaufort Sea were obtained by Lentfer (personal communication). 

Survey results substantiated that a major, short-term shift in density 

had indeed occurred. Density of seals in the Beaufort Sea was down 13 

fold with a corresponding increase in the Chukchi Sea of between 10 and 

15 fold. 

Communications with Canadian investigators indicated that the decrease 

of seals in the Beaufort Sea was not restricted to the areas north cf 

Alaska, but were also similar in the Canadian sector including Amundson 

Gulf. 

Surveys included continuous observation and recording of both seals and 

sea ice conditions. In my opinion, the overriding factor affecting 

ringed seal distribution is the distribution of favorable sea ice 

conditions. From past experience it was obvious the prevailing sea ice 

conditions in the Beaufort Sea were, by and large, unfavorable for 

breeding ringed seals whereas they were excellent in the Chukchi Sea. 

The distribution of ringed seals directly affected the distribution of 

their most significant predator, the polar bear. 

One wonders how, or if, the changes in ringed seal density were or are 

related to the sea ice conditions which prevailed off the north coast of 

Alaska during the summer of 1975. Indeed, they were most unusual! 

Additional marinc mammal-sea ice surveys were undertaken in September. 

Aircraft time was funded by the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service and 

logistic support at Barrow was underwritten by ADF&G, although the work 

77

W. M. Sackinger -2- October 6, 1975 

conducted was specifically part of the OCS marine mammal-sea ice study. 

The mixup, which did not allow for OCS funding of Burns' costs at Barrow, 

resulted from our failure to obtain prior approval from the OCS office 

at the University of Alaska. 

September surveys, under the direction of Dr. James Estes, USFWS, were 

directed at walruses. Again, the unusual sea ice conditions resulted in 

a distribution of animals which was most unusual. Large numbers of 

walruses were present in the American sector of the Chukchi Sea, concentrated 

along the very narrow edge of the late summer pack ice. Very few animals 

were present in the Beaufort Sea and the few that were observed were in 

the immediate vicinity of Barrow. 

Again it appeared obvious that sea ice conditions were the single most 

factor influencing distribution 

and density of walruses. important 

Other work conducted during this report period included the analysis of 

available satellite data and aerial photographs, under the supervision 

of Dr. Shapiro. 

78

MARINE BIRDS

MARINE BIRDS 

Research 

Unit Proposer Title Page 

3/4 Karl Schneider Identification, Documentation, and 85 

ADF&G Delineation of Coastal Migratory 

Bird Habitat in Alaska 

38 Joseph J. Hickey A Census of Seabirds in the Pribilof 87 

Russell Lab. Islands 

U. of Wisc. 

77 Michael F. Tillman Ecosystem Dynamics - Birds and 121 

NWFC/NMFS Marine Mammals 

83 George L. Hunt, Jr. 

Dept. of Population 

& Environ. Biology 

U. of Calif. 

Baseline Studies of Pribilof Island 

Seabirds: Bering Sea 

127 

96 Samuel M. Patten, Jr. Evolution and Pathobiology (including 243 

Dept. of Pathobiology Breeding Ecology) of the Gulf of Alaska 

Johns Hopkins U. Herring Gull Group (Larus argentatus x 

Larus glaucescens) 

108 John A. Wiens Community Structure, Distribution, and 317 

Dept. of Zoology Interrelationships of Marine Birds in 

Oregon State U. the Gulf of Alaska 

172 Robert W. Risebrough Shorebird Dependence on Arctic Littoral 325 

Peter G. Connors Habitats 

Bodega Marine Lab. 

U. of Calif. 

215 George Mueller Avifaunal Utilization of the Offshore 329 

IMS/U. of Alaska Island near Prudhoe Bay, Alaska 

237/ William H. Drury Birds of Coastal Habitats on the 331 

238 Mass. Audobon Soc. South Shore of Seward Peninsula 

239 M. T. Myres Ecology and Behavior of Southern 369 

Juan Guzman Hemisphere Shearwaters (Genus Puffinus) 

Dept. of Biology and Other Seabirds, when over the Outer 

U. of Calgary Continental Shelf of the Bering Sea and 

Gulf of Alaska during the Northern 

Summer 

330/ George J. Divoky The Distribution, Abundance, and 371 

196 USFWS Feeding Ecology of Birds Associated 

with the Bering Sea and Beaufort Sea 

Pack Ice

MARINE BIRDS - Continued 

Research 


337 Calvin J. Lensink 

James Bartonek 

USFWS 

Seasonal Distribution and Abundance 

of Marine Birds 

379 



USFWS 

Photographic Mapping of Seabird 

Colonies 

379 



USFWS 

Review and Analysis of Literature 

and Unpublished Data on Marine Birds 

379 

340 Calvin J. Lensink Migration of Birds in Alaskan Marine 379 


Waters Subject to Influence by OCS 

USFWS 

Development 

341 Calvin J. Lensink Feeding Ecology and Trophic 379 


Relationships of Alaskan Marine 

USFWS 

Birds 



USFWS 

Population Dynamics of Marine 

Birds 

379 



USFWS 

Preliminary Catalog of Seabird 

Colonies 

379

RU 3/4 

"Identification, Documentation and 

Delineation of Coastal 

Migratory Bird Habitat 

in Alaska" 


Alaska Department of Fish & Game 

Work was not started until 11/1/75 - no report at this time. 

85

NOV 04 1975 

NEGOA 

Contract io. 03-5-022-77 

A CENSUS OF SEABIRDS ON THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS 

Semi-Annual Progress Report 

Submitted 

1 November 1975 

To 

Project Office 

Outer Continental Shelf Energy Program 

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration 

P.O. Box 1808 

Juneau, .Alaska 99802 

Attn. Dr. Herbert L. Bruce, Project Manager 

by 

Joseph J. Hickey, Principal Investigator 

Department of Wildlife Ecology 

Russell Laboratories 

University of Wisconsin 

Madison, Wisconsin 53706 

87

DEPARTMENT OF WILDLIFE 

NOV 04 1975 

ECOLOGY 

Russell Laboratories University of Wisconsin - Madison 53706 

COLLEGE OF AGRICULTURAL AND LIFE SCIENCES SCHOOL OF NATURAL RESOURCES 

88 



P. 0. COX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802



P. 0. BOX 1808 

I. Task Objectives JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 

A. To obtain precise estimates, for as many species as is practical 

within the time framework of this study, of the breeding seabirds 

on the Pribilof Islands,and 

B. To explore the possibilities of obtaining refined estimates of 

those additional nesting populations that do not readily lend 

themselves to conventional census techniques. 


A. Field Schedule 

11-06-75 Arrive Anchorage via Northwest Airlines 

14-06-75 Arrive St. Paul via Reeves Aleutian Airlines 

21-06-75 Arrive St. George via Peninsula Airlines 

l4-07-75 J. J. Hickey leaves St. George 

08-08-75 F. L. Craighead leaves St. George 

13-08-75 R. C. Squibb leaves St. George 


1. Dr. Joseph J. Hickey, Professor of Wildlife Ecology, 

University of Wisconsin, P. I. 

2. F. Lance Craighead, Research Assistant, University 

of Wisconsin 

3. Ronald C. Squibb, Field Assistant, University of 

Wisconsin 

C. Methods 

1. A preliminary ecological survey of the seabird cliffs 

on St. George was first carried out. Our observations 

were largely confined to this island. 

2. Direct counts were carried out on the ledge-nesting 

species on six of the cliffs of lesser height. 

3. Flight counts were made of least auklets and murres 

bound for their main nesting areas. 

4. Special study areas were selected, and attendance 

counts were carried out on ledge-nesting species at 

four cliffs of various heights. 

5. Three boat surveys of the cliffs were made late in 

the nesting season after aerial surveys appeared to 

be impractical due to persisting fog banks. 

D. Sample Localities--These will be defined later. Initial 

definitions are found on tables of results. 


1. Flight counts were carried out over approximately 38 

hours. 

2. Ledge attendance records were completed for periods 

involving different days and a total of 50.4 hours. 

89 

1

III. Results 

3. The actual length of coastline censused was 4.95 km. 

Table 1 lists symbols used in this report. 

In Table 2, we find the cliffs on St. George divided into 6 strata, 

according to their approximate height. A total of about 50 km of cliffs 

are involved. 

Tables 3-7 report actual counts made on 4.95 km of these cliffs. 

Tables 8-11 summarize ledge attendance for cliff-nesting species. 

These data represent a partial basis for interpreting aerial photos. A 

series of such photos was attempted by Calvin Lensink,but his results 

are unavailable to us at this time. 

Tables 12, 13 and 14 summarize data concerning Least Auklet flights. 

Tables 15 and 16 summarize some data on murre flights. 

IV. Preliminary Interpretation 

Gabrielson reported that in his opinion "St. George Island, considered 

as a whole, contains the greatest aggregation of breeding birds"he has ever 

seen and that"the Least Auklets are the most numerous in the swarming 

millions of birds" (Gabrielson and Lincoln, Birds of Alaska, 1959, p. 50C). 

We saw nothing of these millions. Gabrielson (ibid.) mentions "circling, 

swirling thousands of birds" between the village and [Ulakaia] ridge" with 

"many Cresteds anu a few Parcquets" among the auklets constantly flying over 

the village. We never saw such "swirling thousands," and the total number 

of cresteds there on a given day certainly totalled no more than 200. 

Gabrielson (1941) has a further description of the "vast swarms" of auklets 

on St. George. We are impressed with the probability of a significant 

decrease in these species in the last 30 years. 

The least auklet flight into Ulakaia Ridge on 1 July dropped to a 

scant 8 birds between 1730 hr and 1800. We initially hypothesized that the 

79,631 that then came in were females preparing to take over their nests for 

the night. If one is willing to accept an even sex ratio in the breeding 

population, it then follows that the morning flight consisted of 79,631 males 

and the remaining 5700 birds (27% of those counted on 1 July) were 

nonbreeaers. This 27% maybe compared to the 30-35% that Bedard (1969, Condor 

71:386-398) estimated as nonbreeders on the least auklet population on 

St. Lawrence Island. 

We did not attempt to test this hypothesis on St. George until 30 July 

when we collected 10 least auklets flying in from the sea between 2030 and 

2130 hr. The sex ratio (table 14) on this occasion was 5:5. We lack a 

good flight count for this late date in the season, and at present we 

regard the hypotnesis as not yet adequately tested. George and Molly Hunt 

report (personal communication) that, in collecting least auklets on 

St. Paul this summer for their food habits stuuy, they found no evidence 

of a difference in sexual behavior such as we initially hypothesized. 

Flight counts do vary somewhat as the season progresses. For the 

period 2100-2200 hr, we counted 29,380 Least Auklets flying into Ulakiea 

Hiage on 22 June; on 1 July this number was 42,710. 

90 

2

In general, the key to the censusing of the ledge-nesting seabirds 

on this island will depend on some sort of photographs taken either with 

aerial or boat cameras. We hesitate to interpret our meager results 

until we see what the aerial photos show. 

There are two subjective impressions we can report at this time: 

(1) The seabirds, while numerous, probably do not run into the many 

millions formerly ascribed to these islands. 

(2) There probably has been some diminution in the numbers of least 

auklets on St. George within the past 30 years. 

V. Problems Encountered 

We felt much constrained by recurring fog banks of the most 

unpredictable nature . . . and at present we have just about given up 

on an aerial photographic approach to this census. 

VI. Estimation of Funds Expended (May 13-September 30, 1975) 

Salaries and Wages $2,317.00 

Materials and Supplies 1,586.26 

Equipment 

346.41 

Travel 4,280.09 

Fringe benefits 52.52 

Subtotal 

$8,532.28 

Overhead (58% of $ & W) 1,343.86 

Total 

$9,926.14 

VII. Recommendations for Future Research 

In 1976 it will be possible to have project personnel in the field 

sufficiently early in the breeding season to undertake censuses of the least 

auklets on their main nesting ridge before the area is cluttered with nonbreeding 

birds. A quadrat system similar to that used by Bedard (op. cit.) 

will be carried out. 

See also VIII (below) 

VIII. Possible Modification of Existing Efforts 

It appeared to us that the use of a fix-winged aircraft to photograph 

the ledge-nesting birds on St. George for census purpose is largely negated 

by tie persisting and highly erratic fogs in this region. We believe the 

best solution is to photograph the cliffs from a boat as stable as possible. 

The project currently lacks a suitable camera with large format and fine 

resolution. 

A Zodiac rubber raft equipped with a 25-HP motor would be most useful 

for landing on the rocky "beaches" and talus slopes below the cliffs. It 

could also be used as a photographic platform if no better boat is available. 

91 

3

IX. Suggestions for More Effective Integration and Coordination 

We have been able to discuss problems on the phone with George Hunt 

in California, and we think our coordination with his project is good. 

We seem to be mentally blocked about phoning the coordinating offices in 

Juneau and Anchorage whenever we want. Are any government FTS lines 

available to Alaska? 

A midwinter meeting with other seabird investigators in this program 

seems to us to be highly desirable. 

X. Focusing Efforts More Directly on OCS Oil and Gas Activities 

We have no ideas on this point at this time. A Shell Oil Company party 

visited St. George for a few days this summer, but our erratic schedule 

of field work prevented us from meeting them. 

XI. Suggestions on Making Results More Easily Available to User Groups 

Certainly the progress reports on the ornithological parts of this 

program could be circulated to other PIs with similar interests. 

XII. Acknowledgments 

We wish to thank Calvin Lensink and James G. Bartonek (U.S. Fish and 

Wildlife Service, Anchorage) for valued advice as we started our field 

work, George and Molly Hunt (University of California, Riverside) for 

amenities in facillitating our stay in St. Paul; and Al Groves and 

Nick Merculief (National Marine Fisheries Service, St. George) for their 

help in arranging the logistical support we needed on St. George. 

92

Table 1. Symbols Used in This Report 

93

Table 2. Types of Cliffs on St. George Is. 

94

Table 3. Census Data--Stratum A 

Cliff No. 1 

95


Cliff No. 2


Cliff No. 3 

97


Cliff No. 6

Table 6 continued

Table 7. Census Data--Strata B and C

Table 8 

101 

101

Table 8 (cont.) 

102


103

Table 9 

Ledge Attendance Counts: Kittiwakes, Murres 

and Cormorants with Supplementary Observations on 

Parakeet and Least Auklets.

Table 9. continued.

Table 10 

Ledge Attendance Counts: Kittiwakes and Murres

Table 10 (Cont.)

Table 10 (Cont.)

Table 10. (concluded)

Table 11 

Ledge Attendance Counts: Thick-billed and Common Murres, Red-legged and Black-legged 

Kittiwakes, and Fulmars. Place: Rosy Finch Cove 

110

Table 11 continued.

Table 11 continued.

Table 11 continued.

Table 12. Flight Count--Least Auklets Flying Over 

Airstrip To Colony on Ulakaia Ridge July 1 

L14

Table 13 

Flight Counts: Comparison of Evening Flights of Least Auklets 

over airstrip on 22 June and 17 July from 2050 to 2200 hours. 

115

Table 14 

Least Auklcts Collected 

116

Table 15 

Flight Counts: Diurnal East-to-West Flight of Murres 

1 17

Table 16. 

Flight Counts: Murre Flights on North 

Side of St. George, as observed from 

Staraya Artil

Table 16 (cont.)

OUTER CONTINENTAL 

SHELF ENERGY PROG 


P. 0. BOX 1808 

Semi-Annual Report JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 ..... 

RU 77 -- Ecosystem Dynamics - Birds and Marine Mammals 

L Task Objective 

NOV 06 1975 

The long range objective is to develop an ecosystem model of the eastern 

Bering Sea which will aid in multispecies and multidisciplinary decision 

making processes. Sub models will be developed for fur seals, groundfish 

and birds, as well as a conceptual submodel for fur seal-fish trophodynamic 

relationships. 


A, B, C) Field Work: 

There was no field work during this period. 

D. Sample Localities: 

See Figure 1. - 


1. Fish submodel 

410 fish stomachs were analyzed. This completed the analysis 

of all fish stomachs (total of 1128). Data is in process of summary 

by species, length, and taxonomic composition of food organism. 

2. Fur seal submodel 

Literature survey and review of feeding habits of pinnipeds in 

Bering Sea completed. Preliminary report and analysis of fur seal 

feeding habits begun, to be completed next quarter. 

3. Bird Submodel 

No work this time period. Bird submodel to be subcontracted to 

Fish and Wildlife Service, Anchorage, Alaska. 

4. Conceptual submodel 

No work scheduled for this time period. 

F. Activities planned for next six months: 

1. Fish submodel 

Report of initial results from stomach analysis. 

2. Fur seal submodel 

Report of initial results from fur seal feeding habits. 

121

3. Bird submodel 

Let contract, initial work to begin. 

4. Conceptual submodel 

Synthesize data from pertinent literature and from submodel 

analyses as available. Determine possible interfaces between 

submodels. 

III. Results 

A. Fish Submodel 

Food content for pollock, weight by taxa, completed. Data tables attached 

(see Table 1.). 

B. Fur Seal Submodel 

No final results, see preliminary results discussion. 

C, D. Bird and Conceptual Submodel 

No results. 


A. Fish Submodel 

Flathead sole and Greenland turbot show a high content of fish 

in their food while rock sole and Alaska Plaice feed mostly on 

annelids. Yellowfin sole and pollock feed on a wide variety of 

organisms with amphipods, annelids, fish, crab, and auphausiids 

contributing significantly to their diet. True cod feed extensively 

on fish and crab. 

The true cod and Greenland turbot prey heavily on the pollock 

while rock sole and Alaska plaice possibly compete for a common 

food source of annelids. In contrast to these species, pollock and 

yellowfin sole exhibit opportunistic feeding patterns, and do not 

draw heavily on any one particular taxa. 

B. Fur Seal Submodel 

Preliminary analysis of feeding habits of fur seal and sea lions in the 

Bering Sea suggest that fin fish consumption by pinnipeds is presently 

of the same order of magnitude as the groundfish fishery in the Bering 

Sea. Present estimates are that the groundfish fishery is already overexploited. 

These are preliminary estimates, subject to revision, should 

not be quoted as results. 

C. Birds 

No results. 

122

D. Conceptual Model 

No results. 


Gerald Sanger has transferred to USFWS in Anchorage, Alaska. This will 

result in a transfer of the bird submodel work to contract from in-house 

research. 

Delay has been encountered in hiring a modeler for the conceptual submodel 

research, but should be filled shortly, and no significant delay is anticipated. 

No recommended changes at this time. 



Salaries (GS 4 temporary) 1. 6 

GS 11 2 p.p. 1.3 

Benefits .3 

Miscellaneous 

TOTAL 3.4 

.2 

123 

3

Table 1. Percent composition of diet by weight of selected fish species. 

124

Figure 1. Stations at which fish stomach samples were obtained. 

125


JUNEAU!J PROJECT OFFICE 

P. 0. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 

The Reproductive Ecology, Foods, and Foraging Areas of 

Seabirds Nesting on St. Paul Island, Pribilof Islands 

A Six Month Progress Report to the 

NOAA - OCSEP Group 


by 

G.L. Hunt, Jr., M.W. Hunt, S.D.L. Causey, 

D.B. Schwartz and L.E. Holmgren 

University of California at Irvine 

Contract number 03-5-022-72 Research Unit #83 

127

I. OBJECTIVES 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

II. FIELD ACTIVITIES 

A. Scientific Party 

B. Location of Field Activities 

C. Work Schedule and Study Areas 

D. Methods 

1. Reproductive Success 

2. Growth Rates 

3. Food Samples 

4. Distribution of Foraging Seabirds 

5. Survey of Otter and Walrus Islands 


III. RESULTS 

A. Reproductive Success 

1. Fulmar 

2. Red-faced Cormorant 

3. Black-legged Kittiwake 

4. Red-legged Kittiwake 

5. Common Murre 

6. Thick-billed Murre 

7. Horned Puffin 

8. Tufted Puffin 

9. Crested Auklet 

10. Least Auklet 

11. Parakeet Auklet 

B. Foods of Seabirds 

C. Distribution of Foraging Seabirds 

D. Survey of Otter and Walrus- Islands 

IV. DISCUSSION 

page 

V. PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED AND RECOMMENDED CHANGES 80 

VI. FINANCIAL STATEMENT 

VII. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 

VIII. APPENDIX I. 

128 

1 

3 

5 

6 

13 

15 

16 

17 

22 

24 

30 

31 

33 

38 

39 

47 

52 

53 

54 

54 

56 

57 

61 

74 

75 

88 

90 

91

LIST OF FIGURES 

Figure 1 Study Sites, St. Paul Island 7 

Figure 2 Study Sites, St. George Island 8 

Figure 3 Discoverer Cruise Track 20 

Figure 4 Location and Numbering of Grid Blocks Surveyed 21 

Figure 5 Location of Otter and Walrus Islands in Relation 

to St. Paul Island 23 

Figure 6 Nests with Eggs and Chicks, Black-legged Kittiwake, 

St. Paul 37 

Figure 7 Nests with Eggs and Chicks, Red-legged Kittiwake, 

St. George 42 

Figure 8 Nests with Eggs and Chicks, Common Murre, St. Paul 46 

Figure 9 Nests with Eggs and Chicks, Thick-billed Murre, 

St. Paul 50 

Figure 10 Growth Rates, Thick-billed Murre, St. Paul 51 

Figure 11 Distribution of Total Numbers of Birds Seen on 

Sea Survey 64 

Figure 12 Number of Species of Birds Seen in Various Grids 

on Sea Survey 65 

Figure 13 Fulmars Counted on Sea Survey 66 

Figure 14 Petrels Counted on Sea Survey 67 

Figure 15 Shearwaters Counted on Sea Survey 68 

Figure 16 Red-faced Cormorants Counted on Sea Survey 69 

Figure 17 Kittiwakes Counted on Sea Survey 70 

Figure 18 Puffins Counted on Sea Survey 71 

Figure 19 Murres Counted on Sea Survey 72 

Figure 20 Small Alcids Counted on Sea Survey 73 

129 

page

LIST OF TABLES 

page 

Table 1 Schedule of Activities 9-12 

Table 2 Dates and Location of Colony Work 25-28 

Table 3 Summary of Data Gathered 29 

Table 4 Reproductive Success, Red-faced Cormorant 32 

Table 5 Reproductive Success, Black-legged Kittiwake 36 

Table 6 Reproductive Success, Red-legged Kittiwake, 

St. Paul 40 

Table 7 Reproductive Success, Red-legged Kittiwake, 

St. George 41 

Table 8 Reproductive Success, Common Murre, St. Paul 45 

Table 9 Reproductive Success, Thick-billed Murre, St. Paul 48 

Table 10 Chick and Egg Loss of Murres after Aircraft Visit 

at St. Paul 49 

Table 11 Summary of Birds Collected for Food Samples, 

St. Paul 59 

Table 12 Total Food Samples Collected; St. Paul 60 

Table 13 Percent Occurrence of Seabirds in Various Regions 

at Sea 63 

Table 14 Research Needs vs. Motorcycles Availability 81 

Table 15 Schedule of Field Operations 1976 86 

Table 16 Weekly Work Schedule 1976 87 

Table 17 Summary of Expenditures 89 

130

I. OBJECTIVES 

In the face of impending oil exploration and extraction in the 

outer continental shelf of Alaska, it is imperative that thorough 

baseline research be conducted on all aspects of the environment in 

potentially affected areas. One segment of the environment which is 

particularly sensitive to spilled oil is seabird populations. The 

Bering Sea is home to some of the greatest concentrations and the 

greatest diversity of seabirds in the world. Baseline studies of 

these populations are necessary in order to identify areas of particu- 

larly great sensitivity from which oil should be excluded, to identify 

areas in which special priority should be given to the clean up of 

spilled oil, and to provide evidence as to the effects of spilled oil 

on avian populations. 

The following is a progress report on field work conducted in the 

summer of 1975 with the purpose of obtaining baseline data on the repro- 

ductive success, the food habits and the foraging areas of eleven 

species of seabirds breeding on St. Paul Island in the Pribilof Islands, 

Alaska. 

In studying the reproductive success of each species the goal of 

the scientific party was to establish timing of breeding, number of 

eggs laid, hatching and fledging success, and growth rates and causes 

of mortality of young. All of these factors are indicators of the 

health of seabird populations. Knowledge of when and why the normal 

stresses in the reproductive cycle occur will facilitate predictions 

of the possible effects of oil spills on these systems. 

131

Data on the foods and foraging areas used by seabirds were collected 

in order to determine in which ocean areas oil spills would be particu- 

larly damaging to Pribilof Island populations. Knowledge of the food 

chains upon which the seabirds are dependent is also necessary to 

establish both the role the seabirds play in the marine ecosystem and 

the potential vulnerability of seabirds should certain other marine 

species be damaged by oil. 

132 

2


A. Scientific Party 

1. Dr. George L. Hunt, Jr., Principal Investigator. Assistant 

Professor, Department of Ecology and Evolutionary Biology, 

University of California, Irvine. Dr. Hunt is the overall 

organizer of the budget, the personnel and the logistics oE the 

project. He is responsible for the design of field studies and 

the interpretation of data. He also provided guidance for the 

field party, and worked in the field on St. Paul Island from 

17 June to 15 July, 1975. 

2. Molly W. Hunt. Assistant Specialist, Department of Ecology and 

Evolutionary Biology, University of California, Irvine. As leader 

of the field party, Ms. Hunt participated in field research on 

St. Paul Island (10 June - 2 September) and conducted research on 

the Red-legged Kittiwake on St. George Island. In addition she 

is responsible for overseeing the analysis of data. 

3. S. Douglas Causey. Research Assistant, Department of Ecology and 

Evolutionary Biology, University of California, Irvine. In 

addition to participating in field research on St. Paul (14 August - 

30 September) and on the Discoverer cruise, Mr. Causey is respons- 

ible for identification of food samples from birds as well as 

analysis of data. 

4. Douglas B. Schwartz. Laboratory Assistant, Department of Ecology 

and Evolutionary Biology, University of California, Irvine. 

Mr. Schwartz has participated both in field research on St. Paul 

Island (10 June - 9 September) and on the Discoverer cruise, and 

in the analysis of data. 

133 

3

5. Laurie E. Holmgren. Laboratory Assistant, Department of Ecology 

and Evolutionary Biology, University of California, Irvine. 

Ms. Holmgren has participated both in field research on St. Paul 

Island (10 June - 4 September) and in the analysis of data. 

6. Max C. Thompson, Consultant. Department of Biology, Southwestern 

College, Winfield, Kansas. Mr. Thompson, who spent several 

summers doing biological research in the Pribilofs, helped the 

field party get established on St. Paul and locate study sites 

(10 - 19 June). 

134

B. Location of Field Activities 

Field work took place on St. Paul Island, Alaska, from 10 June 

to 30 September, 1975. During that period one member of the research 

team (M. Hunt) spent two weeks on St. George Island, from 24 July 

until 8 August. 

Transportation to study sites from the village of St. Paul was 

accomplished primarily with the use of three Harley-Davidson 90CC 

motorbikes. When ladders needed to be moved and before the bikes 

arrived, we rented vehicles from either the National Marine Fisheries 

Service or from the Aleut Community Store. 

From 20 to 23 August two members of the party, D. Causey and 

D. Schwartz, participated in four days of pelagic seabird observa- 

tions on board the NOAA vessel Discoverer in the vicinity of the 

Pribilof Islands. 

On 9 August, L. Holmgren and M. Hunt made a helicopter survey 

of/birds on Otter and Walrus Islands near St. Paul Island. The 

helicopter was attached to the U.S. Coast Guard vessel Mellon. 

After the end of field work, D. Causey spent 6 days in October 

Sin Fairbanks, Alaska, at the Institute of Marine Sciences and 2 days 

in Seattle, Washington, at the National Marine Fisheries Service 

getting information with which to analyze stomach contents of seabirds. 

135 

5

C. Study Areas and Work Schedule 

Study sites for the reproductive biology of seabirds on St. Paul 

and St. George Islands are presented in Figures 1 and 2. In Figure 1, 

the study areas between Southwest Point and Einahnuhto Bluffs are 

referred to as "Southwest Cliffs" in this study. Areas referred to 

as "Ridge Wall Cliffs" are coastal cliffs in the vicinity of Ridge 

Wall which itself is inland. In Figure 2, the Red-legged Kittiwake 

study area was located just east of the Staraya Artel Seal Rookery, 

which is not labeled on this map. 

Table 1 presents the schedule of activities while the scientific 

party was working in the Pribilof Islands and vicinity. 

136 

6

FIGURE 1

FIGURE 2

TABLE 1. Work Schedule 

Pribilof Islands 1975 

139

TABLE 1 (continued) 

140


141


142

D. Methods 

1. Reproductive Success 

Seabirds breeding on St. Paul Island either nest on cliff 

ledges or raise their young in holes and crevices in the cliffs 

or below ground among the rocks of boulder beaches. For those 

species which breed in the open (Common and Thick-billed Murres, 

Black-legged and Red-legged Kittiwakes, and Red-faced Cormorant), 

data on reproductive success can be obtained relatively easily by 

observation of many nests at a time from locations at the top or 

bottom of the cliffs. Accurate data on the hole-nesting species 

(Fulmars, in shallow caves, Tufted and Horned Puffins, and 

Crested, Least and Parakeet Auklets) must be obtained by looking 

into each nest individually. 

The basic techniques for obtaining data on the reproductive 

success of the five ledge-nesting species and the Horned Puffin 

were to locate nests, number them individually, and count the eggs 

or chicks contained in those nests usually every three to seven 

days either until chicks fledged and left the nest or until total 

egg or chick loss occurred. In order to get a good count of eggs 

and small chicks of ledge-nesting species near the cliff tops, 

adult birds reluctant to leave their nests often had to be scared 

off by shouting or by dangling a rope over the cliff edge. In 

working with the two murre species it was imperative that the 

birds not be scared suddenly in order to minimize egg and chick 

loss. Murres were gradually alerted to our presence so that they 

would move slowly away from eggs or chicks before they left their 

143 

13

nesting ledges. As a result of our using this technique very 

few eggs or chicks were lost due to our activities. Egg and 

chick counts for the Horned Puffin, for part of the Black-legged 

Kittiwake sample on St. Paul Island and for the sample of Red- 

legged Kittiwakes on St. George Island were made by using a 

ladder at the bottom of the cliff to reach into nests and nesting 

holes in the cliff. 

For the two Kittiwake species and the Red-faced Cormorant 

the sample of nests included some which could only be viewed 

from below, and consequently counts of eggs and tiny chicks were 

impossible. However, data from these nests were used to calculate 

both fledging success and approximate egg-laying dates, as large 

chicks or incubating parents could be easily seen. 

In addition to counts of eggs and chicks for individual 

pairs of Common and Thick-billed Murres, certain ledges were 

chosen for study on which many birds bred and where it was 

impossible to tell individual eggs or chicks apart. In these 

areas the largest number of eggs and chicks on each ledge was 

used to calculate hatching and fledging success. While these 

figures represent the maximum possible breeding success for those 

pairs rather than the exact percentages, the data provide a 

useful comparison with the sample of individual nests, particularly 

for the Common Murres. In this species nesting is usually in 

large aggregations on wide ledges and the individual nests which 

we had to work with in order to get accurate data may not have 

been entirely representative of the population as a whole. 

144 

14

All probable nest sites located for Fulmars, Tufted Puffins 

and Crested Auklets were inaccessible. While most Fulmar nests 

were located in shallow caves, six nests were found on open 

ledges and progress of chicks in these nests could be followed 

from the top of the cliff. No accessible nest sites of the 

Parakeet Auklet were located until the end of their breeding 

season in 1975, but we feel that in the 1976 season we will be 

able to document Parakeet Auklet reproductive success. 

The most common nesting location for Least Auklets is one to 

two feet below the surface of the ground between the rocks of 

boulder beaches. In digging to check nest contents, it is 

inevitable that the nest itself is destroyed. We dug up only 

one such nest which was located by the noises made by the chick. 

Two other accessible nests located in small holes in a cliff 

could be reached by using a ladder. 

Data were taken on colony attendance by cliff nesting species 

over a cycle of 36 hours by counting birds present every three 

hours. Other observations to be discussed in our next report 

include detailed measurements of nesting habitat preferences of 

cliff nesting species and experiments designed to show which 

species are most easily disturbed from the nesting ledges and 

the consequences of their disturbance. 

2. Growth Rates 

Growth rates of young seabirds have been shown in past 

studies to be strongly correlated with fledging success. 

145 

15

Data on growth rates of the chicks of five species (Thick- 

billed Murre, Black-legged and Red-legged Kittiwakes, Red-faced 

Cormorant and Horned Puffin) were obtained by weighing chicks 

periodically, usually at least twice a week. Chicks were placed 

in cloth bags and weighed with Pesola spring scales (300 g to 

5 kg capacity, depending on the species and the size of the chick). 

The weight of the bag and of any food regurgitated by the chick 

were subtracted from the total weight to obtain the weight of 

the chick. 

In all of the above species with the exception of the Thick- 

billed Murre the typical growth pattern is a period of rapid and 

steady weight gain followed by either a plateau or a slight 

decline in weight prior to fledging. In these cases the growth 

rate for the straight-line portion of the growth curve was calculated 

by the formula: weight 2 - weight 

day 2 - day 1 

where the gain in weight between the first weighing and the peak 

weight is divided by the number of intervening days, yielding an 

average number of grams gained per day. 

3. Food Sampling 

Information on foods were obtained in four ways: (1) The 

birds were shot with a 16 gauge shot gun and their stomachs were 

removed and opened, (2) Chick regurgitation was collected, 

(3) Adult Least Auklets were captured in mist nets, and their 

regurgitation collected, (4) Photographs were taken of birds 

146 

16

(principally the Common and Thick-billed Murres) that held fish 

in their bills prior to feeding their young. 

Birds of several species were collected once or twice each 

week for 3-4 hours per session. On the average, 10-15 birds were 

killed each week. The stomachs were removed from each bird for 

future content analysis. Each bird was skinned for use as a study 

skin or museum skeleton. The skinning process was quite time 

consuming, requiring 1/2 - 3/4 hours per bird. 

As the field season progressed and chicks began hatching, 

we were able to obtain food samples from Black-legged Kittiwake, 

Red-legged Kittiwake, and Red-faced Cormorant chicks. Chicks 

often regurgitated while being weighed, and during August and 

September samples from these species were obtained entirely by this 

method of collection from chicks rather than by shooting. We 

continued to shoot puffins, murres,.and Parakeet Auklets during 

this time, but collected samples from Least Auklets by mist-netting 

adults returning in the evening with food for their chicks. A 

bird containing food in its gular pouch would regurgitate as soon 

as it hit the net. 

Food samples were preserved in plastic Whirl-pak bags in 70% 

ethanol, and labeled as to sample number, species, island and 

date collected. 

4. Distribution of Foraging Seabirds 

Two members of the research team participated in four days 

of pelagic seabird observations on board the USCGSS Discoverer 

147 

17

(OSS 022). D. Causey and D. Schwartz conducted continuous 

censuses of seabirds from dawn to dusk from 20 through 23 August 

1975. 

Observations when the ship was moving were usually conducted 

by one observer who sto6d on the starboard side of the flying 

bridge (eye level 21 m above the water surface). The birds were 

recorded by numbers and location in one of three 100 meter 

segments parallel to the ship's course out to 300 meters from 

the ship. A course register and meteorological log were kept 

during all observations. 

Oceanographic stations were made at the completion of a two 

hour transect segment and in most cases, a Vertical Plankton Tow 

with a one meter net and a Tucker Trawl were made by other 

scientists on the ship. These plankton samples will be analyzed 

by Dr. Ted Cooney at the University of Alaska, who has agreed to 

provide us with his results. During the oceanographic stations 

seabird observations were made from the middle of the flying 

bridge. The observer faced the bow of the ship and recorded 

birds by number and location in each of three concentric 100 meter 

wide semicircles around the ship's bow. A diagram of the viewing 

areas accompanied the observation sheet. 

During all transects and stations, care was 'taken to ensure 

that observations were of a natural situation and not that 

influenced by the ship's presence in the water. Garbage and 

refuse was dumped only at the completion of the observations 

(23 August 1975), and a radar watch was kept for foreign and 

148 

18

domestic fishing vessels within the radar range (50 nautical 

miles). Effort was made not to count circling or following 

birds more than once. 

The proposed ship track for the Discoverer cruise is 

presented in Figure 3. Once the cruise began a number of changes 

were made in the days that certain areas were covered and in some 

of the tracklines themselves, although in general the original 

plan was followed. As of this writing information on the exact 

route and timing of the ship's positions has not yet been sent 

to our group from Alaska. 

An approximation of the route followed is possible, however, 

for the ship's position was recorded on many of the observation 

records. Figure 4 presents the areas covered by the ship. For 

the purpose of preliminary data analysis the area is divided into 

grid blocks 10' x 10'. These grid blocks are divided into three 

groups: Island, Continental Shelf and Continental Shelf Edge 

grid blocks. Island grid blocks are those in which the ship's 

course passed within 10 nautical miles of St. Paul or St. George 

Islands. Likewise, Continental Shelf Edge grid blocks are those 

in which the ship came within 10 nautical miles of the shelf 

edge (the 100 m depth line in Fig. 4 is approximate). All 

remaining grid blocks were over the Continental Shelf itself. 

149 

19

FIGURE 3

FIGURE 4

5. Survey of Otter and Walrus Islands 

A brief survey of Otter and Walrus Islands (Figure 5) was 

conducted by M. Hunt and L. Holmgren using a Coast Guard 

helicopter on 9 August, an unusually bright and clear day. The 

main purpose of the flight was to census by photography a colony 

of Common Murres reported breeding in large numbers on Walrus 

Island early in the century, which had by 1954 declined in size 

due to crowding by Steller's Sea Lions. Each island was circled 

twice at an altitude of 800 feet with the helicopter staying 

approximately 500 feet out from the edge of Walrus Island and 

1,000 feet out from the cliffs of Otter Island. Slides were 

taken using High-speed Ectachrome film in a Nikon camera with 

an 80-200 mm zoom lens. 

152 

22

FIGURE 5


Table 2 indicates the dates on.which reproductive data were 

collected for each species at each study site. Included in this 

table are days on which counts were made of breeding birds on the 

cliffs as well as days of nest chicks and chick weighings. 

Table 3 provides a numerical summary of the different types 

of data gathered.during the 1975 season. 

154 

24

TABLE 2 

Dates and Locations of Colony Work 

St. Paul and St. George Islands - 1975 

155


156


157


158

TABLE 3 

Types of Data Collected, Pribilof Islands 1975

III. RESULTS 

A. Reproductive Success 

1. Fulmar (Fulmarus glacialis). 

Pairs of Fulmars on St. Paul nest almost exclusively in 

shallow caves on the high cliffs of the western end of the 

island. Observations from the clifftop of birds at 43 potential 

nest sites near the Einahnuhto Bluffs were begun in late June 

(see Table 2). These nest sites, all inaccessible to researchers, 

were located either on open ledges or, more frequently, in small 

caves in certain volcanic strata of the cliff face. 

Two main problems encountered in this study were the lack of 

visibility into the caves and the fluctuations in both numbers of 

Fulmars seen and in their distribution in various areas of the 

cliff. On one large ledge numbers of Fulmars seen ranged from 

8 to 18 on any given day, with birds usually in different posi- 

tions from the previous observations. Other potential nest sites 

were occupied erratically. On the whole it was very difficult 

to ascertain which areas were actually nest sites. In 14 of 

the original potential nest locations, Fulmars were observed 

on all days that observations were made. Although no eggs were 

ever seen, in six of these locations chicks appeared and were 

observed consistently through the last observation. Hatching 

most likely occurred during the last week of July and the first 

week of August. 

Unless better means of access to nests can be found, data 

on the breeding success of Fulmars on St. Paul will be at best 

sketchy. 

160 

30

2. Red-faced Cormorant (Phalacrocorax urile). 

Red-faced Cormorant nests on St. Paul Island tended to 

be clumped on certain cliffs despite the apparent availability 

of potential nest sites in other areas. While nests of "nearest 

neighbor" cormorants were sometimes separated by ledges of 

murres and kittiwake nests, it was unusual to find a single 

cormorant nest farther than twenty meters from another one. 

The largest aggregations of cormorant nests that could be 

easily observed were at Polovina Rookery Cliffs, Zapadni Point, 

Ridge Wall Cliffs and Tsammana. Scattered nests not included in 

the sample were also located at Tolstoi Point and along the 

cliffs of the west end of the island. The 88 nests under 

observation may well represent a major portion of the breeding 

population on St. Paul, perhaps as much as 50%. 

Egg-laying was for the most part complete by the time study 

sites were set up in late June. In our sample of 88 nests counts 

of eggs were obtained for 33 nests (Table 4). At the remaining 

nests either we were unable to scare off the incubating parent 

or, in the case of the cormorants at Zapadni, we observed the 

nest from the beach below. Of the total sample, approximately 

90% of the pairs laid eggs (Table 4). 

Hatching success of eggs in the sample of 33 nests was 

approximately 40% (Table 4). This figure is inexact since the 

parent birds were reluctant to stop brooding their newly hatched 

young and good counts of tiny chicks were rarely obtained. 

While most eggs that were lost simply disappeared, in four cases 

161 

31

TABLE 4. Red-faced Cormorant Reproductive Success 

St. Paul Island - 1975

an egg was kicked out of the nest by an adult when it was scared 

and flew off. Four nests with eggs located 2-3 meters above 

mean high water were washed away during a storm. Three nests 

may have lost clutches to fox predation. Nine eggs in five 

nests did not hatch, and remained in the nest after hatching 

should have occurred. Most clutches hatched during the last 

week of June and the first week of July. 

Mortality of chicks prior to fledging was about 32-40%. 

This percentage is inexact because the precise number of chicks 

hatched is not known. As with eggs, most young that died simply 

disappeared. One tiny chick was kicked from the nest when the 

parent was scared off, and two small chicks died in their nestc 

of unknown causes. A large chick that was nearly fledged died 

after losing 770 grams in two weeks from a peak of 2,300 grams. 

Two broods may have lost young to foxes. 

Growth rates were obtained for eight cormorant chicks from 

three nests at Polovina and one at Ridge Wall. Weight at hatching 

is about 30 grams. The average growth rate in the straight-line 

portion of the growth curve was 61.8 + S.D. 10.21 grams per day 

(range 48.5 - 72.8 g/day). Peak weights of chicks (at about 

five weeks of age) ranged from 1,700 to 2,300 grams, probably 

depending on the sex of the bird. 

3. Black-legged Kittiwakes 

The Black-legged Kittiwake nests in profusion wherever 

nesting space is available on the cliffs of St. Paul. This 

163 

33

species is almost certainly the next most abundant of the cliff- 

nesters after the murres. 

Black-legged Kittiwake nests in three study sites were 

chosen either because of the ease of reaching them with a ladder 

(at Tsammana), or because of their proximity to Red-legged 

Kittiwake nests (at Zapadni and Ridge Wall cliffs) which, in a 

comparison of these two closely related species, would control 

for possible differences in environmental factors affecting their 

nesting success. 

Nests at the three study sites were followed from prior to 

egg-laying in June and early July until the chicks left the 

nests in September (Table 2). Of the three sites, the Tsammana 

study area yielded the most satisfactory data because nests were 

lowenough to reach with a ladder in one section and close enough 

to the top of the cliff in another section that adults could 

usually be scared off their nests long enough for us to get an 

accurate count of eggs and small chicks. At Ridge Wall we 

viewed nests from the cliff top but were not able to get good 

egg counts in all nests. At the Zapadni site we viewed nests 

from the bottom of the cliff and egg counts were impossible, but 

the data obtained from there on fledging success were comparable 

with other areas. 

Nesting and timing of breeding success of the Black-legged 

Kittiwake are presented in Table 5 and Figure 6. Although many 

pairs laid two eggs, in most cases only one egg hatched; however, 

in other cases whether the second egg hatched is not known. 

164 

34

In all nests where two chicks hatched, one chick was gone 

before the age of ten days. 

Causes of egg and chick loss in the Black-legged Kittiwake 

were undetermined for the most part. A few eggs did not hatch 

and were not incubated after the normal incubation period. Some 

eggs disappeared before they should have hatched. A very few 

of these may have been taken by foxes in areas where the slope 

of the cliff was less than 90°. In several other cases the 

nest itself disintegrated and fell off the cliff. Chick mortality 

was probably due mostly to chicks falling out of the nest. In 

three cases chicks were found unhurt at the bottom of the cliff 

below their nests; these were counted as "dead" because they 

were unable to fly back to their nests and foxes soon would 

have found and eaten them. One chick died while being weighed. 

The pattern of growth in the Black-legged Kittiwake chick 

is first a period of rapid weight gain from a hatching weight 

of 35-40 grams, followed by a plateau usually between 400 and 

550 grams during which time most of the contour feather producrion 

takes place. Average peak weight is 484 grams (range 427-585 

grams), and probably depends partly on the sex of the chick. The 

average growth rate during the straight-line portion of the 

growth curve for 34 chicks at Tsammana was 17.9 + 3.4 grans/day 

gained (range 11.9 - 26.3 g/day). No statistical differences 

were found between the growth rates of chicks that survived 

(18.0 ± 3.7 g/day, n = 27) and those that died (17.7 + 2.0 g/day, 

n = 7), principally because the chicks that died either 

165 

35

TABLE 5 

Reproductive Success of 

Black-legged Kittiwakes 

St. Paul Island, AK - 1975 

166

FIGURE 6 

PRESENCE OF NESTS WITH EGGS OR CHICKS 

BLACK-LEGGED KITTIWAKES 

TSAMMANA STUDY AREA 

ST. PAUL, ALASKA 1975

disappeared when they were very small before a second weight 

for calculating growth rates could be obtained (n = 4), or died 

after reaching peak weight but before they were able to fly. 

4. Red-legged Kittiwake (Rissa brevirostris) 

Red-legged Kittiwakes nests on St. Paul Island are scattered 

in clumps of two to ten among nests of the Black-legged Kittiwake. 

Whereas the latter species is very numerous, the Red-legs 

represent only a tiny fraction of all Kittiwakes breeding on the 

island. 

Four study sites were chosen for the Red-legged Kittiwakes: 

Tsammana, Zapadni, Ridge Wall Cliffs and Einahnuhto Bluffs north 

of Southwest Point (Table 2). At none of these sites could we 

reach Red-leg nests with a ladder; all data were obtained by 

observation alone. As with the Black-legged Kittiwakes, the most 

satisfactory data were obtained at the Tsammana site. Nesting 

success of this species on St. Paul is presented in Table 6. 

Since we were not able to reach any nests to obtain growth 

rates of the Red-legged Kittiwake on St. Paul Island, we decided 

to sample Red-leg nests on St. George Island where the species 

is more numerous. M. Hunt spent two weeks on St. George from 

24 July to 8 August. Using a ladder with the help of Dr. Joseph 

Hickey's two field assistants, she sampled 28 Red-leg nests once 

every three days (Table 2). In lieu of returning to St. George 

later in the season she hired John Francis, a student spending 

the summer on St. George working for Dr. Roger Gentry of the 

168 

38

National Marine Fisheries Service, to check the nests every 

four to six days, weigh the chicks, and record the development 

of their plumage. 

Timing of breeding and breeding success of St. George 

Red-legs are presented in Figure 7 and Table 7. In interpreting 

these results it must be remembered that work was begun later 

in the season than at St. Paul and ended shortly before most 

chicks should have fledged. Average growth rate for these chicks 

during the straight line portion of the growth curve was 13.7 + 

3.7 grams per day (range 4.0 - 19.1 g/day, n = 18). One small 

chick with the lowest growth rate (4.0 g/day) was found dead in 

its nest, while another chick with the second lowest growth 

rate (8.3 g/day) disappeared. Surviving chicks grew at an 

average of 14.7 + 2.4 g/day (range 10.3 - 19.1 g/day, n = 16). 

The peak growth varied from 327 to 443 g with an average of 

400 g. This weight then dropped slightly until chicks were able 

to fly, usually a week to ten days after reaching peak weight. 

5. Common Murre (Uria aalge). 

Most of the Common Murres nesting on St. Paul Island breed 

on wide ledges on which many birds of the same species congregate 

in dense groups. A very small percentage of the Common Murres 

breed on narrower ledges six inches to a foot wide, often among 

pairs of Thick-billed Murres. No nest is built; the murres 

lay their single eggs on the bare rock and incubate by holding 

them on top of their feet against the brood patch in the stomach 

169 

39

TABLE 6 


Red-legged Kittiwake 

St. Paul Island - 1975

TABLE 7 


Red-legged Kittiwake 

St. George Island 1975 

171

FIGURE 7 

PRESENCE OF NESTS WITH EGGS OR CHICKS. 

RED-LEGGED KITTIWAKE, STARAYA ARTEL 

ST. GEORGE ISLAND 1975

area. Chicks that "fledge" spend an average of 2 1/2 weeks on 

the ledges before leaving to be fed at sea by the adults. During 

this short time on the cliffs their natal down is replaced by 

contour feathers, but chicks attain only about one-third of 

their adult weight before leaving. 

It is often difficult for an observer to tell whether a 

murre is incubating an egg or brooding a small chick merely by 

the position of the bird. As with many of the other species 

nesting on the cliffs of St. Paul, the murres were reluctant to 

move away from eggs or small chicks long enough for an observer 

to count them. There were very few individual nests or broad 

ledges of Common Murres that were close enough to the top of 

the cliff for an observer to persuade the birds to move. In 

addition, large numbers of murres that frequented these ledges 

appeared to be non-breeders. 

Table 8 shows the hatching and chick survival of Common 

Murres both in individual nests and on large ledges. Chicks 

were classified as "fledged" if they were observed until they 

were at least 15 days old. Calculations for breeding success on 

the broad ledges are based on the maximum number of eggs and 

chicks observed. In these areas it is impossible to tell whether 

eggs observed on a given day are the same ones observed previously, 

or whether chicks that are no longer there have fallen off the 

ledges prematurely or have "fledged". Therefore, percentages for 

the broad ledges are at best estimates. Data from the individual 

nests may not be representative of the Common Murre population of. 

173 

43

St. Paul, as these more accessible nest sites are perhaps in a 

suboptimal habitat. 

Table 8 does show, however, that egg mottality is very high 

in the Common Murre, and that the number ofchicks "fledged" 

per egg laid is very small. Judging from the number of broken 

eggshells at the bottom of the cliffs, a main cause of egg 

mortality is falling off the ledges. This happens normally, 

even when birds are not startled suddenly. Other eggs roll and 

become jammed into cracks where the adults cannot incubate them. 

Foxes take large numbers of murre eggs (presumably of both species), 

although it is not known whether this accounts for any egg mortality 

in our sample. Disturbance by aircraft may have accounted for 

part of the egg mortality (see Table 10, discussed under Thick- 

billed Murres). 

Figure 8 presents the dates when Common Murre eggs and chicks 

were observed on the communal ledges of the Ridge Wall Study Site. 

In cases where the area was censused more than once during each 

five-day interval on the graph, the maximum figures were used. 

While this figure indicates that the peak of laying in 1975 

occurred around 17 July, this date is probably not an accurate 

representation of what occurred on the entire island. The Common 

Murre ledges that contributed data to this graph sustained heavy 

egging by the native Aleuts on 29 June, an activity that caused 

egg relaying and delayed chick hatching by 10-20 days. 

174 

44

TABLE 8 

COMMON MURRE REPRODUCTIVE SUCCESS 

ST. PAUL ISLAND - 1975 

175

PRESENCE OF EGGS AND CHICKS 

COMMON MURRE NESTS 

RIDGE WALL STUDY AREA 

ST. PAUL ISLAND, ALASKA 1975 

FIGURE 8

6. Thick-billed Murre (Uria lomvia) 

The most numerous of cliff-nesting seabirds on St. Paul, the 

Thick-billed Murre is found on all cliff areas of the island. 

Breeding biology of this species is nearly identical to that of 

the Common Murre, except that its preferred nesting habitat is 

narrow ledges where pairs breed in linear formation rather than 

in clumped groups. Individual nests close to the cliff top were 

much easier to locate than for the Common Murre. 

Breeding success of Thick-billed Murres both in individual 

pairs and groups of pairs is presented in Table 9. While causes 

of egg and chick mortality in this species are the same as for 

the Common Murre, it is possible that fox predation played a 

larger role in our sample of Thick-billed Murres than in the 

sample of Common Murres. 

In addition to natural causes of mortality, disturbance by 

aircraft may have caused a significant portion of egg and chick 

deaths in both species of murre (Table 10). When aircraft 

approach the cliffs, huge numbers of birds are scared off their 

breeding sites. This can be particularly damaging to the murres, 

which do not have nests to prevent eggs from rolling if the parents 

leave suddenly. 

Figure 9 shows the dates when eggs and chicks were observed. 

For this graph data from three study areas are combined, and in 

cases where sites were visited more than once during a five-day 

period, the maximum numbers of eggs or chicks were used. The 

data from Ridge Wall that are included in this graph were affected 

177 

47

TABLE 9 

THICK-BILLED MURRE REPRODUCTIVE SUCCESS 

ST. PAUL ISLAND 1975 

178

TABLE 10 

CHICK AND EGG MORTALITY OF COMMON AND THICK-BILLED 

MURRES FOLLOWING AIRCRAFT ACTIVITY NEARBY* 

ST. PAUL ISLAND 1975 

179

FIGURE 9 

PRESENCE OF EGGS AND CHICKS 

THICK-BILLED MURRE NESTS 

RIDGE WALL, TSAMMANA AND 

SOUTHWEST POINT STUDY AREAS 

ST. PAUL ISLAND, ALASKA 1975

FIGURE 10 

THICK-BILLED MURRE CHICK GROWTH RATES 

ST. PAUL ISLAND - 1975

y egging activity by Aleut people on 29 June, effectively 

delaying the peaks of egg numbers and chick hatchings. 

Growth measurements were obtained fur seven Thick-billed 

Murre chicks which were accessible to researchers and either 

inaccessible to or overlooked by foxes (Figure 10). Starting 

from a hatching weight of about 75 grams the chicks gain roughly 

20 grams per day until a short period of extensive feather 

development during which weight gain is slower. The chicks then 

gain more weight, which peaks and drops just before the chicks 

leave the cliff. Chicks that grow too slowly may not survive 

(see chick #81, Figure 10). 

7. Horned Puffin (Fratercula corniculata) 

Horned Puffins on St. Paul Island nest in holes in the cliff 

face, and lay their single eggs in nests constructed of grass and 

bits of seaweed. Due to the presence of foxes, these birds do 

not nest in burrows in the ground inland from the cliffs as they 

do in other parts of their range. 

Observation of Horned Puffins from the cliff top to determine 

nest attendance and timing of breeding proved difficult and 

unsatisfactory. In addition to two accessible nests found at 

Tsammana in June, in August an area at Ridge Wall was located 

where nine Horned Puffin nests could be reached from the ground 

with a ladder. Exploration of this area proved that many holes 

thought earlier to be puffin nests were empty. Holes that did 

contain nests were approximately 10-15 inches high at the mouth 

and from 1 to 4 feet in width. Most of the grassy nests 

182 

52

were located in an open "antemchamber" 8-12 inches high towards 

the front of the burrow. Often the hole continued out of arm's 

reach, becoming deep and narrow towards the back. 

All eggs in the 11 Horned Puffin nests hatched. Assuming an 

incubation period of 42 days (as is the case for its congener the 

Common Puffin, Fratercula arctica), egg laying was calculated to 

have taken place during the first two weeks of July with hatching 

in mid to late August. Puffin chicks are the last seabird young 

to leave their nests in September. 

Data on fledging success and growth rates proved somewhat 

difficult to obtain as the chicks tended to crawl out of reach 

to the back of the holes when they heard the ladder against the 

cliff. While at least five of the 11 chicks were believed to 

have fledged, six others either disappeared or may have hidden in 

the backs of the cracks out of sight when they heard us coming. 

This problem will be easily remedied next year by blocking the 

access to the back parts of the nesting holes with rocks before 

the eggs hatch. 

The average growth of eight Horned Puffin chicks was 11.1 + 

1.3 grams per day (range 8.2 - 12.8 g/day) from a hatching weight 

of about 50 grams. Peak growth was attained 30-35 days after 

hatching. 

8. Tufted Puffins (Lunda cirrhata) 

While neither species of puffin on St. Paul is numerous, 

Tufted Puffins are far less common than Horned Puffins, possibly 

183 

53

y an order of magnitude. Like the Horned Puffin the Tufted 

Puffin nests in holes in the cliff face. Most holes that we 

believe were occupied were located toward the top of the cliff, 

and all were well out of reach of a ladder. Some of these holes 

may possibly be explored next year with use of a rope ladder. 

9. Crested Auklet (Aethia cristatella) 

Crested Auklets are the rarest of all seabird species breeding 

on St. Paul Island, representing only an infinitismally small 

fraction of the total number of birds present. On St. Lawrence 

Island, where this species breeds in huge numbers, nests are 

located between large boulders of talus slopes. This type of 

habitat does not exist on St. Paul, and Crested Auklets must 

nest either in holes in the cliff or among the rocks of boulder 

beaches along with its smaller congener, the Least Auklet. Only 

one possible nest of the Crested Auklet was located during the 

1975 season, and it was inaccessible by ladder. This species was 

net seen on St. Paul after the middle of August. 

10. Least Auklet (Aethia pusilla) 

Least Auklets, the smallest of the alcids, are by far the 

most abundant of the hole-nesting seabird species on St. Paul, 

and may be rivaled only by the murres in population size. Many 

of them nest in dense colonies among the boulders below the 

surface of three rocky barrier beaches (East Landing, Salt 

Lagoon and Antone Lake). Others nest individually in small 

holes in the cliff face and probably also use the rocky rubble 

at the foot of the cliffs. 

184 

54

Least Auklets exhibited a regular attendance pattern at 

their breeding areas, and were either present in large numbers 

or almost totally absent depending on the time of day. 

In the case of beach-nesting birds examination of nest 

contents effectively means destroying the nests: therefore, we 

did not attempt to get information on reproductive success by 

this method. However, we have evidence for the timing of breeding 

of the Least Auklet. The egg stage began in early to middle June. 

Two eggs collected by Aleuts on 15 June were measured and opened. 

One egg measured 4.09 x 3.08 cm and contained an embryo 0.76 cm 

long. The other egg was 4.03 x 2.97 cm and contained an embryo 

1.08 cm long. With an incubation period of about one month, these 

eggs were less than a week old. Chicks were present from mid 

July to mid August. On 15 July we dug up a nest with a newly 

hatched chick (weight 15 grams). During the next month, in 

order to collect regurgitation samples, we mist-netted adults 

bringing food back to their young in the evening. From mid July 

to mid August we could hear the chicks chirping constantly among 

the rocks below the beach surface. By 14 August very few adults 

were present and most of the underground chirping had ceased. 

Least Auklets seen during the last two weeks of August represented 

only a tiny fraction of the numbers that had been present earlier. 

Two Least Auklet nests were found in small holes in a cliff. 

In one of these a small chick that was first seen on 18 August 

was growing contour and primary feathers when last observed on 

1 September. The hole was too small for us to reach the chick 

to measure its growth. 

185 

55

11. Parakeet Auklet (Cyclorrhynchus psittacula) 

Parakeet Auklets are ubiquitous, although scattered, on the 

cliffs of St. Paul, nesting in small holes in the cliff face. 

We were not able to locate any accessible nests until the end 

of their breeding season in mid August. In three cases we 

found an egg that had rolled into such a position that it could 

not be incubated. Another egg, presumably laid by a Parakeet 

Auklet judging by its size, was found wedged behind the nest of 

a Horned Puffin, Next year suitable areas of cliff will be explored 

in June with ladders and we anticipate obtaining a reasonable 

sample of nests for data on reproductive success and growth rates 

of young. 

186 

56

B. Foods 

Table 11 presents the number of birds collected for food samples 

and the anticipated percent of useful food samples taken from these 

birds. However, until the samples have been analyzed the true 

percentages will not be known. 

Table 12 summarizes the total number of food samples taken from 

both shot and non-shot birds. This latter category includes not only 

chick regurgitation samples, but also miscellaneous samples found 

on murre ledges and below the bird cliffs and regurgitations from 

adult Least Auklets caught in mist nets. 

Although identification of food samples has just begun and will 

be discussed in detail in the next report, some generalizations on 

the types of foods used by different species may be made. The two 

Kittiwake species relied almost entirely on fish, although occasionally 

samples of small shrimp were found in the regurgitation of Black- 

legged Kittiwake chicks. The Red-faced Cormorant had a varied diet, 

and a single sample often contained two or three different food 

organisms. Fish and shrimp predominated in these samples with squid 

and small red crabs occurring fairly frequently. The two murre 

species contained mostly fish and occasionally a few small crustaceans. 

Food samples from the three auklet species uniformly contained 

zooplankton. While Horned and Tufted Puffins that were collected 

rarely had food in their stomachs, Horned Puffins were occasionally 

seen carrying several small fish at a time in their bills during 

August and September, the period in which puffin chicks were present. 

187 

57

Due to predominately overcast weather, we were able to take 

only a limited number of useful photographs of murres holding fish 

in their beaks. However, we are optimistic that with use of a 

higher-speed film next season a larger number of useable slides of 

foods used by murres and puffins will be obtained. Our results 

show that this technique has promise, and we feel that the expense 

of investment in camera gear will prove warranted. 

188 

58

TABLE 11. Numbers of Birds Collected for Food Samples 

St. Paul Island 1975

TABLE 12. Total Food Samples Collected* 

St. Paul Island, Alaska 

Summer 1975 

190

C. Distribution of Foraging Seabirds 

Approximately 28,000 seabirds of 23 different species were 

seen in the 203 km2 viewed during four days of dawn to dusk observa- 

tions. A detailed report containing such information as the number 

of transects and stations made and the density of each species per 

km2 of transect will have to wait until records of the official 

Course Register and Ship's Log are sent to our project from Alaska. 

For preliminary analysis prior to knowing the precise route 

of the Discoverer, the birds recorded during the cruise were grouped 

according to the 10' square of ocean in which they were observed 

(see Fig. 4). Figures 11 through 20 show the number of the most 

numerous seabird species seen in each 10' x 10' grid block. In 

these figures numbers of birds seen in the same block on different 

days have been separated. Numbers of other species seen appear in 

the Appendix. 

Figures 13-20 suggest that some seabirds are found more 

commonly near land while others appear to congregate in largest 

numbers at the Continental Shelf edge. However, without the knowledge 

of the exact kilometers of trackline through each grid block these 

raw numbers may be misleading. In order to illustrate more 

accurately the tendency of species to gather in certain areas, 

Table 13 shows both the number of birds seen and the percent occurrence 

of species in each of three categories of ocean habitat. 

Of the birds breeding on the Pribilof Islands, the murres and 

kittiwakes were seen most frequently in all three habitat areas 

(Table 13). It is possible that not all of these birds were 

191 

61

eeding. While all of the alcids (murres, auklets and puffins) 

were seen more often near the islands, kittiwakes and fulmars 

occurred more frequently in continental shelf and shelf edge areas. 

The small number of Red-faced Cormorants seen occurred mostly in 

continental shelf areas. Auklets (including "small unidentified 

alcids") constituted a relatively small percentage of the total 

number of birds; by the time the cruise took place toward the end 

of August most had left their breeding grounds on the islands. 

Of the birds seen that do not breed in the Pribilofs, the 

shearwaters far outnumbered all other species in all three area 

types. Petrels were concentrated in areas away from the islands 

and constituted approximately 20 percent of all birds seen in 

continental shelf grid blocks. 

192 

62

TABLE 13. Numbers of Seabirds Observed and Percent Occurrence in Three Ocean Habitats 

193

FIGURE 11 

Total Birds Seen on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 12 

Number of Species of Birds Seen on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer', 20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 13 

Fulmars Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 14 

Petrels (total) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 15 

Shearwaters (total) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 16 

Red-faced Cormorant Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, .20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 17 

Kittiwakes Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 18 

Puffin (total) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20'- 23 August 1975

FIGURE 19 

Murre Counted on the Cruise of U..S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

FIGURE 20 

Small Alcid (total) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

D. Survey of Otter and Walrus Islands 

Cursory examination of slides taken during the flight around 

Walrus Island confirmed observations made from the helicopter that 

the huge.colony of Common Murres described in earlier literature 

was no longer present. The large flat top of the island was bare 

and bore no evidence of guano patches indicating where birds might 

have congregated. However, a small group of gulls or kittiwakes was 

seen resting on the shore at the northern end of the island, and a 

large flock of kittiwakes was seen feeding nearby. Detailed analyses 

of the slides for numbers of pinnipeds around the edges of the island 

and the numbers of birds breeding in the few areas of small, low 

cliffs have yet to be made. 

At Otter Island our view of the highest cliffs at the west end 

of the island was blocked by a fog bank. Although our observations 

of the lower south-facing cliffs were very brief, this area appeared 

similar both in physical structure and in the types of seabirds 

present to the cliffs of St. Paul and St. George Island. 

Observers on the Discoverer survey were able to see murres on 

the top of Walrus Island in late August two weeks after the helicopter 

survey. We do not know why these murres were on the island. 

204 

74

IV. DISCUSSION 

Ideally a baseline study of nesting seabirds should provide data 

on: 1) where and when birds are nesting, 2) what kinds of birds are 

present, 3) how many birds are present, 4) how successful they are in 

raising young, and 5) where do they obtain food and what do they eat. 

With this information available, it is possible to ascertain the 

populations at risk if an oil spill occurs in a given area, and the 

magnitude of the effects of the spill on nesting population size and 

reproductive success. Additionally, if long term banding data are 

available, it may be possible to construct life tables for species and 

to predict the ability of a species to recover from a disaster. 

In the present coordinated studies of Pribilof Island seabirds, 

Dr. J. Hickey and his team on St. George have concentrated on problems 1, 

2, and 3, while we have concentrated on problems 4 and 5 on St. Paul. 

With cooperation between the two groups,.we feel it will be possible 

to get a clear overall picture of seabird numbers and reproductive 

ecology in the Pribilof Islands. 

In our work on the Pribilofs we have attempted to develop an 

overall understanding of processes and principles which govern seabird 

reproductive success and foraging behavior. There are too many remote 

colonies of seabirds in Alaska for all to be accorded the degree of 

study needed to establish realistic baselines. Therefore, it is 

necessary to concentrate on a limited number of important areas, and 

attempt to develop an understanidng of seabird ecology which can be 

extrapolated to other areas. Predictions can then be made and tested, 

and if found reliable, used for estimating present baseline conditions, 

205 

75

and also for advising government bodies on the sensitivity of areas 

to oil spills before lease sales are made. 

We have found that the distribution of nesting activity for the 

11 species of seabirds on St. Paul Island is determined by the avail- 

ability of nesting sites on ledges and in holes in the vertical cliffs 

that border the island on the south and west sides. One of these 

species, the Least Auklet, also nests in large numbers on boulder beaches 

deep in holes between the rocks. 

All seabird species on St. Paul were the potential prey of the 

Arctic Foxes which live by scavenging, catching birds and taking eggs. 

The foxes are small and agile and were often seen running easily up 

and down the crumbling cliffs where a person would soon perish. Con- 

sequently, the seabirds that bred successfully are those that nest in 

locations inaccessible to foxes and therefore also to ornithologists. 

In spite of these problems, we were able to obtain reasonably good 

data on reproductive success and growth rates of young of five species. 

However, in terms of a baseline study, we will need several years of 

comparable data before we will be able to say what is "normal" for 

these species. For this sort of work one year provides but one "sample". 

Comparisons can, however, be made between similar species or popu- 

lations within this year's sample. Comparisons between Black-legged 

and Red-legged Kittiwake on St. Paul and between Red-legged Kittiwake 

on St. Paul and St. George are particularly rewarding. 

Earlier workers described the Red-legged Kittiwake and Black- 

legged Kittiwake as about equally abundant on St. Paul. At present, 

the Black-legged Kittiwake far outnumbers the Red-legged Kittiwake on 

206 

76

St. Paul, while populations of the Red-legged Kittiwake appear large 

on St. George. It would be extremely interesting if we could correlate 

differences in reproductive success between species and populations 

with major changes in population size. If changes in reproductive success 

can in turn be related to food habits or other quantifiable parameters, 

we will have not only a very important discovery, but also a tool for 

predicting future changes in kittiwake populations. 

During the present year's study we found that on St. Paul Island, 

Black-legged Kittiwakes had larger clutches than Red-legged Kittiwakes 

and fledged more chicks per nest even though survival of young in 

relation to chicks hatched was lower for Black-legged Kittiwakes (Tables 

5 and 6). Thus, the higher reproductive success of the Black-legged 

Kittiwakes is directly attributable to their larger clutch size. 

When reproductive success within Red-legged Kittiwakes is compared 

between St. Paul and St. George (Table 6 and 7) it appears that Red- 

legged Kittiwakes enjoy greater reproductive success on St. George. 

This result may be biased by our starting work on St. George shortly 

before hatching was to commence, and thereby causing us to overestimate 

hatching success. Our results need to be carefully checked by future 

studies of these birds on St. Paul and St. George as they may provide 

an important clue about the changing kittiwake populations in the 

Pribilof Islands, a matter of no small interest since the Red-legged 

Kittiwake is endemic to the Bering Sea and nests on only a very few 

islands. 

A comparison of the reproductive success of the Thick-billed and 

Common Murres on St. Paul shows that the more abundant Thick-billed 

207 

77

Murre enjoys both greater hatching success and greater fledging success 

than the Common Murre. At present we do not know why this difference 

exists, but, during at least the egg stage, it seemed that on the broad, 

crowded ledges occupied by the Common Murres there was a greater chance 

for unattended eggs to be knocked off the ledge than was the case on 

the narrow ledges occupied by Thick-billed Murres. 

The mortality of murre eggs and young associated with the passage 

of two or more airplanes close to breeding cliffs points to the need 

to restrict the movement of aircraft should oil leases by sold in the 

vicinity of seabird colonies. Frequent disturbance by aircraft could 

prevent successful reproduction and spell the doom of the largest of 

seabird colonies. 

It is still premature to discuss in detail the results of the 

radial transect surveys for foraging birds at sea. We were somewhat 

surprised by the large numbers of shearwaters close to St. Paul Island 

(Figure 15). The distribution of petrels was much as we had expected. 

More important for the studies of breeding birds was the finding that 

both of the two species of kittiwakes (Figure 17) and the Fulmars 

(Figure 13) ranged far from the islands often near the continental 

slope. Away from the islands the numbers of kittiwakes and Fulmars 

appear to be closely correlated with one another. It will be valuable 

to collect these species at sea on future cruises, as time permits, in 

order to determine their food preferences in relation to food avail- 

ability. 

The alcids, which are notoriously vulnerable to oil on the sea's 

surface, were found primarily close to the islands, usually within 

208 

78

10-20 miles. Because the small alcids had largely completed their 

breeding cycle by the time we made our transects, we were unable to 

get much data on possible differentiation of feeding areas used by the 

different species. However, it did appear that the murres were not 

distributed evenly in a band around each island, but rather were 

clumped in a few areas of presumed abundance of food (Figure 19). 

Our brief surveys of Otter and Walrus Islands suggest that these 

areas are deserving of future attention. Walrus Island was once 

reputed to be the home of one of the world's largest Common Murre 

colonies. While our ship-board observers reported murres on the island, 

the findings of the helicopter survey that no birds occupied the top 

of the island suggests that murres may no longer be breeding there. 

Clearly we need to visit Walrus Island early in the season in order 

to determine both whether birds are breeding there and the size and 

activity of the Stellar's Sea Lion population which is reputed to 

have displaced some of the Murres in the past. 

,209 

79

V. PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED/RECOMMENDED CHANGES 

Transportation and possible understaffing have proven to be our 

most serious problems. The rough roads of St. Paul, the need to work 

in many areas of the island well separated from each other and from 

the village, and the periodic curtailment of field work by heavy rain 

have all pointed to the need for safe, reliable transportation and 

adequate personnel to accomplish the required tasks. 

A. Transportation 

The concept of using motorcycles for transportation has proven 

a good one, although they are thoroughly uncomfortable to use in the 

cold, wet weather. In practice they have proven less than satis- 

factory because of constant maintenance problems (Table 14). The 

dealer failed to provide the tools, spare parts or service manuals 

that NOAA requested, and as a result we were unable to correct 

problems or provide preventative maintenance. Toward the end of 

the season, only two bikes were functional and they required a large 

amount of trouble-shooting which detracted from our research efforts 

(see Table 1). 

If the various Pribilof Island Projects (Birds, Geology) are to 

continue for several more years, we strongly urge that a four-wheel 

drive vehicle be made available for NOAA project use. In addition, 

whether a 4-wheel drive vehicle is available or not, adequate service 

manuals, tools and spare parts should be purchased so that the 

motorcycles can realize their full potential. Arrangements for 

purchase of these basic requirements, which should have accompanied 

210 

80

TABLE 14 

RESEARCH NEED VS. MOTORCYCLE AVAILABILITY, 1975 

211

the motorcycles in the first place, have been made with Jody Hilton 

of the NOAA Project Office in Juneau. 

We had hoped to be able to rent boats from the Aleuts on St. 

Paul to give us access to colonies not approachable from land. 

Adequate boat rental oppottunities were not available, and we suggest 

that it would be valuable to purchase a 15-foot Zodiac inflatable 

boat with motor. This would allow us to census the St. Paul colonies 

not visible from land, give us access to colonies presently unap- 

proachable from land, and allow us to observe foraging seabirds and 

collect seabird food samples at sea. Due to coverage of certain 

project costs with funds from other projects and due to a reduction 

in per diem costs, we believe we have adequate funds in our present 

budget to cover this expense. 

212 

82

B. Personnel 

We had originally expected to operate with a team of three 

investigators on St. Paul, augmented by a visit from the Principal 

Investigator. In fact, when M. Hunt was on St. George, we were 

severely understaffed on St. Paul and important data were lost 

(see Figure 6). As a partial solution a fourth person, D. Causey, 

was sent to St. Paul in early August to help out. Due to the large 

number of species to be studied, the difficulty inherent in working 

4-5 study sites and the need to have teams of two persons when 

ladders are used for checking nests, we feel that it will be 

necessary to have four people stationed on St. Paul from early 

June until early September (see Table 15). We feel that at least 

one observer should start work in mid April or early May for the 

start of the Cormorant nesting and that one or two observers should 

stay on the island from late August until the end of September to 

follow up the late-nesting species. 

These investigators will be fully occupied during a tightly 

scheduled 6 day work week (Table 16). The seventh day will be 

used either as a day off, to fill in for days missed due to bad 

weather, or for mass banding operations. 

It is our hope in the 1976 field season to continue our work 

on reproductive success and foods and to gain additional data on 

daily and seasonal cycles of colony occupancy. It is our plan to 

coordinate our efforts with Dr. Joe Hickey of the University of 

Wisconsin who is working on St. George Island. During the December 

seabird meetings we plan to arrange with him to have his group 

213 

83

perform routine checks of Kittiwake nests on St. George during 

July and early August. In return, we propose to gather data 

on colony size and daily and seasonal activity patterns on St. Paul 

to complement his work on St. George. Such arrangements will 

minimize inefficient splitting of groups and duplication of effort. 

214 

84

C. Surveys of Foraging Seabirds 

Our surveys of foraging pelagic seabirds scheduled in the 1975 

season on the Discoverer were very useful for learning general 

patterns of distribution but they came too late in the summer to gain 

significant data on the distribution of the auklets which nest on the 

Pribilof Islands. For the 1976 season we recommend cruises be 

scheduled in late May, late June, late July and early September in 

order to detect changes in seabird foraging patterns as the breeding 

seasons of the various species progress. Cruises should be scheduled 

for a minimum of four days if reasonable coverage of the area in 

the vicinity of the Pribilof Islands is to be achieved. 

215 

85

TABLE 15 

Schedule of Field Operations 1976 

Pribilof Islands Bird Studies 

216

TABLE 16 

Weekly Work Schedule* - St. Paul - 1976

VI. FINANCIAL STATEMENT 

Table 17 presents a summary of expenditures projected through 

31 October 1975. Certain expenses projected in the original budget 

have shifted. Airplane fares to the Pribilof Islands were much higher 

than had been originally anticipated, although these additional 

expenses were offset by the coverage for much of Dr. Hunt's travel fare 

by a separate contract. Living expenses on St. Paul Island were 

originally projected at $20/person/day at the suggestion of both 

National Marine Fisheries and United States Fish and-Wildlife personnel, 

based on the possibility of having to procure room and board at the 

island's only hotel. Instead, housing controlled by National Marine 

Fisheries was rented for a moderate fee and we saved money by doing 

our own cooking. Thus, we feel we have adequate funds to complete the 

proposed research. 

218 

88

TABLE 17 

Summary of Expenditures, May - October 1975 

219

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 

In this project we have often had to rely on the help of others to 

assist us in our work. We gratefully acknowledge the valuable assistance 

of the personnel in the Juneau NOAA-OCSEP office in providing logistic 

support; the personnel of the National Marine Fisheries Service Pribilof 

Island Project in providing housing, transportation and permission to 

enter Fur Seal rookeries; the Aleut community on St. Paul for transporta- 

tion; the United States Coast Guard for maintainence expertise and heli- 

copter transport; the Officers and Crew of the Discoverer; and numerous 

scientists on St. Paul and St. George for help and encouragement. 

We also wish to thank Barbara Burgeson for her help in producing 

some of the figures in this report and for typing it cheerfully and 

without complaint. 

90

APPENDIX 1 

Charts of Additional Bird Sightings at Sea 

221 

91

Fork-tailed Petrel Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Petrels (unidentified) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Shearwater (unidentified) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Slender-billed Shearwater Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Glaucous-winged Gull Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Arctic Tern Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Parakeet Auklet Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Crested Auklet Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Least Auklet Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Small Alcid (unidentified) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Puffin (unidentified) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Horned Puffin Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Tufted Puffin Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Wandering Tattler Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Jaegers (unidentified) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Long-tailed Jaeger Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Jaegers (total) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Turnstones (unidentified) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Black Turnstone Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Ruddy Turnstone Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

Turnstones (total) Counted on the Cruise of U.S.C.G.S. Discoverer, 20 - 23 August 1975

BREEDING ECOLOGY OF THE GULF OF ALASKA HERRING GULL GROUP 

(Larus argentatus x Larus glaucescens) 

An Interim Report 

by 

RU #96 



P. 0. BOX 1808 


Samuel M. Patten, Jr., M.Sci. Linda Renee Patten 

Associate Investigator Research Technician 

Department of Pathobiology Department of Pathobiology 

The Johns Hopkins University The Johns Hopkins University 

An analysis of the 1975 and previous 

field seasons presented as a working 

copy to the 

U.S. Department of Commerce 

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration 

U.S. Department of Interior 

Fish and Wildlife Service 

Bureau of Land Management 

and 

and 

as part of the 

Environmental Assessment of the Alaskan Continental Shelf 

243

INTRODUCTION 


SCOPE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY 

THE STUDY AREA 

MATERIALS AND METHODS 12 

RESULTS 

page 

Colony Selection and Investigation Dates 12 

Reproductive Cycle 

Data Analysis 

Specimens 

General Timing of the Reproductive Cycle 14 

Territory Size 17 

Nesting Activities 22 

Egg-Laying 31 

Clutch Size 34 

Egg Loss 37 

Egg and Clutch Replacement 43 

Incubation Period 44 

Chick Stage 46 

Mortality Factors 50 

Fledging Success 57 

Banding Recovery and Sightings of Color-marked Gulls 

60 

SUMMARY AND TENTATIVE CONCLUSIONS 62 

LITERATURE CITED 64 

244 

1 

6 

7 

13 

13 

14 

14

iii 


Table page 

1. Clutch size, Number of Fledglings, & Territory 19 

Size in Alaskan L. argentatus & glaucescens. 

2. Inner and Outer Diameter of Larus argentatus - 30 

Larus glaucescens Gull nests at Egg Island, 

Dry Bay and North Marble Island, Alaska. 

3. Nest Depth for Egg Island, Dry Bay and 31 

North Marble Island Colonies. 

4. Numbers of "Lost", "Infertile" and "Pipped" 39 

Eggs Which Did Not Hatch in the Study Areas on 

Egg Island, 1975; Dry Bay, 1975; 

North Marble Island, 1972-73. 

5. Weights and Measurements of "Runt" Eggs on 40 

Egg Island, 1975. One Egg Each from Three 

Different Clutches Compared to "Normal" Range. 

6. Weights and Measurements of Supernormal Clutches, 40 

Egg Island, 1975. 

7. Egg Weights at Beginning and End of Incubation 46 

Period, North Marble Island, 1973; 

Dry Bay, 1975. 

8. Analysis of Seven Mortalities Associated with 48 

Color-marking (Complete) with Nyansol Dye, 

Glaucous-winged Gull Fledglings, 

Egg Island, 1975. 

9. Chick Mortality, Egg Island, 1975; 52 

North Marble Island, 1972-73 (X). 

10. Percent Chick Mortality, Egg Island, 1975; 52 

North Marble Island, 1972-73 (x). 

11. Alaskan Gull Hatching Success, Mean Combined 56 

Mortality, and Total Reproductive Success, 

Egg Island, 1975; North Marble Island, 1972-73 (X). 

12. Comparative Index of Gull Reproductive 59 

Success in Chicks Per Nest (Productivity). 

245

iv 


Figure page 

1. Map of the Northeast Gulf of Alaska, showing 4 

known Large Gull Colonies of the Larus argentatus - 

Larus glaucescens species group. (Inset: map of 

Alaska and northwest Canada showing Gulf of Alaska) 

2. Map of the Copper River Delta Region and Prince 8 

William Sound, showing location of Cordova, 

the Copper River, Egg Island, Copper Sands, and 

Strawberry Reef. 

3. Glacier Bay National Monument, (580 10' - 590 15' 16 

N. Latitude, 1350 10" - 1380 10' W. Longitude, 

located north of southeastern Alaska's Alexander 

Archipelago, is shaped as a parallelogram, with 

104 and 120 km on a side. 

4. North Marble Island lies in the niddle of Glacier 18 

Bay and contains large marine bird nesting areas. 

North and South Marble Islands, 2 km apart, are 

surrounded by cold, highly oxygenated waters and 

strong tidal currents. 

5. Map of the Yakutat area, showing location of 23 

Gull Colonies at Dry Bay, mouth of the Alsek River 

(lower arrow) and Haenke Island in Disenchantment 

Bay (upper arrow). 

6. View from Egg Island, June 1975, showing Elymus 25 

meadows, Egg Island Channel, part of the Copper River 

Delta, and the Chugach Mountains. 

7. Haenke Island (center) is located in Disenchantment 25 

Bay, off Yakutat Bay, near the active front of the 

Hubbard Glacier at the foot of the St. Elias Range. 

8. Egg Island viewed from a small aircraft at 100m 26 

showing hundreds of gulls flying over meadow-covered 

dunes with scattered old drift logs providing partial 

cover for nests, 

9. Dry Bay from a small aircraft 1 km away at 200m + 26 

elevation showing gull colony (center) on low gravel 

bars with sparse vegetation. 

10. Campsite on Egg Island, June 1975, with Egg Island 28 

Channel and the Chugach Range in the Background. 

246

v 

LIST OF FIGURES (cont.) 

Figure page 

11. Campsite on Haenke Island, June 1974, at the 28 

foot of the gull colony on the cliff. 

Pack ice from the Hubbard Glacier in the background. 

Gulls feed on seal placentae scavenged on the ice. 

12. Study Area Southwest of Egg Island Light, 32 

showing Gulls on Territories and Nest Survey Markers, 

June 1975. 

13. Survey Area, Egg Island, West View, June 1975. 32 

14. Abnormal Egg Size, Example # 1. 41 



17. Supernormal Clutch, Example # 1. 42 

247

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 

I am deeply indebted to Dr. Francis S.L. Williamson, Commissioner, 

Department of Health and Social Services, State of Alaska, for the 

opportunity to work on gulls under the auspices of the Department of 

Pathobiology, The Johns Hopkins University. I also extend my sincere 

thanks to Dr. I.L. Graves, Dr. W.J.L. Sladen, and Dr. F.B. Bang of the 

Department of Pathobiology for sponsorship and guidance in planning this 

study, and to Dr. Neal Nathanson and the Division of Infectious Diseases, 

Department of Epidemiology, for logistical support. 

I am grateful to Dr. Calvin Lensink of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife 

Service and to Dr. Jay Quast of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric 

Administration for approval and support of this study. 

Special thanks go to Dr. Pete Michelson, University of Alaska; to 

Mr. Pete Islieb of Cordova, Alaska; and to Mr. Ken Wohl of the Bureau of 

Land Management for assistance and suggestions. Dr. Ralph B. Williams (ret.) 

of Alaska Public Health Laboratories and Mr. Lloyd Morley, Chief of Alaska 

Environmental Health, provided encouragement plus knowledge of animal- 

disease problems in Alaska. Mr. Jim King, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, 

reported important marked gull sightings and banding recoveries. 

The research in this study is being conducted for the Outer Continental 

Shelf Energy Program of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration 

Environmental Research Laboratories, Boulder, Colorado. The Frank M. Chapman 

Fund and the Mae P. Smith Fund of the American Museum of Natural History, 

New York, and the U.S. National Park Service supported initial aspects of 

this investigation. The financial support granted and contracted through 

these agencies is gratefully acknowledged. 

248

vii 

I also express gratitude to the Staff of the Cordova Work Center, 

U.S. Forest Service, in particular to Mr. Richard Groff, Mrs. Linda Plant, 

Mr. Ben Ames, Mr. Tim Moerlin, Mr. Joel Schilmoeller, Mr. Mike Lettis and 

to Mr. Bob Bromley of the University of Alaska for their field time, 

logistical support, and cooperation. Dr. George Watson and Dr. Storrs Olsen 

of the Smithsonian Institution provided assistance with specimens and 

literature. Mr. Alex Brogle, Dr. Don McKnight and Mr. Loyal Johnson of 

Alaska Department of Fish and Game suggested areas for us to investigate. 

I wish to thank Mr. and Mrs. Jerry and Ina Thorne of Cordova for their 

special kindness, hospitality, and good advice, which was most welcome. 

To my wife, Renee, I extend my deepest thanks and appreciation, for 

her skilled graphics, her assistance in the field under very rigorous 

conditions, and for her help in preparation of this report. 

249 

Samuel M. Patten, Jr. 

M.Sci.

INTRODUCTION 

The Larinae (gulls) have a world-wide distribution with 42 species. 

Gulls as a group may have evolved in the North Pacific and North Atlantic 

(Fisher and Lockley, 1954). Sixteen species of gulls are found in the 

North Pacific (Vermeer, 1970). Birds of this sub-family have been considered 

chiefly inshore feeders, and most coasts support a smaller scavenging species 

and a larger more piratical type (Cody, 1973). Recent evidence indicates 

that large as well as small gulls can behave as essentially marine species, 

feeding far out at sea and coming to land only occasionally or to breed 

(Lensink, pers. comm.). Most gulls live in flocks; they forage together 

in characteristic patterns the year around and nest in colonies during the 

breeding season (Tinbergen, 1960). These gregarious birds nest in a wide 

variety of habitats ranging from vertical cliffs to open marshes (Smith, 

196 6 a). Gulls lend themselves to population analysis, especially productivity, 

because of their colonial breeding tendency (Kadlec and Drury, 1968). 

An important reason for studying gulls is their use as indicators of 

the health of the environment (Vermeer, 1970). Chemical pollution of the 

environment poses an increasing and immediate threat to all organisms, 

including man. A recent survey conducted by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife 

Service (Ohlendorff, pers. comm.) of chemical residues in marine avifauna 

showed gulls to be among the most contaminated birds examined., probably due 

to their feeding habits. Since gulls nest in colonies, changes in breeding 

populations can be monitored and related to environmental conditions, among 

which are industrial development and the concurrent changes in food supply. 

An additional reason for studying gulls is that the age structure, 

mortality rate, life expectancy and survival rates of gull populations aid 

in the general understanding of population mechanisms. The mere knowledge 

250

2 

of the size of a population from year to year indicates little about 

population problems without such data (Paynter, 1949). 

The size, age structure, growth or decline of a population are a 

result of fluctuations in time and space of the natality and mortality 

rate, and movement into or out of a population of a species. Breeding 

adults form the base of the population structure, because only by successful 

production of young can a population grow or maintain itself (Kadlec and 

Drury, 1968). 

Reproductive rate has an important effect on the age structure and 

the growth of the population. The average number of young which a breeding 

pair can raise to fledging is a good measure of gull reproductive success. 

Meadow-nesting gulls are excellent subjects for a study of reproductive 

success because eggs and young are readily accessible. Information is 

available on the breeding biology and dynamics of gulls near large urban 

centers, or in recent post-glacial environments, but comparative base-line 

information on gulls along the southern coastline of Alaska prior to the 

development of oil resources is completely lacking. 

This report presents the initial results of an ongoing study of 

meadow-nesting gulls in widely-spread colonies in the northeast Gulf of 

Alaska. These sites were selected for research because of the incipient 

development of oil resources in the vicinity, and the necessity to provide 

base-line information on marine birds along this relatively wild stretch 

of Alaskan coastline. The overall objectives of the study are to gain 

information on distribution, behavior, population dynamics, trophic 

relationships, and pathologies of the Gulf of Alaska Herring Gull group 

(Larus argentatus x Larus glaucescens). To assemble this information,we 

studied: colony sites, feeding areas, behavior of adults and chicks, aspects 

251

3 

of breeding biology, calculated hatching and fledging success, and compared 

the data to knowledge of other Alaskan gull populations previously studied. 

We banded a large number of gulls, and color-marked, collected and removed 

blood samples from a smaller number of individuals. We carried out a 

concentrated investigation of the breeding biology of Larus glaucescens on 

Egg Island, at the mouth of the Copper River, Chugach National Forest, 

near Cordova, Alaska. Additional time was spent examing a mixed colony 

of Larus argentatus and Larus glaucescens at Dry Bay, mouth of the Alsek 

River, Tongass National Forest, near Yakutat, Alaska. Information previously 

gathered on a Larus glaucescens colony on Haenke Island at Disenchantment 

Bay (off Yakutat Bay), and from North Marble Island, south of the study 

area,is included in this report for comparative purposes (Figure 1). 

The Glaucous-winged Gull (L. glaucescens), which breeds along the 

coast from Washington State to the Aleutians, is quite closely related to 

the Herring Gull (L. argentatus), a common and widely distributed species. 

Herring Gulls make up a low proportion of the breeding gulls in the northeast 

Gulf of Alaska, but occur more commonly in winter and offshore. The 

Herring Gull replaces the Glaucous-winged Gull in interior Alaska, British 

Columbia, and the Yukon. The Glaucous-winged Gull is morphologically 

similar to the Herring Gull except that the black pigment on the tips of 

the primaries is replaced by light grey that matches the rest of the 

mantle. Conversely, the iris of the Glaucous-winged Gull is darker than 

that of the Herring Gull. These two gulls are considered separate species 

in the A.O.U. Checklist of North American Birds (1957), but the taxonomic 

and ecological relationships between the two species have not been clearly 

defined. In some areas hybrids are common. 

Information on other species of plants and animals inhabiting the 

252

Figure 1. Map of the Northeast Gulf of Alaska, showing 

knownlarge gull colonies of the Larus argentatus - Larus glaucescens 

species group. (Inset: map of Alaska and northwest Canada showing 

Gulf of Alaska.) 

253

5 

northeast Gulf of Alaska was gathered to support the main objectives of 

this study. This report presents the interim results and partial analysis 

of the data gathered during the 1975 field season, and is supported with 

previously gathered material. 

254

SCOPE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY 

The nature of this study was to examine the reproductive biology 

of several colonies of Herring and Glaucous-winged Gulls in the northeast 

Gulf of Alaska. This report covers information from the 1975 and previous 

field seasons. Several aspects of gull breeding biology were studied for 

comparative purposes. Such information is available in the literature for 

gull populations outside of Alaska and from Glacier Bay National Monument 

south of the study area. This comparison serves as a basis from which to 

draw some tentative conclusions. Definitive statements require further 

investigation. An important aspect of this report is the initial data on 

fledging success. As can be seen from a literature review, fledging success 

can serve as an index to the dynamics of an avian population. If fledging 

success is poor over a number of seasons, a population will decline through 

adult mortality and low recruitment of breeding adults. While this report 

presents 1975 fledging success from the largest gull colony in the northeast 

Gulf of Alaska, it is emphasized that no firm conclusions should be drawn 

regarding the state of this population without further study. 

Results from this report provide the National Oceanic and Atmospheric 

Administration with specific information about the status of a marine- 

oriented animal population during one field season. More broadly, this 

report indicates additional areas to be investigated for a better understanding 

of an Alaskan marine bird species under environmental conditions certain 

to change with increasing human activity. 

255

THE STUDY AREA 

The largest and probably most important gull colonies in the northeast 

Gulf of Alaska are located on sandbar islands off the Copper River delta. 

For millenia Copper River has flowed from interior Alaska through the 

Chugach Mountains (2000-3000 m) to the Pacific Ocean. The river carries a 

naturally heavy burden of silt, mud and gravels from montaine erosion and 

the heavy, ongoing glaciation of the higher peaks. This massive river 

system flows into the Gulf of Alaska south of Cordova, Alaska, and carries 

Gletschermilch, mud and gravel of the Scott, Sheridan and Sherman glaciers 

and other ice systems (USFS, 1975) (Figure 2). 

The Copper and the confluent Martin River have deposited their sands 

and mud where they meet the sea. With the increasing salinity gradient 

the suspended inorganic matter precipitates out. A large, 50 kilometer- 

wide delta has been formed over the centuries. The rivers move across the 

delta, crossing tidal mudflats and passing through brackish sloughs. 

Shallow ponds are formed in sedgy or grassy marshes. Summers in the Copper 

Delta region tend to be cool and rainy, while winters bring extremely strong 

storms, intense cold, ice and interior winds which blow with incredible 

velocity. 

The Copper River Delta has been one of the most productive and important 

migrating and breeding grounds for waterfowl on the North American continent 

(USFS, 1975). Millions of birds pass through the area in spring and fall, 

and tens of thousands of ducks, geese and swans remain to breed. Brown 

bears and moose roam the delta, while black bears, lynx, wolf, coyote, 

black-tailed deer and wolverine are found in forested areas of the delta 

nearer the mountains. Another indicator of the importance and productivity of 

the Copper River Delta is the sizable fishery on the "Copper Flats" for 

king, sockeye, and silver salmon. The king and sockeye salmon migrate up 

256

Figure 2. Map of the Copper River Delta region and 

Prince William Sound, showing location of Cordova, the Copper River, 

Egg Island (arrow), Copper Sands, and Strawberry Reef. 

257

9 

the Copper River into the interior to spawn, while the silver salmon breed 

in the smaller streams and tributaries of the delta. A Herring fishery is 

important and increasing in size in the Cordova-Copper River, Prince 

William Sound area. It is inevitable that this concentration of food 

resources should attract fish-eating birds such as eagles and gulls. 

A series of low sandbar-dune islands located a few kilometers offshore, 

form a partial barrier at the mouth of the Copper River. Geologically these 

islands appear to have been entirely formed by the deposition of sand and 

mud from the Copper River, and to have been shaped by the counter-clockwise 

onshore currents of the Pacific Ocean. 

Constant change is a characteristic of the interface between land 

and sea, especially where rivers enter the ocean. Sandy islands are formed, 

built up, and eroded away again in a relatively slow, uninterrupted process. 

However, the Copper River Delta and surrounding area have been marked by 

sudden geological changes that have been extremely important in affecting 

the local biota. The most severe earthquake recorded on the North American 

continent during modern times occurred in March of 1964. The whole Copper 

River delta and surroundings including offshore islands, were uplifted an 

average of two meters in a series of severe shock waves(USFS, 1975). This 

abrupt uplift disrupted the complex ecosystem of the Copper Delta and altered 

the balance between fresh and salt water. Nutrient imput from salt water 

to the delta was appreciably diminished; several species of intertidal 

invertebrates declined in numbers, and nesting populations of ducks changed 

much for the worse. Willows and alder began to replace grassy and sedgy 

marshes in certain areas on the delta. Tidal sloughs dried out. 

The offshore sandbar barrier islands at the mouth of the Copper River 

underwent the same geological forces as the delta itself, but due to the 

258

10 

nature of the islands and the marine bird species using them, the resulting 

changes were quite different. Shallow salt-water channels separating islets 

were eliminated, and new ridges of sand dunes formed, joining islets together. 

The actual land area of the islands increased due to the uplift. Because 

fresh water was limited on the islands before the earthquake, the small 

breeding populations of waterfowl were not affected to the degree on the 

Delta itself. The gulls, the largest breeding bird population on the outer 

islands, were influenced in the following manner. The long lines of dunes 

increased in height and area. Plant succession began on newly formed dunes, 

with Elymus, the beach rye, forming scattered tufts on the sandy surface. 

The beach rye spread.from the older high dunes which were covered with 

grassy meadows, in which Elymus was the dominant plant species. A variety 

of other lesser grasses, mosses and forbs also occurred. Large colonies of 

gulls nest on these meadow-covered dunes. With the passage of time, more 

and more dunes become covered with meadows as succession continues. The 

actual area upon which gulls can nest is increasing. A few young alder and 

cottonwood trees are growing on the higher dunes of Egg Island. If this 

trend towards woody vegetation continues, in time the result could be 

displacement of nesting gull populations. The presence of important seafood 

packing canneries in Cordova is providing an increasing food supply for gulls, 

and the potential for discarded human food and industrial waste in the 

Cordova area increases .daily. Islieb (pers. comm.) sees an increasing gull 

population to this point. Additional factors now enter the picture(of 

unknown consequence). The trans-Alaska pipeline is being constructed from 

Prudhoe Bay on the North Slope to Valdez on Prince William Sound on the 

south. Valdez is less than 150 kilometers northwest of the delta. Tanker 

traffic will pass just offshore from the barrier islands through the entrance 

259

11 

to Prince William Sound. The Copper River Delta itself is rich in both 

mineral and fossil resources. The first oil well in Alaska was developed 

just south of the delta at Katalla in 1901 (USFS, 1975). A consortium of 

oil companies is presently involved in exploratory research offshore. The 

first oil leasing is expected in December 1975. The following report 

should be understood as the initial attempt to analyze and predict some 

of the vector forces acting to change gull populations in the NEGOA. 

260

MATERIALS AND METHODS 

Colony Selection and Investigation Dates 

We selected Egg Island as a principal location for this study because 

it has the largest meadow-nesting gull population in the northeast Gulf 

of Alaska. Kenton Wohl of the Bureau of Land Mangement, Dr. Pete Michelson, 

then of the Forest Service, and Pete Islieb of Cordova emphasized the importance 

of this colony to our study. The 1975 field season began on 16 June and 

continued through August 23. We selected a survey area southwest of Egg 

Island light, and spent considerable time on foot examining the rest of the 

island colony. There were 153 nests in the study area, which was fairly 

representative of conditions on the island. This study area is located on 

the windward, ocean slope of stabilized meadow-covered dunes of the east 

end of the island near the light tower. Egg Island Light is readily identified 

on nautical charts, and can be visually observed from some distance (Figure 2, 12). 

We initially hoped for a survey area of about 100 nests in this facet 

of the study. We measured a 150m x 150m square with a tape, flagged the 

corners with survey markers, and counted nests a sequence of slow sweeps. 

Our final nest count considerably exceeded our original estimation, a fact 

to be remembered in future surveys. (Figures 12, 13). 

Kadlec and Drury (1968) observed that a high level of disturbance will 

cause Herring Gulls to abandon efforts to breed. Coulter et al (1971) 

found reproductive success in a colony of Western Gulls to be inversely 

proportional to the amount of disturbance. Therefore we did not enter the 

survey colonies except when absolutely necessary. 

261

Reproductive Cycle 

13 

We used a method devised in previous gull studies to mark the nests 

we were studying. We marked 153 gull nests with flagged wire stakes in 

2 

the 22500 m study area at the beginning of the investigation on Egg Island. 

Since growth of vegetation tends to obscure the stakes, each was marked 

with a additional numbered florescent streamer. The same method was used 

to mark 100 nests at Dry Bay, another study area south of Yakutat. Using 

the measure of territory defined by Harpur (1971) we used a steel tape to 

find the direct distance from every nest to the center of the nearest 

neighboring nest; one half this distance was assumed to be the radius of the 

territory. Nest diameter and depth were measured in Dry Bay and on Egg 

Island for comparative purposes. 

Each time we visited a nest site we recorded the number of eggs or chicks. 

The highest number of eggs per nest was assumed to be the clutch size. Due 

to the short notice under which the investigation was begun, completed clutch 

size figures are lacking. Original clutch sizes were extrapolated from 

typical rates of egg loss from data gathered in our previous Alaskan studies. 

Egg loss was calculated at the end of the incubation period from the numbers 

of eggs remaining from the (calculated) completed clutch. We counted young 

chicks on Egg Island in the nest. We assumed older chicks to come from the 

nearest nest; such older chicks were banded with 657 series tall tarsal bands 

and released. At the end of the survey period in August, we made fledging 

counts of banded chicks for the entire survey area on Egg Island. The 

results were compared to North Marble Island and to other gull studies. 

Data Analysis 

As part of each sequential visit through the gull colonies we recorded 

262

14 

the number of eggs and chicks from each nest site visited. The numbers 

were recorded on 80-column entry, and used to compute clutch size, egg 

loss, hatching success and fledging success. 

A Monroe 1766 programmable desk-top calculator was used for the initial 

statistical analysis. Means and standard deviations are included in the 

data where applicable. 

Raw data on 80-column entry was filed with Mr. Mauri Pelto (NOAA-OCSEP) 

in Juneau, Alaska, for later retrieval. 

Specimens 

We collected specimens from Egg Island, Haenke Island, and Dry Bay. 

Thirty-two Egg Island specimens were collected in July and August 1975. 

Ten Haenke Island specimens were collected in June 1974, and twenty-eight 

Dry Bay specimens were collected in June 1974 and 1975. Three Egg Island 

specimens were placed in the charge of Dr. David Norton, OCS Arctic Project 

Officer, for potential petrochemical assay. The other specimens are 

maintained in the Department of Pathobiology, The Johns Hopkins University, 

since analysis is presently only partially complete. At the close of this 

study, the specimens will be maintained in the U.S. National Museum and the 

American Museum of Natural History. Two hundred and fifty gull blood 

samples from chicks and adults were collected. Serum was collected from 

the samples with a centrifuge courtesy of Alaska Public Health Laboratories. 

Analysis of these sera is not yet finished. 

RESULTS 

General Timing of the Reproductive Cycle 

Exactly when gulls first arrive on Egg Island in the spring is not 

known, although Michelson (pers. comm.) reports seeing gulls on their nesting 

areas in May. Arrival dates may vary from year to year by several weeks 

263

15 

due to weather conditions and snow cover. Gulls are present in the Cordova 

area through the winter, but nesting populations do not settle down in their 

colonies until snow melts (Islieb, pers. comm.). Streveler (pers. comm.) 

reports similar observations from Glacier Bay (Figure 3). 

Incubation was well advanced at the time of our arrival on Egg Island 

in the middle of June 1975. The first chicks hatched around the middle 

of June, and most chicks hatched the last week of June. This year the peak 

time of fledging on Egg Island was the beginning of August. At Dry Bay, 

the general timing of the reproductive cycle was two weeks delayed from 

that of Egg Island, since the first eggs were pipping at the end of June. 

Brogle (pers. comm.) reported heavy snow fall and a late spring for the 

Yakutat area this year, perhaps accounting for the late nesting gulls. 

Extrapolating from the hatching dates, and assuming an incubation of 24-26 

days, as has been reported by Patten (1974) for Glaucous-winged Gulls in 

Glacier Bay, Alaska, most egg laying took place in the last week of May 1975 

on Egg Island. Gulls at Dry Bay laid most of their eggs in the first week 

of June. 

Other investigators have reported the following: Western Gulls in 

southern California usually lay eggs at the end of the first week in May 

(Schreiber, 1970; Harpur, 1971). Herring Gulls in Rhode Island and Michigan, 

and Lancashire, England, have mean egg-laying dates usually around the end 

of the first week in May (Erwin, 1971, Keith, 1966; Brown, 1967a). Herring 

Gulls breeding on Kent Island, New Brunswick, Canada, have mean egg dates in 

the middle of May (Paynter, 1949). Glaucous-winged Gulls on Mandarte Island 

B.C., Canada, lay most of their eggs in the last week of May and the first 

weeks of June (Vermeer, 1963). Patten (1974) has reported egg dates of mid 

to late May in Glacier Bay. While egg-dates vary by several weeks in the 

264

Figure 3. Glacier Bay National Monument (58° 10' - 59° 15' N. Latitude, 

135° 10' - 138° 10' W. Longitude), located north of southeastern 

Alaska's Alexander Archipelago, is shaped as a 

parallelogram, with 104 and 120 km on a side.

17 

northeast Gulf of Alaska, the general timing of the reproductive cycle most 

resembles that reported by Vermeer (1963) on Mandarte Island, B.C., and by 

Patten (1974) on North Marble Island, Glacier Bay, Alaska (Figure 4). 

Territory Size 

The definition of territory, as Hinde (1956) states, is "any defended 

area". Even if this definition does not necessarily imply that the defended 

area is sharply delimited, in practice many workers on territory (references 

in Hinde, 1956) imply the existence of such borders by measuring territory 

size. Using the measure of territory defined by Harpur (1971) we calculated 

the area of each nesting territory as a circle with a radius half the distance 

to the nearest active nest. We found the mean territory size on Egg Island 

was 28.9 m2, while the Dry Bay mean territory size was 29.8 m2. Mean distance 

to nearest neighbor at Egg Island was 6.066 m , while at Dry Bay the 

distance was 6.16 m. This suggests that there was no significant difference 

in the territory sizes in two widely spread colonies in the northeast Gulf 

of Alaska in the 1975 breeding season. Patten (1974) has previously 

reported a mean territory size of about 18 m2 for gulls in two different 

seasons on North Marble Island, but that territory size varied from colony 

to colony and from year to year. In comparison, Vermeer (1963) found 

Glaucous-winged Gulls on Mandarte Island to have a mean territory size of 

2 

15.6 m . Harpur (1971) studying a small colony of Western Gulls near 

2 

Santa Catalina Island, California, reported a small colony had a mean 22.0 m 

territory size. 

Patten (1974) has previously reported an inverse relationship between 

colony and territory size on North Marble Island in Glacier Bay. The 

inverse relationship could be due to the two kinds of predation pressure 

on gulls. Larger colonies of gulls, with smaller territories, have the 

266

Figure 4. North Marble Island lies in the middle of Glacier Bay and 

contains large marine bird nesting areas. North and South 

Marble Islands, 2 km apart, are surrounded by cold, highly 

oxygenated waters and strong tidal currents. 

267

advantage of behavioral mechanisms such as flight response to alarm calls 

and mass attack on predators (Kruuk, 1964), but large colonies suffer 

more internal cannibalization of eggs and chicks. Smaller gull colonies, 

with larger territories, have weaker defenses, more predation, and less 

cannibalism (Darling, 1938; Brown, 1967b). Selection may operate for a 

range of values around the optimum, and against both ends of the.spectrum, 

although there are presumably more advantages to nesting closer together. 

In the field, this means one could expect gulls with very large territories 

or very small territories to produce fewer young over a long period of 

time. Since both Egg Island and Dry Bay survey areas contained 100 or more 

nest sites, it is not especially surprising that the mean territory sizes 

were quite similar; what is notable is the large territory size. This 

suggests the gull populations are not yet limited by the available nesting 

territory on their breeding islands. With increasing food supply, it is 

not unreasonable to expect,increasing gull populations. 

Table 1 

CLUTCH SIZE, NUMBER OF FLEDGLINGS, & TERRITORY SIZE 

IN ALASKA L. argentatus & glaucescens 

268

20 

The mechanism for establishing territory size is defensive behavior, 

according to Patterson (1956). The way in which this mechanism could 

produce dispersion of individuals or pairs has been discussed by Tinbergen 

(1957). He emphasizes that both attack and avoidance are involved in the 

maintenance of the territoral system. Both motivations are present in the 

threat displays of the territory owner and conspecific intruders almost always 

respond to these displays and to actual attack by fleeing. Degree of spacing 

between nests and territorial individuals will then depend upon the balance 

of attack and escape motivations in the established residents and intruding 

birds. 

Two possible functions of the territorial system are; assistance to 

survival of adults, or insurance of their maximum reproductive success, or 

a compromise between the two functions. Data on mortality agents suggests 

that egg and chick predation was by far the most important cause of reproductive 

failure (Table 4 ). The most serious predation was gulls consuming eggs and 

chicks of their own species (see below); secondary in importance was crows, 

ravens, jaegers, and probably eagles (Vermeer, 1963) taking gull eggs and 

(1938) 

chicks. Darling,suggested that the much larger territory sizes of the Lesser 

Black-backed Gull allow a higher overall reproductive rate than the Herring 

Gull. Large territories permit chicks to wander over a larger area before 

they stray into another parent's nesting region and are attacked. He also 

observed, however, that the young in large colonies has better survival than 

those in smaller colonies. He presumed this to be due to the greater degree 

of synchronization in large colonies leading to a smaller percentage of chicks 

or eggs taken by predators in any one period. However, Coulson and White (1958) 

challenged this conclusion by reporting the spread of Kittiwake breeding 

was greatest in larger colonies, with older birds laying sooner than young 

269

21 

adults. Our evidence from Egg Island, a large colony, indicates a 

wider spread of breeding and a lower fledging success than North Marble 

Island, a much smaller colony under post-glacial conditions. 

Another function of territory may be the spacing apart of nests. 

Tinbergen (1956) has stressed the importance of dispersion in cryptic prey 

in order to minimize the formation of search images in their predators. It 

would seem advantageous to have gull eggs and young spaced apart to some 

extent since they are cryptically colored. The arguments of spacing out 

as one of the main functions of territory have been summarized in the review 

by Hinde (1956) and by Tinbergen (1957). However, the upper limit of 

territory size would be influenced by the need for colonial nesting 

discussed above, and the lower limit influenced by the possibility of in- 

creasing intraspecific predation (see below). In addition, the spacing apart 

of nests in a gull colony is adaptive mainly against bird predators, normally 

the most important for gulls, which tend to nest on islands or cliffs (Patterson, 

1956). 

The most obvious factor in dense breeding populations of meadow-nesting 

gulls is that smaller territories increase the chances that wandering chicks 

will be attacked (see Ashmole,1963 for a similar argument concerning terns). 

Hunt and McLoon have recently (1975) argued that decline in food availability 

will lessen the ability of adult gulls to provide their chicks with food. 

When the begging chicks fail to receive food, their increased activity 

(wandering) will increase their chances of being killed by territorial 

neighboring gulls. This in turn suggest food as the ultimate limiting factor. 

If this sort of internal predation is combined with Darling's hypothetical 

effect of breeding synchrony, then there would be an optimum density for 

-breeding. Whether gulls have reached this density in the northeast Gulf of 

270

22 

Alaska is not yet clear. Evidence indicates sufficient room for larger 

breeding populations on nesting islands. 

Nesting Activities 

Thousands of gulls on Egg Island nest on stabilized meadow-covered (Fig.6,8,10) 

dunes, usually in proximity to some additional cover of old drift logs or 

Sambucus bushes. Slope of the dunes is shallow, since the highest are only 

ten meters above sea level. Egg Island can be compared to North Marble, 

where highest densities of nesting gulls are found on completely open meadows. 

However, some sites on North Marble are precipitous, approaching 50 percent 

slope. Gulls tend to select breeding habitat where approaching predators can 

be easily detected. Gulls were not observed nesting in brush fringes on 

North Marble,but gull nests have been observed directly beneath bushes on 

Egg Island. Brush-nesting gulls have been previously reported by Vermeer 

(1963) for Mandarte Island, and Manuwal (pers. comm.) in the San Juan Islands, 

Washington State. 

Dry Bay provides somewhat different conditions. About 500 gull pairs nest(Fig,5) 

on gravel bars at the mouth of the Alsek River. The low gravel islands there(Fig.9) 

are washed by high waters during spring melt-off and following summer storms. 

Vegetation as a consequence of unstabilized substrate plus flooding is sparse 

and consists of mainly Salix, spp., Festuca, Achillea, Elymus and Epilobium, 

which would indicate a combined maritime and fresh-water influence. Vegetation 

cover is important, since nests are clumped near drift logs, willow bushes, 

and grass patches. Fewer nests are located on exposed gravel. Nests are 

similar to those on Egg Island, although nest cups are more shallow, perhaps 

due to the lack of slope on the island and the lack of suitable vegetation. 

Some nests are hardly more than a depression in the sand with a few dry 

strands of Elymus around the edge. 

271

Figure 5. Map of the Yakutat area, showing location of gull colonies 

at Dry Bay, mouth of the Alsek River (lower arrow) and Haenke Island in 

Disenchantment Bay (upper arrow).

24 

Gravel beds where no gulls nest separate parts of the island colony 

at Dry Bay. The reason for this distribution became evident when a strong 

summer storm followed days of brilliant sun. Apparently glaciers meltedsomewhat in 

the mountains. When the melt-waters combined with the heavy rainfall, the 

river rose, filled the gravel beds, sectioned off parts of the gull island 

and the entire area. Gulls on the gravel beds or on the periphery of the 

island must find their nests washed away under these conditions (Figure 9). 

Glaucous-winged and Herring Gulls nest together at Dry Bay. These gulls 

are flexible in nesting habitat selection (Patten and Weisbrod, 1974; Patten, 

1974). Western and Glaucous-winged Gulls also nest in a variety of habitats 

(Vermeer, 1963; Coulter, et al 1971). Nesting habitat selection apparently 

does not serve as an isolating mechanism between these species. 

About 200 pairs of Glaucous-winged Gulls nest at Haenke Island off (Fig.5 7) 

Yakutat Bay. Haenke Island is about 1 km wide and 1 km across. The east 

side of the island, facing the Hubbard Glacier, gradually inclines up to a 

large 150-200 m westward facing cliff, which then slopes precipitously down 

a series of shallow terraces bordered by vertical cracks. Vegetation on 

the terraces is composed of alders and meadows. Sambucus and Ribes bushes 

border grass and forb meadows on the face. The dominant grass in the nesting 

areas was Hordeum sp. Mosses, fireweed and forbs made up the steeply sloping 

meadows where gulls did not nest. Glaucous-winged Gulls breed on the meadow- 

covered terraces. Gull nests in 1974 were widely spaced, approximately 20 

meters apart on the average. We observed many "false" nests. The Glaucous- 

winged Gulls did not nest close to the water; the closest nest was about 25 m 

above the high tide mark. 

Gulls in all colonies studied in southcentral and southeastern Alaska 

built nests of material available in the immediate vicinity of the nest site, 

273

Figure 6. View from Egg Island, June 1975, 

showing Elymus meadows, Egg Island Channel, part of the 

Copper River Delta, and the Chugach Mountains. 

Figure 7. Haenke Island (center) is located 

in Disenchantment Bay, off Yakutat Bay, near the active 

front of the Hubbard Glacier at the foot of the St. Elias Range. 

274

Figure 8. Egg Island viewed from a small aircraft 

at 100 m, showing hundreds of gulls flying over meadowcovered 

dunes with scattered old drift logs providing 

partial cover for nests. 

Figure 9. Dry Bay from a small aircraft at 200 m + 

elevation showing gull colony (center) on low gravel bars 

with sparse vegetation. 

275

27 

that is, usually within the territory. Colonies located on different 

vegetation substrate show the corresponding structural material in the 

nests. Thus, the predominant nest material on Egg Island is Elymus and (Fig. 10) 

mosses, on Haenke Island most material is Hordeum, Epilobium and mosses (Fig. 11); 

at Dry Bay Salix twigs, Epilobium and detritus, and on North Marble Hordeum, 

Festuca, Epilobium, Elymus and mosses depending upon colony location. Similar 

use of vegetation close to the nest site has been reported by Harpur (1971) 

and Strang (1973). 

We measured 100 nests at Egg Island and 100 nests at Dry Bay for 

comparative purposes, the dimensions of which are presented along with 

North Marble data in Tables 2 and 3. The inner (nest cup) diameters along 

two perpendicular axes had respective means of 19.63 cm and 19.91 cm at Egg 

Island, and 19.92 cm and 20.06 cm at Dry Bay. The outer nest diameters along 

two perpendicular axes had respective means of 39.75 cm and 39.11 cm at Egg 

Island, while at Dry Bay the respective dimensions were 40.16 cm and 39.42 cm. 

(Table 2). Note that the standard deviations indicate that the nest cup 

dimensions, or inner diameters, are less variable than the outer nest dimensions 

(Table 2). This is due to the method of nest construction, in which the gull 

turns its body to form the more rounded uniform interior of the nest. Mean 

nest cup depth was 6.98 cm at Egg Island, while Dry Bay mean nest cup depth was 

5.94 cm (Table 3). Egg Island nests tended to be deeper and more built up than those 

at Dry Bay. Note that nest cup dimension at North Marble was appreciably 

deeper than either Egg Island or Dry Bay, probably due to the large amounts 

of vegetation available on North Marble and possibly related to the greater 

slope. The nest dimensions given here resemble those of other large white- 

headed gulls (Patten, 1974). 

Vermeer (1963) stated that either male or female Glaucous-winged Gulls 

276

Figure 10. Campsite on Egg Island, June 1975 

with Egg Island Channel and the Chugach Range in the background. 

Figure 11. Campsite on Haekne Island, June 1974, 

at the foot of the gull colony on the cliff (not visible). 

Pack ice from the Hubbard Glacier in the background. 

Gulls feed on seal placentae scavenged on the ice. 

277

29 

may initiate nest building. After the beginning of nest construction, 

apparently both sexes share equally in building, in contrast to Herring 

Gull males, which collect more material than females (Tinbergen, 1960; 

Goethe, 1937). Nests are maintained until chicks hatch, after which the 

nests begin to disintegrate and rarely survive the winter storms. 

We observed the construction of "false" or "play" nests at Egg Island, 

Haenke Island, Dry Bay and North Marble, as did Goethe (1937), Paynter (1949), 

and Tinbergen (1960) elsewhere. Construction of "false" nests may relate 

to the amount of available vegetation. Supernumerary nests may prevent the 

formation of search images in predators (Tinbergen, 1960). Reasons otherwise for 

the construction of supernumerary nests are not apparent. False nests 

may simply result from the release of the nest-building drive (Nisttrieb), 

but the effect can be the utilization of a large amount of vegetation. A 

colony of 500 gull pairs on North Marble removes about a metric ton of 

vegetation in one season. Added to the effects of trampling, fertilizing 

and physical damage done to the meadows during spring and summer, the total 

gull activity may act to retard herbaceous succession in the meadows in which 

they nest. Tree reproduction, however, around the edges of the meadows in 

gull colonies may eventually displace the gulls. For a discussion see Patten 

(1974). (See Figures 12, 13.) 

278

Table 2 

Inner and Outer Diameter of Larus argentatus - Larus 

Glaucescens Gull Nests at Egg Island, Dry Bay and 

North Marble Island, Alaska 

279

Egg Laying 

Table 3 

Nest Depth for Egg Island, Dry Bay and 

North Marble Island Colonies 

The gulls on North Marble begin to lay eggs in mid to late May (Patten, 

1974). A remarkable degree of synchronization was apparent when comparing 

percentages of eggs found on sequential dates of observation through the 

nesting period. Egg-laying on North Marble both years was very closely 

synchronized in all colonies, although peak egg-laying was two weeks earlier 

in 1973 than 1972. Darling (1938), Coulson and White (1956), Coulter, et al 

(1971) and Brown (1966b) have reported synchronous egg-laying in gulls. 

There is considerable debate, however, about the relation of colony size 

and density to egg-laying synchrony (see above). 

The northeast Gulf of Alaska gull study was not funded early enough 

this year to provide sufficient data on egg laying synchrony. However, 

evidence suggests a wide spread of egg dates on Egg Island. This may be 

due to the amount of egg predation from the large numbers of other gulls 

and consequent re-nesting. Smaller colonies at Haenke Island and Dry Bay 

may show less spread of egg dates, although evidence is currently incomplete. 

280

Figure 12. Study area southwest of Egg Island 

Light, showing gulls on territories and nest survey markers, 

June 1975. 

Figure 13. Survey Area, Egg Island, West View, 

June 1975. 

281

33 

Egg synchrony will be investigated further; we include a general discussion 

here. 

Both colonial nesting and synchronization of egg-laying have an 

anti-predator function. The mechanisms through which these two phenomena 

reduce predation on the population have been discussed by Darling (1938) 

and Kruuk (1964). They suggest that the concentration of gull reproduction 

into the shortest possible time will reduce egg and chick losses since the 

number of predators is limited by the amount of food available.during 

the rest of the year, and by intra-specific aggression. Brown (1967b) 

suggests a possible mechanism for synchronous laying. He suggests that 

"social attraction" in gull colonies functions beyond colonial defense, and 

that this function increases efficiency. Brown (1967b) postulates that 

in gulls copulation may be the key factor stimulating ovulation, and that 

copulation by one pair stimulates others to do the same. Judging from 

Coulson and White's (1960) records on the effect of density on breeding in 

the Kittiwake, the result would probably be a local synchrony, rather than the 

colony-wide one suggested by Darling (1938); presumably the birds in the 

denser areas would be the first to breed. Either way, their breeding is 

likely to be more efficient than birds in less dense areas or colonies. The 

evidence from North Marble (Patten, 1974) indicates not only a colony-wide 

synchrony, but a synchronous egg-laying in four partially contingent colonies. 

This in turn suggests that the gulls on North Marble are acting as one 

large colony. It should be pointed out that North Marble contains about 

500 breeding pairs of gulls. Egg Island pairs vastly outnumber this figure. 

Incubation in Alaskan Glaucous-winged Gulls does not begin until after 

the clutch of three is completed, usually about a week after the first 

S egg is laid (Patten, 1974). On North Marble the onset of incubation was 

282

34 

quite synchronized, and began immediately after the peak egg-laying week. 

This meant that gull eggs are subjected to ambient temperatures for a week. 

Gull eggs, however, apparently tolerate temperature fluctuations, even after 

incubation commences (Baerends, 1959; Vermeer, 1963). Gull eggs were left 

uncovered during the time we examined the survey area on Egg Island, about 

once every three days. Weather ranged from cold drizzle to brilliant (Fig.10) 

sunshine. We found no adverse affect on eggs hatching resulting from 

interrupted incubation due to our presence. Vermeer (1963) found gull 

eggs to be resistant to nocturnal exposure in a series of experiments. He 

found no adverse effect on hatching and fledging rate in an experiment 

which involved preventing gulls from incubating during the night. 

Clutch Size 

A total of 339 eggs was found in the 153 nests under study on Egg 

Island within the observation period of 16 June to 18 August. At Dry Bay, 

237 eggs were found in the 100 nests examined in late June. These are not 

completed clutch size figures. In both colonies the modal number of eggs 

per clutch was three. At Egg Island, the mean was 2.2 per clutch on 17 June, 

and at Dry Bay the mean was 2.37 on 28 June. Both dates are late in the 

incubation period. The clutch size data are within the range of other studies 

of Glaucous-winged, Herring and Western Gulls in North America and Europe 

(reference in Patten, 1974). Patten (1974) has previously reported a mean 

clutch size at the beginning of the incubation for Alaskan Glaucous-winged 

Gulls of 2.9. This leads to the question: "Why do Alaskan gulls lay this 

number of eggs rather than fewer or more?". As Lack (1968) has stated, the 

factor limiting clutch size is not the number of eggs a bird is potentially 

capable of laying and incubating, but rather the number of young a pair 

ofbirds is able to rear to fledging age with success. The upper and lower 

283

35 

limits of clutch size have been determined by natural selection which 

acts through several channels. The lower limit of clutch size in gulls 

has been influenced by predation, and the upper limit presumably through 

the inability to feed young in abnormal years, although gulls in the 

Larus argentatus group have only three brood patches. Harpur (1971) has 

previously reported no gulls were successful in experiments involving the 

ability to brood clutches larger than three. We report, however, two (Fig. 17) 

supernormal clutches of four eggs each on Egg Island this season. Sample 

size was 750 nests observed. At least one of these clutches hatched 

normally, producing 4 chicks of normal weight (Table 6). Such an occurrence 

is quite rare, and has not been previously reported for Alaska. No clutchss 

larger than three were observed in Glacier Bay; sample size was 500 nests. 

Hunt and Hunt (1973) have reported supernormal clutches in Western Gulls 

in southern California (see below); currently Pierotti (pers. comm.) is 

investigating the possibility that supernormal clutches are the result of 

female-female pairs (fertilized by males otherwise paired). The presence 

of supernormal clutches in the study area requires additional research. 

The optimum clutch size in Herring, Glaucous-winged and Western Gulls is 

evidently around three but as in other species there is probably some 

variation in the optimum number from locality to locality as well as from 

year to year. 

Among the determinants of clutch size is the age at which birds breed. 

(Paynter, 1949). Coulson and White (1956) have demonstrated that in the 

cliff-nesting Kittiwake (R. tridactyla) the female's age, breeding experience 

and the time of breeding all effect clutch size. There is colonial and 

geographic variation in the percentage of complete clutches, and this has 

284

36 

direct effect on the population reproduction rate. Another agent which 

at times has been suggested as modifying clutch size is the availability 

of food (Paynter, 1949; Ward 1973). While this may be effective in 

species with a more restricted diet than Glaucous-winged or Herring Gulls, 

it seems that judging from the castings on Egg Island, that food is not 

usually scarce. Fish and other animal populations may fluctuate from 

year to year, but gulls feed on so many forms, including human garbage, 

that there is little probability that in any one breeding period all types 

of food would be difficult to find (Paynter, 1949). 

Another factor enters into the discussion of clutch size. Harris 

(1964) in Wales, Keith (1966) in Wisconsin, Kadlec and Drury (1968) in 

Massachusetts, and Vermeer (1963) in British Columbia have independently 

decided that with repeated egg counts the closer the mean clutch approaches 

three. Most single counts will show only 60 to 80 percent three-egg counts, 

because egg loss is widespread, in some cases occurring even during laying, 

and egg-dates of females in the same colony may be spread over several 

weeks, so that there is no one day on which all nests have the full number 

of eggs. Gulls do noti;re-lay unless the completed clutch is destroyed. 

We report the occurrance of "runt" eggs on Egg Island. In the same 

sample of 750 nests examined above, we found four nests with strikingly (Fig. 14,15,16 

subnormal eggs in size and weight (Table 5). These nests contained one 

"runt" egg each, in addition to one or two other "normal" eggs. The "runt" 

eggs were not viable, did not hatch, and contained little tissue or fluids. 

Ohlendorff (pers. comm.) informs us of "runt" eggs in museum collections. 

Female gulls laying for the first time may lay smaller eggs than usual but 

the reasons for the occurrance of "runt" eggs are otherwise obscure and will 

285

e investigated further. 

Egg Loss 

37 

Patten (1974) has previously reported a mean clutch size of 2.9 

for Alaskan Glaucous-winged Gulls. For purposes of demonstration, we 

will assume a mean clutch size of 2.9 at the beginning of the 1975 

incubation period on Egg Island and Dry Bay. One hundred nests examined 

on June 17th at Egg Island contained a mean 2.2 eggs per nest. Hatching 

started within two days. Thus approximately 75 percent of the eggs in 

this smaller survey area were remaining near the end of incubation. 

However, both egg loss and egg-laying continued. At the end of the season, 

our figures indicated we had observed 339 eggs in the enlarged study area 

of 153 nests. Of these 339 eggs, 254 had hatched. Of the remaining 85 

eggs, 9 were apparently infertile or pipped but failed to hatch (see below). 

Therefore, 74 eggs (19 percent) were "lost" from the study area after 

we had seen them. Assuming a completed clutch of 2.9 eggs per nest and 

153 nests, then total eggs laid in the study area amounted to 444. If 

our assumptions hold true, then 105 eggs (24 percent) were lost before 

our arrival on Egg Island. Total egg loss amounted to 179 eggs or nearly 

43 percent in the study area (Table 4). This is an island with 10,000- 

12,000 nesting adult gulls. 

At Dry Bay on June 28th, 100 nests contained a mean 2.37 eggs per 

site. Granted the above assumption of 2.9 eggs per nest at the beginning 

of incubation, the colony at Dry Bay had about 82 percent eggs remaining 

near the end of incubation on an island with about 1,000 adult gulls. 

This would indicate in general about 20-40 percent egg loss to predation 

from other gulls, ravens, crows and jaegers in the northeast Gulf of Alaska. 

286

38 

This roughly follows a normal pattern of 60-80 hatching success reported 

by Kadlec and Drury (1968) for Herring Gulls in New England. 

Hatching failure can be conveniently divided into three classes 

(Paynter, 1949): egg disappearing (lost) from the nests during incubation; 

eggs which remained in the nests but did not hatch (dying); and eggs 

which were pipped but in which the chick died before emerging. Gulls would 

occasionally be seen to swoop down on unguarded nests of their own species 

and eat or carry away eggs. We also saw raven and crows on Egg Island and 

North Marble taking gull eggs. At Dry Bay we observed Parasitic Jaegers 

eating gull eggs. However, in all three places the gulls appear to be the 

more serious predators simply because of their overwhelming numbers. 

The loss of eggs through predation was the principal factor influencing 

hatching and fledging rate on Egg Island in 1975 and in both years on 

North Marble (1972-73) (Table 4,9,10). 

L. argentatus loses eggs most commonly through predation from con- 

specific adults, according to Paynter (1949) and Paludan (1951). This 

is the opposite of which Vermeer (1963) reported for L. glaucescens. 

More eggs in his study failed to hatch than were taken by predators. 

However, Keith (1966) reported that in a population of Lake Michigan 

Herring Gulls, contaminated by DDT, the chief cause of egg mortality was 

embryonic death. Hunt and Hunt (1973) located a colony of Western Gulls 

on Santa Barbara Island, California, in which many clutches containing 

four or five eggs were found. It is particularly interesting that in 

these large clutches not only was hatching success low but also eggshell 

thickness was reduced. The authors suggested that the eggs may have beer 

contaminated with pesticide residues. 

287

Table 4 

Numbers of "Lost", "Infertile" and "Pipped" 

Eggs Which Did Not Hatch in the Study Areas 

on Egg Island, 1975; Dry Bay, 1975 and 

North Marble Island, 1972,1973. 

A very low cause of non-productivity in the 1975 gull breeding season 

on Egg Island was failure to hatch. Incubation and other influences 

seemed normal from gross field examination. Examinations of the few 

decayed eggs did not reveal developed embryos or any specific reason for 

mortality. We have tentatively concluded the eggs were infertile since the 

relative percentage of unhatched eggs was very low, and eggshells showed no 

signs of fragility or pesticide contamination. Ohlendorff (USF&WS Patuxent) 

is currently examining a small sample of eggs from Egg Island for biocide 

residues. A larger sample will be collected for biocide residue analysis 

next year. Paynter (1949) and Brown (1967) have also reported low numbers 

of "infertile" gull eggs in their studies. 

The last cause of failure to hatch occurred when the chick pipped the 

shell but failed to emerge and died. There was only one case of this in 

in the Egg Island study area this year, and only three cases 

288

in the two years of Patten's (1974) previous study. These are insignificant 

figures. 

Pigmentation of eggs on Egg Island was observed to be quite variable 

ranging from virtually no coloration (pale blue with no spots) to dark 

olive with many spots. Variation in eggshell pigment has been widely 

reported and is not directly involved with hatching or fledging success, 

although light-colored eggs in grassy meadows may be more susceptible to 

predation (Kruuk, 1964). 

Table 5 

Weights and Measurements of "Runt" Eggs 

on Egg Island, 1975, Compared to "Normal" 

Range. 

Table 6 

Supernormal Clutches Egg Island, 1975 

289

Figure 14. Abnormal Egg Size, Example # 1. 


290


Figure 17. Supernormal Clutch, Example 1. 

291

Egg and Clutch Replacement 

43 

Replacement clutches seem to be important only when large disturbances 

occur to colones (Vermeer, 1963). Paludan (1951) recorded Herring Gulls 

laid replacement clutches after a snowstorm. Such a large disturbance was 

not noted this summer on Egg Island or in either year of Patten's (1972-73) 

study on North Marble. However, our figures show some egg-laying still 

going on in early July 1975. Whether this indicates replacement clutches 

following predation, or simply a wide spread of breeding is yet unknown. 

Loss of the entire clutch after sufficient brooding to suppress the fourth 

follicle results in a replacement clutch in Larus argentatus and L. fuscus 

in 11-12 days (Paludan, 1951) and in L. ridibundus in about the same time 

(Weidmann, 1956). Vermeer (1963) found a similar occurrence in Larus 

glaucescens to take a slightly longer time, probably due to his experimental 

procedure (trapping). If we are allowed to speculate, egg-laying in late 

June or early July could indicate previous clutch loss to predation in early 

to mid June. This is entirely likely. 

Loss of eggs as they are laid enables four eggs to be laid, as evidenced 

by L. argentatus and L. fuscus (Paludan, 1951) and L. ridibundus (Weidmann, 

1956). Vermeer (1963) demonstrated similar phenomenon for L. glaucescens and 

also that the egg-laying interval between eggs was similar to undisturbed 

clutches. The reason for egg loss in Vermeer's (1963) study was crow predation 

resulting from human disturbance. In spite of predators, Vermeer found that 

in both years of his study, more eggs failed to hatch (addled) than were taken 

by predators. 

Attempts have been made to control the New England Herring Gull population 

292

44 

by treating eggs with a mixture of formaldehyde and oil (Gross, in Drury 

and Nisbet, 1973). An egg destruction program was planned to inhibit 

the growth of the gull population. During the first years of the gull 

control program, Gross (USF&WS) punctured eggs. However, the eggs so 

treated then rotted, burst, and the gulls again laid complete clutches 

in the usual pattern. Gross then shifted to spraying eggs with formaldehyde 

and oil. The formaldehyde is of course cytotoxic, but we wish to point 

out that the oiling of the eggs also acted to inhibit the respiration 

of the developing embyro by sealing the egg. If adult gulls resting 

on contaminated water become oiled about the breast feathers, then oil 

could be transferred to the eggs during incubation, causing embryonic 

mortality. If the embryos died, and the oil prevented much bacterial 

action, then the adult birds would continue to brood the eggs for long 

periods and not re-nest during the season. Drury and Nisbet (1973) reported 

Gross found the numbers of gulls nesting on treated (oiled) islands 

decreased more rapidly than could be attributed to adult mortality, indicating 

a net emigration of adults from these colonies. We wish to indicate the 

possibility of such occurrances in the NEGOA, with unfortunate consequences 

for marine birds including gulls. 

Incubation Period 

Incubation was nearly complete at the time of our arrival at the gull 

colonies in June 1975. Patten (1974) has previously reported a range of 

onset of incubation on North Marble from 29 May to 10 June. Beginning of 

incubation in colonies at Dry Bay, Haenke and Egg Island apparently falls 

within this time range. The beginning of incubation was synchronized in 

all colonies on North Marble; most gulls began brooding at about the same 

293

45 

time, despite of larger spread of egg-dates from colony to colony. The 

abrupt synchrony of chick hatching both years of the North Marble study 

reflected the synchronized onset of incubation. The wide spread of 

chick ages on Egg Island may reflect less synchrony in onset of incubation 

as well as a greater spread of egg-laying. 

Median dates from onset of incubation to hatching established a 

incubation period of 24 to 27 days on North Marble. Modal hatching 

dates indicate the usual eggs were incubated for a period of 26 days. 

Similar incubation periods have been reported by Tinbergen (1960), 

Vermeer (1963), Keith (1966), Schreiber (1970) and Harpur (1971). 

Near the end of the incubation period, on 29 June 1975, 115 gull 

eggs at Dry Bay weighed a mean 87.2 + 7.3 gms (Table 7). Eggs from 

North Marble in 1973 weighed 80.5 gms at the end of incubation. Eggs 

on North Marble lost about 18 percent of their weight during incubation, 

beginning incubation at a mean 97.6 gms/egg. The usual incubation period 

on North Marble is 26 days, and the average gull egg loses 0.67 percent 

of its weight per day. Assuming an equal incubation period 75 percent 

completed with equivalent weight loss at Dry Bay, the usual weight 

for gull eggs there at the beginning of incubation is about 100 gms. 

Eggs thus hatch at a hypothetical mean 82.7 gms, which would indicate 

a mean hatching date of 5 July 1975. Indicated onset of incubation at Dry Bay 

Bay was thus 10 June 1975. 

294

Chick Stage 

Table 7 

Egg Weights At Beginning and End of Incubation 

Period, North Marble Island,1973; Dry Bay, 1975 

A chick, as here designated, is a bird from time of hatching until 

departure from the nesting island (Schreiber, 1970). 

Chick hatching was not especially synchronous on Egg Island this 

year. Two peaks of chick hatching were observed: the majority of chicks 

hatched in late June, while a smaller group of chicks hatched in mid-July. 

Presumably, synchrony of egg and hatching dates provides better protection 

from predators, which can take only a certain percentage of eggs and chicks 

at any one time (Darling, 1938). 

When chicks hatched adult gulls gave long (territorial) calls more 

frequently than during incubation. Adult gulls also became more aggressive 

when chasing other gulls or corvids from their territories (similar 

observations reported by Vermeer, 1963). Parental gulls continued 

incubation during hatching, although the intensity of the drive apparently 

diminished rapidly, correlated with the development of homeothermy in the 

chicks. Adult birds removed eggshells up to 20 meters away from nests 

295

47 

by picking them up and dropping the eggshells in flight. Presumably 

there is a strong selective pressure for removal of eggshells from 

the nest as an anti-predator device. Gulls were extremely wary with 

young chicks in the nest, and flew up at the slightest alarm. 

Defensive adult gulls defecated on us or repeatedly struck us with 

lowered feet across the back of the head. 

Adult gulls react to all newly born young on the territory in 

the first few days after hatching by directing by directing parental 

behavior towards them (Tinbergen, 1960). Soon afterward, gulls learn 

to know their own young, and hostile behavior towards strange chicks 

develops within a week (Tinbergen, 1960). Gull parents react to the 

call of their own chicks, even when they cannot see them (Goethe, 1956), 

while they do not react to strange chicks under similar circumstances. 

Goethe (1956) concluded that voice is an important factor in adults 

recognizing young. In addition, the cryptic pattern of dark vs. light 

on the chick's head may be important for individual recognition by the 

parents (Tinbergen, 1960). In this context we wish to emphasize the 

results of some of our color-marking experiments this summer on Egg Island. 

We originally planned to color-dye all chicks produced in our study area 

in order to trace their movements. In accordance with the plan we 

completely dyed 21 chicks with nyansol, a purple-black dye. Immediately 

thereafter (in two days) we found seven of the 21 chicks dead, a 

33 percent mortality (Table 8). The parents may not have continued to 

feed the young due to non-recognition, or the young birds may have died 

from exposure resulting from the evaporation of the isopropyl alcohol 

which is the solvent for the dye. The complete color-dyeing program of 

young gulls was immediately dropped due to the mortality rate. 

Outside the study area proper on Egg Island, 

296

we dyed 80 chicks with nyansol on the tail, rump, abdomen, and axillaries, 

in other words parts of the body that probably are not important for 

individual recognition. Dying the parts of young birds unrelated to 

individual recognition led to no observed mortality. With this 

background in mind we wish to point out that if young gulls are oiled 

for whatever reason about the head, individual recognition of chicks 

by parents may be destroyed, leading to mortality of the young. 

Table 8 

Analysis of Seven Mortalities 

Associated With Color-Marking 

(Complete) With Nyansol Dye. 

Egg Island, 1975 

297

49 

We also wish to point out that if chicks become oiled on other parts 

of the body, the development or maintenance of homeothermy may be 

prevented, leading to death from exposure (McEwan and Koelink, 1973). 

Since chicks have little energy reserves, and often die in periods of 

bad weather (see below) impairment of homeothermy through oiling must 

be regarded as a possibility. 

The period of hatching is a critical time in the gull reproductive 

cycle. In this period, adults must shift their behavior from incubating 

to brooding, gathering food and feeding the young (Vermeer, 1963). Some 

parents do not make this shift, or are inept at it. Paynter (1949), 

Paludan (1951) and Harris (1964) agree that major chick mortality occurs 

within a few days of hatciing. 

Even while still in the egg, chicks ready to hatch can be heard 

squeaking. But chicks stop peeping when hearing alarm calls from the 

adults. Tinbergen (1960) is sure that the alarm stimulus is auditory; 

in experiments involving visual isolating.of chicks, chicks crouched upon 

hearing alarm notes. 

The physical characteristics and boundaries of the territory are 

learned by chicks through experience as they develop. Chicks run to 

accustomed hiding places when adults give alarm calls. Fortunately this 

made the chicks easier for us to locate. For about two days after hatching, 

chicks remained in or next to the nest and made no consistant attempts 

to hide other than remaining quietly on the bottom of the nest. Then for 

several days chicks hid behind grass tussocks near the nest. Later, chicks 

wandered further from nest sites and were more difficult to locate. Chicks 

began to swim on their own at about two weeks of age, and with increasing 

mobility 

298

50 

and coordination they attempted to move down and away from the main 

colony sites when disturbed. Chicks close to the edge of the island 

fled into the water. However, water apparently does not provide the 

proximate stimulus for this behavior, since chicks from the high dunes 

at the center of Egg Island moved out into open sandy areas at the foot 

of the dunes when disturbed. While swimming, chicks from the edge of 

the island started to group together. Small groups of chicks swam 

back to the island and crept in submissive posture, with heads down, 

back up to their nest sites after disturbance. If aquatic borders 

of island colonies become heavily oiled, at this time normal avoidance 

behavior of chicks would lead them into oil slicks. 

Nearly fledged chicks wandered extensively in and out of less 

defended territories towards the end of the breeding season. A flightless 

chick with a tall tarsal band, indicating origin in the Egg Island study 

area near the light, was found in late July one km further west along the 

main dune line. Wandering chicks formed small flocks at the base of the dunes 

near the water, or if no water was nearby, the chicks formed small flocks 

at the edge of sandy open areas. Southern (1968) noted response to disturbance 

of Ring-billed Gull chicks (Larus delawarensis) that were similar to other 

observations (Patten, 1974) of Glaucous-winged Gull chicks in Alaska. 

Mortality Factors 

Observed chick mortality was low (28 chicks) this season in the Egg 

Island study area. Most chicks (76) that failed to fledge simply disappeared 

(Table 9). Chicks surviving to banding at two weeks amounted to 221 

individuals. One hundred fifty banded chicks were counted in the study area 

at the close of the fledging period. If we include the seven chick. 

299

51 

mortalities associated with color-dying, then productivity in the study 

area on Egg Island was 157 individuals. Twenty-one tall tarsal banded 

chicks observed were natural mortalities, including one found over 

300 meters away from the study area. Therefore, 43 banded chicks were 

"lost" from the study area and probably failed to survive. Thirty three 

chicks were lost before banding. Banded chicks, flightless but still alive, 

were found as much as one kilometer away from their natal area, suggesting 

that a few wandering chicks may have lived to fledge. Their chances 

were not good since they had to forage on their own in the meadows. 

Egg Island chick mortality was 23 percent in 1975. Chick mortality 

was lower (5 to 8 percent) in both years of Patten's (1974) Glacier Bay 

study under conditions considerably different (Table 10). Coulter et al 

(1971) reported a mean 11 percent chick mortality for Western Gulls on 

Southwest Farallon Island, California. Harpur (1971) found , mean chick 

mortality in the Western Gull on an islet near Santa Catalina Island, 

California, to be 37 percent but he stated that except for human disturbance, 

chick mortality might have been as low as 7 percent. Harpur (1971) suggested 

that chick mortality may be more a function of crowding than of absolute 

colony size. 

The rise in mortality in crowded colonies could be due to the 

increased probability that small chicks wander into nearby territories and 

are killed (see above). The high average (about 85 percent) from the 

larger colonies reported by Harris (1964) support this hypothesis. However, 

Patterson (1956) working with the Black-headed Gull and Vermeer (1963) 

working with the Glaucous-winged Gull could find no significant difference 

in chick mortality as related to various colony sizes. 

300

Table 9 

Chick Mortality Egg Island, 1975, 

North Marble Island, 1972-73 (x) 

Table 10 

Percent Chick Mortality Egg Island, 

1975, North Marble Island 1972-73 (R) 

As indicated in previous discussions above, one of the main factors 

affecting chick mortality and fledging rate in this and other gull studies 

was the habit of adults to attack strange chicks (Paynter, 1949; Tinbergen, 

1960; Vermeer, 1963; Patten, 1974). It was not unusual to note adult gulls 

attacking chicks that had wandered from their natal territories into neighboring 

areas. We found most dead chicks on Egg Island about three weeks of age, 

301

53 

in contrast to North Marble, where most dead chicks were found during 

the first week after hatching. Killing at North Marble does not seem 

confined to any particular age group, but is greatest when chicks are 

small, unable to retreat rapidly, or give appeasement displays. On 

Egg Island chick mortality seems most related to the age at which chicks 

begin to wander widely. 

The dead chicks on Egg Island and North Marble were usually away 

from any nest site, and typically exhibited head injuries. Small chicks 

were easily swallowed by adult gulls (Brown, 1967b), perhaps accounting 

for some chick disappearance. Vermeer (1963) noted that most chick 

mortality on Mandarte Island, B.C., occurred in the first week after 

hatching. Paynter (1949) and Paludan (1951) also ascribe most of the 

chick mortality in Herring Gulls to aggressive behavior in adults. 

There has been much speculation about the reasons for this killing 

(Paynter, 1949). Tinbergen (1960) believes that it may be due to the 

highly developed territorial defense of breeding adult gulls towards any 

moving object. It may be that selection is operating so that chicks 

remaining strictly on their natal territory will have a better chance of 

survival. 

Weather was also a factor affecting chick mortality in this study. 

June and July 1975 on Egg Island were favorable months, with periods of a 

day or two of rainfall and moderate winds followed by stretches of fair, 

calm weather. There was excellent cover in the gull meadows due to growth 

of vegetation, and air temperatures were moderate. A week of quite poor 

weather occurred in early August, with cooler temperatures, very strong 

winds, and heavy rainfall. Vegetation in the meadows began to die down 

after the growing season. The main group of chicks had fledged and were 

302

54 

foraging on their own around the island beaches. However, a second group 

of chicks was still in the meadows and there was heavy mortality of the 

smaller chicks after the stretch of poor weather. The mortality may have 

two reasons, although they are related. Partially fledged chicks in poor 

cover may have died from exposure. Secondarily we observed much cannibalism, 

and we found many chick bodies picked clean. The inclement weather may 

have prevented both adults and juveniles from foraging efficiently, and the 

half-grown chicks accordingly suffered. Whether the chick mortality was due 

directly to attacks from other hungry gulls, was related to their weakened 

condition, or was only indirectly related to other gulls scavenging on 

chicks dead from exposure, is unclear. The effect was the same: chicks 

hatched later than the main group apparently had much lower survival. A 

selective pressure for egg and chick synchrony maybe due to weather, predation, 

cannibalism, and lack of food. Michelson .(pers. comm.) pointed out that 

for several years a severe storm has occurred in the Cordova area early 

in August. Our observations of chick mortality after the August storm 

were made in meadows outside the study area. By August 10th only few adult 

gulls were left. The productivity figure for the 1975 study area thus 

may not include the weather-induced mortality affecting other parts of Egg 

Island. 

The unseasonably dry July of 1972 on North Marble resulted in poor 

protective cover for chicks. Several chicks were found dead, apparently 

from exposure, after several days of cold rainy weather ended the dry 

spell. Coulter et al (1971) found chick mortality to be affected by the 

degree of exposure to weather and salt spray. Tinbergen (1960) stated gull 

chicks were quite sensitive to temperature changes. Vermeer (1963) suggested 

that the proximity of cover may be important for survival of young chicks 

303

in a hot, dry summer. Thus weather, through abrupt temperature changes 

and increasedvulnerability to adult gulls and other predators, may have 

an effect on survival of chicks. 

We compared the results of our investigation of factors influencing 

reproductive success on Egg Island and North Marble with data from other 

colonies and from other species of gulls, since so little is otherwise 

known of Glaucous-winged Gulls in Alaska. Natality, or hatching success, 

was calculated to be approximately 57.3 percent on Egg Island, and about 

68 percent for North Marble (Table 11). These figures can be compared 

to Western Gulls, in which hatching success has been reported to be 55 

percent by Schreiber (1970), 78 percent by Harpur (1971) and 78 percent 

by Coulter, et al. (1971). 

The mean combined mortality from egg to fledging on Egg Island was 

about 66 percent. This compares to 34 percent on North Marble, to 30 

percent combined egg and chick loss for Western Gulls on Southeast Farallon 

Island (Coulter, et al. 1971). Egg loss was higher but chick loss was 

lower on North Marble compared to Southeast Farallon. On Egg Island, egg 

loss was 42.7 to 26.5% and chick loss was 23.4 to 6.5% compared with North 

Marble. In both cases there was higher mortality on Egg Island. 

Total reproductive success was about 33.7 percent on Egg Island. Egg 

Island can be compared to North Marble, which had a total fledging success 

of 61 percent under post-glacial conditions. The fledging success of eggs 

hatched (59%) on Egg Island in 1975 compares favorably with the usual 50 

percent reported by Kadlec and Drury (1968) for Herring Gulls in New England; 

however, one year's data is no indication of a trend. 

On North Marble, hatching and fledging success were not s gnificantly 

different from colony to colony and from year to year, suggesting the gulls 

304

on North Marble may be acting as one large colony, and that environmental 

conditions were relatively static for the two study years. The exception 

was a small, newly colonized area at the top of the island, which had 

significantly larger territory sizes and lower fledging success. Egg loss 

on North Marble plotted against territory size showed increased loss with 

smaller territories, indicating that on egs, intraspecific predation was 

more important than interspecific predation. Thus, the larger average 

territory in the new small colony could not directly account for higher 

egg loss and resultant lower fledging success. However, the enclosed location 

of the small colony, and the lack of water nearby to which chicks could flee, 

suggested strongly that chick predators had an important effect. In 1975 

perhaps the larger numbers of other gulls on Egg Island resulted in a 

greater rate of chick predation, although the situation there is complicated 

by the large territory size. 

Table 11 

Hatching Success, Mortality, Reproductive Success 

Egg Island, 1975; North Marble Island, 1972-73 (X) 

Avian predators other than gulls were not uncommon on Egg Island or 

North Marble, although relative to gulls, their numbers were low. No 

terrestrial predators were noted on any gull island examined. Gull alarm 

305

57 

calls were due, in order of importance, to the frequent appearance of 

Bald Eagles (Haliaeetus leucocephalus), Ravens (Corvus corax) and Crows 

(Corvus brachyrynchos). Parasitic Jaegers (Stercorarius parasiticus) took 

gull eggs at Dry Bay and perhaps at Egg Island. Alarms in the gull colonies 

were good indicators of breeding intensity (Vermeer, 1963). Broody gulls 

remained on the nest and did not repeat the alarm call until the disturbance 

was close. Gulls gave two kinds of alarm calls, high and low intensity, 

as reported by Tinbergen (1960). Gull chicks hid at both high and low 

intensity alarm calls. 

Eagles disturbed the Egg Island and North Marble colonies repeatedly, 

especially early in the season before salmon were in the nearby mainland 

streams. The approach of an eagle caused immediate high-intensity alarm 

calls and flight of entire colonies at once. We found some gull remains 

that had been picked completely apart except for the cranium. A dead gull 

was found in an eagle nest near North Marble. Smoker (NMFS) reports 

a successful attack by an eagle on a gull at Kitoi Bay, Agfognak Island. 

Our conclusion fromthis evidence is that eagles take gulls whenever possible. 

Tinbergen (1960) never saw a Herring Gull actually attacked by a 

predator, although he found remains of Herring Gulls probably killed by 

a Peregrine Falcon (Falco peregrinus). No Peregrines were observed this 

season on Egg Island, although Peregrines were seen occasionally on North 

Marble in previous years. The falcons caused no alarms in the gull colonies, 

and no attacks were observed. 

Fledging Success 

We determined the median length of the nestling period to be 40-45 days 

on Egg Island, similar to that on North Marble. Other investigators also 

306

58 

have reported similar fledging periods for Herring Gulls in Michigan 

(Keith, 1966), Western Gulls in California (Schreiber, 1970; Harpur, 

1971), and Glaucous-winged Gulls in British Columbia (Vermeer, 1963). 

At the end of the fledging period, counts were made to determine 

fledging success. The fledging success, while a difficult measurement, 

(Keith, 1966; Schreiber, pers. comm.) is crucial in understanding the 

reproductive biology of birds. The fledging rate of 1.03 chicks per 

nest is normal when compared to other gull species, but much lower when 

compared to a colony in recent post-glacial surroundings (Table 12). 

Paynter (1949) found a production of 0.92 chicks per pair per year sufficient 

to maintain a stable population of L. argentatus on Kent Island, New Brunswick. 

Ludwig (1966) reported a recruitment rate of 0.63 is sufficient to maintain 

a stable population of Ring-billed Gulls (L. delawarensis) on the Great 

Lakes. Ludwig (1966) also found that between 1960 and 1965, L. argentatus 

populations increased at an annual rate of 13 percent with a mean fledging 

rate of 1.47. This was due to the unusal abundance of the alewife (Alosa 

pseudoharengus), a major food source. At the same time, L. delawarensis 

populations on the Great Lakes were increasing 30 percent per year with a 

mean fledging rate of 1.74, which is practically identical to the gulls 

on North Marble. Glaucous-winged Gulls studied by Vermeer (1963) on 

Mandarte Island, B.C., fledged 1.0 and 1.7 chicks per nest in his two-year 

investigation. Harpur (1971) published fledging rates of 1.33 and 0.96 

per nesting pair of Western Gulls. The highest mean fledging success 

encountered in the literature has been the 2.00 chicks per nest reported 

by Coulter, et al. (1971). Other fledging successes, as summarized by Keith 

(1966) ranged from 0.3 to 1.17. The gulls on Egg Island in 1975, in comparison 

307

with the above studies, fledged roughly in a "normal" pattern. This 

rate , if continued, would indicate a slowly expanding population, 

similar to that of Herring Gulls in the eastern United States and Canada, 

and due to a similar reason, that of an increasing food supply due to 

man's activities. 

Table 12 

Comparative Index of Gull Reproductive Success 

In Chicks Per Nest (Productivity) 

308

60 

Banding Recovery and Sightings of Color-marked Gulls 

We banded 1300 Glaucous-winged Gull chicks in July and August 1975 

on Egg Island outside the study area. These young birds were ringed on 

their left tarsi with USF&WS aluminum "short" bandsof the 1047 series, 

size 7A. We also captured every chick surviving to two weeks of age 

(221 individuals) in the study area (150m x 150 m) southwest of Egg Island 

Light, and enclosedtheir left tarsi in stainless steel "tall" bands of 

the USF&WS 657 series, size 7A. Of these 221 banded chicks, 150 survived 

to fledge. One of these juvenile gulls, banded in the study area on 

August 1st, turned up at the end of Sunny Point, 8 kilometers west of 

downtown Juneau, on October 4th, where it was shot by a small boy. 

Mr. Jim King of the Fish and Wildlife Service, Waterfowl Investigations, 

managed to coax the boy into retreiving the gull from the woods where he 

had it hidden. The immature Glaucous-winged Gull wore band # 657-67383, 

which indicated it had been banded as a flightless individual of unknown 

sex on August 1st. 

We color-marked over 100 young gulls in two different patterns 

with nyansol dye at the end of the season on Egg Island. (See above 

discussion.) We were able to capture 9 adult gulls this summer and 

mark them with picric acid, a brilliant yellow feather dye, which 

gradually oxidizes to orange with time. The first gull was captured 

at the Cordova docks, dyed on the head and upper breast, and released 

after a blood sample was removed. Our subsequent observations indicated 

that this bird remained in the Cordova area for most of the summer, 

feeding on the effluent of the salmon-packing canneries, and resting 

on Eyak Lake or at the municpal docks. When the canneries were not 

309

61 

operating, this individual was seen at the dump. The local movements 

it be 

of this bird lead us to the suspicion that it may be part of a non-breeding 

population exploiting concentrated food resources opportunistically. 

Eight other adult gulls were captured at Egg Island, banded, weighed, 

and dyed yellow on lower breast, abdomen, axillaries, and tail, so as 

not to break pair bonds. Our initial observations indicated these birds, 

which were breeding adults with eggs or chicks when captured, remained 

close to the colony in July. In August we observed these birds progressively 

further from Egg Island, first at the mouth of the Eyak River a few 

kilometers away, then in Cordova 30 kilometers away at the dump or around 

the docks, and then as far away as Observation Island, near Deep Bay, 

Hawkins Island, 40-50 kilometers from Egg Island. 

Recently we have received notification from Mr King of "canary yellow" 

to "golden" gulls seen by various parties in the Juneau area in early 

September. Through the efforts of Mr. King, the Alaska Department of 

Fish and Game notified the Juneau public of the presence of color-marked 

gulls in the area during a radio broadcast.from station KINY. Dr. Ralph B. 

Williams, Juneau ornithologist, has just written us about a "black - stained" 

gull reported near Juneau. We are hopeful of additional reports of 

adult and juvenile gulls from our Egg Island study. We are able to suggest 

local and then southeastern movements of both adult and juvenile gulls 

from Egg Island along the Gulf of Alaska coastline in post-breeding dispersal 

310

SUMMARY AND TENTATIVE CONCLUSIONS 

We carried out a concentrated investigation of two gull colonies located 

hundreds of kilometers apart in the northeast Gulf of Alaska in the summer 

of 1975. We compared the results of our investigation to data gathered in 

our previous Alaskan research and to other studies in the literature. 

Egg Island lies a few kilometers offshore from the mouth of the Copper 

River, near Cordova, Alaska, and contains the largest Glaucous-winged Gull 

colony in the northeast Gulf of Alaska. Some 5000-6000 pairs nest on meadow- 

covered dunes on Egg Island. Mean territory size was 28.9 m2. The gull 

population may not be limited by available nesting space due to the uplift 

of the island and the surrounding area in the '64 earthquake. Nests 

averaged 19.6 by 19.9 cm across the inside, and 39.7 by 39.1 cm across the 

outside, and averaged 7 cm deep. Most egg-laying took place in late May or 

early June; there was a wide spread of egg dates. Observed clutch size at the 

end of incubation suggests a 43 percent egg loss to predators, mostly other 

gulls. Hatching success was high other than those eggs predated. There were no 

signs of eggshell weakness. However, "runt" eggs and supernormal clutches 

were noted on Egg Island. Considerable chick mortality occurred when chicks 

began to wander at about three weeks of age; the large territory size may 

slow the rate of earlier mortality. Death of many wandering chicks was 

due to attacks from other adult gulls. Bad weather was associated with much 

mortality of younger chicks later in the breeding season. Fledging took about 

40-45 days, and overall productivity was moderate, averaging about 1.03 chicks 

produced per nest, or 59 percent fledging success of chicks hatched. 

About 500 pairs of Herring and Glaucous-winged Gulls nest sympatrically 

in a mixed colony on low gravel bars at Dry Bay, mouth of the Alsek River, 

311

63 

south of Yakutat, Alaska. Hybrids and intergrades are common in the area. 

The reproductive biology of this colony was examined in late June 1975 in 

a sample of 100 nests. Territory size averaged 29.8 m , practically 

identical to that on Egg Island and also suggesting room for expansion 

of the breeding population. Nests at Dry Bay averaged 19.9 by 20.06 cm 

inner diameters, and 40.16 by 39.42 cm outer diameters, and averaged 1 cm 

shallower than nests on Egg Island, probably due to the lack of suitable 

nest material. One hundred and fifteen eggs at this colony showed a usual 

mean weight for a late stage in incubation. No runt eggs or supernormal 

clutches were observed in this smaller sample size. The reproductive cycle 

at Dry Bay was about two weeks behind Egg Island, probably due to heavy 

snowfall and late spring in the Yakutat area. The gravel bars at Dry Bay 

may be flooded on occasion, disturbing the gull reproductive cycle. 

This report examines some of the factors influencing gull reproductive 

biology in the northeast Gulf of Alaska during the 1975 field season, and 

tentatively indicates a gull population reproducing at a normal rate under 

relatively wild conditions. However, we suggest this gull population is 

already responding to human influence in the area. The moderate reproductive 

success of this population in the northeast Gulf of Alaska could account for, 

if continued, a slowly expanding number of gulls, due to increasing availability 

of food resulting from human activity. The development of oil resources in 

this area could effect gull reproduction at certain crucial periods in the 

breeding cycle, detailed herein. 

This study will continue through the 1976 field season, focusing on 

food habits, migration routes, pathobiology, population dynamics, amplification 

of aspects of breeding biology, and investigation of additional colonies. 

312

LITERATURE CITED 

American Ornithologists' Union. 1957. Checklist of North American Birds. 

American Ornithologists Union. Port City Press, Baltimore, Md. 691 pp. 

Baerends, G. P. 1959. The ethological analysis of incubation behavior. 

Ibis 101: 357-368. 

Brown, R. G. P. 1967a. Species isolation between the Herring Gull Larus 

argentatus and Lesser Black-backed Gull L. fuscus. Ibis 109: 310-317. 

S1967b. Breeding success and population growth in a colony of 

Herring and Lesser Balck-backed Gulls Larus argentatus and L.fuscus. 

Ibis 109: 505-515. 

Cody, M. L. 1973. Coexistence, coevolution, and convergent evolution in 

seabird communities. Ecology 54: 31-44. 

Coulson, J. C. and E. White. 1956. A study of colonies of the Kittiwake 

Rissa tridactyla. Ibis 98: 63-79. 

. 1958. The effect of age on the breeding biology of the Kittiwake 

Rissa tridactyla. Ibis- 100:40-51. 

. 1960. The effect of age and density of breeding birds on the ti e 

of breeding of the Kittiwake Rissa tridactyla. Ibis 102: 71-86. 

Coulter, M., D. Ainley, and T. J. Lewis. 1971. Breeding of the Western 

Gull in different habitats on Southeast Farallon Island. Point Reyes 

Bird Observatory Bull. 20:1-3. 

Darling, F. F. 1938. Bird flocks and the breeding cycle. University Press, 

Cambridge. 124 pp. 

Drury, W. H., and I. C. T. Nisbet. The importance of movements in the 

biology of Herring gulls in New England. Contribution No. 64, Hatheway 

School of Cons. Eds., Mass. Audubon Soc., Lincoln, Mass. 

Erwin, R. M. 1971. The breeding success of two sympatric gulls, the Herring 

Gull and the Great Black-backed Gull. Wilson Bull. 83: 152-158. 

Fisher,J., and R.M. Lockley. 1954. Sea-birds. 

Collins, London. 320 p. 

Goethe, F. 1937. Beobachtungen und Untersuchungen zu Biologie der Silbermove 

(Larus argentatus Pontopp) auf den Vogellinsel Memmerstand. J. fur 

Ornithologie 85: 1-119. 

S1956. Die Silbermove. Wittenburg Lutheranstalt, Die Neue Brehm- 

Bucherei, Hert 182: 95 pp. 

313

65 

Harpur, C. A. 1971. Breeding biology of a small colony of Western Gulls 

Larus occidentalis wymani in California. Condor 73: 337-341. 

Harris, M. P. 1964. Aspects of the breeding biology of the Larus argentatus, 

L. fuscus, and L. marinus. Ibis 106:432-456. 

Hinde, R. A. 1956. The biological significance of territories in birds. 

Ibis 98:340-369. 

Hunt, G. L., Jr. and Molly W. Hunt. 1973. Clutch size, hatching success, 

and eggshell-thinning in Western Gulls. Condor 75:483-486. 

Hunt, G.L., Jr. and S.C. McLoon. 1975. Activity patterns of gull chicks in 

relation to feeding by parents: their potential significance for 

density-dependent mortality. The Auk 92: 523-527. 

Kadlec, J. A. and W. H. Drury, Jr. 1968. Structure of New England Herring 

Gull population. Ecology 49:644-676. 

Keith, J. A. 1966. Reproduction in a population of Herring Gulls Larus 

argentatus contaminated by DDT. Jour.Appl Ecol. 3:57-70. 

Kruuk, H. 1964. Predators and anti-predator behaviour of the Black-headed 

Gull (Larus ridibundus). Behaviour Suppl. 11:1-130. 

Lack, D. 1968. Ecological adaptations for breeding in birds. Chapman and 

Hall. London. 388 pp. 

Ludwig, J. P. 1966. Herring and Ring-billed Gull populations of the Great 

Lakes 1960-1965. Univ. Mich. Great Lakes Res. Publ. 15:80-89. 

McEwan, and Koelink. 1973. Response of mallards and scaup to oiling. 

Journ. Wildl. Man. 

Paludan, K. 1951. Contributions to the breeding biology of Larus argentatus 

and Larus fuscus. Videsk. Medd. dansk naturh. Foren. 114:1-128. 

Patten, S., Jr. 1974. Breeding ecology of the Glaucous-winged Gull (Larus 

glaucescens) in Glacier Bay, Alaska. Thesis, University of Washington, 

78 pp. unpublished. 

Patten, S.,Jr. and A. R. Weisbrod. 1974. Sympatry and interbreeding of 

Herring and Glaucous-winged Gulls in southeastern Alaska. Condor 

76: 343-344. 

Paynter, R. A. 1949. Clutch size and egg and chick mortality of Kent Island 

Herring Gulls. Ecology 30:146-166. 

Schreiber, R. W. 1970. Breeding biology of Western Gulls Larus occidentalis 

on San Nicholas Island, California, 1968. Condor 72: 133-140. 

Patterson, I. J. 1965. Timing and spacing of broods in the Black-headed 

Gull Larus ridibundus. Ibis 107: 443-449. 

314

66 

Smith, N. G. 1966a. Adaptations to cliff-nesting in some arctic gulls 

Larus. Ibis 108:68-83. 

Southern, W. E. 1969. Orientation behavior of Ring-billed Gull chicks and 

fledglings. Condor 71:418-425. 

Strang, C. A. 1973. The Alaskan Glaucous-winged Gull (Larus hyperboreus 

barrovianus Ridgway): autecology, taxonomy, behavior. Dept. of Forest 

and Cons., Purdue University, West Lafayette, Indiana. (mimeo). 60 pp. 

Tinbergen, N. 1957. The functions of territory. Bird Study 4: 14-27. 

. 1960. The Herring Gull's World. Rec. 2nd. ed., Basic Books, 

New York, 255pp. 

U. S. F. S. 1975. The Copper River delta, land at river's end. 

Chugach National Forest. Anchorage. 

Vermeer, K. 1970. Breeding biology of California and ring-billed gulls. 

Canadian Wildlife Service Rep. Ser. No. 12. 52 pp. 

. 1963. The breeding ecology of the Glaucous-winged Gull Larus 

glaucescens on Mandarte Island, B. C. Occ. Pap. B. C. Prov. Mus. 13:1-104. 

Weidmann, U. 1956. Observations and experiments on egg-laying in the 

Black-headed Gull. Anim. Behavior 4:150-161. 

Ward,J.G. 1973. Reproductive success, food supply, and the evolution of 

clutch size in the Glaucous-winged Gull. Unpubl. PhD. dissertation, 

U.B.C., Vancouver. 

315

PROGRESS REPORT NO. 1 

NOAA OCSEP Research Unit # 108 

COMMUNITY STRUCTURE, DISTRIBUTION, AND 

INTERRELATIONSHIPS OF MARINE BIRDS 

IN THE GULF OF ALASKA 

Principal Investigator: John A. Wiens 

Research Assistants: Wayne Hoffman 

Dennis Heineman 


(Submitted 8 December 1975) 

317

I. TASK OBJECTIVES 

A. We intend to determine the interdependencies and interactions among 

marine bird species in the location of fish schools or other concentrated 

food sources. To this end we are studying the dynamics of mixed species 

flocks, concentrating on arrival and departure times and rates, flock 

composition, and modes of foraging behavior. 

B. We are assessing the role of non-breeding migrants in the dynamics 

of the community. Shearwaters, which breed in New Zealand and Southern 

South America, are at times the most abundant marine birds in Alaskan 

inshore waters. These birds could exercise a negative effect on population 

densities of breeding birds by pre-empting food sources, a positive effect 

by serving as locator species for food resources, or exhibit no direct 

relations to the dynamics of the breeding or resident species. 

C. We intend to simulate the trophic impacts of birds on the continental 

shelf ecosystems. To this end, we are collecting data on distribution, 

density, and food habits of marine birds in the study area to use as 

inputs in the simulation. The basic distribution and density data will 

also be valuable to the Project directly for prediction of the effects 

of development. Since the simulation depends upon the field data, this 

part of our work will not be initiated until after the initial field data 

are collected. 


A. Ship Schedule 

Time spent to date: Surveyor, Aug. 4 - Sept. 13 - party of two. 

Surveyor, Sept. 16 - Sept. 23 - party of one. 

Surveyor, Oct. 28 - Nov. 8 - party of one. 


Wayne Hoffman, Research Assistant, Oregon State University 

Dennis Heinemann, Research Assistant, Oregon State University 

C. Methods 

1. Flock Characterization. - When feeding flocks are observed, counts 

are taken of the various species and observations of foraging 

and interactive behavior are made. These include time, order, 

and manner of arrival and departure, mode of feeding, intensity 

of feeding behavior, position within the flock, and interspecies 

interactions such as aggression and piracy. These observations 

can occasionally be taken from the ship, but most of our detailed 

data were gathered using the ship's launches in inshore areas. 

Observations from the ship confirm that most multi-species feeding 

flocks occur near shore. 

Observations of bird activity around ships' garbage, and other 

materials dumped overboard, both from the Surveyor and from other 

vessels encountered, were made op occasion. These are of some use 

in determining responses of birds to flock foraging by other species. 

2. Transect counts. - To determine the density and distribution of 

the various marine bird species, we used a standardized transect 

count technique. While the ship was steaming on a constant heading 

for a period of at least 15 min, all birds seen in a 90° arc from 

the bow to one beam, are recorded.Distance from the ship, and 

318

-2- 

activity of the birds (sitting, diving, flying, direction and 

height) are recorded for each bird or group of birds. Additional 

notes are taken where appropriate on foraging behavior, association 

with mammals, or interactions between individuals or species. 

D. Sample localities 

1. Flock observations were made primarily at Kodiak and Unalaska, 

also near Sundstrom Island, Pavlov Bay, Big Koniuji Island, 

and in the Bering sea south of Nunivak Island. 

2. General regions of transects are noted in Table 1. The included 

trackline is very rough because we have not yet received a copy 

of the ship's trackline for the period we were aboard. 

E. Data collected 

1. Number and types of observations 

a. Flock characterization. These data are presently being 

prepared for submission to the NODC. The numerical data 

on the various flocks will be clustered to distinguish the 

basic flock types. Frequencies of occurrence of the various 

species in and out of flocks will be determined to estimate 

the degree of dependence of the species on the flocks for 

food location. 

III. RESULTS 

b. Transect data. Analysis has been postponed until a concensus 

has been reached among the Principal Investigators and the 

NODC concerning a common format for bird transect censusing. 

The following analyses will be performed: Bird densities 

will be computed for the various areas covered; the association 

tendencies will be measured for each regularly occurring species; 

associations with mammals will be compiled; and interspecies 

interactions will be analyzed for frequency and distribution. 

Since we are still involved in preparation of our data for processing, 

we have no specific results to communicate at this time. Indications of 

reliability, accuracy, and precision are also premature at this time, except 

as expressed in part one of the addendum to this report. 

IV. PRELIMINARY INTERPRETATIONS 

At this time we can only convey subjective impressions of the phenomena 

we are studying. These thoughts are of very uncertain reliability and 

should not be disseminated outside the project office. 

Feeding flocks are a common phenomenon in summer near shore, but are 

apparently rare offshore. They can be catagorized on the basis of 

species composition into a number of fairly distinct types. The differences 

apparently cannot be explained completely in terms of differences in 

occurrence and abundance of the birds in different geographical areas. 

The possibility exists that some species may exclude from, or may selectively 

attract to the flocks, certain other species. 

The transect data indicate that bird densities are more variable but 

generally higher inshore than offshore. Certain areas of very low bird 

density are obvious in the data without extensive analysis. 

Shelikof strait and the area around Hinchinbrook entrance are notable 

319

TABLE ONE 

320

-3- 

in this respect. General patterns of inshore/offshore zonation are also 

obvious without analysis. Albatrosses were only seen at distances of 

25 nautical miles or more form land. Murrelets and Pigeon Guillemots 

were only seen within a few miles of land. It was also noted that several 

species were foraging at different distances from land than they do off 

Oregon and Washington. Forked-tailed Petrels and Cassin's Auklets were 

both found foraging close inshore, whereas off Oregon and Washington they 

are seldom if ever found foraging within 10 miles of the beach. 

V. PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED/RECOMMENDED CHANGES 

A. We had hoped to do extensive observation of feeding flocks from the 

Surveyor. We found that a ship of thatsize tends to disturb the flocks 

before it approaches close enough for detailed observation. Also, 

a majority of feeding flocks are located nearshore and in shallow 

water where the ship's officers are (rightfully) unwilling to alter 

course for flock observations. In order to obtain the desired degree 

of detail in our flock observations we hope to be able to use the 

Surveyor's lauches more extensively than we did this fall season. 

We are also planning to spend several periods of 5-20 days each, 

camped on remote islands, observing the flocks form shore with 

a spotting scope. This would require coordination with ships' 

schedules to provide for our transportation to and from the campsites. 

Experience in Washington state demonstates that the degree of detail 

we need in our observations can be obtained in this manner. 

B. Transect counts for density estimation. We encountered a problem 

with estimating densities of flying birds at sea. Our present 

techniques represent the "State of the Art", and the investigations 

which we feel would advance the state would require a modest budget 

adjustment, so we have included in our discussion of this problem 

under part 1 of the Amended Instruction section at the end of this 

report. 

C. Navigation Postion Problems. Calculation of densities of marine 

birds from transect data requires accurate information on the 

ship's speed, and accurate positions are required to relate the 

transect information to density. Ship's speed over the ground can 

best be calculated by taking two positions and obtaining the distance 

between them. For these reasons we require a log of accurate positions 

to be kept throughout the daylight hours while we are on board. 

The accuracy of the positions obtained on the Surveyor this last 

summer was not sufficient for our purposes. These accuracy problems 

result from indadquate equipment and too frequent human error by 

the junior officers charged with keeping a position log. 

Our recommended solution is to provide the ship with navigation 

systems that are more precise and that provide automatic output of 

positions, thus reducing the opportunities for human error. During 

extensive discussions with the officers of the Surveyor, the following 

possibilities were discussed. 

1. Inertial guidence system. This would, assuming it functioned 

properly, solve all of our position problems. 

2. Automatic teletype-output and automatic course-speed update 

system for the Satellite Navigation System. This would provide 

321

-4- 

sufficiently precise position information 60 to 80 percent of the 

time. The remainder of the time the position information would be 

limited by the lack of good satellite passes. 

3. Automatic Teletype Output without automatic course-speed updating 

for the Sat-Nav. This would provide similar accuracy to (2) above 

provided the officers of the watch kept the System properly updated. 

The system was often not properly updated while we were on board this 

year. 

VI. ESTIMATE OF FUNDS EXPENDED (as of 31 October 1975) 

A. Salaries and Wages 

Graduate Research Assistants 

$1,986.56 

B. Payroll Assessments 284.87 

C. Services and Supplies 627.86 

D. Travel 1,086.36 

E. Permanent Equipment 

2 Olympus cameras with motor drive 1,050.72 

Accessories for cameras 

1,674.71 

Other equipment 

874.74 

F. Total Direct Costs 7,585.82 

G. Indirect Costs 898.33 

TOTAL $8,484.15 

322

AMENDMENTS TO PROGRESS REPORT 

1. Recommendations for future research. - Much of the present seabird 

research effort in the OCSEP program is directed toward measuring 

time-specific and location-specific densities of birds at sea. A 

major part of this effort is being done from on board ships, and a 

problem of density estimation from ship-gathered information has 

arisen. When birds are flying through the area censused, the calculated 

density will vary from the actual density as a funtion of 

the birds' flying speed, the wind speed, the birds' direction distribution, 

and the ship's speed, as well as of visibility and conspicuousness, 

for which we correct in our current methodology. 

Methods for correcting for these flying-bird errors, or even for 

estimating their magnitude, are not presently available, but errors 

could potentially range to two orders of magnitude. 

We are thus suggesting that a simultion of flying bird distribution 

patterns would be very useful to OCSEP as a means of providing error 

estimates for all the transect data collected. It also would provide 

a better basis for evaluating the relevancy of density-related behavioral 

information to density estimation. It would be of great value 

to any future studies requiring estimates fo bird density at sea, 

not only in the OCSEP Program, but also in other impact-related and 

more basic research. 

The proposed simulation considers six possible distributions 

relative to the ship: unidirectional parallel, unidirectional antiparallel, 

unidirectional oblique, bidirectional parallel and antiparallel, 

bidirectional oblique, and random. 

Each distribution would be modeled using absolute densities, relative 

speeds, and relative directions, and the number and pattern of appearances 

of birds to an observer on board ship would be simulated. The 

output could be used directly to provide error estimates for our present 

data, and the output could be used to derive correction factors or 

improved methodology to correct for the bias. 

Anticipated Cost: 

Computer Services at OSU rates 

Writing and debugging of the programs $ 300 

Twenty runs of each distribution 1,500 

Additional analysis of present data 

to provide species-specific direction 

information to be used as input 

parameters 

1,000 

2,800 

Contract Programmer Expense 1,000 

323 

TOTAL $3,800

-6- 

2. Our OCSEP-funded research is directed toward obtaining information 

necessary to the intellegent development of regulations and guidelines 

for the development and transportation of petroleum resources. 

It is necessary that the distributional patterns, and the behavioral 

interactions, of the birds be known in order to predict the effects 

of resource development and possible development and transportationrelated 

accidents. 

3. Our environmental studies will be important to two general user groups. 

One of these includes government officials charged with regulating 

energy development and industry personnel involved in energy development. 

The other is comprised of seabird researchers and other ornithologists, 

ecologists, and population biologists, interested in the basic information 

we gather on seabird behavior, distribution, and species interactions. 

We are currently exploring the most appropriate means of publishing or 

distributing our findings to these different groups. Since we will be 

continuing to gather field data until the end of the current contract 

period, some additional salary support into fall 1976 will be necessary 

to complete these writing efforts. 

324

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 

BERKELEY * DAVIS * IRVINE * LOS ANCELES * RIVERSIDE * SAN DIEGO * SAN FRANCISCO SANTA BARBARA * SANTA CRUZ 

BODECA MARINE LABORATORY P. 0. BOX 247 

Dr. Gunter Weller 

OCS Arctic Project Office 

Geophysical Institute 



Dear Gunt/er: 

BODEGA BAY, CALIFORNIA 94923 

7 October 1975 

I'm unsure of whether I owe you a brief informal 

progress report for the quarter ending September 30, 1975 

or a more detailed semi-annual report. This letter will 

summarize our late summer research program; if a more 

detailed report is required I will be happy to write one. 

Field personnel for this quarter included myself: 

July 1 - September 3, and my two assistants, Carolyn Connors: 

July 1 - September 3 and Russel Greenberg: July 1 - September 

18. Most of this period was spent at NARL in Barrow, but 

four separate trips to Wainwright and Lonely required two 

people for each trip of 3 or 4 days. A few other opportunities 

allowed us some additional aerial survey work along the Beaufort 

coast. 

We followed shorebird populations on all our littoral 

and near-littoral transects on a S-day interval basis, with 

more frequent counts during periods of high use. Regular 

transect sampling was supplemented with censuses and observations 

over larger areas of the gravel shorelines in the Barrow area. 

I made use of the Fish and Wildlife Service permit to collect 

34 birds of 9 species, and found the stomach analysis results 

extremely helpful. 

Briefly summarized, our results are these: small movements 

of non-breeding and post-breeding adults utilize the 

shorelines in late June and mid-to-late July; heavy use of 

littpral habitats begins in late July when juvenile birds begin 

their migrations. Several shorebird species are represented for 

varying lengths of time,with the heaviest use occuring in August 

and early September when flocks of juvenile Red Phalaropes move 

325

Dr. Gunter Weller 2 7 October 1975 

to the gravel shorelines to food close to shore on planktonic 

organisms of several species, Red Phalaropes often occur in 

feeding associations with Sabine's Gulls, Black-leggod 

Kittiwakes, and Arctic Torns at this time, and the occurrence 

and movements of these flocks is quite irregular. I believe 

it is correlated with wind and ice conditions, possibly 

through variations in prey abundance. I plan to expand this 

facet of the study next summer. 

I returned to California to find our finances somewhat 

confused. We have not received the budget allotment for the 

second funding period of July 1, 1975 to September 30, 1976 

(it is not mentioned in the contract for some reason). As a 

result, we are operating at a deficit presently. I have written 

to Boyd Green in Boulder requesting an explanation. 

I feel our summer was quite successful. Most logistics 

problems were handled quite satisfactorily. The Honda 3-wheelers, 

in particular, were a great help in coverage of the extensive and 

important Barrow Spit area. We look forward to having them 

throughout the summer next year. 

I am currently revising plans for next summer's work on the 

basis of my experience this past summer. When our finances become 

clear, and I can plan our efforts better, I will be writing to 

you concerning possible changes in logistic support. 

My thanks to you, Dave Norton and Dave Kennedy for all the 

support this summer. 

PGC:ljp 

326 

Sincerely, 

Peter G. Connors

Dr. ,*unt cr %lier P7 r/ 

OCS Arctic Project rffice 

Ilve'y Puilding 

UniversiLy , - i r -a n : s, $s- of , Alaska s k;_ _9 I 

Fairbanks, Alaska? 99701 

Dear un=ter: 

%rrow, ; Alas!ka 723 

July 30, 175 

Dave Norton has advised me that my quarterly report can 

consist of a short, infoermal 'escriptin to ,u of res -rch 

-ti vitios for th!e .,riod. I understand that finic iic report 

is not re ,: r i ri d , r 3sentli 

Cur efforts dur i nn '"ay n ' Jlun" we're .Ii recLtd towai;rd these 

task-s: In C lifornia, planning tLh. sLIr-n;r's field ..ork, selection 

and i -u;rchas- cf eiq.:inment; ,t '!ý !.L, se l :t ion of shoreline ar,~-aS 

r";rosentint a ran. - oF littoral hahitats and, esta blishm-ent co 

crns,3s rrnsets; initiation cF c census reji i ; estchlish-nnnt of 

h :i ta I clc:ssif ict.ions; oi'srvation of FLcr nj bIhavicr cr s cis 

in 1ittorcl hahitats; and j"ner.r ,1 .a -s'rvbt i-elo ;' rly Seh rscn occur- 

r n.;--7 . :... ; sh'orohi r-'s .n othenr * i'r.'s : U 

-in ! tt: or1, an.'d n,.rshore- ar us. 

s our 

.. - 

_ -; 

ssi Stants, u- s .. 1 r. ci_ 'n! 

::.. ,C ' t at i:.C-"' r " ' 1. y st.r.S in, \n n.. t rit n 

r . :,. , n-?d. d ~n i c Cinj cut trans r'ts. 

I,-..''~y 

s*--oreh 

l reo 

bird ecc.cl y) 

, 

Le h eished .vo 1.5 :s 

.F1 of l ittoral tr nsr .c :: at a rrow, 

'rI h b 3.


SHELF 


P. 0. Box 1S08 



Project Title: Avifaunal Utilization of the Offshore Island Area 

Near Prodhoe Bay, Alaska 



Principal Investigator: George Mueller, Director 

Marine Sorting Center 

Institute of Marine Science 




The main objectives of the present study are to document: 

A. seasonal numerical changes by species and sex 

B. daily and seasonal trends in spatial distrubiton, by species and sex 

C. diurnal activity rhythms, by species and sex. 


None. 

III. Results 

None. 


None. 


Total 6 mos 

Budget Expended Remaining 

Salaries & wages 1,202.00 0 1,202.00 

Staff Benefits 204.00 0 204.00 

Equipment 0 0 0 

Travel 0 0 0O 

Other 1,850.00 0 1,850.00 

Total Direct 3,256.00 0 3,256.00 

Indirect 688.00 0 (88.00 

Total Cost 3,944.00 0 3, 944. 00 

329 

ENERGY PRO

MASSACHUSETTS AUDUBON SOCIETY 

CONSERVATION LINCOLN, MASSACHUSETTS 01773 - TEL. 617-259-9500 

EDUCATION 

RESEARCH 

October 31, 1975 

Herbert Curl 

OCSEAP 

NOAA Environmental Research Laboratories NOV 1 11975 

Boulder 

Colorado 80302 

Dear Herbert Curl, OFFICE 

I enclose copies of semi-annual reports for the period from 1 June 

through 30 September 1975, as outlined in the memorandum from Herbert 

E. Bruce, September 5, 1975. 

1) The period covered is entirely field work in Alaska. It is unlikely 

that I will be able to do any further work on collating and interpreting 

field data until the funding for my contract is clarified. The last 

communication I have was from Dave Friis in July. At that point he said 

funding was still not approved by Congress and that he had made $15,000 

available for me to finish the field season. 

As the accounts show, I estimate that I have already exceeded that $15,000, 

and the condition of this contract is that my salary and other expenses 

must be paid by the contract while I am working on it. 

2) Note that the figures I enclose here for the period running until 

30 June 1975 ($10,830) do not agree with the figure of $13,770.31 listed 

as expenses incurred in the accounting by Massachusetts Audubon Society 

business office on September 9, 1975. This discrepancy results from our 

business office's assigning several charges to the pre-June 30 period 

which should have been charged after July 1: (equipment, $1500; travel 

$750; salary, $1230) or which should have been charged to another account 

(travel, $287). There are other minor readjustments. 

The charges removed from the period up to 30 June 1975 are included in 

the figures for the first quarter of fiscal 1976. 

3) I have received some helpful communications from a NOAA OCSEP office 

at the University of Alaska. Among the notices were dates on which 

reports are due and proposals for work after September 1976 are due. Could 

you clarify for me what the relation of that Fairbanks office is to my 

contract and to the office in Boulder? 

4) There is going to be a meeting of the Pacific Seabird Group at Monterey, 

California, December 11-14 1975. That meeting offers an excellent chance 

for investigators involved in the NOAA OCSEP to discuss results and plans. 

331

Herbert Curl October 31, 1975 Page 2 

Do you know whether we might be able to get funds to meet expenses 

of attending that meeting? 

Thank you for your attention to these. If you want other materials 

from me, I trust that I will hear from you. 

Sincerely yours, 

William H. Drury 

Scientific Staff 

332

TO: NOAA, Environmental Research Laboratories 


Contract No. 03-5-022-77 

TITLE: Birds of Coastal Habitats on the South Shore of Seward Peninsula, 

Alaska: Semi-annual report; period 1 June to 30 September 1975 

Task 237: Breeding biology of seabirds 

Principle Investigator: William H. Drury 


Massachusetts and National Audubon Societies 

South Great Road 

Lincoln, Massachusetts 01773 


A. Review existing knowledge of the relation of seabird biology to 

local oceanographic conditions in the Bering Sea. 

B. Determine seasonal density, distribution, and breeding locale for 

principle seabird species. 

1. Establish species numbers and schedule of reproduction. 

2. Compare species and numbers at major seabird colonies; (for 1975 

at Sledge, Topkok, Bluff, Cape Denbigh, and Egg Island). 

C. Describe dynamics and trophic relations of selected species. 

1. Measure reproductive success (for 1975: Pelagic Cormorant, 

Glaucous Gull, Black-legged Kittiwake, and Common Murre). 

2. Determine where nesting seabirds feed and what food they bring 

to their young. 

3. Establish local distribution and abundance of prey species and 

identify factors contributing to local productivity. 

D. Predict the effects upon seabird populations, of contamination and 

disturbance associated with proposed mineral development. 


A. Field trip schedule 

June 4 - 15: at Nome, Alaska gathering field equipment and supplies; 

5 days coastal reconnaissance by automobile and on foot. 

333

TO: NOAA Environmental Research Laboratories Task 237 Page 2 

June 16 - 23: camping at Sledge Island and at the mouth of Cripple 

River, west of Nome, 1) making preliminary estimates and photo- 

graphic record of seabird species and numbers and 2) recording 

seabird use of coastal habitats. 

June 24 - July 2: at Nome gathering field equipment; four days 

coastal reconnaissance. 

July 2 - 14: at Bluff making preliminary census and photographic 

record of seabird numbers, and establishing study sites. 

July 19 - 27: at Sledge Island and camped on the beach west of 

Nome; further census and photographic record of seabird numbers; 

establishing study sites, and collecting food samples. 

July 27 - 31: at Nome; one day talking with other field party. 

August 1 - 22: at Bluff seabird cliffs gathering data at study 

sites; making reconnaissance trips by boat along shore and off 

shore; collecting food samples. 

August 18: air reconnaissance of seabird cliffs east of Nome. 

August 22 - 29: at Nome, held up by weather; two days reconnais- 

sance by truck. 

August 29 - Sept. 22: at Bluff continuing watches at study sites and 

monitoring seasonal changes in seafowl and waterfowl. 

Sept. I: air survey and photographing to compare reproductive per- 

formance of Kittiwakes at Sledge Island, Cape Denbigh and Bluff. 

Sept. 22 and 25: coastal reconnaissance by boat and airplane. 

Sept. 28: left Nome for Anchorage. 

All boat travel was by small boats owned by the project or in 

chartered aircraft. We made two half-day flights in U.S. Fish & 

Wildlife Service aircraft. We spent 35 days living in an old 

334

TO: NOAA Environmental Research Laboratories Task 23. 

office building at Nome, 15 days camping on the beach and 60 days 

living in abandoned miners' cabins. We moved twice in small air- 

craft and eleven times by small boat. 


William H. Drury: Massachusetts Audubon Society; Principle Inves- 

tigator; present 4 June - 28 September. 

Mary C. Drury: logistics; accounts and coordination of records at 

study sites; present 4 June - 11 August. 

Peter L. Drury: undergraduate: The Evergreen State College; field 

assistant; present 6 August - 24 September. 

John B. Drury: undergraduate; Lincoln Sudbury Regional High School; 

field assistant; present 4 June - 11 August. 

Hope Alexander: unsalaried photographer; all of her travel expenses 

were paid by grant from the National Audubon Society; present 

15 July - 11 August. 

Kate Brooks: unsalaried field assistant: all of her travel expenses 

were paid by private grant; present 22 June 15 July. 

Katherine Hazard: undergraduate; The College of the Atlantic, intern 

C. Methods 

program; unsalaried field assistant; present 20 July - 22 Sept. 

1. Surveys 

a. Air reconnaissance was made of the major seabird nesting areas 

on Egg Island, Besboro Island, Cape Denbigh, Rocky Point, 

Bluff, and Sledge Island as well as small groups of nesting 

seabirds in between. Surface censuses were made of the sea- 

bird nesting areas at Bluff, Topkok and Sledge Island. 

335


b. During travel attempts were made i) to identify and count 

species present and ii) to discover why the areas were 

being used. While camped during travel or at nesting 

cliffs, we made standardized 15 minute watches over the 

inshore waters. During these watches we recorded species 

present, their numbers, directions of flight, and feeding 

or other activities. 

2. Studies at Bird cliffs 

a. Censuses of the entire cliffs area were made by boat at 

different times of day and several times during the season 

(13 complete or partial censuses). During the period when 

eggs were being incubated, two complete photographic records 

of the cliffs at Sledge Island were made, and 1 complete 

record was made at Bluff. 

A photographic record was made of each study site at Bluff 

at 3 different times during the breeding season. 

b. Study sites were established (two at Sledge Island and 14 at 

Bluff) where repeated counts and observations of all species 

present were made. The purpose of the observations was to 

establish the sequence of events in the breeding schedule. 

Counts were made of nests, their contents and later in the 

season, the number of chicks that reached fledging age (that 

is, were ready to leave the nest.) (320 visits) 

Additional counts were made from a spot looking along the 

cliffs: of the birds at the cliffs, those flying to the 

cliffs, those flying away from the cliffs, those resting on 

the water, and those flying along the cliff face (23 counts 

at Bluff cliffs). 336


c. During each visit to the study sites, observations were 

made on birds seen carrying food or regurgitating it for 

their young. Special watches were made to look for food 

brought in, but it proved impractical this year to measure 

the time that individual birds were absent on feeding trips, 

or the frequency with which young were fed. 

Searches were made for food regurgitated for young and 

dropped on the ledges accessible from the beaches and lower 

cliffs (12 visits). 

d. At 5 study sites, maps of the nests of Kittiwakes were made 

and each nest assigned a number. The contents of each of 

these nests was recorded at regular intervals until the end 

of September (38 site visits). 

e. Maps of the location of individual Murres were made during 

August and a continuing attempt was made either to locate 

young or eggs or to locate adults in postures that indicated 

they were incubating an egg or brooding a chick. During the 

period when chicks were leaving the cliffs and going to sea, 

timed watches were made between sunset and dark at one site 

to count the number of chicks seen to leave a cove having 

about 150 meters of shoreline below the cliffs. 

f. Counts of the numbers of Puffins perched on cliff faces were 

made at the study sites and attempts were made to locate 

burrows where birds incubated or to which they brought food. 


Populations of nesting seabirds were estimated at Sledge Island, 

Topkok, Bluff, Square Rock, Rocky Point, Cape Denbigh, Besboro 

337


Island and Egg Island. Sixteen study sites, including 5 mapped 

sections, were sampled at Bluff. 

Seabirds fed widely dispersed over the whole of Norton Sound. 

Presence and activities of seabirds were recorded in the course 

of 63 15-minute watches from the beaches between Bluff cliffs on 

the east and Sledge Island on the west. Sampling localities are 

shown on the accompanying map. 


III. Results 

We spent parts of four days flying reconnaissance, made 26 trips 

in small boats, 20 trips censusing seabird cliffs by boat, 12 trips 

to cliffs collecting food samples, collecting a total of 48 fish 

samples. We carried out 63 15-minute watches for seafowl on the 

beaches. We made 320 visits to study sites including taking 17 

samples for clutch size and 38 checks of study areas where nests 

were mapped. 

We took 60 scattered samples of the proportion of adult Kittiwakes 

to chicks on the cliffs at Bluff to measure reproductive success 

outside of study sites. We made surveys during about 300 miles of 

small boat travel, 300 miles of road travel 1000 miles of recon- 

naissance in small aircraft and about 200 miles on foot. 

These mileages are for the party as a wholeApproximately half of 

the time 3 persons were involved in these watches and during the 

other half, 4 persons were involved. 

A. At the colonies 

1. Species: 

The table presents estimates of the numbers of breeding pairs 

338

TO: NOAA Environmental Laboratories Task 237 Page 7 

by species at breeding sites. It is clear that some species 

nest as a few individuals in widely scattered places while 

others aggregate into large "bazaars" of several different 

species. 

Identification of species for the Murres was done only at 

sample locations. At Sledge Island, about 1 in 10 was a Thick- 

billed Murre. The proportion was 1 in 3-5 on outer cliff faces 

and 1 in 30-50 on inner ledges. There were virtually no Thick- 

billed Murres on crowded broad ledges or tops of stacks. 

At Bluff less than 1 in 100 Murres were Thick-billed and all 

Thick-billed Murres occupied narrow outer ledges. 

2. Schedule: 

We were not at the colonies when birds came in the spring. Our 

first visit to Sledge Island in late June revealed that a small 

number (perhaps 20%) of the Kittiwakes were incubating and about 

10% of the Murres acted as though they might have eggs. It is 

local tradition that the peak of egg-laying is during the first 

week of July. 

On the third of July at Bluff, 40-507 of the Kittiwakes were 

incubating and about 207 of the Murres were closely attached to 

their ledge. 

Murre eggs began to hatch in late July and early August and Murre 

chicks began to leave by 10 August. Murres began to be restless 

by 15 August. Many left after a large storm on 25 August and al- 

most all were gone by 15 September. A few chicks left the cliff 

after 10 September. 

Kittiwake eggs hatched in early August and the first fledglings 

were on the'wing by September 1st. Many fledglingsleft the cliff 

339


to feed for themselves by 15 September but large numbers of 

Kittiwakes were still occupying territories on 25 September. 

Horned Puffins were incubating eggs on 4 July and at least one 

had hatched several days before 8 August. This chick had left 

by 18 September. After mid-August the number of Horned Puffins 

perched on ledges and inspecting crevices increased and the 

numbers reached a peak in mid-September. Cliff prospecting 

occurred when southerly winds made updrafts along the cliff 

faces. 

The numbers of Tufted Puffins visiting the cliffs also increased 

during September. 

Although both Puffins decreased markedly after 15 September, 

they had not deserted the cliffs on 22 September when we left. 

3. Trophic relations: measurement of reproductive success. 

Of the 16 study sites at Bluff, 9 included counts of Murres. 

We did not have a satisfactory method of measuring breeding 

success in Murres although we can say that between 20% and 40% 

of birds present in early August appeared to be incubating or 

brooding and that no more than 207. of the birds present appeared 

to produce large young. We have data on 125 mapped nests of 

Kittiwakes at 4 study sites. These and additional "samples of 

opportunity" supply an adequate sample to give clutch sizes at 

Bluff and Sledge Island. About half the nests contained 2 eggs; 

half the rest contained one egg and the remainder were empty at 

both gulleries. On average, nests produced one half a chick per 

nest and less than 5% of the nests produced 2 chicks to fledging. 

Twenty three "capriciously" selected samples taken along the 

340


cliffs at Bluff showed variation from .2 to .8 (1.0) young per 

nest and averaged .5 (.48), i.e., total 604 chicks in 1281 

nests sampled. (SEE TABLE 2) 

We have estimates of the number of breeding pairs and young 

produced for Glaucous Gulls at Topkok, Bluff, and three 

breeding colonies on islands in lakes seen during air recon- 

naissance. We also have estimates which will allow us to make 

up a life table for the gulls seen between Point Spencer and 

Bluff. These data will give us only approximate values 

because of difficulty a) in seeing all chicks and subadults 

present and b) estimating the relation between the number of 

adults and the number of nests at a breeding colony. 

We have counts of the number of young in successful nests of 

Pelagic Cormorants at Sledge Island and Topkok Head. These 

data are approximate because of the a) difficulty of deciding 

whether each consistently used ledge and its "flag" of guano 

constitutes a nesting attempt and b) the difficulty of estab- 

lishing from a dancing small boat whether any given nest plat- 

form has young lying flat on it. We made counts after the 

young were half the size of adults in order to minimize the 

chance of missing chicks. 

4. Identification of food: 

We have about 46 samples of fish collected on ledges where 

Murres and Kittiwakes nest, and several dozen identifications 

made by 40X telescope of food fish brought in my Murres. We 

have 6 samples of fish regurgitated by Kittiwake chicks. 

B. Away from colonies 

Our coastal watches showed the directions in which birds were flying 

341

TO NOAA: Environmental Research Laboratories Task 237 Page 10 

to and from feeding areas, 

1. Feeding mélées were of special interest (scores of Kittiwakes 

and Puffins gathered over schools of bait fish, together with 

Spotted Seals, Fin-back Whales or Dall Porpoises). In mid- 

July, we saw 4 feeding mélées off Sledge Island; in mid-August 

4-6 feeding mélées were to be seen on relatively calm days in 

the shallow water within a few miles of the barrier beach at 

Safety Lagoon. In mid-September on calm days, 4-8 feeding 

mélées could be seen within 3 miles of shore from east of 

Square Rock to Topkok Head. 

2. Kittiwakes and Puffins were observed to commute between the 

cliffs at Bluff and the feeding mélées. Before the feeding 

mélées were visible from Bluff, the major movement of Kittiwakes 

away from and back from the cliffs was along the beaches. We 

did not get enough observations of Puffins to chart their 

movements. 

3. Murres apparently "fanned out" in all directions southward from 

Bluff. Although some flew and returned from the southeast and 

south, the large majority appeared to fly toward 2150 magnetic. 

Skeins of scores of birds returned from that direction from as 

far as we could see with 16X binoculars. 

C. Air reconnaissance 

In June a reconnaissance flight was made along the south shore of 

Seward Peninsula from Nome to the Koyuk River (where the shoreline 

turns south). Small groups of nesting Glaucous Gulls, Pelagic 

Cormorants, and Horned Puffins were recorded at rocky headlands 

apart from the main colonies at Topkok, Bluff and Square Rock. 

342


Sheer rock faces 1) east of Chiukak and 2) west of Rocky Point 

supported perhaps 20 pairs of Pelagic Cormorants, 30 pairs of 

Glaucous Gulls and in one spot a group of less than 50 Black- 

legged Kittiwakes. There is a small colony of Glaucous Gulls 

and Pelagic Cormorants on Rocky Point and a somewhat larger 

mixed colony on Cape Darby. A small nesting group of Glaucous 

Gulls and Pelagic Cormorants is found on a sheer rocky face 

about 4 miles northeast of Cape Darby. 

In August a reconnaissance flight was made searching the shore 

from Cape Denbigh to Egg Island. A small group of nesting 

Horned Puffins was seen near Cliktarik Point and a group of 

Glaucous Gulls at Tolstoi Point. 

The rest of the bluffs on the east shore of Norton Sound are of 

unconsolidated sediments and unsuitable for crevice or cliff 

nesting seabirds, except for one spot north of Egavik. 

IV. Preliminary Interpretation: it is all right for these ideas to be 

discussed outside of the NOAA office provided that it is recognized 

that I may change my mind. 

A. Species density 

1. There were significant changes in the numbers of Murres (30,000 - 

60,000) and Horned Puffins (750 - 3000) at the cliffs from day 

to day and in response to changes in weather. There were less 

conspicuous changes in the numbers of Kittiwakes. These 

changes indicate that population figures must be derived from 

several samples and that a large amount of variation must be 

expected (compare Kenyon's estimate of breeding seabirds at 

Little Diomede). This also suggests that there may be impor- 

tant differences in numbers from year to year as was reported 

343


from the Cape Thompson bazaar by Schwartz. 

2. A few cliffs (Sledge, Bluff, Denbigh, Egg) are occupied by the 

great majority of nesting Murres and Kittiwakes of Norton 

Sound. There were other cliffs where a few Kittiwakes nested 

and several sites where small numbers of Pelagic Cormorants, 

Glaucous Gulls, and Horned Puffins nested. The significance 

of the lesser sites in the event of population disasters is 

not known but one presumes that the few primary colonies (in 

this case at Bluff and at Cape Denbigh) are critical to the 

persistance of seabirds in Norton Sound. 

3. Glaucous Gulls were found nesting scattered along the tops of 

rocky cliffs at Sledge, Bluff, Topkok, Cape Denbigh, Besboro 

Island, and Egg Island. These are their usual nesting sites. 

However, we also found three colonies on small grassy islands 

in coastal lakes. This type of nesting site is unusual for 

Glaucous Gulls and more characteristic of Glaucous-winged Gulls 

or Herring Gulls. This and other observations at Nome and at 

Eskimo fish camps, suggest that Glaucous Gulls in Norton Sound 

are a plastic population, well able to benefit by increased 

association with man. 

4. The breeding schedule of the seabirds at Sledge Island and Bluff 

conformed to the expected pattern. 

5. The departure of Murres from the cliffs appeared to be associated 

with early autumn storms. The species had abandoned the cliffs 

long before there was any probability of sea ice forming. Kitti- 

wakes and Puffins on the other hand were still visiting the cliffs 

in late September. The numbers of Kittiwakes and Puffins at the 

cliff in September were larger than those at the height of the 

344


breeding season. The reason for this is presumably that young 

birds are prospecting for potential breeding-sites the year 

before they will first breed. 

B. Species distribution 

1. Common Murres were much the more numerous of the two Murre 

species, which was not expected, because in general, Thick- 

billed Murres are more numerous in sub-Arctic waters. From 

the information available, it appears that Black-legged Kitti- 

wakes, the Murres and Horned Puffins are relatively uniformly 

distributed over the northern Bering Sea area. There seem, 

however, to be marked differences in the relative abundance of 

the two Murre species, the Common Murre being much more abundant 

in Norton Sound and the Thick-billed Murre being much more abun- 

dant in the Saint Lawrence Island to Bering Strait waters. More 

conspicuously, the three species of Auklets (Parakeet, Crested, 

and Least) are very much more numerous in the western waters than 

in Norton Sound. 

2. Sledge Island, although it has suitable scree slopes, lacks 

breeding Auklets, although Auklets of all three species visited 

it. The contrast between Sledge Island and King Island (the 

two islands are within sight of each other) was marked. King 

Island has hundreds of thousands of breeding Auklets. The 

presence of Besboro Island in easternmost Norton Sound, whose 

scree slopes appear to be ideal for nesting Auklets, makes the 

question of the distribution of Auklets more pressing. These 

observations on the several species of seabirds indicate that 

it will be important to confirm the numbers of Kittiwakes, 

345


Murres, and Horned Puffins breeding in the western part of 

the area, i. e. St. Lawrence Island and the Bering Strait. 

They also indicate that it will be important to understand 

why Sledge Island appears to lie in the influence of Norton 

Sound even though its weather and local ocean currents seem 

to make it belong in the Bering Strait group. 

C. Trophic Relations 

1. Murres fed both close to and at great distances from the 

cliffs but were conspicuous in their commuting long distances 

to the southwest. The Murres fed primarily on a blenny, a 

fish whose biology is little known. Kittiwakes and Puffins fed 

on a sand-eel or Capelin. They fed at long distances until 

shoals of their preferred fish moved east past Cape Nome and 

into the bight just south of the Bluff breeding area. 

2. We found it difficult to measure reproductive success in Murres 

or Puffins but measurement of success was easy with Kittiwakes. 

We believe we have developed a technique of photographing 

nesting cliffs from a small airplane in late August or early 

September which will allow us to assay the general success of 

a seabird cliff with perhaps only one visit, and that by air. 

A combination of measuring the proportion of chicks to adult 

Kittiwakes and measuring the growth rate of their sand-eel/ 

Capelin prey should provide straight forward measurement of the 

condition of the local marine trophic structure. 

D. Relation of trophic structures to geograpbic distributions (review 

of published material) 

Several sets of facts may be relevant to the marked difference in 

346


distribution of Auklets as compared to the Kittiwakes, Murres and 

Puffins. First the Kittiwakes, Common Murres and Puffins feed upon 

fish. Thick-billed Murres feed somewhat more frequently on zoo- 

plankton than do Common Murres. The three species of Auklets are 

primarily plankton feeders (Copepods, Euphausids and Amphipods). 

I can find little about the distribution and abundance of the 

primary bait fishes in the northern Bering sea, but according to 

material published in "The Oceanography of the Bering Sea", the 

distribution of zooplankton corresponds to the pattern I have 

outlined for the distribution of Auklets and predominance of 

Thick-billed Murres. Zooplankton is dense off the Pribilof 

Islands (a center of Auklet breeding) and in St. Lawrence Island 

waters, and is less than half as dense in the Norton Sound area. 

Further indication of rich biological productivity is given by 

the exceptionally high density of benthos in the Chirikov Basin. 

In the southeastern part of the Bering Sea continental shelf 

(Bristol Bay), it has been reported that zooplankton are much 

more abundant in the waters off shore with higher salinity and 

less abundant in the waters dominated by freshwater runoff. In 

that area apparently salmon smolt when they go to sea move rapidly 

through the low salinity areas and begin to feed where zooplankton 

density increases. It seems presumptuous to refer to Coho Salmon 

smolt as bait fish but Murres and Puffins are known to occur in 

large numbers in the same waters. 

E. Relevant aspects of physical and chemical oceanography (review of 

published material) 

The area of study, the northeastern continental shelf waters of the 

Bering Sea (including Norton Sound, the Chirikov Basin, and Saint 

347


Lawrence Island waters) is shallow. Norton Sound is, in general 

less than 10 fathoms deep (20 meters) and its waters are relatively 

warm, of low salinity; they have high partial pressure of CO 2 and 

are poor in nitrates. They are flooded with a large volume of 

fresh water coming out of the Yukon River whose flow is maximal 

during spring and summer months of peak biological activity. 

LANDSAT data shows a major pathway of suspended sediment transport 

directly from the delta of the Yukon northwestward past Sledge 

Island toward the Bering Strait. The heavy contribution of river 

water is indicated by the windrows of stumps, logs, and dead trees 

which mark the upper limit of storm waves everywhere along the 

treeless south shore of the Seward Peninsula. The waters flowing 

out of the basin in the Gulf of Anadyr north past the western end 

of St. Lawrence Island into the Chirikov Basin (despite the fresh 

water flowing out of the Anadyr River) are cold, more highly saline, 

of low partial pressure of CO 2 and are nitrate rich. The western 

side of the area has high primary productivity, 600 mg C/m 2 - day 

which is balanced by an increased contribution of deep source 

water rich in both nitrate and CO 2. 

In general there is an inverse relation between phytoplankton 

production (including the rate of nutrient uptake) and P CO 2 . 

There appears to be a very sharp drop in P CO 2 west of Nome 

(Gordon et al, 1973) along the line between Sledge Island and 

the eastern edge of St. Lawrence Island west of which is the 

sharp increase in numbers of Auklets. 

It is known that there is a peak of productivity and other 

biological activity at the edge of ice as the pack ice breaks up 

and retreats north in spring. It may be that the energy born in 

348


the oxygenated waters of the spring freshet coming out of the 

Yukon and Anadyr Rivers play an important part in Spring turn- 

over and the turbulent flow of the waters in this northern Bering 

Sea region. The thrust of fresh Yukon water mass can be expected 

to displace westward the cold saline water flowing out of the 

Gulf of Anadyr. One might expect the result to be two rather 

well defined water masses. The areas where these water masses 

meet and the ensuing turbulence should be highly productive. It 

has been noted elsewhere (Hardy's work in the Antarctic) that 

where fresh meltwater merges with upwelling cold salt water, high 

productivity occurs. Russians investigating the whaling grounds 

southeast of Cape Navarin have found that the whales gather where 

deep salt and surface fresh water masses sheer against each other. 

One expects seabirds to gather in such waters. 

One of the tasks of this project is to examine whether the more 

even distribution of fish eating Murres, Puffins, and Kittiwakes 

in contrast to the concentrated distribution of Auklets in the 

St. Lawrence Island waters, Chirikov Basin - Bering Strait area is 

coincidental or related to the characteristics of these water masses 

and their trophic structures in a cause-and-effect way. This dis- 

cussion implies, at a minimum, that the events in Norton Sound and 

off the Yukon River will have effects in the waters well to the 

west. If these speculations are valid, then any pollution, such as 

oil spills which may occur in the Norton Sound area and the area 

between Sledge Island and St. Lawrence Island, can be expected to 

contaminate the Chirikov Basin and flow north through the Bering 

Strait. 

349


F. Effects of development 

1. The seabird breeding colonies at Bluff appear to be critical 

to the existance of seabirds in Norton Sound. Although the 

birds may be able to rest in some neighboring portions of the 

present cliffs, it is unlikely that they can move to other 

cliffs. If experience elsewhere is valid, adults will not 

breed rather than shift to another site at any distance from 

the traditional ones. If the few bird bazaars which exist are 

disturbed by settlements or destroyed by mining, the seabird 

resource will be lost. 

2. Our observations are consistent with those of Tuck (1960) who 

remarked that native communities at the seabird bazaars of 

Digges Island, Akpatok etc., in the Canadian Eastern Arctic, 

which had once been thriving centers of Eskimo populations, 

are now abandoned. King Island was abandoned in 1966; Sledge 

Island was apparently not visited in 1975, and Bluff, where 

one site is called Akpuluit (native name for Murre or Akpa 

place) was visited only twice by eggers and they were collect- 

ing eggs as a delicacy. 

There may be nostalgia for some individuals, but it's hard at 

this stage of history to see how the seabird cliffs play any 

essential role in the Eskimos' economy. We can expect that with 

further development, the personal danger of fowling and egging 

will become symbolic vehicles for establishing one's manhood 

rather than a necessary ingredient for survival. With contin- 

uing economic development, the value of the birds' nesting on 

these cliffs will shift from a commodity category to an esthetic 

350


one, and the primary call of the native population on them will 

become complicated by the interests of a broadly concerned pub- 

lic. It has now been widely agreed that as development occurs, 

leisure time increases and hence awareness of recreation oppor- 

tunities; the financial value of wildlife resources rises 

sharply and continues to rise: vis. the much larger contribution 

to local economies of salmon caught by sports fishermen as com- 

pared to commercial fishermen. 

If, however, economic development stalls it may be that some 

segment of the native population will return to a subsistance 

economy, in which case bird cliffs will again play an important 

part. 

It would seem thus that land use and habitat planning for the 

Norton Sound, Saint Lawrence Island waters, Chirikov Basin, and 

Bering Strait should include guarantees for the healthy persis- 

tance of the seabird cliffs as a resource whose values must 

inescapably increase in the future. 

V. Problems: the most persistant problems of the 1975 field season involved 

equipment and travel. 

A. Because the road and ferry at Safety Lagoon were out of operation, 

we found much greater difficulty in getting to Bluff and back than 

we would have otherwise. A 4-wheel drive vehicle would have miti- 

gated these difficulties. 

B. The weather west of Nome resembles that of the Bering Strait and the 

sea if often rough and disturbed by current rips. One needs either 

a moderately sized boat or time to wait for the sea to go down. 

Travelling to Sledge Island in a small boat therefore may delay the 

351


trip for a week or 10 days. With a single party, such a delay 

prevents the gathering of data at important periods at other 

breeding cliffs. Therefore, we have decided that a resident 

party is needed at Bluff for 1976, and that a small travelling 

party will visit other sites. With such an arrangement, it may 

be possible to gather the information needed from colonies at 

King Island, St. Lawrence Island, etc. 

C. There may be serious problems of a place to live with access to 

fresh water at Bluff if the mining operation starts up in 1976 

as is now planned. I do not believe it will be practical to 

have a field party living next to a mining operation, but it may 

be possible to live in a valley mouth on the east end of the 

Bluffs. 

D. One major need is a technology for taking measurements of breeding 

success at several colonies efficiently. We found that taking 

photographs with a telephoto lens is a promising way to sample 

bird cliffs to measure reproductive success between colonies of 

Kittiwakes. A plane can fly quite close if the wind is "on shore." 

It would be very valuable to get these data for all seabird bazaars 

in the project area. To do this work safely one needs a small, slow, 

twin-engined plane. The most promising candidate is the Cessna 

push-pull twin-engined Sky Hawk. One of these operates for a 

missionary society around Nome and I intend to see if I can charter 

it. I already have an interested and able pilot. 

E. We need to have facilities to make transects of feeding areas and 

to sample the waters where the birds are feeding, for fish popula- 

tion. It would be an important contribution to our work if we 

3b2


could develop means for sampling the sand-eel/Capelin through 

the summer season to measure growth rate. Our Zodiac is excellent 

for local travel and for transportation in aircraft, but is not 

suitable for heavy work in any sort of seaway. Hopefully, as the 

fisheries research related to NOAA, OCSEP move into the area, we 

will be able to get data on small fish and on shelf waters less 

than 20 fathoms (40 meters). 

F. The germinal needs of this program, directed as it is to making 

baseline studies and preparing impact statements, are still not 

clear. We need data on species, their numbers, etc., at a given 

time; to fill this need we must carry out surveys. We also need 

to know how the biological community operates; to fill this need 

we must make detailed continuing studies at one site such as Bluff. 

It is not clear the degree to which it will be worth while 

(strictly from the point of view of OCSEP) to expend the effort to 

catch and band adequate numbers of birds at the cliffs as an example 

of the sort of field operations which would allow us to enter onto 

the next more sophisticated level of understanding (population turn- 

over, age structure, inter-colony movements, etc.) necessary for 

monitoring, unless a monitoring program is established. 

G. The most important issues are political, related to attitudes 

toward use of the shoreline, a) commodity orientation toward wild- 

life, b) opportunistic and exploitive approach to resources. The 

intrusion of high pressure, exploitive industries maintained by 

large subsidies from "outside" are the major force which will change 

the way of life of the people in the Norton Sound villages. Some 

353


individuals will profit and flourish. Others, the less aggressive 

but probably equally creative, will undoubtedly suffer. Attitudes 

toward the sea, land, and wildlife will change and unfortunately 

many attitudes will be imposed directly or indirectly from outside 

as they already have been. 

Although the immediate decisions will be political, the decisions 

will be better if based on knowledge. Biologists can not only 

play a direct part in the assessment of such impacts in the short 

term, but also can make fundamental contributions towards plans for 

what will be most needed in the long run. 

354


VI. Estimate of funds expended: both Tasks 237 and 238 

A. Period 20 May - 30 June, 1975 

Salaries 1 month WHD $1540.00 

Fringe benefits 1 month WHD 110.00 $1650.00 

Equipment 7200.00 

Travel 1225.00 

Other direct costs 65.00 

Food 690.00 

10,830.00 

B. Period 1 July - 30 September 

Salaries (estimated) $6950.00 

Fringe benefits (estimated) 450.00 $7400.00 

Equipment (accounted) 3400.00 

Travel (accounted) 4400.00 

Other direct costs (telephone) 

Food (accounted 2000.00 

Overhead 2500.00 

19,700.00 

19,700.00 

10 830.00 

30,550.00 

Note: book entry figures for the first quarter are not available. 

355

Samples of Kittiwake-nesting cliffs: Bluff, August, 1975

TO: NOAA Environmental Research Laboratories 


Contract No. 03-5-022-77 

TITLE: Birds of coastal habitats on the south shore of Seward Peninsula, 

Alaska: Semi-annual report; period 1 June to 30 September 1975. 

Task 238: Use of coastal habitats by waterfowl (including seabirds 

and shorebirds) 

Principle Investigator: William H. Drury 


Massachusetts and National Audubon Societies 

South Great Road 

Lincoln, Massachusetts 01773 


A. Review existing knowledge. 

B. Determine seasonal distribution and density of waterfowl on inshore 

waters and coastal lowlands; locate concentrations of waterfowl and 

make comparisons between regions, of types and intensity of use. 

C. Determine where, in inshore waters and coastal lowlands, the species 

are feeding. 

D. Predict impact of development (increase in human disturbance, roads, 

pollution, and alteration of habitat). 


A. Calendar 

June 4 - 15: at Nome; 5 days spent in coastal reconnaissance by 

auto and on foot. 

June 16 - 23: travel west of Nome; camping at the mouth of Cripple 

River and at Sledge Island; three days during which watches were 

posted on the beach and two days during which we traveled by 

small boat. 

June 24 - July 2: at Nome;four days coastal reconnaissance. 

July 2: trip by auto and small boat along the coast from Nome to 

Bluff (about 70 miles) including surveying for waterfowl. 

July 14: return trip by small boat and auto including surveying 

for waterfowl. 

359

July 15 - 19: at Nome; two days coastal reconnaissance. 

July 19 - 27: camped on the beach west of Nome and at Sledge 

Island, three days during-which watches on the beach were 

carried out and two days during which coastal reconnaissance 

by small boat was made. 

July 27 - 31: at Nome; one day coastal reconnaissance by auto 

August 1: trip by auto and small boat along the coast from Nome 

to Bluff including surveying for waterfowl. 

August 2 - 21: two days reconnaissance by small boat and two one- 

half day surveys by small aircraft. 

August 22: return trip from Bluff to Nome by boat and auto includ- 

ing survey for waterfowl. 

August 29: air reconnaissance between Point Spencer and Golovnin 

Bay. 

August 29 - Sept. 22: at Bluff, one half-day reconnaissance for 

waterfowl, one day reconnaissance by small boat. 

Sept. 22: trip by small boat and auto from Bluff to Nome. 

Sept. 23: reconnaissance of coastal area east of Nome by auto. 

Sept. 25: one half-day reconnaissance by small aircraft of area 

between Nome and Golovnin Bay. 

All boat travel was by small boats owned by the project, or in 

chartered aircraft; there were two half-day flights in a 

United States Fish & Wildlife Service aircraft. 

We spent 35 days living in an old office building at Nome, 15 days 

camping on the beach, and six weeks living in abandoned miners' 

cabins. We moved twice in small aircraft and eleven times by 

small boat. 

360



William H. Drury: Massachusetts Audubon Society; Principle Inves- 

tigator; present 4 June - 28 September. 

Mary C. Drury: logistics; accounts and coordination of records at 

study sites; present 4 June - 11 August. 

Peter L. Drury: undergraduate; The Evergreen State College; field 

assistant; present 6 August - 24 September. 

John B. Drury: undergraduate; Lincoln-Sudbury Regional High School; 

field assistant; present 4 June - 11 August. 

Hope Alexander: unsalaried photographer; all of her travel expenses 

were paid by a grant from the National Audubon Society; 

present 15 July - 11 August. 

Kate Brooks: unsalaried field assistant; all of her travel expenses 

were paid by private grant; present 22 June - 15 July. 

Katherine Hazard: undergraduate; The College of the Atlantic; in- 

C. Methods 

tern program; unsalaried field assistant; present 19 July - 

22 Sept. 

1. Air reconnaissance of the coastal region was made between Saint 

Michael on the south, around the east coast of Norton Sound to 

Cape Spencer on the northwest part of the Seward Peninsula. In 

this coastal region, marshes, lagoons, river estuaries and lakes 

within about ten miles of the coast were surveyed, 

Surface reconnaissances were made of the Teller area, Cape Woolley 

area, an area between 10 - 15 miles west of Nome and the area 45 

miles long from Cape Nome to Bluff. 

361

TO: NOAA ENVIRONMENTAL 

RESEARCH LABORATORIES TASK Page 238 4 

2. During these reconnaissance visits, species present were iden- 

tified; individuals were counted and interpretations made as to 

the uses of the area by these species and individuals. 

In addition (during reconnaissance travel or while camped at 

nesting areas) standardized 15 minute watches were made of the 

inshore waters recording species and numbers present, directions 

of flight, and feeding or other activity. 


1. Air reconnaissance of the coastal lowlands, lagoons and beaches 

between Point Spencer on the northwest and Egg Island - Saint 

Michael on the southeast. 

Surface visits to the coastal area at Teller, the Cape Woolley 

Lagoons, the coastal lakes between Cripple River and Sinruck 

River, the mouths of the Snake and the Nome Rivers, and the 

shoreline from Nome eastwards as far as Bluff. 

Surface visits to rivers crossed by the roads to Teller north- 

west of Nome, and the Kugarok Road north of Nome. 

Small boat travel between Sledge Island and Nome and eastward to 

Square Rock east of Bluff. 

2. On all these trips, we kept on lookout for numbers and kinds of 

waterfowl. We gave special air and surface attention to Safety 

Lagoon, the mouth of Bonanza River and the lagoons between Bon- 

anza (Solomon) and Topkok. 

E. Date Collected 

We spent parts of 6 days flying reconnaissance, made 26 trips in 

small boats, 14 coastal and inland reconnaissances in auto, and 

carried out 63 fifteen minute watches for seafowl. 

362


III. Results 

We made surveys of waterfowl during 200 miles of travel by small 

boat, 520 miles of travel on roads, 750 miles of air travel and 

180 miles on foot. 

A. Surface Reconnaissance 

1. The standardized watches and observations made during travel 

supply reliable data on species present and numbers at the times 

of observation. These data have already indicated, however, 

that variation is high. 

a) The species occurring in small numbers may vary widely from 

spot to spot and from day to day. 

b) The numbers of individuals in flocks vary widely so th.. the 

precision of our counts is much greater than is necessiry to 

establish expected usage. 

Thus we can be confident of the occurrence and abundaice of the 

common species. However, the presence of many wandering 

individuals of less common species and the large variation in 

flock size indicated that only general statements are suppor- 

table. 

2. Sample size (number of sample watches and reconnaisance trips). 

Many areas were visited too few times to allow us to do more 

than to make general statements about the use of !e area by 

water-fowl. Some areas are used heavily in mid to late September 

but were very little used in June. A lagoon that .s crowded with 

waterfowl when its water level has dropped because it has been 

drained may be devoid of birds if the water level rises to the 

usual shore lines. 

383

3. Some of our data are not representative because we only learned 

of important areas late in the season. We learned that certain 

areas, often of small area1 extent, get unusually heavy usage. 

During other years these places will need to be visited more 

frequently. 

4. We have data from a few visits at a few times during the summer 

for the fresh water areas visitable by car between Teller and 

Safety Lagoon. These include Teller, Woolley Lagoons, Sinruck 

River to Washout on Safety Sound, Bonanza River and Taylor Lagoon. 

B. Air Reconnaissance 

1. We have made only one reconnaissance of the shore line of Norton 

Sound. That visit was in mid-August to September. We have more 

than half a dozen air transects at low altitude of Safety Sound 

and these suggest that the general pattern found on one survey 

is consistent, even though details change. 

2. We have counts of waterfowl including cranes, ducks, geese, 

swans, and gulls from the air. The identification of these is 

reliable with the exception of separating the small sized 

Canada Geese from Brant and the identification of some species 

of diving ducks in eclipse plumage. We have some counts of 

shorebirds but species identifications in many cases are not 

reliable. We have sample counts of age groups by plumage types 

for gulls and swans. The age samples among gulls is imprecise 

because of a) difficulties in counting large milling flocks, 

and b) the tendency for gulls to flock together by age groups. 

Because gulls do flock by age groups one needs a sample over a 

wide area to get a true age sample. We are not sure that Norton 

Sound is a large enough area. 

361


IV. Interpretation 

A. Distribution 

1. We found that river mouths were very important gathering areas 

early in the season as the sea ice was melting.River mouths 

continued to attract aggregations of ducks and gulls throughout 

the season. 

2. The meandering lower reaches of silt-laden rivers attracted 

gulls, ducks and especially shorebirds late in the season 

during autumn migrations. 

3. Lakes and lagoons that had been drained as a result of over- 

flow and subsequent stream erosion during spring meltwater 

runoff, attracted large numbers of shorebirds, ducks and gulls 

all during the summer. 

.4. The shallow waters just offshore from barrier beaches were 

visited by sea ducks much more frequently than the rest of the 

shore line. 

We interpret these observations as indicating that a certain 

limited number of areas are of disproportionate importance to 

waterfowl occupying the coastal areas. The areas where water- 

fowl gather change in the course of each season and because of 

the accidental nature of the geological features that made them 

attractive, (i.e. a) melt water runoff cutting through a barrier 

beach and b) offshore wind lowering sea level hence exposing 

extensive mud flats in estuaries), an important element of 

chance enters into the distribution of waterfowl. As a result 

one can say that small areas will assume great importance at 

any given time, but one cannot predict which areas will be

important, nor how many are necessary so that "on odds;' enough 

areas will be in suitable condition to fill the needs of water- 

fowl populations at any one time. One presumes, for example, 

that a lake bed kept drained so as to be attractive to water- 

fowl would be soon "over fished" and would need to lie under 

water for several years for populations of food species to 

build up. 

B. Human Use 

1. Our observations suggest intense local use of waterfowl gath- 

ering areas by Eskimos or Eskimos with white companions. The 

clearest correlation on our air and surface reconnaissance was 

that all wildlife was very sparce in a zone around all human 

settlements. 

2. It is not surprising that many native traditional camping areas 

occur where waterfowl might be expected to be numerous. After 

all, Eskimos formerly depended on waterfowl for part of their 

food. 

3. If intense human use continues as areas available for water- 

fowl decrease, one can expect declines in local waterfowl pop- 

ulations. 

4. At present, exploitation by Eskimos appears to be unlimited. 

Furthermore, exploitation appears to be heavier by those 

affluent Eskimos who work in Nome and have trucks, several 

outboard motors and many firearms rather than those Eskimos 

who have a subsistence economy. Thus the special priviledges 

of native use, which has been justified in terms of the needs 

of subsistence economy, appears in fact to becoming an indul- 

gence for an elite group for whom hunting is recreation. 

366


5. Hopefully there need not be a conflict between native rights 

and management based on biological studies. Biological studies 

are needed to establish what cropping local populations can 

sustain and what protection is necessary. Once this information 

is available political decisions can be made as to what social 

groups have the priviledge of using a given resource and for 

what purpose: commodity, esthetics, subsistance, tourist income, 

etc. 

V. Problems 

A. Transportation 

1. The small size of boats allowed us to travel only under favorable 

conditions. Bad weather prevented our making several trips and 

the associated transects for waterfowl. 

Some remote areas could have been accessible if we had a larger 

4-wheel drive truck; for instance, the road along Safety Lagoon 

was washed out during most of the summer. This fact reduced the 

number of visits we could make to it. A poor road leads to 

Woolley Lagoons hence we could get there only once. 

2. Other committments: our work at seabird cliffs was given prece- 

dence and hence interfered with survey work on coastal waters 

and lagoons when travel to the lagoons was difficult. 

3. During this summer we learned of new places and new waterfowl 

uses. Hence our surveys did not give them adequate attention. 

4. We learned of the small boat channels through Safety Lagoon 

late in the season. Hence we were not able to get to many areas 

which deserve attention earlier in the season. 

B. Recommended solutions: the best solution of some of these difficul- 

ties will be to have two field parties in 1976, one to carry out 

367

TO: NOAA Environmental Research Laboratories Task 

seabird breeding studies at Bluff, and the other to be a traveling 

party. This will allow more time to take advantage of favorable 

weather. 

It has been predicted that the roads and ferry at Safety Lagoon 

will be in operation in 1976. If so, our transportation should be 

adequate. However, we may be again handicapped by lack of a 

4-wheel drive vehicle. Unfortunately a 4-wheel drive vehicle is a 

very expensive commodity in Nome. 

VI. Estimated funds expended: see accounting in Task 237. 

368

RU 239 

"Ecology and Behavior of Southern Hemisphere Shearwaters 

(Genus Puffinus) and other Seabirds, when over the Outer 

Continental Shelf of the Bering Sea and Gulf of Alaska 

during the Northern summer" 

M. T. Myres & 

Juan Guzman 

Univ. of Calgary 

Report not received in Boulder office; to be forwarded 

when received. 

369

DEPAIITMENT OF FISH AND GAME / 

JAY S. HAMMOND, GOVERNOR 

/ 1300 COLLEGE ROAD 

FAIRBANKS 99701 

November 17, 1975 RECEIVED 

RECEIVED 

NOV 2 4 1975 

Gunter Weller 

NOAA/OCS Project Office OFFICE 

Elvey Building (Geophysical Institute) 


Fairbanks, AK 99701 

Dear Dr. Weller: 

I have enclosed a copy of the semi-annual report on Research Unit 330/196 

"The distribution, abundance and feeding ecology of birds associated with 

the Bering Sea and Beaufort Sea pack ice." 

The State will probably be submitting another copy through official 

channels. 

Sincerely, 

Georg J. Divoky 

Seabird Biologist 

Division of Game 

Enclosure 

371

Semi-annual Prugress Report 

Project No. RD002-R7120815 (2521) 

Research Unit 330/196 

The distribution, abundance and feeding ecology of birds associated 

with the Bering Sea and Beaufort Sea pack ice. 


The proposed research addresses i:: part the following tasks 

identified in the Draft Study Plan "Environmental Assessment 

of the Gulf of Alaska, Southeastern Bering Sea and Beaufort 

Seas": 

A-4 - Summarize and evaluate existing literature and unpublished 

data on the distribution, abundance, behavior, and food 

dependencies of marine birds. 

A-5 - Determine the seasonal density distribution, critical 

habitats, migratory routes, and breeding locales for principal 

marine species in the study areas. Identify critical species 

particularly in regard to possible effects of oil and gas 

development. 

A-6 - Determine the dynamics and trophic relationships of 

selected species at offshore and coastal study sites. 

A-31 - Determine the relationship of living resources to the 

ice environment (including the edge of the drifting ice, land 

fast ice and inner pack ice) on a seasonal basis in the Bering, 

Chukchi and Beaufort Seas. 

II. Field activities 

Dates Location Activity 

16-30 May DISCOVERER Pelagic observations and 

Seward to Adak and specimen collecting. 

(Bering Sea) Divoky 

24-27 June Barter Island Waiting for Fish and 

Wildlife plane to arrive 

for offshore aerial census. 

Plane did not arrive. Some 

land based observations 

made. Divoky and Boekelheide 

30 June- Cooper Island Observe breeding activities and 

23 July via helo and migration. Divoky and 

float plane Boekelheide. 

372

30 July- USCGC GLACIER Pelagic observations. 

13 August Nome to Barrow Divoky and Boakelheide. 

(Chukchi Sea) 

13-29 August USCGC GLACIEIR Pelagic observations. 

off Barrow Boakelheide. 

22-28 August Anchorage Waiting for good weather 

for P2V .Beanfort Sea flight. 

Flight scrubbed. Divoky. 

1-5 September Cooper Island Observe breeding activities and 

(via float plane) migration. Boekelheide. 

6-18 September Barrow Observe migration. 

Divoky and Gibson. 

28 September- Barrow Wait for BURTON ISLAND. 

21 October Mission scrubbed. Divoky 

B. Principal Investigator: George J. Divoky 

U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service 

Alaska Department of Fish and Game (currently) 

Field Assistants: Robert Boekelheide 

U. S. Fish and Wildlife 

C. Methods. 

Daniel D. Gibson 

University of Alaska. 

Pelagic observations - observations are made from the flying 

bridge while the ship is underway during daylight hours. Observations 

are made for at least 30 minutes each hour (two 15 minute intervals). 

Observations at stations are made at irregular intervals. Birds 

are identified to species, counted, ages determined when possible 

and their activity (flying, sitting on water, sitting on ice, etc.) 

is noted. Detailed notes on behavior are taken when warranted. 

Oceanographic and meteorlogical data are obtained from the ships 

log. Data on ice type and cover is gathered by the bird observer. 

Transect observations are used to derive density figures on a km 2 

basis. Station observations provide relative numbers but not 

densities. 

Breeding activities - this activity was conducted primarily at 

Cooper Island. On Cooper Island all nests were located and marked. 

Dates of laying, hatching and fledging were obtained whenever 

possible. All chicks were weighed at least once and banded. A 

primary part of the breeding work was to ascertain where adult 

birds were obtaining food. This was done by conducting watches of 

movements of adult birds. Detailed data on feeding was obtained 

whenever possible. During these watches data was also obtained on 

migration. 

373

Migration observations - numbers, movements and feeding activity 

of migrant birds were observed whenever possible. This was frequently 

done incidentally to other land-based work but some information of 

birds per unit time were obtained. 

Specimen collecting - birds were colLacted with a shotgun. 

Stomach contents were preserved in formalin and the bird's body 

frozen for later examination. Some colection of zooplankcon was 

conducted to observe densities of pray. 


Positions for DISCOVERER Cruise 

58° 24' 167° 14' 

58° 13' 167° 12' 

58° 01' 166° 57' 

57° 52' 166° 39' 

57° 48' 166° 36' 

57° 41' 166° 32' 

57° 48' 166° 47' 

57° 52' 166° 48' 

57° 44' 166° 51' 

57° 43' 167° 01' 

57° 49' 167° 02' 

57° 47' 167° 08' 

57° 42' 167° 10' 

57° 36' 167° 11' 

57° 31' 167° 09' 

57° 25' 167° 10' 

57° 21' 167° 10' 

57° 20' 167° 07' 

57° 25' 167° 12' 

57° 30' 167° 16' 

57° 35' 167° 21' 

57° 40' 167° 24' 

57° 44' 167° 27' 

57° 49' 167° 26' 

57° 43' 167° 27' 

57° 38' 167° 29' 

57° 33' 167° 26' 

57° 28' 167° 28' 

57° 24' 167° 28'

22 May 570 38' 1670 29' 

570 33' 1670 26' 

570 28' 1670 28' 

570 24' 1670 28' 

570 20' 1670 27' 

570 24' 1670 32' 

570 30' 1670 33' 

570 32' 1670 36' 

570 37' 1670 41' 

23 May 570 44' 1670 46' 

570 47' 1670 44' 

570 48' 1670 44' 

570 53' 1670 50' 

570 57' 1670 56' 

570 52' 1680 14' 

570 430 1680 13' 

570 43' 1680 13' 

570 38' 1680 23' 

24 May 57' 37' 1690 19' 

580 47' 1690 17' 

580 50' 1690 19' 

580 45' 169° 18' 

580 41' 1690 18' 

58° 35' 1690 17' 

25 May 580 29' 1690 19' 

580 25' 1690 21' 

580 20' 1690 19' 

580 25' 1690 23' 

580 30' 1690 28' 

580 37' 1690 33' 

580 40' 1690 34' 

580 45' 1690 38' 

58° 42' 1690 30' 

26 May 580 40' 1690 38' 

580 35' 1690 39' 

580 30' 1690 39' 

580 25' 169* 39' 

580 20' 1690 38' 

580 15' 1690 38' 

570 50' 1690 40' 

570 31' 1700 00' 

570 12' 1690 53' 

27 May 570 01' 1680 59' 

560 31' 1670 55' 

560 00' 1660 51' 

560 35' 1650 57' 

560 06' 1640 54' 

550 29' 165" 50' 

540 58' 1660 44' 

540 18' 1670 36' 

Location of Cooper Island 

170 14N, 155° 41W 

375

Positions (noon) for GLACIER Cruise 

30 July 640 20'N, 1660 12'W 

31 July 650 17'N, 1680 45'W 

1 August 680 28'N, 1680 11'W 

2 August 700 OO'N, 1670 35'v; 

3 August 700 41'N, 1670 11'W 

4 August 710 19'N, 1650 26'.T 

5 August 70° 26'N, 1630 10'W 

6 August 700 04'N, 163S 1.5'W 

7 August 690 46'N, 168° 01'W 

8 August 700 40'N, 1640 46'W 

9 August 70° 23'N, 1630 00'W 

10 August 70° 32'N, 1610 44'W 

11 August 700 20'N, 1640 16'W 

12 August 70° 45'N, 1590 55'W 

13 August 70° 52'N, 1590 37'W 

14 August 700 52'N, 1590 37'W 

15 August 70° 52'N, 1590 37'W 

16 August 700 52'N, 1590 37'W 

17 August 700 58'N, 158° 47'W 

18 August Off Barrow 

19 August 71° 20'N, 1560 44'W 

20 August 71° 17'N, 1560 49'W 





25 August 710 29'N, 1560 20'W 


DISCOVERER Cruise 

Number of 15 minute transect observations 104 

Number of station observations 30 

Specimens collected: 

Black-legged Kittiwake 4 

Glaucous-winged Gull 6 

Glaucous Gull 1 

Cooper Island 

Number of hours of observations of 

movements of migratory and breeding birds 110 

Nests studied: 

Arctic Terns 51 

Black Guillemot 18 

Oldsquaw 9 

Sabines Gull 4 

376

Specimens Collected: 

King Eider 2 

Oldsquaw 4 

Black-legged Kittiwake 1 

Glaucous Gull 1 

Acetic Tern I 

GLACIER Cruise 

Number of 15 minute transect observations 489 

Number of station observations 1.5 

In addition to the above fild work a literature sarch has been 

initiated on topics relating to bird-ice relationships. 

III. Results 

Data collected is still on field forms and summary sheets. Due to 

the intensive and extensive field season that has just ended, no processing 

of the data has yet been accomplished. 

IV. Preliminary interpretation of reults (not to go outside project 

office). 

DISCOVERER Cruise - no large concentration of birds was found at the 

edge of the ice as has been reported for the winter months. Birds were 

more common deep in the ice than in the loose ice at the ice front. 

Black-legged Kittiwakes and Glaucous-winged Gulls were the most abundant 

species in or near the ice. Observations made during the last days of 

the cruise showed that a diverse assemblage of birds was associated with 

a warm water plume flowing north through Unimak Pass. 

Cooper Island - observations of Arctic Terns breeding on Cooper 

Island showed that during the pre-laying and incubation period birds are 

feeding on insects from tundra ponds. Only when the chicks hatch (which 

occurred at the.same time that leads started forming around the island) 

do adults obtain their food from the sea. Hatching and fledging success 

was high for all species on the island. 

GLACIER Cruise - observations made while the ship steamed north 

past King Island, Fairway Rock and Cape Lisburne provided information on 

the locations and movements of feeding flocks. Bird densities in the 

Chukchi Sea were lower than densities obtained in the Bering Sea reflecting 

the lower surface temperature and lessened productivity of the Chukchi. 

The extreme ice conditions in the Chukchi prevented many Bering Sea 

species from summering as far north as they normally do. No observations 

were made in the Beaufort due to heavy ice conditions. 

Suggestions for more effective integration and coordination 

While there has been a good effort to coordinate the bird 

studies on the Alaskan OCSEP program there has been no attempt to 

377

coordinate the projects studying a given region or system. A meeting 

should be held on Beaufort Sea projects and Principal Investigators 

could see how to best integrate their studies. A similar meeting should 

be held for ice related studies. Future research should then be modified 

to enhance other people's data. No effort has been made along these 

lines and it is badly needed. Specific questions about specific systems 

need to be answered and a major interdisciplinary effort is needed to 

accomplish this. There should also be a major effort to standardize 

data with all bird studies using a common coding format whenever possible. 


While most cruises are for the gathering of "classical" oceanographic 

data, ornithologists should be consulted during the preparation of 

cruise tracks and cruise objectives so that they are not at the mercy of 

other scientists. There is a need for much better coordination at sea 

among the biologists on board ship. If large numbers of birds are seen 

in one area a zooplankton/fish biologist should be ready to do a tucker 

trawl to compare prey densities with other areas. 

VI. Estimate of expenditures 

FY75 Expenditures: 

Salaries 

$4,500.00 

Travel and transportation 

Per diem 

300.00 

Air fare 850.00 

Equipment and supplies 1,600.00 

Total Expenditures $7,400.00 

FY76 Expenditures: 

[FORMULA] 

Salaries: 

George J. Divoky $3,780.00 

Robert Boekelheide 2,044.00 

Travel and Transportation 

Per diem 

Air fare 

1,000.00 

700.00 

Supplies (expendible items) 400.00 

Miscellaneous expenses 

Total Expenditures 

378 

500.00 

$7,724.00

RU 337 - "Seasonal Distribution and Abundance of Marine Birds" 

RU 338 - "Photographic Mapping of Seabird Colonies" 

RU 339 - "Review and Analysis of Literature and Unpublished 

Data on Marine Birds" 

RU 340 - "Migration of Birds in Alaskan Marine Waters Subject 

to Influence by OCS Development" 

RU 341 - "Feeding Ecology and Trophic Relationships of Alaskan 

Marine Birds" 

RU 342 - "Population Dynamics of Marine Birds" 

RU 343 - "Preliminary Catalog of Seabird Colonies" 

Calvin Lensink & 

James Bartonek & 

other USFWS personnel 

Reports still in preparation; will be forwarded when received. 

379

FISH, PLANKTON, BENTHOS, LITTORAL

FISH, PLANKTON, BENTHOS, LITTORAL 

Research 


5/303 H. M. Feder The Distribution, Abundance, 389 

IMS/U. of Alaska Diversity, and Productivity of 

Benthic Organisms in the Bering 

Sea 

6 A. G. Carey The Distribution, Abundance, Diver- 393 

Oregon State U. sity, and Productivity of the 

H. M. Feder Western Beaufort Sea Benthos 


7 A. G. Carey Summarization of Existing Litera- 395 

Oregon State U. ture and Unpublished Data on the 

Distribution, Abundance, and Life 

Histories of Benthic Organisms of 

the Beaufort Sea 

19 Ronald Regnart Herring Spawning Surveys - Southern 407 

ADF&G Bering Sea 

23 Jerry McCrary Yakutat Bay Benthos Study 409 

ADF&G 

24 Rod Kaiser Razor Clam Density and Distribution 411 

ADF&G 

27 Loren B. Flagg Kenai Peninsula Study of Littoral 413 

ADF&G Zone 

58 G. C. Anderson A Description and Numerical 493 

Ronald K. Lam Analysis of the Factors Affecting 

Dept. of Ocean. the Processes of Production in the 

U. of Wash. Gulf of Alaska 

64 W. T. Pereya Review and Evaluation of Historical 499 

M. 0. Nelson Data Base on Non-Salmonid Pelagic 

NMFS/NWFC Resources of the Gulf of Alaska 

Shelf and Slope 

78 S. T. Zimmerman Baseline Characterization: Littoral 511 

T. R. Merrell Biota, Gulf of Alaska 

NMFS/Auke Bay 

Fisheries Lab. 

79 S. T. Zimmerman Baseline Characterization: Littoral 511 

T. R. Merrell Biota, Bering Sea 

NMFS/Auke Bay 

Fisheries Lab.

FISH, PLANKTON, BENTHOS, LITTORAL - Continued 

Research 


156/ T. S. English (a) Plankton of the Gulf of Alaska- 605 

164 Dept. of Oceano. Ichthyoplankton 

U. of Wash. 

D. M. Damkaer (b) Plankton of the Gulf of Alaska- 609 

PMEL Initial Zooplankton Investigations 

J. D. Larrance (c) Phytoplankton of the Gulf of Alaska 617 

PMEL 

R. T. Cooney (d) Zooplankton and Micronekton in the 621 

IMS/U. of Alaska Bering-Chukchi/Beaufort Seas 

Vera Alexander (e) Phytoplankton Studies-Bering Sea 625 


174 W. T. Pereyra Baseline Studies of Demersal 629 

L. Ronholt Resources of the Northern Gulf of 

S. Hughes Alaska Shelf and Slope 

NMFS/NWFC 

175 W. T. Pereyra Baseline Studies of Demersal 633 

J. E. Reeves Resources of the Eastern Bering 

R. G. Bakkala Sea Shelf and Slope 

NMFS/NWFC 

233 Rick Furniss Beaufort Sea Estuarine Fishery 643 

ADF&G Study 

281 H. M. Feder The Distribution, Abundance, Diver- 647 

IMS/U. of Alaska sity and Productivity of Benthic 

Organisms in the Gulf of Alaska 

282/ H. M. Feder A Summarization of Existing Litera- 653 

301 IMS/U. of Alaska ture and Unpublished Data on the 

Distribution, Abundance, and Productivity 

of Benthic Organisms of 

the Gulf of Alaska and Bering Sea 

284 Ronald Smith Food and Feeding Re! tionships in 657 

IMS/U. of Alaska the Benthic and Deme sal Fishes of 

the Gulf of Alaska and Bering Sea

FISH, PLANKTON, BENTHOS, LITTORAL - Continued 

Research 


285 J. E. Morrow Preparation of Illustrated Keys to 661 

Dept. of Biological Skeletal Remains and Otoliths of 

Sci. Forage Fishes - Gulf of Alaska and 

U. of Alaska Bering Sea 

318 J. E. Morrow Preparation of Illustrated Keys to 663 

Dept. of Biological Skeletal Remains and Otoliths of 

Sci. Forage Fishes - Beaufort Sea 


348 J. E. Morrow Literature Search and Data Conver- 665 

Dept. of Biological sion on Density Distribution of 

Sci. Fishes of Beaufort Sea 


349 T. S. English Ichthyoplankton 667 

Dept. of Ocean. 

Univ. of Wash. 

354 W. T. Pereyra Review of Literature and Archive Data 669 

Paul T. Macy for Non-Salmonid Pelagic Fishes of 

NMFS the Eastern Bering Sea 

356 A. C. Broad Littoral Survey of the Beaufort Sea 683 

Western Wash. 

State Col. 

359 T. S. English Beaufort Sea Plankton Studies 685 

Dept. of Ocean. 

U. of Wash.



P. O. BOX 1808 . 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 .. 


Project Title: The Distribution, Abundance, Diversity and 

Productivity of Benthic Organisms in the 

Bering Sea 

Contract Number: 03-5-022--56 

Task Order Number 15 R.U 5/303 

Principal Investigator: Dr. Howard M. Feder 

Professor of Marine Science 




A. Qualitative and quantitative census of dominant species 

within oil lease sites. 

B. Description of seasonal and spatial distribution patterns, 

with emphasis on assessing patchiness and correlation 

with microhabitat. 

C. Comparison of species distribution with physical, chemical, 

and geological factors. 

D. Observations of biological interrelationships in benthic 

biota of the study area. 


A. Ship schedules and names of vessels 

1. 5/15/75 - 6/20/75; R/V Discoverer 

2. 8/16/75 - 10/24/75; R/V Miller Freeman 


1. R/V Discoverer 

Dr. H. M. Feder - Leg II, P.I., U of A 

Mr. Eric Knudtson - Legs I, II; Technician (temp.) 

Mr. Karl Baflinger - Leg 

II, Technician, U of A 

2. R/V Miller Freeman 

Mr . Max lloberg - Legs 1, Ill: Technician, U of A 

Mr. Robert Roark - Legs 1, II; Technician (temp)

C. Methods 

-2- 

1. Field sampling: 6 - 10 Van Veen grabs are taken at 

each station. Exact number of samples is determined 

by consideration of time allowance and by field 

observations on substrate, sample volume, and between 

sample organism variance. Samples are screened to 

isolate biological materials, and fixed in a formalin 

solution for transport to the U of A. 

A separate sediment sample to be used for sizefrequency 

analysis is taken from one of the series 

of grabs. 

One hour tows were made at predetermined station 

locations using an otter trawl. Non-commercially 

important invertebrate species were sorted, weighed 

and counted, identified or assigned a type number 

and an aliquot sample of most species preserved in 

10% buffered formalin for later detailed examination. 

Fish stomachs were obtained from selected species. 

Selected species were collected and frozen for the 

Hydrocarbon and Heavy Metal Programs. 

2. Laboratory analysis: Samples are taken to the Marine 

Sorting Center at the University of Alaska for processing. 

Sorting Center services involve final taxononic 

analysis and biomass determinations. Results will be 

computer-sorted and ranked by station in accordance 

with 5 criteria for biologically important specie- 

(see Feder and Mueller, 1972). In addition, the 

Shannon-Wiener and Simpson diversity indices will be 

computed for each station. 

D. Sample Locations 

1. See attached map for stations occupied on the Discoverer 

cruise (stations 0-69 actually occupied). 

2. Station locations for the later cruise of the R/V Miller 

Freeman have not yet been returned from the field. 

E. Data Collected or Analyzed 

least 5 grabs 

1. For R/V Discovered cruise, all stations represented by at 

390

111. Results 

-3- 

2. For R/V Miller Freeman cruise, Leg I, at least 28 

stations; are represented by at least 3 grab samples, 

Eghty-six trawl stations were occupied on the first 

leg of the Miller Freeman cruise. 

Resuls from the Marine Sorting Center for samples taken on the 

R/V Discoverer cruise should be made available by January 1, 

1976. At present, analysis of about 40 stations has been 

completed . Data from the R/V Miller Freeman cruise will not 

be released from the Sorting Center until later next year. Trawl 

material is till stored on the Miller Freeman. 

IV . Preliminary Interpretation 

None at this time. 

V. Problems Encountered, Recomended Changes 

Serious problems of priority have arisen relative to the use 

of the Miller Freeman. The Benthic- Invertebrate grab 

program was apparently relegated to a minor role i] the 

general scientific program. The original understanding involved 

a 50/50 use of shiptime with the National Marine 

Fisheries Service. This should be resolved for next field 

season . The cooperative effort with the National Marine Fisheries 

Service trawl program was most satisfactory, It was possible, 

a result as 

of this cooperation, to collect much more than 

was originally anticipated. I would recommend a continuation 

of this cooperative 

effort, but suggest 

that more 

planning be attempted next year in order to have a broader 

coverage of the OCS lease area. 

VI . Estimate of Funds Expended 

(6 months) 

Total Budge Expended Remaining 

Salaries & wa&.''- 4(, 516. 00 

1 4 ,2J , 6 31, 99 1,l 

Stlaf't beInefits 7,854.00 2, .i78 . , 475f .: 

F:qulip ent 3 00. 00 1 ,? 1 ; 

2,? ' 

'.i'ravel 

.4 500.00 .3, 1; . ( :1 . 

OIler ( , 300 )00 '1, l1.'0 ) , J . 

.1d , 11 eDl I 1 , "0 ' , , ' . 

331


1 April - 30 November 1975 

NOAA/BLM Alaskan Outer Continental Shelf Energy Program 

Contract No. 03-5-022-68, Task Order No. 5 

Title: The distribution, abundance, diversity, and productivity of the 

western Beaufort Sea benthos. 

Principal Investigator: Andrew G. Carey, Jr. 

School of Oceanography 

Oregon State University 

Corvallis, Oregon 97331 

393 

Andrew G.Carey, Jr 

Principal Investigator 

Date: 12 Dec 75

During the report period we have organized and started a new effort on 

the ecology of Beaufort Sea benthic fauna. Since the acquisition of funds 

in August 1975, we have evaluated and purchased basic field and laboratory 

equipment, hired and trained qualified personnel, attempted three field 

efforts on the Beaufort Sea continental shelf. 

Quantitative Smith-McIntyre grab, otter trawl, and bottom photography 

surveys during the summer of 1975 in coastal waters and along the continental 

shelf were cancelled because of unusually heavy ice conditions. A research 

assistant was put aboard the U.S. C.G.C. GLACIER for 6 days, but the cruise 

was cancelled. Coastal work aboard the R/V NATCHIK was cancelled owing to 

the transportation problems for the vessel. 

Seasonal quantitative grab sampling successfully got underway in October- 

November 1975. Fourteen quantitative Smith-McIntyre grab samples were collected 

on Transect I off Pitt Point in the western portion of the study area (Table 1). 

The quantitative samples were washed through 0.42 mm square aperture sieves 

preliminary to laboratory processing and analysis. Two additional samples 

were collected for sediment and meiofaunal analyses. Equipment and techniques 

were developed and successfully tested for cutting a 4 foot square hole 

through the ice,for lowering and raising the 0.1 m 2 Smith-McIntyre grab 

through the ice in continental shelf depths, and for washing the samples. 

It was concluded that helicopter-supported seasonal field trips on the ice are 

feasible. 

The grab samples are now being processed, sorted, identified, and enumerated 

in the laboratory at Oregon State University. 

Table 1. Samples collected during fieldtrip OCS 1. 

394



NOAA/BLM Alaskan Outer Continental Shelf Energy Program 

Contract No. 03-5-022-68, Task Order No. 4 

Title: Summarization of existing literature and unpublished data on the 

distribution, abundance, and life histories of benthic organisms 

of the Beaufort Sea. 

Principal Investigator: Andrew G. Carey, Jr. 

School of Oceanography 

Corvallis, Oregon 97331 

395 

Andrew G. Carey, Jr. 

Principal Investigator 

Date: 12 Dec 75

Progress Report 


During this period we have accelerated some projects already underway 

and initiated other aspects. A literature search for data and references 

pertaining to benthic fauna in the Beaufort Sea and adjacent areas has been 

started, and extensive correspondence with benthic ecologists and taxonomic 

specialists is underway. We have increased efforts to analyze past samples 

and photographs collected by Oregon State University in the western Beaufort 

Sea during the U.S. Coast Guard WEBSEC (Western Beaufort Sea Ecological Cruise) 

series in 1971 and 1972. After receipt of NOAA/BLM funds in August 1975, 

personnel were hired, equipment evaluated and purchased and necessary space 

acquired to undertake the research outlined in this contract. The evaluation 

of laboratory and data analysis techniques, the acquisition of appropriate 

equipment, and the training of personnel have involved significant amounts of 

time. 

The following progress has been accomplished to date for the various 

objectives of this research contract: 

(1) Species List. 

The list of benthic invertebrate species from the Beaufort Sea is being 

accumulated from Oregon State University's previous research in the area, 

from the literature, and from data reports (see Appendix I). Species names 

have been sent to George Mueller at the University of Alaska for coding. 

Species identification are being verified as much as possible by systematic 

specialists (Appendix II). Arrangements have also been completed for a 

1 1/2 month visit of Gordon Bilyard (OSU Ph.D. candidate) with Dr. Kristian 

Fauchild of the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California. 

G. Bilyard is working with the systematics and ecology of polychaetous 

annelids from WEBSEC-71 samples; he will work up polychaetes from the present 

field effort. We will arrange such visits for research assistants and students 

working with other taxonomic groups to ensure quality control. 

Table 1. Taxonomic specialists cooperating with the OSU Beaufort Sea benthic 

program. 

Crustacea 

Gammarid amphipods 

Cumacea 

Jorge Castillo 

University of Concepcion 

Dr. Jean Just 

University of Copenhagen 

Dr. Jorge Castillo 

nivers of Concepcion 

Mollusca 

Gast opoda Jame: 

.Los Ai 

Lean 

es County Museum 

Pelecypoda 

. FranK Bernard 

Fisheries Research Board Canada 

396


Amphineura Amelia Scheltema 

Woods Hole Oceanographic Inst. 

Echinodermata 

Ophiuroidea Michael A. Kyte 

University of Washington 

Holothuroidea Robert S. Carney, Jr. 

Oregon State University 

Dr. David Pawson 

Smithsonian Institution 

Annelida 

Polychaeta Dr. Kristian Fauchild 

Allan Hancock Foundation 

Pisces Don E. McAllister 

National Museum of Canada 

We are continuing to organize and add specimens to an appropriately 

indexed benthic invertebrate reference museum within the Oregon State University 

School of Oceanography. 

Data Analysis 

The analysis and delineation of species distributions and abundance 

patterns, the determination of the natural variability of the fauna, and the 

analysis of benthic communities are continuing. Several techniques for multivariate 

data analysis of species groupings and faunal-environmental correlations 

are under study. 

An appropriate data format has been developed for benthic data, and 

data are being entered and filed in anticipation of appropriate statistical 

analyses. 

397 

2

BEAUFORT SEA SPECIES CODE 

398

BEAUFORT SEA SPECIES CODE

BEAUFORT SEA SPECIES CO3E 

.400


401


402


403


404

BEAUFORT SEA SPECIES CODE

RU 19 

"Herring Spawning Surveys - 

Southern Bering Sea" 

Ronald Regnart 


Work has not begun -- no report at this time. 

--4 7

RU 23 

"Yakutat Bay Benthbs Study" 



409

RU 24 

"Razor Clam Density & Distribution" 



411

PROGRESS REPORT 

AN ECOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT OF THE 

LITTORAL ZONE ALONG THE OUTER 

COAST OF THE KENAI PENINSULA FOR 



P. 0. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 ....... 

STATE OF ALASKA, DEPARTMENT OF FISH & GAME 

EO DAMES & MOORE 

AN JOB NO: 6797-002-20 

413

State of Alaska 

Department of Fish and Game 

Homer, Alaska 

Attention: Mr. Loren Flagg 

Gentlemen: 

Anchor Point, Alaska 


Progress Report 

An Ecological Assessssent of the 

Littoral Zone Along the Outer Coast 

of the Kenai Peninsula for 

State of Alaska, Department of Fish & Game 

We submit herewith a copy of the first progress report for Outer 

Continental Shelf studies on the Outer Kenai Peninsiila. This report contains 

the quantitati e data and qualitative descriptions obtained during 

the reconnaissance survey to that area during the summer of 1975. On the 

basis of this reconnaissance, we selected Koyuktolik Bay and lagoon, Chugach 

Bay and Port Dick as the sites for continued iiitensive study during the remainder 

of this program. The major problem oncountered, as anticipated, was 

the effect of weather and oceanographic conditions on the accessibility and 

workability of this remote, rugged area. 

It has been a pleasure assisting you on this project. We are looking 

forward to continued investigations in this interesting, pristine region. 

DCL:RJR:RHW:sed 

Enclosures 

Yours very truly, 

DAMES & MOORE 

Dennis C. Lees 

Senior Marine Biologist 

Richard J. Rosenthal 


R. H. Winn 

Managing Pr inciilpal -Anchiorage 

414

SECTION 


List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 

PAGE 

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. . . . ii 

List of Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... i 

Task Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. .. 2 

ield Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . 2 

Field trip schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Scientific party . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. 2 

Methods . . . . . . . . .... . . ... . .. . . . . . .. . 2 

Sample localities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 

Data collection and analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 

Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . .. . . 9 

General description of the areas examined at Koyuktolik Bay 9 

General description of the areas examined at Chugach Bay. . 19 

General description of the locations examined at E. Chugach 27 

General description of the area examined at Port Dick . . 36 

Preliminary Interpretation of Results . . . . . . . . .... .44 

Literature Cited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 45 

415


FIGURE TITLE PAGE 

1 Location map of the southern Kenai Peninsula . . . . . 4 

2 Mussel bed study site, Koyuktolik Bay. . . . . . . ... 10 

3 Comparison of size distributions at different 

levels in the mussel bed along the entrance 

channel to Koyuktolik Lagoon, Sept. 9, 1975 . .... .17 

4 Comparison of biomass, density and individual 

size estimates for mussels near seaward 

margin of mussel bed in entrance channel to 

Koyuktolik Lagoon, September 9, 1975 . . . . . . ... 18 

5 Chugach Bay study site . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 20 

6 Port Dick study site . . . .. ... . . .. .. . 37 

4.16

LIST OF APPENDICES 

APPENDIX TITLE 

A Relative coverage (%) by major species in three levels 

near seaward edge of mussel bed in entrance channel 

to Koyuktolik Lagoon, 9/9/75 

B Coverage by Fucus distichus and Mytilus edulis in a 

Fucus covered area near the E. end of the outer 

mussel bed at Koyuktolik Bay, 9/9/75 

C Size distributions for mussel samples near seaward 

edge of mussel bed in entrance channel to Koyuktolik 

Lagoon, 9/9/75 

D Distribution of some* macrophytes at Sea Otter Point, 

Chugach Bay, 9/11 and 9/12, 1975 

E Distribution of some* invertebrates at Sea Otter Point, 


F Quadrat data (1/4 sq m) from Sea Otter Point area, 


H Feeding and size data for asteroids from the Sea Otter 

Point area, Chugach Bay, 9/12/75 

I Macrophytes observed at East Chugach Island, 8/1/75 

J Invertebrates observed at East Chugach Island, 8/1/75 

K Fishes and mammals observed at East Chugach Island, 

8/1/75 

L Species composition and distribution at the head of 

West Arm, Port Dick, 7/31/75 

M Evasterias troschelii size-frequency distributions 

from samples collected on 7/31/75 at Port Dick 

417


TABLE TITLE PAGE 

1 Organisms observed in outer Koyuktolik Lagoon, 9/9/75 12 

2 Macrophytes observed growing in mussel bed and entrance 

channel to Koyuktolik Lagoon, 9/9/75 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 

3 Animals noted in mussel beds and entrance channel to 

Koyuktolik Lagoon, 9/9/75 . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 14 

4 Summary of size distribution data for mussels near 

seaward margin of mussel bed in entrance channel to 

Koyuktolik Lagoon, 9/9/75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 

5 Biomass, density and mean individual wet weight data 

for mussels near the seaward margin of mussel bed in 

entrance channel to Koyuktolik Lagoon, 9/9/75 . ...... . 16 

6 Density of some dominant macrophytes in the vicinity 

of Sea Otter Point, Chugach Bay, 9/11 and 9/12, 1975 . . . . 23 

7 Approximate distribution of observed invertebrates by 

feeding type at Chugach Bay, 9/11 and 9/12, 1975 . . . . .. . 24 

8 Density estimates (indiv./sq m) of some echinoderms 

in the vicinity of Chugach Bay, 9/11 and 9/12, 1975 . . . . 28 

9 Summary of prey items of asteroids in the Sea Otter 

Point area, Chugach Bay, 9/12/75 . . . . . . . . . ... . 29 

10 Summary of asteroid feeding from Sea Otter Point 

area, Chugach Bay, 9/12/75 . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .30 

11 Size distributions of the most abundant asteroids at 

Sea Otter Point, Chugach Bay, 9/11 and 9/12, 1975 . . . . . 31 

12 Size data for Musculus sp. collected from blades of 

laminarian kelp at Chugach Bay, 9/11 and 9/12, 1975 . . . . 32 

13 Approximate distribution of observed invertebrates 

by general feeding type at East Chugach Island, 

8/1/75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . ... . . . .34 . 

14 Size distribution for Musculus sp. from east end of E. 

Chugach Island, 8/1/75. Substrate was Pleurophycus 

gardneri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 35 

418

LIST OF TABLES (continued) 

TABLE TITLE PAGE 

15 Abundance data for Evasterias troschelii in mussel bed 

at Port Dick. Samples from 25 x 1 m quadrats . . . . . ... . 39 

16 Feeding data from head of West Arm, Port Dick, 

7/31/75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . .. . . . .40. 

17 Size-frequency data for the starfish Evasterias 

troschelii for Port Dick, 7/31/75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 

18 Approximate distribution of observed invertebrates by 

feeding type at the head of West Arm, Port Dick, 

7/31/75 . . . ... . . . . . . ................ . 43 

419

I. TASK OBJECTIVES 

The main objective of this study is to assess some of the marine 

plant and animal communities in intertidal and adjacent shallow subtidal 

areas along the southern or outer Kenai Peninsula. This is to be accomplished 

by: 

(1) gathering baseline information on species composition and 

relationships within supporting "characteristic" biotic 

assemblages; 

(2) recording seasonal changes within the habitats; and 

(3) collecting information leading to an understanding of the 

ecological functions within these assemblages, including 

data on population structure, food web relationships, and 

factors influencing distribution and abundance. 

The objective of the initial survey was to conduct a reconnaissance into 

the area assessing the distribution of biotic assemblages, accessibility 

and logistical requirements at various locations. This information was to 

assist in the selection of study sites. 

420

Field Trip Schedule 

II. FIELD 

The reconnaissance survey was conducted from July 30 to August 5 

and September 9-12, 1975. The M. V. Humdinger was chartered out of 

Cordova for those periods. 

Scientific Party 

Methods 

The scientific party included: 

(1) Richard J. Rosenthal, Dames & Moore, senior biologist; 

(2) Dennis C. Lees, Dames & Moore, senior biologist; and 

(3) Thomas Rosenthal, diving technician. 

The mode of operation in the field was to combine qualitative and 

quantitative techniques in such a manner as to obtain a general idea of the 

organisms and functional relationships characteristic of each site surveyed. 

This involved making random "nature walks" through the habitats, examining 

large quadrats (25 m by 0.5, 1, or 2 m) for density estimates of macroalgae 

and large invertebrates such as starfish or gastropods, medium-sized quad- 

rats (0.25 sq m) for species composition and coverage estimates of smaller 

algae, encrusting and epifaunal forms, and small quadrats (1/16 sq m) for 

density estimates and size distributions of extremely dense organisms such 

as mussels and certain macrophytes (e.g., Zostera marina). 

421

Laboratory analysis was limited to measuring size and/or wet 

weight of certain organisms to allow examination of size distributions at 

the study sites. The measurement used for starfish is the radius (milli- 

meters) of the animal from the center of the mouth to the tip of the longest 

ray. For pelecypods, shell length is used. Where weights have been recorded, 

only whole wet weights of complete samples have been obtained. However, we 

intend to develop a dry tissue weight-length regression curve for the 

species measured. 

Sample Localities 

The survey was conducted in 12 specific locations at 5 general 

sites (Figure 1). These are listed below: 

(1) Koyuktolik(Dogfish) Bay and lagoon 

(a) gravel beach and spit at east end of bay 

(b) mussel bed on north side of entrance channel to lagoon 

(c) subtidal portions on entrance channel 

(d) outer lagoon 

(e) inner lagoon (eelgrass bed) 

(2) Port Chatham complex 

(a) ocean-facing sand and gravel beach west of Chrome Bay 

(b) Chrome Bay 

(c) Port Chatham 

422

LOCATION MAP 

OF THE SOUTHERN KENAl PENINSULA

(3) Chugach Bay - southern point and coves 

(4) East Chugach Island 

(a) kelp bed off sand spit at west end of island 

(b) kelp bed at east end of island 

(c) subtidal area at extreme eastern end of island 

(5) Port Dick - mud flats, eelgrass bed and upper basin at the 

head of West Arm 

Data Collection and Analysis 

The data collected are presented as table and appendices to this 

report. Analysis has been very limited to date as a consequence of field 

schedules for summer and fall surveys. Analyses will be completed during the 

winter when no survey is scheduled. 

Types of Samples 

(1) Koyuktolik Bay - outer mussel bed 

(a) 1/16 sq m mussel collections for density, size structure 

and biomass - 6 

(b) 1/4 sq m quadrat casts for cover and algal species 

composition - 40 

(c) Surveyed the dimensions of the outer mussel bed 

(d) Qualitative diving observations of the inner and outer 

lagoon and the lagoon entrance 

424

(2) Chugach Bay 

(a) 25 x 2 m quadrats for macroalgal density - 2 

(b) 25 x 1 m quadrats for macroalgal density - 1 

(c) 25 x 1 m quadrats for echinoderm abundance - 5 

(d) 1/4 sq m quadrats for species composition and coverage - o 

(e) 1/4 sq m quadrats for macroalgal density - 7 

(f) size data for 12 asteroid, 1 sea urchin, and 1 pelecypod 

species 

(g) specific feeding data for sea otters and asteroids 

(h) general food web data 

(i) preliminary species inventory 

(3) East Chugach Island 

(a) size data for 1 pelecypod species 

(b) general food web data 

(c) preliminary species inventory 

(4) Port Dick 

(a) 25 x 1 m quadrats for asteroid density - 2 

(b) 25 x 1 m quadrat for size data of Evasterias 

troschelii - 1 

(c) 1 sq m quadrat for size data of Evasterias troschelii - 1 

(d) specific feeding data for asteroids 

(e) preliminary food web data 

425

Intended Use for Size and Density Data 

Several types of quantitative data may be collected for some 

conspicuous species apparently occupying important roles in the natural 

economy of each study site. These include relative abundance (density- 

number of individuals per square meter), and some measurements of linear 

size (length, width, aperture width, etc.) and weight (wet or dry weight 

of soft tissue). These data will assist in describing variations in con- 

ditions at the study sites and will permit examination of differences 

between them. Specifically, we want to be able to compare population 

structure among different areas, or at the same site under different con- 

ditions, and to generate accompanying biomass estimates for selected spe- 

cies at the study sites. These data will provide information on temporal 

variations in population structure at specific sites and allow assessment 

of the effects of unnatural phenomena. 

We will employ several statistical techniques in data analysis. 

Size-frequency data will be compared with the Kolmogorov-Smirnov two- 

sample test (Siegel, 1956). Differences in density and biomass data gen- 

erally will be compared using the Student's t-test or analysis of variance 

methods (Sokal and Rohlf, 1969). Most of the biomass data will be recon- 

structed by using the size-frequency data in conjunction with site-specific 

size-weight regressions. This will only produce first approximations but 

in view of the nature of the study and the poor understanding of the quali- 

tative features of the various systems, it appears that the major portion 

of our initial efforts would be more usefully spent in general endeavors 

such as describing species composition and the natural relationships (e.g., 

predator-prey and other trophic relationships). 

426

Population structure will be examined using a series of equations 

based on Brody-Bertalanffy growth curves (Ebert, 1973). This method, espe- 

cially applicable to survey work, uses easily gathered size data to produce 

useful first approximations of growth and mortality rates, and also generates 

a life table. The parameters required for computation are the means of the 

size distributions from two large samples (300 measurements; the means must 

closely estimate the parametric mean for the sampled population), times of 

sample collection relative to the time of "recruitment" in the sampled popu- 

lation, and maximum (asymptotic) size attained by the species at the collect- 

ing site. 

427

III. RESULTS 

Results from each study site are discussed separately. Tables, 

figures and associated appendices are included. Because of the reconnais- 

sance objectives of this survey, the discussion of results will be general. 

General Description of the Areas 

Examined at Koyuktolik Bay 

The areas examined at Koyuktolik Bay can be separated into four 

basic habitats, namely (1) the inner lagoon, (2) the outer lagoon, (3) the 

subtidal entrance channel, and (4) the intertidal entrance channel (Figure 

2). Although the bay and entrance channel are exposed to considerable wave 

action from lower Cook Inlet, the lagoon areas are well protected. All but 

the inner lagoon are washed regularly by strong tidal currents. 

Only a tiny fraction of the extensive inner lagoon was examined; 

however, it appears that much of it is probably exposed on a minus tide. 

The flat substrate is fine silty sand or sandy silt with little shell debris 

but considerable organic debris. The portion examined was completely dom- 

inated by eelgrass with leaves up to 2 m long. Invertebrates were generally 

inconspicuous. Chum salmon, dolly varden, and tomcod were the only fishes 

observed. Sea otters and several species of waterfowl were observed feeding 

in the inner lagoon. 

The outer lagoon is somewhat deeper and considerably less exten- 

sive, corresponding roughly with the area where the lagoon rn rows down to 

form the entrance channel. Sediments are flat .: pently s ,ing clean sand 

and gravel with a moderate amount c shell debris; large cobbles are scat- 

tered throughout, frequently acti.ý as substrate for macrophytes. The flora 

428

MUSSEL BED STUDY SITE 

KOYUKTOLIK BAY

of this area is characterized by the mixture of brown and red algae and 

eelgrass; macrophyte density is greatly reduced from the inner lagoon (Table 1). 

Alaria sp. was the dominant alga; Nereocystis was common. Another feature 

making this area distinctive was the presence of numerous invertebrates 

such as clams and tubicolous polychaetes. Small clams of several species 

were abundant. Fish were uncommon (Table 1). 

A periwinkle, Littorina sitkana, was the only herbivore observed, 

but large numbers were feeding mainly on Fucus distichus. Suspension feed- 

ers, primarily the clams, Astarte sp., Clinocardium nuttalli and Saxidomus 

giganteus and an unidentified tubicolous polychaete appeared to be the 

dominant feeding type. Predators were uncommon. 

The entrance channel is about 50 m wide and has a maximum 

depth of about 3 m at high tide. The sides are terraced. The substrate is 

composed of coarse sand, gravel and small cobbles. 

Vegetation of the subtidal portion was dominated by Laminaria 

groenlandica and Alaria fistulosa in the deeper portions and by Schizymenia 

sp. and Porphyra spp. in the shallower areas (Table 2). Invertebrates and 

fish were not conspicuous (Table 3). 

Vegetation of the intertidal portion was dominated by Fucus 

distichus, Laminaria groenlandica and Spongomorpha sp. A mussel, Mytilus 

edulis, strongly dominates and structures the habitat. At least two extremely 

large beds exist in the entrance channel where they act to consolidate and 

stabilize the gravel deposits. The main predators observed were glaucous- 

winged gulls, surf scoters and sea otters. 

430

Table 1. Organisms observed in outer Koyuktolik 

Lagoon, September 9, 1975. 

431

Table 2. Macrophytes observed growing in mussel bed and 

entrance channel to Koyuktolik Lagoon, 

September 9, 1975 

432

Table 3. Animals noted in mussel beds and entrance 

channel in Koyuktolik Lagoon, September 9, 

1975. 

433

Table 4. Summary of size distribution data for mussels near 

seaward margin of mussel bed in entrance channel to 

Koyaktolik Lagoon, September 9, 1975. 

434

Table 5. Biomass, density and mean individual net weight 

data for mussels near the seaward margin of 

mussel bed in entrance channel to Koyaktolik 

Lagoon, September 9, 1975. 

435

COMPARISON OF SIZE DISTRIBUTIONS AT DIFFERENT LEVELS IN THE 

MUSSEL BED ALONG THE ENTRANCE CHANNEL TO KOYUKTOLIK LAGOON, 9/9/75

437 

FIGURE 4

Size, biomass and density data were collected and are presented 

in Tables 4 and 5 and Figures 3 and 4, but are too preliminary to estimate 

the reliability of the emerging patterns. 

Preliminary indications are that the systems examined here are 

highly productive. The inner lagoon appears to have high primary produc- 

tion and also acts as a collection basin for detrital material from a 

considerable terrestrial watershed. The clam and mussel beds appear to 

utilize an appreciable portion of these materials. Several terrestrial and 

marine vertebrate species use both the eelgrass and mussel resources for 

food. Time has not permitted examination of the benthos in Koyuktolik Bay, 

but it seems reasonable to suspect the existence of a well-developed faunal 

assemblage based mainly on suspension feeding organisms. 

A through C. 

Additional information and raw data are presented in Appendices 

General Description of the Areas 

Examined at Chugach Bay 

At Chugach Bay, we examined six areas ranging in depth from inter- 

tidal to 23 m; most attention was given to areas between 6 m and 13 m 

(Figure 5). The entire area examined is fairly well-protected from wave 

activity on the Gulf; however, the elevation of drift logs on the beach 

indicates that the area occasionally receives heavy wave action. Since the 

mouth of Chugach Bay is relatively broad, tidal currents are not particularly 

magnified, and so current velocity is moderate. 

438

CHUGACH BAY STUDY SITE

Near the southern point of Chugach Bay ("Sea Otter" Point) the 

shore is fringed with a moderately dense Nereocystis bed. The shoreline 

consists of a series of small rocky headlands interspersed with small gravel 

coves about 50 meters wide. The transition from beach to spruce forest occurs 

in just a few meters. 

Several food webs dominated by vertebrates are in close association 

in this area. A raft of at least 100 sea otters has been consistently 

observed in the outermost cove on the point during marine mammal surveys.by 

Alaska Department of Fish and Game. Land otter slides and basking sites were 

observed on the adjacent beaches. Evidence of predation by seagulls in the 

intertidal zone was conspicuous on the rocky headlands. Furthermore, evidence 

of eagle predation on sea gulls was observed. An active eagle nest is located 

above one of the headlands. Harbor seals used the exposed rocks as hauling 

sites. 

Dive No. 1 was conducted north of the tip of Sea Otter Point at 

the base of a talus ridge running about 50 meters north from the point and 

marked near its outer limit by,a rock outcrop that is awash on a minus tide. 

The remainder of the ridge is approximately 10 m deep. Dive No. 3 was con- 

ducted on top of this ridge between the outcrop and the point. A group of 

at least 50 otters was rafted in the cove immediately inshore of the point 

(Raft Cove) before both dives. Depths examined during Dive No. 1 ranged 

from 10 m to 13 m. At 13 m, the bottom consists of large open patches of 

gravel and widely scattered, large boulders; the gravel contains a large 

quantity of shell debris (mollusk shells, sea urchin spines and test frag- 

ments, bryozoan skeletons, etc.). To the east is the talus slope of large 

440

oulders forming a rock pile extending into the low intertidal zone. Bottom 

relief ranged to 1.5 m with some of the larger boulders. 

The general appearance of the area of Dives No. 1 and 3 was dom- 

inated by a high understory of Laminaria groenlandica and Pleurophycus 

gardneri on the rocks and rock pile and the large gravel patches at the 

base of the slope (Table 6). The brittlestar Ophiopholis aculeata, with 

arms extended into the current from gravel, crevices, etc., was one of the 

more conspicuous invertebrates. Others included,the bryozoan Microporina 

borealis and hydroids of the genus Abietinaria. Starfish of several 

species were common. Greenling species were the most commonly observed 

fish. 

The invertebrate fauna was strongly dominated by suspension feeders, 

especially bryozoans, tunicate and hydroids (Table 7). Large herbivore 

species were relatively uncommon. Predator species, particularly asteroids, 

were also frequently encountered. Three of the more important predators 

in the area, excluding fish, were the sea otter and the starfish Pycnopodia 

helianthoides and Orthasterias koehleri. Sea otters appeared to have turned 

over a considerable number of large boulders in pursuit of prey items. 

Dive No. 2 was conducted off the inner (west) point of the sec- 

ond cove in 14 m of water. The bottom was composed of a coralline encrusted 

bedrock and abundant boulders from 0.75 m to 1.75 m in diameter. 

In general appearance, the rocky substrate was partially obscured 

by a vegetative understory of Agarum cribrosum and Laminaria groenlandica and 

a low understory of Constantinea sp. Most conspicuous invertebrates were a 

bryozoan, Microporina borealis, a small mussel, Musculus sp., and a soli- 

tary ascidian, Boltenia villosa. 

441

Table 6. Density of some dominant macrophytes in the 

vicinity of Sea Otter Point, Chugach Bay, 

September 11 and 12, 1975 

442

Table 7. Approximate distribution of observed 

invertebrates by feeding type at Chugach 

Bay, September 11 and 12, 1975 

443

Suspension feeders dominated the invertebrate fauna (Table 7). 

A single large herbivore, the green sea urchin, Strongylocentrotus 

drobachiensis was common. No particular predator was especially conspicuous. 

Dive No. 4 was conducted northeast of the tip of Sea Otter Point 

at the base along the side and top of a rocky finger extending eastward from 

the point. It was the most exposed location examined at Chugach Bay. Depth 

of the area examined ranged from 13 m to 23 m. The top and side of the ridge 

are basically solid rock with small cracks and channels up to 1 m deep; 

the side is somewhat terraced. At the base of the finger (23 m), the 

bottom is composed largely of shell debris and gravel with scattered boulders 

and small, low-lying reefs. 

Laminaria groenlandica partially obscured the substrate on the 

top of the reef. Agarum cribrosum was the dominant alga on the slope, but 

density was much lower. The bryozoan, M.borealis, a small orange social 

ascidian and a hydroid of the genus Abietinaria were the most conspicuous 

invertebrates throughout the area. Musculus sp. was quite abundant on the 

laminarians that grew on top of the finger. 

Suspension feeders, particularly the species noted above (Table 7), 

strongly dominated the invertebrate fauna. The main herbivore species 

noted was a sea urchin, Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis. Principal 

predators in the area appeared to be a starfish, Orthasterias koehleri, 

and, judging from the condition of the shell debris, sea otters. 

444

Dive No. 5 was conducted at the outer point of Raft Cove in 6.5 m 

to 10 m depths. The substrate in the area examined is mainly large boulders 

and a coralline encrusted bedrock. Boulders cover about 50 percent of the 

bottom. Relief ranges up to about 1.5 m. 

Generally, the substrate was completely obscured from the surface 

by a heavy understory of Laminaria groenlandica; Nereocystis was uncommon 

this close to shore but became dense in deeper water (Table 6). Inverte- 

brates most frequently encountered were encrusting forms such as the bryo- 

zoan, M. borealis, a yellow-green osculate sponge and hydroids of the genus 

Abietinaria. Juvenile tomcod was the most frequently encountered fish. In 

our absence, sea otters were abundant in this area. 

Suspension feeders dominated the invertebrate fauna in number of 

species and frequency of encounter or relative cover (Table 7). All herbi- 

vores observed feed on microalgae. The most important predators in the 

area were probably the starfish, Pycnopodia helianthoides, and sea otters. 

Dive No. 6 was conducted inside the second cove in shallow water 

(5 m to intertidal); the observation was quite brief. The bottom of bedrock, 

low reefs, large boulders and cobble is heavily encrusted with coralline 

algae. Relief up to 1.5 m was observed. 

Both Nereocystis and Alaria reached the surface, but coverage was 

slight. However, the substrate was almost completely obscured by the tall 

understory of Laminaria groenlandica in 5 m of water. The starfish Pycnopodia 

helianthoides was abundant throughout this area and the chiton Katharina 

tunicata was abundant in shallow water. 

445

Asteroids were a very widely distributed predator in these study sites 

and considerable data were consequently collected. The density data pre- 

sented in Table 8 suggest that Pycnopodia helianthoides, Orthasterias 

koehleri, and Asterias sp. are among the more abundant predatory species. 

Prey items observed are presented in Table 9; most were mollusks. Feeding 

frequency data are shown in Table 10. Size distributions for the two most 

abundant asteroids are indicated in Table 11. Also, the size distribution 

for an important prey item (Musculus sp.) is indicated in Table 12. 

Additional data are included in Appendices D through H. Despite 

a greater amount of data, the system at Chugach Bay is more complex than 

at Port Dick or Koyuktolik Bay, so we would rather withhold any speculation 

on productivity, etc., at present. Nevertheless, it is obvious that the 

suspension feeding and predatory roles appear more important than the macro- 

herbivore role. 

General Description of Locations 

Examined at East Chugach Island 

The area observed at the east end of East Chugach Island is 

directly exposed to the Gulf of Alaska and forms the inner margin of a 

broad, shallow shelf extending from the island into the Gulf (Figure 1). 

The hydrographic chart indicates swift, turbulent currents. Depth in 

the area surveyed range between 5 m and 11 m. The substrate is a rock 

pavement with scattered cobbles and boulders. However, bottom relief is 

considerable with surge channels and rifts 3 m to 5 m deep cutting through 

the reef. 

446

Table 8. Density estimates (indiv./m²) of some 

echinoderms in the vicinity of Chugach 

Bay, September 11 and 12, 1975. 

447

Table 9. Summary of prey items of asteroids in the 

Sea Otter Point area, Chugach Bay, September 

12, 1975. 

448

Table 10. Summary of asteroid feeding from Sea Otter Point, area 

Chuqach Bay, September 12, 1975.

Table 11. Size distributions of the most abundant 

asteroids at Sea Otter Point, Chugach 

Bay, September 11, 12, 1975. 

450

Table 12. Size data for Musculus sp collected 

from blades of Laminarian kelps at 

Chugach Bay, September 11, 12, 1975. 

451

General appearance of the area was dominated by a dense cover of 

brown algae such as Laminaria groenlandica and Pleurophycus gardneri (Appendix 

I). Most of these plants were heavily covered by a small brown mussel of the 

genus Musculus. In addition, spat of this mussel formed a dense gray-white 

encrustation on many of the rocks, algae and invertebrates. Kelp greenling 

and juvenile tomcod were the most frequently encountered fish in the area. 

Sea otters were commonly observed feeding around the periphery of the island 

and in deeper water offshore. Food items most in evidence were Balanus 

nubilus and some extremely large Mytilus edulis. 

The invertebrate fauna observed in this area was strongly biased 

toward suspension feeders and predators; large herbivores were generally 

uncommon (Table 13). The more common suspension feeders were Musculus sp., 

an ophiuroid, Ophiopholis aculeata, and hydroids of the genus Abietinaria 

(Appendix J). Sea otters and starfish appeared to be among the more impor- 

tant predators. 

Size data collected for Musculus sp. indicate that the population 

is represented by a 0-year (spat) and a 1-year class (Table 14). The mode 

of the latter is an 8 mm shell length. 

A large Nereocystis bed just inside (northwest) of the east end 

of the island was examined briefly. This area is protected from the majpr 

forces of the Gulf and did not appear subject to strong currents. Depth 

of the area examined was about 10 m. The substrate is a relatively flat 

rock pavement with little relief. The Nereocystis canopy covered 20 percent 

to 50 percent of the sea surface. In general appearance, the bottom was 

covered by a dense understory of Laminaria and Pleurophycus. 

452

Table 13. Approximate distribution of observed 

invertebrates by general feeding type 

at E. Chugach Island, August 1, 1975. 

453

Table 14. Size distribution for Musculus sp from 

east end of E. Chugach Island, August 

1, 1975. Substrate was Pleurophycus 

gardneri. 

454

The area observed at the west end of the island was the outer 

edge of a dense bed of mixed Nereocystis and Alaria fistulosa located off 

a prominent sand spit (Figure 1). The area appears fairly well-protected 

from swells off the Gulf but probably is subject to considerable tidal 

currents. The development of the sand spit suggests that a persistent 

system of eddies occur in the area. Depth is about 13 m. The bottom was 

a mixture of boulders, cobble and shell debris, and was partially obscured 

by an understory of Laminaria and Cymathere (Appendix I). 

The most commonly observed invertebrates were a bryozoan, 

M. borealis, and a sertulariid hydroid (Appendix J). Sea otters were ob- 

served feeding in the kelp bed and beyond; one female was observed and 

photographed hauled out on the beach. One adolescent bull Steller sea lion 

was observed in the area and exhibited a remarkably aggressive scientific 

interest in our activities. 

The invertebrate fauna observed in this area was strongly biased 

toward suspension feeders and predators; large herbivores were generally 

uncommon (Table 13). The more common suspension feeders were M. borealis, 

hydroids, and ascidians. Sea otters and starfish appeared to be among 

the more important predators. 

General Description of Area 

Examined at Port Dick 

The area observed at the head of West Arm, Port Dick extended 

from the mouth of Port Dick Creek across the intertidal mud flats and the 

subtidal eelgrass bed, down the slope out the first bench in the basin of 

the West Arm (Figure 6). 

455

PORT DICK STUDY SITE

The area in the vicinity of Port Dick Creek is strongly influenced 

by fresh water runoff, tidal changes in water level, ice scour and air temp- 

erature extremes. The substrate consists mainly of clean sand, gravel and 

cobble with scattered small boulders; pieces of logs and branches are common 

on the bottom. Fucus distichus and Ulva or Monostroma were the dominant 

vegetation and Mytilus edulis and balanoid barnacles the dominant inverte- 

brates. Salmonid fry were observed schooling over the vegetation (Appendix 

L). 

At a lower tidal level, approximately 50 meters from the stream 

outlet, barnacles became less abundant, but mussels were more abundant, 

forming scattered, large patches; small patches of eelgrass were observed. 

However, the dominant vegetation was Ulva or Monostroiia. In this same area, 

the starfish, Evasterias troschelii, was abundant (3.2/square m) (Table 15); 

over 70 percent were feeding on mussels (Table 16). Subtidally, between 

about 5 m and 6.5 m, eelgrass patches were quite large, lush and extensive. 

Both the mussel and eelgrass beds appear to cover a considerable area at 

the head of West Arm. A comparison of the hydrographic chart of the area 

and a sketch constructed during the reconnaissance suggests that the dimen- 

sions of the mussel and eelgrass beds approximately 200 x 200 m and 300 x 

400 m, respectively. Both appear highly productive. 

At approximately 6.5 i, the bottom begins to slope steeply into 

the basin. The slope, somewhat terraced, is covered with small rocks and 

shell debris from Macoma nasuta, Mya truncata and Saxidomus giganteus. 

457

Table 15. Abundance data for Evasterias troschelii 

in mussel bed at Port Dick. Samples from 

25 x 1 m 2 in band transects. 

458

Table 16. Feeding data from head of West Arm, 

Port Dick, July 31, 1975. 

459

Laminaria saccharina, attached to small rocks, was the dominant vegetation. 

Among the invertebrates observed, starfish were dominant, but clams are prob- 

ably quite abundant, too. 

The deepest bench examined on this slope (16 m) was characterized 

by large quantities of drifting vegetation, particularly eelgrass, Laminaria 

and Fucus. Several fish species were observed here. 

The most conspicuous predator was a starfish, Evasterias 

troschelii. Size distributions are presented in Table 17 and Appendix M. 

Feeding type data (Table 18), although compiled, are not adequate for dis- 

cussion at this time. 

460

Table 17. Size-frequency data for the Starfish 

Evasterias troschelii for Port Dick, 

July 31, 1975. 

461

Table 18. Approximate distribution of observed invertebrates 

by feeding type at the head of West Arm, Port Dick, 

July 31, 1975. 

462

IV. PRELIMINARY INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS 

The primary objective of the reconnaissance survey was to gather 

preliminary data on the distribution of basic biotic assemblages and to use 

these data to select study sites. The preliminary data on the biotic assem- 

blages have been discussed above and little more should be added at this 

time. Two comments are justified, however. First, there appears to be a 

strong relationship between the food webs of the nearshore and terrestrial 

commlunities. Second, it appears that the basic "primary" consumer level in 

several of the more prevalent shallow sublittoral assemblages in this area 

are composed of suspension feeders rather than macro-herbivores. 

The areas selected for continued study on the outer Kenai Peninsula 

are Koyuktolik Bay, Chugach Bay and Port Dick. These areas provide study 

sites in areas of high biological value and activity. The three areas repre- 

sent distinct habitat types, i.e., a salt water lagoon system, a fiord eel- 

grass meadow and an outer coast rock kelp habitat. Each area is a rich, 

pristine environment with exposure to the waters of lower Cook Inlet and the 

northern Gulf of Alaska. 

Respectfully submitted, 

DAMES & MOORE 





R.H. Winn 

Managing Principal-Anchorage 

463

LITERATURE CITED 

Ebert, T.A. 1973. Estimating growth and mortality rates from size data. 

Oecologia 11:281-298. 

Siegel, S. 1956. Nonparametric Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences. 

McGraw-Hill Book Co. New York. 312 pp. 

Sokal, R. R., and F. J. Rohlf, 1969. Biometry. W. H. Freeman and Co. 

San Francisco. 776 pp. 

464

Appendix A 

Relative coverage (%) by major species in three levels 

near seaward edge of mussel bed in entrance channel to 

Koyuktolik Lagoon, September 9, 1975. Haphazard casts 

with 0.25 sqm quadrat. 

465

Appendix B 

Coverage by Fucus distichus and Mytilus 

edulis in a Fucus covered area near the 

eastern end of the outer mussel bed at 

Koyuktolik, September 9, 1975. Quadrat 

size, 0.25 square m. 

466

Appendix C 

Size distributions for mussel samples near seaward edge of mussel 

bed in entrance channel to Koyuktolik Lagoon, September , 1975.

Appendix C (continued)

Appendix D , 

Distribution of some* niacrophytes at Sea Otter 

Point, Chugach Bay, September 11 and 12, 1975. 

469

Appendix D (continued) 

470

Appendix E 

Distribution of some* invertebrates at Sea Otter 

Point, Chugach Bay, September 11 and 12, 1975. 

471

472

Appendix E (continued) 

473

Appendix E (continued) 

474

Appendix F 

Quadrat data (1/4 m 2 ) from Sea Otter Point 

area, Chugach Bay, September 11 and 12, 1975. 

475

Appendix F (continued) 

476

Appendix G 

Fish observed in the vicinity of Sea Otter 

Point, Chugach Bay, September 11 & 12, 1975. 

4 7 7

Appendix H 

Feeding and size data for asteroids from the 

Sea Otter Point area, Chugach Bay, September 

12, 1975. 

478

Appendix H (continued) 

47 9


480


481


482

Appendix I 

Macrophytes observed at East Chugach Island 

August 1, 1975 

483

Appendix I (continued) 

484

Appendix J 

Invertebrates observed at East Chugach Island 

August 11, 1975 

485

Appendix J (continued) 

486

Appendix K 

Fishes and mammals observed at East Chugach 

Island, August 1, 1975. 

487

Appendix L 

Species composition and distribution at the 

head of West Arm Port Dick, July 31, 1975, 

488

Appendix L (continued) 

489

Appendix L (continued) 

490

Appendix M 

Evasterias troschelii size-frequency 

distributions from samples collected 

on July 31, 1975 at Port Dick. 

491

JUNEAU PROJECT OFFI CE 

P. O. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU ALASKA 99802 

From: C. C. Anderson 29 October 1975 

R. L. Lam 

B. Booth N EGOA 

To: Dr. Herbert Bruce 

Project Manager, Gulf of Alaska, Bering Sea Projects 

OCSEP Project Office 

Juneau, Alaska 

Topic: Semi-annual progress report #1 RU #58 

A Description and Numerical Analysis of the Factors 

Affecting the Processes of Production in the Gulf of Alaska 

Task 1. 

CONTINENTAL 

SHELF ENERGY PROGRAM 

Subtask a. Objective: To conduct a search and present a compilation 

of available baseline biological and associated 

physical and chemical data from the Gulf of 

Alaska (planktonic realm). 

Data have been compiled by Beatrice Booth from the following cruises 

in the Gulf of Alaska: 

RV Brown Bear 199 30/06/58 - 30/07/58 

RV Hugh M. Smith 046 4/8/58 - 3/9/58 

RV Brown Bear 235 16/7/59 - 31/7/59 

RV Oshoro Maru 046 23/6/60 - 16/8/60 

RV Brown Bear 275 11/1/61 - 27/1/61 

280 7/3/61 - 24/3/61 

282 3/4/61 - 7/4/61 

287 8/5/61 - 24/5/61 

288 9/16/61 - 19/6/61 

CNAV Oshawa:Prod. Cruise 3/7/61 - 15/7/61 

CNAV Oshawa 1962 18/4/62 - 20/4/62 

RV A Agassiz:Ursa Major 25/8/64 - 4/9/64 

RV G.B. Reed 164 7/1/64 - 7/2/64 

RV G.B. Kelez 8/19/64 - 29/9/66 

MV Paragon 266 10/6/66 - 20/6/66 

RV Kelez 166 18/3/66 - 28/3/66 

RV Argo:Zetes 1 18/1/66 - 24/1/66 

RV Kelez 767 21/8/67 - 29/8/67 

RV Kelez 667 8/7/67 - 11/7/67 

RV Kelez 567 8/6/67 - 3/7/67 

RV Kelez 367 20/4/67 - 26/4/67 

RV Kelez 167 30/1/67 - 15/2/67 

RV T.G. Thompson 012 5/2/67 - 4/3/67 

*Ships of Opportunity 

002 to 005 27/2/68 - 11/5/68 

RV Kelez 168 16/2/68 - 11/5/68 

RV Kelez 268 13/5/68 - 15/5/68 


007 to 014 12/2/69 - 19/7/69 

RV Hakuko Maru 694 12/8/69 - 14/8/69 

493


OUTER CONTINNTAL SHELF ENERGY FROGRAM 

JUNEA PROJECT OFFICE 

P. 0. BOX 1803 

JUNEAU ALASKA 

From: G. C. Anderson 

R. L. Lam 

B. Booth 

Page Two 

RV Endeavour Trans Pacific 18/3/69 - 30/4/69 


015 to 024 11/1/70 - 26/6/70 

RV Oshoro Maru 001 4/7/70 - 8/7/70 

RV T.G. Thompson 059 21/5/71 - 14/6/71 


025 to 033 24/1/71 - 18/6/71 

RV T.G. Thompson 072 3/9/72 - 9/9/72 


034 to 043 2/3/72 - 3/7/72 

RV T.G. Thompson 082 3/18/73 - 7/8/73 

RV T.C. Thompson 091 1974 

Weather Station Papa 1959 - 1974 

*These are commercial vessels which were instrumented to make 

oceanographic observations. 

Variables compiled for each station are: 

Temperature, salinity, phosphate, nitrate, silicate, depth of mixed 

layer, chlorophyll a, secchi disk, C uptake, zooplankton volume, 

daily radiation. (Not every cruise measured each of the above 

variables.) 

Data are now being reduced to a common format for entry on computer cards. 

Problems encountered have been the non-standardized collection and computation 

techniques. Examples are: the different equations used in calculating chlorophyll 

a concentrations; the varying methods of computing solar radiation; and 

the varying zooplankton sampling techniques (different net types, mesh sizes, 

sampling intervals, and sampling times). Chlorophyll and radiation data will 

be relatively easy to standardize, whereas zooplankton data will not. 

Additional sources of data have been investigated: 

Data have been requested by letter from the 1959 cruise of the Russian ship 

'Vityaz' to the northeast Pacific. Unpublished data or leads to unpublished data 

have been solicted from the following persons and institutions: 

University of Alaska - Vera Alexander 

Oregon State University - Lawrence Small 

Auke Bay Fishers Laboratory - Herbert Bruce 

NOAA - Herbert Curl 

Nagasaki Marine Observatory - O. Asaoka 

Plankton Laboratory in Moscow - O.I. Koblents Mishke; G.I. Semina 

A search for biological data from the Gulf of Alaska has been initiated 

through OASIS. The preliminary search did not provide any new information. 

Hopefully, a broadened base of search will be more successful. 

Description of variation in phytoplankton distribution will eventually 

include phytoplankton species as well as standing stock (as measured by chlorophyll 

a). Species data have been requested from the persons listed above. 

494

OUTER CONTIENETAL 


P.O. BOX 





From: G. C. Anderson 

R.L. Lam 

Page Three 

B. Booth 

Unpublished work in this department (Munson) will provide the bulk of the 

data. 

The following journals have been scanned in a search for Japanese and 

Russian data: 

Journal Oceanographic Society of Japan 

Bulletin of the Japanese Society of Scientific Fisheries 

Oceanology 

Journal of Fisheries Research Board of Canada 

Oceanologia 

Japanese Journal of Ichthyology 

Journal of the Fisheries Society of Japan 

Subtask b. Objective: To use the compiled data for a description of the 

temporal and geographic variation in phytoplankton 

standiig stock (and species), production, and 

related physical and chemical factors. 

Analysis of variance within the Gulf of Alaska will begin as soon as all 

of the data have been entered on ca'ds. Forty-six geographic areas (see Fig. 1) 

have been defined by modifying 5° squares to include: 

1.0 areas on the shelf and slope'(areas 37 to 46 on Figure 1) 

7 areas in the Alaskan Stream areas 25 to 31 on Figure 1) 

5 areas in the Alaskan Gyre (areas 32 to 36 on Figure 1) 

24 areas in the Subarctic currer: (areas 1 - 24 on Figure 1) 

(The northern boundary of the Transition Domain will be defined for each 

year and Transition data omitted from the analysis.) 

Some areas have been sampled more completely than others; however, only a few 

of the areas defined lack data points. , 

Within the 17 years of data, the f rst nine months of each year have been 

more completely sampled than the last t iee. For approximately three fourths of 

the data, replicate values for chlorophyl a have been recorded so that variance 

due to measurement error can be computed. A nested classification will be used 

beginning with averages from each month c\ each year for each geographic area. 

Then, months will be lumped into seasons and areas into regimes to arrive at the 

main sources of variation. Of special interest will be the seaward boundary of 

the neritic realm. Surface concentrationsof chlorophyll a will be analyzed first. 

Task 2. 

Subtask a. Objective: To use the completed 

data in a numerical model to 

identify the majr factors involved in phytoplankton 

dynamics. 

495

To: Dr. Herbert Bruce 29 October 1975 

Page Four 

From: C. C. Anderson 

R. L. Lam 

B. Booth 

The model depends upon a complete set of annual profiles of biological 

data from one location. The location chosen is Station 'P', 145°W 50°N. 

Published biological data from Station 'P' extends only to 1967. Data from 

the last eight years will be available to us in January, 1976. These data 

are more complete than the earlier data which covered only alternate sixweek 

periods. Work on this subtask will, therefore, be delayed until the 

data are in hand. 

We have been examining the question of the accuracy of our numerical 

model as a function of changes in grid sizes for depth and for time. The 

grid spacings which we are using at present are numerically accurate for most 

of the period which we are simulating (late winter to late summer), but there 

is a question of whether they result in a sufficiently accurate approximation 

during the spring bloom. At present the computer costs ($3.00 for each day 

of model time) are about a factor of five higher than we had anticipated 

when preparing the proposal last spring. This higher cost is due mainly to 

the much finer grid spacings which we have been forced to use in order to 

obtain the accuracy which we have achieved to date. Our next steps will be: 

1) to see if we have sufficient accuracy during the time of the spring bloom 

so that we can be confident that the model results reflect biological phenomena 

and not numerical artifacts; and 2) to attempt to reduce the cost of 

running the model. It is unlikely that we will be able to greatly reduce the 

computer costs per run and still retain sufficient numerical accuracy. We 

will most likely be faced with severely limiting the number of numerical 

simulations unless additional computer funds are made available. 

BB:bh 

Subtask b. Objective: To test the sensitivity of the results of the 

'standard' run to changes in the submodels and 

independent variables, and to identify those 

variables and processes which strongly influence 

the result. 

Work to follow completion of subtask a. above. 

496

Figure 1

Estimate of funds expended to date: 

Salaries: $6,000 

Benefits 1,000 

Equipment 1,000 

Materials and Services 500 

Travel and per diem 500 

Indirect Costs 3,000 

Total $12,000 

498

Progress Report, BLM/OCS Research Unit #64 

Review and Evaluation of Historical Data Base on 

Non-salmonid Pelagic Fishery Resources of the 

Gulf of Alaska Shelf and Slope 

by 

Martin 0. Nelson 

National Marine Fisheries Service 

Northwest Fisheries Center 

Seattle, Washington 


499


II. Background 

Review and Evaluation of Historical Data Base on Non-Salmonid 

Pelagic Fishery Resources of the Gulf of Alaska Shelf and Slope 

A. Review and summarize the published and unpublished scientific 

literature on the distribution, abundance, life histories, and 

population dynamics of non-salmonid pelagic fishes of the Gulf 

of Alaska. 

B. Examine and summarize unpublished research vessel survey and 

commercial fishery data on the distribution, abundance, and 

size composition of the subject species. 

C. Prepare data report on records of the distribution, abundance 

and size composition of the subject species. 

D. Prepare annotated bibliography and a narrative report which 

collates results of studies undertaken under objectives (A) 

and (B) and describes, within the constraints of the available 

data, observed temporal and spatial variations in the distribu- 

tions of the subject species. 

In-house meetings were held during the summer to define the geographic 

area of interest, prospective subject species, the types/scope of 

information to be included in the review and to make arrangements for 

employing new personnel. Attention was also devoted to the problem of 

how to treat semi-pelagic species, e.g., pollock and other cods, rockfish 

and sablefish, of interest to both this project and RU #174. 

A. Geographic Coverage 

The area which is being considered extends from the Central Gulf 

of Alaska coastline south and east to 520 north latitude and 1350 

500

west longitude, respectively. Examination of unpublished catch 

records is essentially confined to this area. The literature 

review work is also confined to this area to the extent that it 

is practical. 

B. Species 

A prospective species list is attached (Appendix A). This list 

is based on a preliminary examination of the literature and of 

unpublished data files from research vessel surveys. It has been 

decided that description of the life histories of all cods, all 

rockfish and sablefish, will be treated in detail by the demersal 

resource project (RU #174). However, all information on the 

pelagic occurrence, distribution, behavior and sampling/detection 

of thes species will be examined and reported on by the present 

project. In addition, records are being kept of the pelagic 

occurrence of flatfishes. 

C. Subject Areas 

The final report to be submitted for this project will include 

synoptic information from the literature on the life history, 

distribution and abundance, population dynamics and (where 

applicable) fisheries for the subject species. It will also 

include detailed records of the data on distribution, abundance, 

and size composition obtained from the examination of unpublished 

data files. The outline below is being used as a guide in 

compiling literature on the subject species, but it should not 

be considered a report outline, since the report will necessarily 

be much less detailed.

1. Distribution and abundance by life stage (eggs, larvae, 

juveniles, and adults) 

a. total area 

b. relative abundance by time and area 

c. ecological/oceanographic determinants of distribution 

changes 

2. Life history and behavior 

a. Reproduction 

(1) Sexuality, mating and fertilization 

(2) Age and size at maturity 

(3) Fecundity 

(4) Spawning 

(a) Seasons, areas, frequency 

(b) Egg stage: structure, size, hatching 

type, predators and parasites 

b. Larval and juvenile histories 

(1) Rate of development 

(2) Feeding and movements 

(3) Predators, competitors and survival rates 

c. Adult history 

(1) Longevity 

(2) Hardiness 

(3) Predators, competitors, parasites and diseases 

d. Nutrition and growth 

(1) Food and feeding behavior 

(a) Food types and amounts 

(b) Feeding behavior: season, location, time 

502

(2) Growth 

e. Behavior 

(a) Age-length and age-weight relations 

(b) Relative and absolute growth rates 

(1) Migrations 

(2) Bathymetric and vertical movements 

(3) Schooling characteristics 

(4) Behavior in relation to sampling/detection 

tactics and strategy 

3. Population structure and dynamics 

4. Fishing 

a. Sex ratio, size composition, age composition 

b. Abundance and density 

(1) Relative abundance and standing stock estimates 

(2) Density estimates and changes in density 

c. Recruitment 

d. Mortality 

(1) Natural mortality rate 

(2) Fishing mortality rate 

e. Yield models and estimates 

f. Population/community/ecosystem relations 

a. Vessels, gear and gear selectivity 

b. Areas and seasons 

c. History of fishery 

(1) Distribution of effort 

(2) Catch statistics 

503

5. Conservation/management regulations 

It is apparent that for most of the subject species, 

little or no information will be available on many of the 

items listed. This is primarily because most of the data 

available on non-salmonid pelagic species (with the excep- 

tion of herring and semi-pelagic groundfishes) have been 

collected on an incidental basis, and also because most of 

the species are unexploited. 

It should be noted that the nomenclature, taxonomic status 

and morphology of the subject species will not be described 

in detail. Speciation/subpopulation problems will be treated 

for those species in which they are.important. 

No attempt will be made to include references on processing, 

utilization or marketing. Also, papers on the effects of 

contaminants on the subject species will not be included and 

no attempt will be made to predict the possible impacts of 

petroleum development activities on the subject species. 

D. Personnel and the Interaction with RU #354 

On September 29, Mr. Nick Lampsakis was hired under the present 

project to work on the examination of unpublished data files. 

Mr. Lampsakis is supervised by Mr. James Mason and it was decided 

that their work will cover both the Gulf of Alaska and eastern 

Bering Sea (RU #354) areas. Conversely, Ms. Janet Wall, a 

GS-7 Fishery Biologist hired on September 12 under RU #354 to 

work on the literature review for that project,is also reviewing 

literature pertaining to the Gulf of Alaska. Ms. Wall is 

supervised by Mr. Paul Macy. Although not specified in the project 

5.04

proposals, this "cross-walking" of personnel between the two 

similar RU's eliminates the possibility of a significant amount 

of redundant effort, makes the best use of available talents, 

and should provide an efficient means of accomplishing the 

objectives of both RU's. 

III. Laboratory Activities 

A. Methods 

1. Literature Review Studies 

The literature review was begun by examining major literature 

indices and some of the more comprehensive references on the 

subject species. The sequence of steps which is being followed 

in the literature review process is as follows: 

a. Enter complete citation on file card and arrange by 

author and year 

b. Periodically duplicate accumulated reference cards and 

place in file sorted by publication 

c. Obtain and examine source literature and verify accuracy 

of reference 

d. Prepare annotation and, if necessary, select pages to 

be duplicated 

e. Papers and/or pertinent extracted information placed 

in file arranged in order of final report outline 

f. Foreign literature translated as necessary 

In order to avoid unnecessary duplication of effort, personnel 

from RU #174 are working with Ms. Wall and Mr. Macy. Although 

it has not yet been necessary, or practical, it is planned to 

take advantage of computerized literature retrieval services. 

505

2. Examination of unpublished data records 

B. Results 

The inventory of unpublished data was recently initiated and 

has been limited to the incidental catch records of the high 

seas salmon purse seining conducted by the University of 

Washington's Fisheries Research Institute (FRI), the NWFC's 

high seas salmon gillnetting studies, the Japanese Fishery 

Agency's high seas salmon gillnetting studies, and the 

juvenile pink salmon tow netting conducted by FRI in the 

bays around Kodiak Island. 

The purse seine catch data and the tow net.catch and 

effort were not entered on cards-and it was necessary to 

examine all of the original field data and format it for 

preliminary ADP tabulation and analysis. Computer print- 

outs of incidental catches made in gillnets were available. 

These data were recently reformatted. Decisions as to the 

final data report formats will not be made until a prelim- 

inary inventory of all data sources has been completed. 


To date, the literature search has produced approximately 

600 references on non-salmonid pelagic fishes of the Gulf 

of Alaska and the eastern Bering Sea. Many of these deal 

with the life histories of the subject species and the in- 

formation they contain is germane to both RU #64 and RU #354. 

It is expected that the total number of papers will not 

exceed about 1000 and that additional articles will be 

obtained mainly from the literature cited in the papers 

506

already located. Review and annotation of the papers 

available is just now being initiated. 


a. FRI high seas salmon purse seine records 

These are available for the years from 1956 to the 

present. Effort data is retrievable from IBM cards 

by year, INPFC area of sampling, set location, set 

number and vessel code. Within the area of interest, 

1128 sets were made. Of these, approximately 380 

contain useable information for non-salmonid pelagic 

species. 

b. NWFC high seas salmon gillnetting records 

Records are available for the years 1955 to 1972. 

In the subject area, 378 sets were made, 213 of 

which contain useable data on incidental catches of 

the subject species. 

c. Japanese high seas salmon gillnetting records 

Japanese gillnetting effort in northeast Pacific was 

mainly outside the area of interest and records 

presently available at the NWFC from INPFC contained 

no information on incidentally caught species. 

d. FRI Kodiak Island juvenile pink salmon tow net records 

Data are available for the years 1963 through 1975. 

Over 4000 tows were made in 12 "index" bays. Of these, 

1590 contain at least partially useable information on 

the species of interest. 

507

Lamnidae 

APPENDIX A 

Proposed Species List of Non-Salmonid Pelagic Fishes 

Salmon shark (Lamna ditropis) 

Basking shark (Cetorhinus maximus) 

Carcharinidae 

Clupeidae 

Osmeridae 

Gadidae 

Blue shark (Prionace glauca) 

Spiny dogfish (Squalus acanthias) 

Herring (Clupea harengus pallasi) 

Shad (Alosa sapidissima) 

Surf smelt (Hypomesus pretiosus) 

Capelin (Mallotus villosus) 

Rainbow smelt- (Osmerus mordax dentex) 

Eulachon (Thaleichthys pacificus) 

Pacific cod (Gadus macrocephalus) 

Pacific hake (MerlTuccius productus) 

Pacific tomcod (Microgadus proximus) 

Walleye pollock (Theragra chalcogramma) 

Scomberesocidae 

Carangidae 

Bramidae 

Pacific saury (Cololabis saira) 

Jack mackeral (Trachurus symmetricus) 

Pacific pomfret (Brama japonica) 

Trichodontidae 

Sandfish (Trichodon trichodon) 

508

Zaproridae 

Prowfish (Zaprora silehus) 

Ammodytidae 

Icosteidae 

Scombridae 

Pacific sandlance (Ammodytes hexapterus) 

Ragfish (Icosteus aenigmaticus) 

Chub mackeral (Scomber japonicus) 

Albacore (Thunnus alalunga) 

Scorpaenidae 

All species in the genera Sebastes and Sebastolobus which occur 

in the study area. 

Anoplomatidae 

Sablefish (Anoplopoma fimbria) 

Hexagrammidae 

Atka mackeral (Pleurogrammus monopterygius) 

509



P, 0. BOX 1808 


Report of Progress 

April -- October 1975 

BASELINE CHARACTERIZATION, LITTORAL BIOTA, 

GULF OF ALASKA AND BERING SEA 

(Tasks 78 and 79) 

by 

Stevenr T. Zinmmerman 

511 

NOV 06 1975 

NEGOA



III. Results 

-- Intertidal Baselines 

A. Methods 

B. Field Activities 

-- Diving Studies 

A. Methods 

1. NMFS 

2. Dames & Moore, Inc. 


-- Drift Zone Studies 

A. Methods 


-- Aerial Beach Classification 

A. Methods 


-- Intertidal Baselines 

-- Diving 

-- Drift Zone 

-- Aerial Survey 

-- Species Collection 

-- Sample Sorting 

CONTENTS 

-- Computer Format & Data Archiving 

-- Literature Survey 

512


V. Acknowledgments 

VI. Recommendations for Future Research 

VII. Estimate of Funds Expended 

VIII. Appendices 

1. Diving Studies 

2. Species List 

3. Sorting Forms 

4. Literature Search Forms 

5. Geographic Locations of Stations 

513

I. Task Objectives (Tasks 78 and 79) 

The objective of this study is to provide a general description of the 

distribution and abundance of the dominant intertidal and shallow subtidal 

organisms on the Alaskan Continental Shelf. Several studies have been 

initiated in the Gulf of Alaska and the southern Bering Sea to fulfill the 

objectives. Included are an aerial classification of beach types and habitats 

along the entire coastline from Yakutat to Cape Newenham; the study of 

seasonal and spatial distributions of dominant intertidal and shallow subtidal 

organisms at several representative sites in this area; and a study of 

drift zone accumulations in the beach zones. Longterm monitoring of 

several of the baseline sites will be initiated in the spring. 

II. Field Studies -- Intertidal Baseline 

A. Methods 

1. At each rocky site, one to three transect lines are extended 

across the beach from the highest area of tidal influence to the water's edge 

at low tide. The number of lines used at each site is determined by the shape 

of the beach; on a low gradient beach only one line is sampled, whereas 

on a steep beach, as many as three lines are sampled. 

Sampling frames (1/16m 2 ) are laid at regular intervals along the line. The 

area under the frames is photographed and the biota is scraped from the 

rocks and preserved in 10% formalin for shipment to the University of Alaska 

Marine Sorting Center. The level of each sample is determined with a transit 

and stadia rod using standard engineering procedures. Leveling is done 

with respect to predicted low tide levels, and the heights of permanent 

bench marks are established for each beach. 

A second sampling method was developed to study areas which contain large 

boulders or irregular topography. This method involves sketching a facsimile 

of the area to be sampled, and the biotic zonation, on a sheet of Mylar 

plastic. Numbered, homogeneously arrayed dots are then placed on the sketch. 

A random number table is used to choose the dots which will be projected 

into sampling locations. Numbered arrows are then placed at the corresponding 

locations on the rock face and photography and leveling follow. Destructive 

quantitative collections (1/16m 2 ) are taken in areas with similar biota. 

The rock face itself is not destructively sampled and remains as an undisturbed 

study site. 

514

A third sampling method is also occasionally utilized on rocky beaches. It 

involves the use of a "nested quadrat sampler." This frame consists of 16 

squares, each 1/64m 2 . Different sized areas, or all 1/64m 2 areas are collected 

and the resulting data are studied and combined to determine the 

adequacy of different sample sizes. 

2. At muddy and sandy sites, transect lines are also used, 

but the substrate is sampled using a rectangular mud corer. It measures 

approximately 10cm on a side, and collects approximately one liter of sediment. 

Two replicate samples are collected from each location, along the 

transect line. 

At both rocky and mud-sand sites, additional collections of organisms (termed 

"species collections") were made when time permitted, to obtain representative 

specimens of unusual or scarce species in the vicinity of the site. 


i. April 20-May 2, 1975 NOAA vessel Surveyor 

Alaska Helicopter 7817S 

NMFS Personnel: Zimmerman, Sears, Mattson, Gnagy, Myren, 

Calvin, Lindstrom, Barr. Dames & Moore personnel: Rosenthal. 

Sampling was done at eight sites in the eastern Gulf of Alaska: 

Day Harbor, La Touche Point, Macleod Harbor, Zaikof Bay, Port Etches, 

Boswell Bay, Katalla, Middleton Island (Figure 1) . 187 quantitative samples, 

12 trace metal samples and several species collections resulted, 595 photographs 

were taken. 3.4 hours of charter helicopter plus several hours of 

USGC helicopter time were utilized. 

2. May 11-May 15, 1975 O.A.S. aircraft 466R 

NMFS personnel: Zimmerman, Sears. 

A reconnaissance of possible sites for intertidal studies in the 

western Gulf of Alaska was made. Aerial observations along the Kenai 

Peninsula, Kodiak and Afognak Islands, Chirikof Island, the Trinity Islands, 

and the Alaska Peninsula were made. 10.5 hours of aircraft time were used. 

515

Figure 1, Intertidal sampling sites in the Gulf of Alaska

3. May 20-May 30, 1975. NOAA vessel Surveyor 

Alaska Helicopter 7817S 

NMFS personnel: Zimmerman, Sears, Mattson, Gnagy, Myren, 

Lindstrom, Calvin, Barr, Meyers. 

Sampling was done at seven sites in the western Gulf of Alaska: 

Port Dick, Sud Island, Cape Nukshak, Sundstrom Island, Chirikof Island, 

Spectacle Island, and Three Saints Bay (Figure 1) . 211 quantitative samples, 

8 trace metal samples, and several species collections resulted. 524 photographs 

were taken. 15.2 hours of charter helicopter time were used. 

4. June 9-June 11, 1975 Gulf Air Taxi 

NMFS personnel: Zimmerman, Lindstrom, Gnagy, Sears, 

Taylor, Jones. 

Sampling was done at Yakutat and Yakataga to complete the 

spring survey of the 10 NEGOA stations. Poor weather had stopped the 

Surveyor from reaching these areas during the April low tide period. 56 

samples, four trace metal collections and several species collections were 

made. 99 photographs were taken. Approximately 8 hours of charter air 

time was used. 

5. July 15-July 26, 1975 NOAA vessel Surveyor 

NMFS personnel: Merrell, Munk, Mackinnon, Edson, Gnagy, 

Calvin, Mattson, Budke, Barr, Ellis. 

Eight sites in the eastern Bering Sea-Bristol Bay area were 

sampled: Akun Island, Amak Island, Crooked Island, Cape Pierce, Point 

Edward, Port Moller, Cape Mordvinof, and Makushin Bay (Figure 2) . 165 

quantitative samples, several species collections, and 521 photographs 

were taken. 

6. August 4-12, 1975 NOAA vessel Surveyor 

Kodiak Western Airways 

NMFS personnel: Zimmerman, Munk, Mackinnon, Edson, 

Romm, Gnagy, Mattson, Fujioka. 

Seven sites were sampled in the western Gulf of Alaska: Port 

Dick, Three Saints Bay, Sud Island, Cape Nukshak, Sundstrom Island, 

Chirikof Island, Spectacle Island. All had been sampled during the May 

cruise. Due to Surveyor engine problems, two of the stations (Port Dick, 

Three Saints Bay) were sampled using a chartered Grumman Goose. 219 

quantitative samples, seven trace metal samples, and several species collections 

resulted. 368 photographs were taken. Approximately 9 hours of air 

charter were used. 

517

Figure 2. Intertidal sampling sites in the Bering Sea, 1975.

7. August 13-20, 1975 NOAA vessel Surveyor 


Romm, Gnagy, Koski, Barr, Ellis, Calvin. 

Intertidal sampling was done at three sites: Makushin Bay, 

St. George and Otter Islands (Figure 2) . An additional diving site was 

sampled in Captains Bay, near Dutch Harbor. The cruise was terminated 

prematurely by engine difficulties aboard the Surveyor and only 3 of 6 

scheduled sites were reached. 100 quantitative samples, two trace metal 

samples, and several species collections resulted. 174 photographs were 

taken. 

8. September 2-12, 1975 NOAA vessel Surveyor 


Romm, Hoke, Hopson. 

Seven of the NEGOA stations were sampled in the eastern Gulf 

of Alaska: Day Harbor, La Touche Point, Macleod Harbor, Zaikof Bay, 

Boswell Bay, Katalla, and Kayak Island. All of these sites had been sampled 

on previous cruises with the exception of Kayak Island. 252 quantitative 

samples, 11 trace metal samples, one hydrocarbon sample, and several 

species collections were made. 319 photographs were taken. 

9. September 6-9, 1975 O.A.S. Cessna 241 B 

NMFS personnel: Gnagy, Calvin, Palmisano, Phillips, Taylor, 

Jones. 

Three of the NEGOA stations: Yakutat, Yakataga, and Middieton 

Island, were sampled using OAS aircraft. The short tidal period in September 

precluded reaching these sites during the Surveyor cruise. 74 quantitative 

collections, and several species collections were made. 139 photographs 

were taken. 

II. Field Studies - Subtidal Diving 

A. Methods 

1. National Marine Fisheries Service. Diving teams from both 

NMFS and Dames & Moore, Inc., have been used in the study. The objective 

of the NMFS diving team has been to provide subtidal biological information 

to supplement the intertidal collections made at each site. The NMFS divers 

operate, whenever possible, immediately seaward of the intertidal sarrpling 

site. The information gathered includes type and slope of bottom, dominant 

plants and animals, and a partial list of all recognized species. Photographs 

519

are taken of the general site, the area along sampling lines, and individual 

organisms of interest. Specimens of plants and animals are collected for 

identification as part of the overall species work. 

The initial studies provided qualitative data and established sites for later 

quantitative sampling. On the second Bering Sea trip, a newly developed 

airlift sampler was used to make quantitative, quadrat collections in an 

area which had been selected during the first trip. 

2. Dames & Moore, Inc. A contract ($39,500) to provide an 

ecological assessment of sublittoral communities at three sites in the NEGOA 

area was negotiated with Dames & Moore, Inc., in July 1975. Sampling will 

be done at La Touche Point, Macleod Harbor, and Zaikof Bay in conjunction 

with intertidal study sites. In addition to providing qualitative estimates of 

substrate, and the distribution and occurrence of dominant species, quantitative 

observations will be made. Transect lines will be placed and referenced 

to bench marks. Fixed quadrats and transects will be used in studies of 

temporal changes in populations. Seasonal variation in vegetative standing 

crops will be determined by measuring biomass and estimating percent 

coverage. Sampling will be seasonal, four times per year. The report of 

accomplishments under this contract is included as an appendix to this report. 


1. April 23-26, 1975. Lou Barr (NMFS) and Rick Rosenthal 

(Dames & Moore, Inc.) joined the intertidal field party aboard the Surveyor. 

Dives were made to coordinate methodology and make preliminary studies at 

intertidal sites. 

2. May 20-30, 1975. Lou Barr and Ted Meyers (NMFS) 

accompanied the intertidal field party to all western Gulf of Alaska sampling 

sites. 15 dives were made during this period. 

3. July 15-26, 1975. Natasha Calvin, Bob Ellis, Bob Budke, 

and Lou Barr accompanied the intertidal field party to 8 sites in the Bering 

Sea. 13 dives were made. 

4. August 13-20, 1975. Natasha Calvin, Bob Ellis, and Lou Barr 

accompanied the intertidal field party to 4 sites in the Bering Sea. 11 dives 

were made. 

5. September 12-22, 1975. Dames & Moore, Inc., divers under 

the direction of Richard Rosenthal completed the fall survey of subtidal 

sites. Data on their results are incomplete at this time. 

520

II. Field Studies--Drift Zone 

A. Methods 

The objective of this study is to determine the species composition 

of biota deposited on beaches following high tides and major storms. Surveys 

are to be made at two, three, or more of the NEGOA intertidal sites quarterly 

and following major storms. Permanent sites will be along the open coast. 

One kilometer lengths of shoreline are measured and marked with numbered 

arrows. Faunal drift is recorded as the 1 km sections are traversed on foot. 

When biota are very numerous, subsamples are made in randomly selected 

100m sections. Only items occurring at least partially on the surface are 

recorded (i.e., items buried under kelp piles, rocks, etc. are not recorded) 

A complete list was made of the number and species of all plants and animals 

encountered. When possible, individual weights and lengths were determined 

in the field and a sample collection was made and preserved for later 

study. Photographs were taken of individual species and the general areas. 

Daily rates of accumulation were determined by destroying or marking 

all items encountered. The occurrence of new organisms was then noted 

on each successive visitation. 


1. August 15-20, 1975. 

NMFS Personnel: Palmisano, Phillips 

The beach at Yakutat (Ocean Cape) was studied for five days. 

Rates of accumulation and species occurrence was determined along several 

1 kilometer sections of sand beach. 

2. September 4-7, 1975. 

NMFS Personnel: Palmisano, Phillips. 

Preliminary drift zone studies were made at Cape Yakataga 

and Middleton Island in conjunction with intertidal studies. 

3. September 4-22,1975. 

NMFS personnel: Palmisano, Philips. 

Preliminary drift zone studies were made at La Touche Point, 

and Hinchinbrook Island in conjunction with Dames & Moore, Inc., diving 

studies. 

521

II. Field Studies -- Aerial Beach Classification 

A. Methods 

The objective of the project is to visually classify the intertidal 

zones from Cape Newenham in the Bering Sea to Yakutat in the eastern Gulf 

of Alaska. Observations were made from an Office of Aircraft Services (OAS) 

plane flown at approximately 200 foot elevations. Data are recorded onto 

Geological Survey maps (Figure 3). 

The coding is as follows: 

Composition Slope of exposed beach 

Bed rock--black line 1. Vertical 

Rubble--red line 2. Steep 

a. rubble2 ft. square 4. Flat 

c. combination of a. and b. 

Gravel--blue line 

Sand--green line 

Mud--purple line 

Biological cover on substrate 

I - Bare 

II - Light 

III - Medium 

IV - Heavy 

Other data recorded on the charts included seabird rookeries, sea mammal 

"haul-out" areas, sea mammals in water, dead sea mammals, location of 

eagle sightings, land mammals seen on beaches, and location of kelp beds. 


Field work was started July 17, 1975, in Bristol Bay. Flights were 

made approximately 2 hours before and 2 hours following low tide. Eightyeight 

hours and seventeen minutes flying time was expended flying beach 

lines along the Bering Sea coast from Cape Newenham to Dutch Harbor and 

along the Pacific side of the Alaska Peninsula as far east as Bluff Point on 

Kupreanof Peninsula (1590 45' West, approx.) . The entire Shumagin Island 

group and part of the central Gulf of Alaska were also flown. 

522

Figure 3. Example cf Aerial survey data. 524

II. Results - Intertidal Baselines 

A total of 45 intertidal sites were sampled during the period from April thru 

September. These included two visits each to 9 eastern and 7 western 

Gulf of Alaska stations. Kayak Island and Port Etches were each sampled 

once in the eastern Gulf of Alaska. Nine stations were sampled once each 

in the Bering Sea, and Makushin Bay was sampled twice. 

Approximately 1300 quantitative intertidal samples were collected (Table 1) . 

Approximately 3000 photographs were taken (Table 2) to document sampling 

areas. Over 100 qualitative species collections and 44 trace metal samples 

were also taken. 

Since the beginning of the program, 1479 qualitative samples have been 

collected. Because of the large volume of data which will result, computer 

services are necessary to reduce and organize the information on intertidal 

zones. Data for the first 266 samples, containing computer species codes, 

has been received in the last month, and a new computer format has just 

been developed to handle the coded information. Thus, no preliminary 

interpretation of the data will be made at this time. As soon as the computer 

system is functioning, large quantities of data will begin flowing rapdily 

and data may be interpreted. 

III. Results - Diving 

Approximately 50 dives were made by NMFS divers in conjunction with 

intertidal studies in the Gulf of Alaska and Bering Sea. Reconnaissance 

studies, species collections, and extensive photographic documentation 

were completed at 22 sites. Quantitative sampling was performed for the 

first time during the second visit to Makushin Bay. The newly developed 

airlift sampler was used to obtain 5 quadrat samples. Results of this 

work and the work of Dames & Moore, Inc., are included in Appendix I. 

III. Results and Preliminary Interpretation -- Drift Zone 

The number and type of samples collected is given in Table 3. An estimate 

of species composition of drift biota found at sample localities at Yakutat, 

La Touche Island, and Hinchinbrook Island is given in Table 4. Species 

lists of drift biota found at these localities appear in Tables 5, 6, 7. 

525

Table 1. Quantitative intertidal samples lected for the NAGOA and OCSEAP Projects

Table 1. (Continued)

Table 2. Summary of Outer Continental Shelf Intertidal 

Photo Documentation 1974-1975 

528

Table 3.--Number and types of samples collected and observations conducted 

at sample localities at Yakutat, LaTouche Island, and Henchinbrook Island 

during drift zone studies between August 15 and September 19, 1975.

Table 4.--Species composition (in percent) of drift biota at sample localities 

at Yakutat, LaTouche Island, and Hinchinbrook Island, between August 15 and 

September 19, based on an estimate of percent cover and biomass. 

b 30

Table 5.--Species list of drift biota found at Yakutat sample locality 

August 15-20, 1975. 

531

Table 6.--Species list of drift biota found at LaTouche Island sample 

locality September 16-17, 1975. 

532

Table 7.--Species list of drift biota found at Hinchinbrook Island sample 

locality September 19, 1975. 

533

The drift on the sand beach at Yakutat was sparse and was characterized 

by empty razor clam (Siliqua patula) shells, dungeness crab (Cancer 

magister) carapaces, and unidentified jelly fish and ctenophores. Also 

found were four intact dungeness crabs and two dead fish; a walleye 

pollock (Theragra chalcogramma) and a Pacific sandfish (Trichodon 

trichodon) . Table 8 shows the numbers and mean daily accumulation rate 

per km of shoreline of the most abundant drift biota found at Yakutat. 

The four intact crabs were marked with red spray paint on their ventral 

surface and left on the beach. They were consumed by sea gulls within 

24 nours. This use confirmed by visual observation and the occurrence 

of gull tracks adjacent to the crab remains. 

The visits to La Touche and Hinchinbrook Islands were brief. Most of the 

time was spent in reconnaissance and little quantative data were collected. 

The drift on the rocky shoreline at La Touche was patchy and consisted 

primarily of decayed algae (mostly Laminaria spp.) . The remains of a 

"skinned" adult sea otter (Cenhydra lutris) and a 25x10 cm patch of hide 

from a harbor seal (Phoca vitulina) were found in the drift. 

The drift on the cobble beach at Hinchinbrook was patchy and consisted 

almost entirely of fresh Laminaria spp. Skulls of six mature male pink 

salmon (Oncorhynchus gorbusha) and the remains of seven sea stars (one 

Pisaster ochraceus and six pycnopodia helianthoides) were also found. 

Table 9 gives the species and relative numbers of marine mammals and sea 

shore birds adjacent to the three sample localities. 

Because so few samples were collected, it is difficult to know if the data are 

representative of amounts and composition of naturally occurring drift biota. 

It seems logical to conclude, however, that in general the composition of 

drift biota reflects the biota of the adjacent community, e.g., the drift at 

Yakutat and La Touche Island were representative of sandy and rocky areas, 

respectively, This type of reasoning may prove to be misleading, especially 

in the absence of information on the physical, chemical, and biological forces 

which lead to the death and accumulation of the drift biota. For example, 

although the distribution of Nereocystis luetkeana in the Aleutian Islands does 

not readily reach Umnak Island, this kelp is quite abundant in the drift at the 

western Aleutian Island of Amchitka. Thus more time and additional data on 

ocean currents, wind patterns, migration times and routes, life history of 

drift biota and thus predators and competitors, etc. are needed before these 

results can be thoroughly and accurately interpreted. 

534

Table 8.--Number and mean daily accumulation rate per kilometer of shoreline 

of most abundant drift biota found at Yakutat sample locality September 

17-20, 1975 (N.D. = no data). 

535

Table 9.--Species and relative numbers of marine mammals and sea and shore 

birds observed adjacent to sample localities at Yakutat, LaTouche Island, 

and Hinchinbrook Island between August 15 and September 19, 1975. Numbers 

indicate maximum citing in any one day. 

536

III. Results -- Aerial Survey 

Over 88 hours of observations were made. The entire Bering Sea coastline 

from Cape Newenham through Unimak Pass and all of the Krenitzen Islands 

were flown. The Gulf of Alaska coastline from Yakutat to Cordova and from 

Chignik to Unimak Pass were also flown (Figure 4) . Unfortunately the data 

for the Chignik to Unimak area were lost when the OAS plan crashed on 

takeoff on August 26, 1975. Included with this were the complete observations 

for the Shumagin Islands. 

The type of observation which resulted from the overflights is shown in 

Figure 3. The data from these charts will be used to determine the percentage 

occurrence of the major habitat types. They will also be drafted into 

figures which may be duplicated and used by other investigations. 

II. Results -- Species Collections 

At each sampling site, one or two of the most experienced biologists make 

collections of animals which do not appear in the samples. Several species 

which occur in tide pools, under rocks or are very rare are collected in this 

manner. Many of the organisms are identified at the Auke Bay Laboratory 

and others are sent to the University of Alaska. A list of species which occurs 

at each station is kept. 

Most of the species collections made in 1974 have been worked up. Several 

made in the spring 1975 trip have also been completed. Because the lists 

are constantly being updated with the arrival of sorting data, we do not have 

completed lists for any location. An example of the data being developed is 

given in Table 10. A list of all species encountered through October 1, is 

given in Appendix II. 

III. Results -- Sample Sorting 

The data for 266 sorted samples were received on October 7, 1975. An example 

of the type of information supplied is given in Appendix III. 

A new contract ($81,000) was signed with the Sorting Center in September 

to process 900 more samples. The Sorting Center Director, Mr. George 

Meuller, anticipates processing 100 samples per month. 

537

Figure 4. Areas overflown during July-August, 1975. Red designates areas which were surveyed 

but the records were lost following the crash of the OAS plane.

Table 10.--Invertebrate species collected at St. George Island on August 15, 

1975 

539

540

III. Results -- Computer Format and Data Archiving 

During the early days of the NEGOA project, an attempt was made to develop 

a unified format which could use data from any of the biological programs. 

A test of this, format was made with NODC in April. 

After the project increased in size, it was determined that there were too 

many programs to be accommodated in a single format. During the first week 

of October, a series of meetings were held in Fairbanks with NODC personnel. 

Following these meetings a new format was developed. It is being finalized 

and will be sent to other OCSEP intertidal investigators for their comments. 

We anticipate that card punching will begin by November 1, 1975. 

III. Results -- Literature Survey 

Although not specifically mentioned in the contract, we have been compiling 

an annotated bibliography of the existing literature concerning the distribution, 

abundance, and life histories of the littoral biota of the North Pacific and 

Arctic Oceans. This bibliography is intended for use primarily by members of 

the OSCEP team at the Auke Bay Laboratory. Dames & Moore, Inc., are also 

compiling a bibliography as part of their diving contract. 

The retrieval and summarization of literature have been restricted geographically 

to include the Arctic Ocean, Bering Sea, Gulf of Alaska, and Pacific Ocean off 

the coasts of Alaska, British Columbia, Russia, and Japan. Information on 

deepwater fauna and flora has been excluded. 

Services of NOAA's Technical Information Division through their OASIS literature 

search have been requested (Appendix IV) and should be received shortly. 

Personal libraries of the scientific staff at Auke Bay Laboratory have been 

reviewed. 

A standard form (Appendix IV) was developed so that each reference need 

only to be examined once prior to being recorded in the bibliography. A 

subject index and author index will be used for retrieval of information from 

the bibliography. A copy of each article, where practicable, will be kept in 

an established file keyed to the bibliography. Hopefully, this will make it a 

working bibliography capable of being easily updated and usable by all 

members of the project. 

541

To date, nearly 150 references have been collected for the bibliography. 

The majority of references have dealt with the marine invertebrates in waters 

off Alaska. 

The ability to successfully complete the annotation of the bibliography by 

the completion date will depend on the volume of literature retrieved by OASIS. 

It is also apparent that a large amount of literature exists in the form of 

unpublished reports, graduate theses, and miscellaneous agency reports. 


1. On August 26, 1975, OAS Aircraft N768 crashed, but the occupants 

were rescued. According to NMFS biologist, Howard Sears, the crash resulted 

from pilot inexperience. OAS had sent a pilot who was not qualified to fly the 

Beaver plane which was lost. Subsequently, Sears requested that his wife 

and NMFS personnel Smoker, Merrell, Barr, and Ellis be notified immediately 

of the crash. The last two people are divers and Sears hoped that the information 

still in the plane could be salvaged. OAS failed to notify any of the 

above people, and all of the information was lost. Although no investigation 

of the accident has been held, it is apparent from Sears' testimony that OAS 

failed to: 1. provide a qualified pilot; and 2. to notify appropriate people 

following the crash. 

On May 10, NMFS personnel Zimmerman and Sears were scheduled to make an 

aerial reconnaissance of intertidal zones in the western Gulf of Alaska. On 

May 5, the assigned pilot, Glenn Waits, was killed while flying an OAS plane. 

Waits had flown NMFS biologist Sears and NBS chemist Gump the very morning 

of his crash. In the fall of 1974, an OAS plane was lost while carrying 4 NEGOA 

bird observers. All hands were presumed killed. 

With these facts in mind, it is apparent that a careful study of OAS should be 

made prior to any further use of this agency by OCSEP personnel. 

2. We believe that this project should provide more than just a 

baseline study of intertidal populations in the Gulf of Alaska. Of special 

interest is the effect of oil on intertidal biota. As part of the FY 76 proposal, 

we proposed to study the effects of oil on limpets, Fucus, and other dominant 

intertidal species. Eventually it was hoped that this part of the study could 

be enlarged into research into the effects of oil on receuitment and critical 

stages. 

Unfortunately, all of this type of research was removed from our proposal 

at the request of OCSEP personnel. We believe that this type of research will 

512

answer the most important question of oil effects and research into oiling 

effects and we should begin as soon as possible. 

3. There has been a constant evolution of thought concerning our 

requirements by the OCSEP office. Geographic boundaries have been moved 

and deadlines have been changed. Last-minute reversals in Surveyor activities 

have occurred quite frequently. These have caused confusion and disorientation 

among the principal investigators. In an investigation this large, 

such problems are probably inevitable, however, and they have not presented 

any overwhelming difficulties. 

V. Acknowledgments 

1. It was the availability of the NOAA vessel Surveyor which made the 

summer a success. It is not possible to list all of the excellent help we received. 

In addition to just having the facilities available, all the ship's personnel were 

more than willing to help. LCDR Schaefer kept the operations moving efficiently, 

Captain MacDonald was always ready to maneuver the ship's schedule to 

accommodate our needs. 

2. The OCSEP office is to be commended for their continuous help and 

good will in providing assistance to us when problems arose. 

IV. Recommendations For Further Research 

A. Selection of specific plants and animals for monitoring. 

The selection of specific plants and animals for monitoring should be 

based on culturing ease and intertidal dominance. Methods for the culture of 

many adult and larval intertidal forms are available. Many of the more important 

forms such as mussels, barnacles, and littorine snails, have been cultured 

and their specific requirements have been reported. Certain intertidal species 

have also been used as monitoring organisms, and the Environmental Protection 

Agency has developed a receiving water quality test based on oyster embryos. 

Because of the intense study done on culturing bivalve molluscs, it is assumed 

that mussels, Mytilus edulus, could be the first international organisms to be 

cultured. Among the algae, Fucus and a filamentous red algae will probably 

be chosen first. 

543

B. Estimation of adult responses to oil levels. 

Adult intertidal animals are fairly resistant to short-term, high level 

oil pollution. Some effects, however, have been reported. Among these is 

the retardation of byssal thread information in mussels. Longterm effects on 

growth and production by dominant intertidal forms will also be studied using 

existing methods. 

Facilities for carrying out oil related studies have been developed and 

are currently in use at the Auke Bay Fisheries Laboratory. A wide variety 

of tolerances have already been determined for several species, including 

salmon, crabs and scallops. 

It should be pointed out that monitoring studies usually include estimates 

of changes in oil-related products in animal tissue. Such studies are not 

included in this project, however, because they fall into an area being 

covered by another OCSEP contractor. 

C. Estimation of Critical Stage Response to Oil Pollution 

Techniques for culturing the embryos and larvae of many common intertidal 

species have been developed. Where possible these techniques could be 

adapted for Alaskan species. 

The larvae of dominant organisms should be cultured. Their sensitivity to 

low levels of crude oil (1 ppm - 1 ppt) and other oil fractions should be 

determined. Correlation of these effects with other environmental variables 

such as salinity and temperature ought to be performed in later years of this 

study. 

D. Prediction of Recruitment Shifts Due to Oil Pollution. 

The natural population and recruitment data could be combined with the oilinduced 

adult and larvae data. Although mortality would probably be low, 

repopulation following winter kills could be critical. Often, winter storms 

almost eradicate populations of mussels and barnacles. High larval mortality 

due to oil would be reflected in recruitment shifts among the more sensitive 

species. Diversity and dominance could change. 

VII. Estimate of Funds Expended 

This summary includes only FY 1976 funds, although the main body of the 

report includes activities beginning in April, 1975, (in FY 1975). Salaries 

are through October 31. Excepting salaries, other costs were arbitrarily 

split between the two tasks. 

544

Gulf of Alaska: (Task 78) 

Salaries: 

Travel: 

Payment for Fujioka's P.C.S. move 

Shipment of goods and samples 

$ 66,236. 

15,245. 

2,744. 

743. 

Contracts: 

(1) U.of Alaska Sorting Center 

(2) Dames & Moore,Inc. , (Rosenthal) 

Subtidal Diving 

(3) Office of Aircraft Services 

(4) Miscellaneous Services 

Supplies 

Equipment 

TOTAL, GULF OF ALASKA 

40,500. 

39,500. 

11,000. 

242. 

3,319. 

2,592. 

$103,121 

Bering Sea: (Task 79) 

Salaries: 

Travel: 

Payment for Fujioka's PCS move: 

Shipment of goods and samples: 

$ 42,560. 

15,245. 

2,744. 

743. 

Contracts: 

(1) U. of Alaska Sorting Center 

(2) Office of Aircraft Services 

(3) Miscellaneous services 

Supplies 

Equipment 

TOTAL, BERING SEA 

40,500. 

11,000. 

242. 

3,319. 

2,592. 

$118,945.

July 17, 1975 - Akun Bay (Billings Head) , Akun island, Aleutians. 

Divers: Ellis, Calvin, Budke, Barr 

Depth: To 30 feet; Ellis and Calvin dove 30 feet for 40 minutes; 20 feet 

for 10 minutes; and 30 feet for 30 minutes. 

P eiiminary species list: field i.d. 

Algae noted: 

Alaria fistulosa 

Aarum cribrosum 

Thalassiophyll um clathrus 

Constantinia sp. 

Animals noted: 

Haliclystis (sedentary jellyfish) 

Seals (Phoca vitulina richardsii) 

Sea lions - numerous and active 

Methods used 

Species collections by Calvin & Ellis; movie camera by Budke, still 

camera by Barr. 

Number of samples taken: 

One large species collection (several jars); pictures (get # from Barr). 

Type of bottom: 

Exceptionally large boulders ~ 20 ft. diameter with large, discrete 

clumps of Alaria fistulosa. Thick stands of Thalassiophyllum. Rock 

between, washed clean and smooth on bottom. Vertical bedrock face 

with exceptionally heavy cover of biota. Sand between boulders at 

~ 35 ft. 

Conditions: 

Visibility exceptionally good, about 60 feet. Slight surge in shallow 

water. Sea lions numerous, active and bold. Caused some distraction, 

which is the reason for the short preliminary species lists. 

Eilis and I collected as fast as possible but made no notes. I believe 

that if I had had the equipment I could have taken a quantitative sample. 

Assessment of methods & future recommendations: 

At this stage our methods were somewhat haphazard accentuated by sea 

lion iarrassment. 

Since the bottom is clean, photographs and sampling can be carried 

cut here even if sea lions are there again--though they make some divers 

quite nervous, it is still possible to carry out sampling so long as 

they do not obscure the visibility excessively by "kicking up" the 

bottom. 

I recommend this as a monitoring site. 

547

Appendix I -- Diving Activities (Report by Natasha Calvin, NMFS) 

A. Western Gulf of Alaska Cruise, May 20-30, 1975 

Two NMFS Biologist/divers accompanied the intertidal sampling team 

during a cruise between Seward and the Shumagin Islands. The objective 

of the diving team was to provide subtidal biological information to supplement 

samples collected intertidally at each site. The divers operated 

immediately seaward of the intertidal sampling site when possible; when 

depth, surge, or visibility factors prevented working adjacent to the intertidal 

site, nearby dive sites were chosen. The information sought during 

each dive was: type and slope of bottom; dominant plants; and dominant 

animals; a partial listing of all other recognized species seen. In addition 

to those observations, underwater photographs were taken of individual 

organisms or small aggregations of organisms, and specimens of plants 

and animals were collected for preservation and permanent storage. 

The subtidal sampling, although mostly qualitative during this cruise, is 

intended to provide a basis for later selection of subtidal sites to be sampled 

quantitatively on a repetitive basis as part of the longterm Gulf of Alaska 

biological monitoring program. 

B. First Bering Sea Cruise, August 13-20, 1975 

I consider that we have made a good start on the Bering Sea diving. 

Our methods developed as we went along. On the first trip we did all qualitative 

observations and photographs and species collections. These will 

always be necessary. On the second trip, we tried out the airlift sampler 

for some quantitative quadrat collections. I had spent a good deal of time 

between trips rounding up parts and discussing the design and construction 

with Fred Salter, who built them. I feel that with the combined use 

of this sampler and Lou Barr's exceptionally excellent photography, we 

will have something well worthwhile pursuing. The species and quadrat 

collections will allow more complete analysis of the photographs. 

There are some problems to be ironed out--for instance, we will probably 

have to use doubles for extensive quadrat sampling, since diver and 

airlift on one tank uses up air pretty fast. 

When monitoring sites are chosen, I suggest we establish permanent 

transects with anchor bolts drilled in the rock (it is possible to run a 

pneumatic drill with a scuba tank) and use photography and limited 

quadrat collecting. 

548

3 

July 18, 1975 - Akutan Point. 

Divers: Ellis, Barr, Budke 

Depths: (this from Ellis' notes) Ellis, 35 ft. 50 min.; Barr & Budke, 

55 ft. 45 min., 65 ft. 32 min.. 

Species seen: 

Algae noted: 

Laminaria longipes - in intertidal 

Laminaria groenlandica - predominates 

Laminaria yezoensis 

Cymathere triplicata 

Agarum cribrosum 

Thalassiophyllum clathrus - with red algae attached 

Species not seen: 

Constantinea 


Mysids - dense swarms in water column. 

"Tennis ball" sponges - many on vertical surfaces. 

Burrowing anemones in sand and silt between boulders. 


Rounded boulders, much undercut, sand and silt between. 

Conditions and recommendations: 

Get from Barr. 

July 19, 1975 - Amak Island, Bering Sea 

Divers: Barr, Calvin, Budke, Ellis. 

Depth: Covered by this report to 55'. Ellis & Calvin dove to 

25 ft. 50 min., 55 ft. 40 min. 

Algae noted (preliminary): 

Laminaria sp. - general cover 

Rhodymenia sp. - heavy cover at water's edge 

Rhodophyta - exceptional number of species and heavy cover of foliose 

reds. 

549

4 

Animals noted 

Sabellid worms - immense beds on bottom. 

Crabs (Oregonia) - on worm community. 

StrongyTocent rtus drobachiensis - sparse. 

Sponge - exceptionally heavy cover at = 0 to -10 feet on smooth bedrock 

in cavern. 

Caprellids - on sponge above. 

Methods used: 

Species collection by Calvin and Ellis. Still photographs by Barr. 


Two large species collections; 1 at 25 feet and 1 at 55 feet. Pictures 

(get # from Barr). 


Small boulders with sandy substrate between. 

Conditions: 

Fair surge, visibility not too good. I was struggling with a rented 

Unisuit which was too large for me and hard to manage. Quantitative 

samples could have been taken. 

Assessment of metnods & future recommendations: 

We made a good beginning on a species collection which should make 

identification from photographs easier. Our collections are discrete 

for the depths given (25 and 55 feet). 

A combination of photography and sampling systematically used would 

work well at this station. The biota is exceptionally rich here, with 

numerous filter feeding animals and a number of algal species. 

I would place this station in TOP PRIORITY as a permanent monitoring 

site. 

July 20, 1975 - Far offshore of Hagemeister Island. 

Divers: Barr & Budke. 

Depth: 70 ft. 20 min. 

Current was too strong to accomplish anything; barren sand bottom. 

550

5 

July 21, 1975 - Cape Pierce. 

Divers: Lou Barr and Mark Howe. 

Depths: 40 ft. 43 min. - I do not have access to these notes. 

July 22, 1975 - Outside Port Moller at buoy. 

Divers: Barr & Budke; Calvin & Ellis. 

Depths: 65 ft. 12 min. for Calvin & Ellis. 

Species list: None (Barr found a small king crab). 

Type of bottom: Sandy. 

Conditions: 

Visibility almost zero (to = 1 foot), fair current, had to hold on 

to anchor, too bad for sampling. This area was explored only because 

the ship was delayed in Port Moller picking up another scientific party. 

Future possibilities: 

At or near slack water this bottom could be sampled with an airlift 

but I would recommend this site for sampling only if the ship had to 

be there any way. Suggest if this occurs again that the divers try 

inside Port Moller. 

July 24, 1975 - N. Unimak Island in vicinity of Cape Mordvinoff. 

Divers: Barr, Budke, Calvin & Ellis. 

Dives were made at 5 sites and Ellis and I made one intertidal species 

collection since it was extremely foggy at first and we were not sure 

the intertidal party would get ashore at all. 

Site 1: Ellis & Barr - 10 ft. 10 min. visibility zero, no collections. 

Ellis & Calvin intertidal species collection. 

Site 2: Ellis & Calvin - 25 ft. 20 min. east of intertidal site. 

Preliminary species list:

6 

Algae noted: 

Laminaria groenlandica? 

Desmarestia intermedia? 

Porphyra? (only red alga seen) occurs sociably, many on some surfaces, 

none on others. 


Balanus sp. - in clumps on boulders, some very crowded, long and pencilthin, 

many dead ones also. 

Hydroids - many 

Telmessus - (crab) 

Erimacrus - (crab) 

Thais lima - many on barnacles and sand. 

Shrimp - many. 

Styela? - stalked tunicate. 

Tealia crassicornis (anemone) - occasional. 


One species collection. 


Sandy bottom with boulders. Some barnacle clumps covered with a sandmud-worm 

conglomeration. 

Conditions: 

Fair current, visibility 2-3 feet. 


Not recommended but possible as a future monitoring site. 

Site 3: Slightly west of intertidal site. Ellis & Calvin - 25 ft. 

20 min. Budke & Barr - 30 ft. 20 min. 


Mostly boulders, some covered with wall to wall Sabellid worms, fine 

red algae, 1 chiton collected. Tealia crassicornis (anemone) exceptionally 

thick, estimated to 10 per square meter: Note - this is 

extremely unusual. These anemones habitually occur singly, about 

20 feet apart or so. 

Site 4: Directly offshore from Site 3. Ellis & Calvin - 55 ft. 15 

min. Barr & Budke - 55 ft. 18 min. 

552

7 

Species seen: 

One sand dollar test, a few hermit crabs. 


Sand, appeared barren. 

Conditions: 

Low visibility, fair current, could maintain position by digging fingers 

into the bottom. 


Not recommended as a future site. 

Site 5: Ellis & Calvin - 30 ft. 15 min. west of intertidal party 

and other sites, west of Rock Island pinnacle. 

Species seen (animal): 

Sabellid worms, probably Schizobranchia. These were often 100% cover 

on boulders. Small crabs (Oregonia ?) skittering over surface of worm 

colonies. 

Tealia 

Smaller brown anemones. 

Small tunicates; collected; occasional. 

Sponge; heavy encrustation in some areas. 

Algae noted: 

Laminaria - scattered and small, often coming through sponge encrustation. 

Methods used: 

Summary of Cape Mordvinoff 

Species collections by Calvin & Ellis, photography by Barr. 

Number of species taken: 

Species, 6 jars animals, 1 jar algae, photographs, check with Barr. 


The large number of worms and anemones here indicates a good food supply. 

A good site could be found in the vicinity of the intertidal site. 

A combination of systematic photography and collection could be used. 

Site should be fairly close to shore away from the sandy, high current 

area. 

553

8 

July 25, 1975 - Makushin Bay, Unalaska Island. 

Divers: Ellis, Calvin, Barr, Budke. 

Site 1: Ellis & Calvin - 50 ft. 25 min., 30 ft. 20 min; Barr & Budke - 

100 ft. 30 min. 

Preliminary species list: 

Algae noted: 

Lithothaminion ? - heavy cover. 

Laminaria dentigera ? - heavy cover. 

Ulva or Monostroma 

Alaria fistulosa - scruffy fungi. 

Agarum cribrosum - 100% cover below the Alaria. 

Constantinea 

Desmarestia intermedia ? - heavy at 15 feet with many stalked jellyfish 

(Haliclystis) attached. 

Codium ritteri 


Foliase reds - sparse. 

Species not seen: 

Thalassiophyllum 


Spirorbis 

Cryptobranchia 

Acmaea mitra 

Epiactis ? Tbrownish orange or pink anemones). 

Balanus cariosus )intertidal 

Evasterias ? ) 

Haliclystis - attached medusae, about 1 inch diameter. 

Margarites pupilla 

Margarites sp. ? 

Stron ylocentrotus drobachiensis - sparse, increasing slightly in numbers 

at the point. 

Solaster sp. - few. 

Pyncnopodia helianthoides - both large and medium size. 

Metriduim - many large white anemones, some chest-high (mine). 

Sabellid worms. 

Sponges - several spp., some quite large. 

Terebellid worm. 

Animales noted: 

Serpulid worms. 

Hemithyrus (brachiopod) - black. 

Brachiopod - small, pink, under rock. 

Bryozoa - under rock. 

554

9 

Cribrinopsis fernaldi ? - large anemones with resident shrimp on columns, 

many of these. 

Pododesmus - "jingle shell" - few. 

Placetron wosnesenskii - crab identification by Barr. 

Methods used: 

Species collections and notes by Calvin & Ellis, photographs by Barr?. 


Primarily rock; boulders in cove, bedrock on point. 

Conditions: Good. 

Site 2: Makushin Bay, north side Cathedral Rocks. 

Divers: Ellis & Calvin to 70 ft.; Barr & Budke to 80 ft. - several 

dives. 

The biota here is so rich it boggles the mind. Cover everywhere 100%+. 


Algae noted: 

Laminaria longipes - immediately subtidal, heavy cover. 

Porphyra sp. on L. longipes. 

Laminaria dentigera ? - thick below L. longipes. 

Small reds - many species. 

Desmarestia munda. 


Anisodoris - large yellow nudibranch. 

Archidoris? - large white nudibranch. 

Sponges - heavy cover. 

Dendronotus - nudibranch. 

Musculus - many, some in nucous case. 

Cryptochiton - several. 

Styela - stalked tunicate, many. 

Colonial tunicates - several species. 

Hydroids - several species. 

Balanus sp. 

Sponge - much encrusting. 

Sabellid worms - very thick on rock faces. 

Serpulid worms. 

Brittle stars. 

Limpets - scattered ( A. scutum ?). 

Katharina 

Tonicella 

Placetron wosnessenskii (crab). 

Seals on rocks - Phoca vitulina. 

555

10 

Methods used: 

Species collection Calvin & Ellis, photographs by Barr. 


Bedrock and exceptionally large boulders. 

Conditions 

Good, slight surge. 


We have a good start on a species collection and photos. This site 

HIGHLY RECOMMENDED for future systematic photography and collections. 

C, SECOND BERING SEA CRUISE 

August 13, 1975 - Makushirn Bay, Cathedral Rocks, south side. 

Divers: Ellis & Calvin, 4 each; Barr & Ramm (ship's diver), 2 each. 

1st dive. Ellis & Calvin - 45 ft. 45 min., exploratory and species 

collection. 


Algae noted 

Laminaris denogera ? heavy cover, many with sori. 

Cymathere r 'iicata - not abundant, but healthy, fertile. 

Thalass iochyllum clathrus - occasional. 

Constantinea - none. 

Desmarestia viridis ? - occasional. 

Alar-ia fistiolnsa - 

AgaJrum crinsro_:um 

occasional and scruffy. 

Lithothamnion - not heavy. 

Laminaria- or,.nples - shallow. 

Red algae - almost none. 


Balanus cariosus - shallow on vertical face. 

Sabellid worms - clumps on rock. 

Tealia crassicornis - occasional. 

Paguruiis spp. 

Strongylocentrotus drolb.achiensis - sparse, most on Haminaria. 

Margarites pupilla 

Hydroids 

Caprellids - on hydroids and ringing holes in Agarum.

11 

Pyncnopodia - one about 3 inches, young. 

Ammocharid worms - in soft substrate, tubes "shingled" with shell, 

at about 40 feet. 

Crabs (Oregonia ?) - on worm colonies. 

Ophuiroids (brittle stars) - under rocks. 

Clams - siphons in soft substrate at 40 feet. 

Microporina ? - joined orange bryozoan, heavy cover. 

Metridium - occasional. 

Epiactis ? - anemone, brown or peach colored. 

Katharina 

Cryptochiton - a few. 

Styela (tunicate) ) abundant near shore. 

Sponges ) 

Harbor seals (Phoca vitulina) - abundant. 


Steep bedrock and boulder in upper zones, at about 40 feet boulders 

interspersed with gravel, shell and sand. 

2nd dive: Ellis, Calvin, Barr; Ellis & Calvin, 30 ft. 20 min. 

Methods used: 

Barr laid a transect line along a steep rock face to about 20 feet 

deep and took photographs at each side of each meter for 6 meters (12 

sites). These photographs are within a 16.5 x 23.5 cm frame. 

Using a frame of the same size, an airlift and a diving knife, I cleared 

a quadrat to the right of the second meter from the bottom of the line. 

This was Quantitative Sample No. 1. 

3rd dive: 

Using same frame, I selected and cleared a quadrat sample on top of 

a boulder, photographed before and after sampling by Barr, sample depth 

32 feet at 1415. 

4th dive: 

More species collection closer to shore. 


Transect photographs - 12 

Quantitative quadrats collected - 2 

Species collections 

Additional photographs by Barr. 

557

12 


I do not recommend this site. The north side is much better, but DO 

recommend development and continuation of these methods at other sites. 

August 14, 1975 - St. George Island, Pribilofs, Sea Lion Point. 

Divers: Barr, Ellis, & Calvin. 

Depth: 30 ft. 45 min., 30 ft. 25 min. 


Algae noted: 


Alaria fistulosa - holdfasts very large. 

Constantinea 

Thalassiophyllum No Agarum! 

Laminaria yezoensis - large patch. 

Laminaria groenlandica - distribution discontinuous. 

Crustose coralline - very heavy and extensive. 

Odonthalia kamtchatica ? 

Many species foliase reds. 


Mangarites helicina - laying eggs on Constantinea. 

Tealia crassicornis 

Tube worms. 

Amphipods - several spp. in droves and piles. 

Sabellid worms 

Serpulid worms 

Acmae scutum ? 

Modiolus - empty shells only. 

Haliclystis 

A. mitra ? 

Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis 

Colonial tunicates 

Styela ? (tunicates) - patchy distribution. 

Fish: spiny orange lump sucker, small flatfish, sculpins, sturgeon 

poachers, pelagic orange polychaetes. 


Bedrock, boulders with sand between. Several very large boulders at 

about 30 feet had apparently been overturned, by ice? storms? Coralline 

alga coating on bottom instead of top. 

Methods used: 

Species collections - Ellis & Calvin. 

558

13 

Photographs - Barr. 

Quantitative sample - 1 taken using airlift, Ellis. 

Conditions: Good. 

August 15, 1975 - Rush Pt., St. George, west of Zapadni Bay. 

Divers: Barr & Howe (ship's diver), 35 ft. 48 min.; Ellis & Calvin, 

30 ft. 35 min. 

1st dive: 


Algae noted: 

Crustose coralline - extremely heavy and thick, can be chipped with 

a knife, animals underneath. 

Constantinea - very thick, exceptionally heavy cover. 

Alaria sp. - small. 

Alaria fistulosa - small, most not reaching surface in 20 feet of water. 

Agarum - sparse and very scruffy. 

Laminaria - only 1 plant seen. 

Desmarestia viridis ? - scattered clumps. 

Few foliose reds. 

Codium ritteri 


Many living under coralline cover, soft bodied crabs, worms, clams, 

black Echiruroids. 

Haliclystis 

Margarites helicina ? - laying eggs. 

Chiton - tiny. 

Hydroids 

Echiuroid worms - black, with long, Bifurcate proboscis which is extended 

several feet and slowly retracted when disturbed, probably same as 

observed by divers at Amchitka; numerous. 

Hippolytid shrimp 

Cryptochiton - occasional. 

Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis - many, all sizes. 

Limpets - few small 

Encrusting sponges, red-orange and orange. 

Styla ? ) tunicates 

Boltenia ? ) 


Large boulders, with clean rock between, not sand. I observed several 

large rocks, one almost one-half the size of the whaleboat, turned 

over with Constantinea upside down on the underside. 

559

14 

Methods used: 

Qualitative observations, species collections, photos by Barr. 

2nd dive: 

At Seal Observation site in Zapadni Bay, off intertidal site. Labels 

on samples say "East of Village." 

Divers: Barr & Howe, 20 ft. 74 min.; Ellis & Calvin, 35 ft. 40 min. 

Con; i: s'un tei , oHd. 

Crt' Cr e - less than Rush Pt. 

0 onii riu" i tciches. 

Orarn;je ;';'ir .. ,.: tes - swarming in water column bearing eggs. 

Ct:enophei r ; 

r I - l r!;:: , pink. 

Al 

Tea n 'ia - no 

cI oon, large, maroon colored. 

large. 

Acmaea sciT,, ? 

Chitonlls - 

Few stars 

FUR SEALS! 

tiny, green, on rock and Constantinea. 

Animals not seen: 

Evasterias 

NTediastor 

Cucumbers 

Meathods- sed: Qualitative observations and collections. 

ossess!r; o riy ieteos & future recommendations: 

i F a peiainiient monitoring site is to be established at St. George, 

Rush Pt. wvculd be superior to this site. Possible damage to sites 

by ice should be considered. 

Med-i aster

15 

August 15, 1975 - Otter Island, west end off St. Paul. 

Divers: Barr & MacKinnon, 20 ft. 55 min.; Calvin & Ellis, 25 ft. 30 

min. 


Algae seen: 

Alaria fistulosa - bed, not fertile. 

Coralline encrusting - much. 

Schyzmenia ? 

Constantinea - little 

Note: Barr reports Thalassiophyllum here. 

Algae not seen: 

Thalassiophyllum 

Agarum 

Desmarestia 

Cymathere 

Animals seen: 

Tealia crassicornis - medium size. 

Epiactis ? 

Alcyonarian coral - pink. 

Anomuran crabs - many, soft bodied. 

Hydroid - red, pectinate. 

Sabellid worms - scattered patches on rock, Schizobranchia?. 

Sabellid worms with tubes in substrate. 

Haliclystis - on rock. 


Small snails - Margarites beringensis? (too small to collect by hand). 

Leptasterias 

Chitons - few 

Pododesmus - few. 

Encrusting sponges - several. 

Mya truncata - shell only. 

Animals not seen: 

Pyncnopodia 

Evasterias 

Cucumbers 

Echiurids 


Large boulders, covered with pink coralline encrustation. 

Methods used: 

Qualitative species collection and photographs. 

561

16 

August 16, 1975 - Otter Island, northwest end. Labels for this group 

are incorrectly marked "NE end". 

Divers: Barr, Ramm (ship's diver), Ellis, Calvin. 

1st dive: Barr & Ramm, 85 ft. 7 min., 35 ft. 38 min.; Ellis & Calvin, 

30 ft. 40 min. 

2nd dive: Barr, Ramm, Calvin, 35 ft. 48 min. 


Algae seen: 

Alaria fistulaea - bed. 

Coralline encrusting. 

Laminaria groenlandica ? - heavy. 

Thalassiophyllum - thick cover. 

Bladed reds - extensive, several spp. 

Schyzymenia ? - frequent. 

Laminaria longipes - on top of boulder at 20 feet. 

Constantinea - many large, many storied. 

Ceramium ? - large, collected. 

Jointed coralline alga - scattered clumps. 

Algae not seen: 

Cymathere 

Animals seen: 

Amphipods - dark grey with lighter undersides, in clouds. 

Hydroid, red, pectinately branched, thick. 

Encrusting sponges - many spp. 

Tunicate - many. 

Worm tubes under coralline coating. 

Small anemones - many. 

Metridium ? 


Epiactis ? - frequent. 

Acmaea scutum ? 

Worm tubes protruding from sponges. 

Haliclystis - large, on Constantinea. 

Chitons - on Constantinea. 

Sabellid worm with large purple bronchiae. 

Pink Alcyonarian. 

Small soft-bellied blue Anomuran crabs. 

Microporina sp. - especially on vertical surfaces. 

Cryptochiton - several. 

Schizobranchia ? - scattered clumps on rock. 

Caprillids 

562

17 


Boulders with solid smooth rock between, some gravel. Boulders are 

often covered with coralline alga. 

Methods used: 

Qualitative species collections and photography. The water was choppy 

and there was a fair surge. 


This would be a good monitoring site for use of systematic photography 

and collecting. 

August 20, 1975 - First Site - Captains Bay, Arch Rock (near Dutch 

Harbor, Unalaska). 

Divers: Barr, Ramm, MacKinnon, Calvin, Ellis. 

Depth: 90 ft. 30 min. 


Algae seen: 

Laminaria groenlandica - cover heavy to 30 feet, sparse below, none 

fertile, many very small L. groenlandica to 90 feet. 

Cymathere triplicata - shallow. 

Schyzymenia ? - to 80 feet. 

Ulva or Monostroma - heavy cover shallow. 

Alaria fistulosa - near shore, not fertile. 

Encrusting dark red - 80 feet. 

Animals seen: 

yncnoodia helianthoides - few. 

Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis - mostly medium to small at 30 feet. 

Microporina - much, jointed bryozoan. 

Euasterias sp. - just subtidal. 

Chitons: Tonicella sp. 

Placiphorella uschakoui ? 

Much encrusting bryozoa. 

Flustra? 

Heteropora ? 

Seapulid worms - few. 

Spirorbis sp. - heavy at 15 feet. 

Cucumaria - black and orange cucumbers. 

Cribrinopsis - anemone with shrimp. 

Puncturella 

Ophuiroids - brittle stars, extremely numerous in gravel at 30 feet. 

563

18 


Boulders in highest zone, cobbles and rocks, sand, etc. on slope lower. 

August 20, 1975 - Second Site - Captains Bay, west side of Bay. 

Divers: Ellis & Calvin, 50 ft. 15 min., 40 ft. 15 min.; Barr & MacKinnon, 

85 ft. 35 min. 

See Barr's report for species. 

Ellis and Calvin used these dives to collect two samples. 

Samples collected: 

Samples 1 and 2, 1/16 m 2 , collected at 40 feet with airlift sampler, 

to depth of 6-7 cm. Areas were chosen at random on sand and small 

rock bottom, chosen for substrate similarity to each other. 

Third Site - Captains Bay, west side of entrance. 

Divers: Ellis & Calvin, 30 ft. 10 min. 

This dive was made off a rock reef bench that looked like a possible 

intertidal collecting site to be used in case we are "stuck" in Dutch 

Harbor some day and want to do something useful. The purpose of the 

dive in the bed of Alaria offshore was to reconnaissance the area as 

a future diving study site also. 


Rock rubble and boulder with some coralline alga coating. This is 

a bed of Alaria fistulosa. There is much Desmarestia viridis ? covered 

with exceptionally dense white Haliclystis. Much Agarum. 

I would recommend this area, intertidal and subtidal, be considered 

as a sampling site if the ship is delayed in Dutch Harbor.


P. 0. Box 155 

Auke Bay, Alaska 99821 

Attention: Dr. Steven Zimmerman 

Gentlemen: 

Anchorage, Alaska 


Progress Report - Summer 1975 

Ecological Assessment of 

Sublittoral Plant Communities in the 

Northern Gulf of Alaska 

We would like to report on the subtidal baseline investigation 

that was initiated in July 1975, in conjunction with the NMFS intertidal 

program for the northern Gulf of Alaska. Three locations were selected 

by the Auke Bay Fisheries Laboratory for inclusion in the nearshore pro- 

gram:. (1) Latouche Point - Danger Island; (2) Macleod Harbor, Montague 

Island; and (3) Zaikof Bay, Hinchinbrook Entrance (Figure 1). Reconnais- 

sance dives and beach surveys were conducted in these locations during 

August-September 1974 and in April 1975. The background information 

gathered in each site provided us with a general knowledge of the area 

prior to initiating the current research program. These pre-OCS data have 

not been published to date; however, they will be included in the overall 

final report. 

565



Page -2- 

NMFS established intertidal baseline monitoring sites in each of 

the previously mentioned locations during 1974-75. Our task was to expand 

the biological data acquisition in each location by extending the sphere 

of observation into the sublittoral zone adjacent to the shoreline. All 

of our sampling and observations were to be made while diving at depths 

between 5 in and 30 in below MLLW. 

On July 22, 1975, we began the summer OCS field work in Prince 

William Sound and returned to the three stations in mid-September. During 

July, we recorded an intrusion of "red tide" into Zaikof Bay and Latouche 

Passage. However, by September the dinoflagellate bloom was no longer vis- 

ible in the water column. Concurrently, measurements of water transparency 

and downward irradiance increased dramatically after the planktonic bloom 

had disappeared from the Sound. Although we saw no deleterious effects on 

the sea life in these locations, we did document an extensive kill of clams. 

and snails in Kachemak Bay that was believed to be related to the red tide 

phenomena. 

Latouche Point - Danger Island 

OBSERVATIONS AND PRELIMINARY RESULTS 

On the west end of L touche Island, between Montague Straits and 

Latouche Passage, lies a reef that extends seaward for approximately 4 km. 

The entire area underwent considerable change in elevation during the earth- 

quake of March 27, 1964 (lational Research Council, 1971). The uplift most 

567



Page -3- 

certainly affected not only the physiognomy of the shoreline but also the 

nearshore reefs and associated marine life. The sublittoral zone was heter- 

ogeneous in relief; the substratum was composed of boulders, shale pavement, 

outcrops and patches of sand or shell debris. 

During the summers of 1974 and 1975, the largest stand of the 

bull kelp Nereocystis luetkeana in the Prince William Sound region was 

found on the reef between Latouche and Danger Island. Attached bull kelp 

was found growing from the intertidal-subtidal fringe down to depths of 

20 m. Most of the Nereocystis plants examined in July 1975 were robust 

and fertile;.however, by mid-September these same individuals had lost 

most of the blade material above the bladder. Densities of Nereocystis 

in belt transects ranged from 0 to 0.12 individuals/m2 within the 200 

square meters of sea floor quantitatively sampled. 

The summer macrophyte assemblage was multilayered with a canopy 

of Nereocystis floating on the sea surface above an understory of shorter 

statured algae. The most conspicuous algae observed during the summer 

season are listed in Table 1. Additional algal species will be added to 

this inventory when our identifications are verified by taxonomic experts. 

Laminaria groenlandica was the most abundant brown alga in the understory 

complex with densities from 3.96 to 10.04 individuals/m². Other conspicu- 

ous browns were Cymathere triplicate, Pleurophycus gardneri and Agarum 

cribrosum. Beneath this dense canopy was usually found another vegetative 

layer composed of the foliose and peltate reds. Encrusting and articulated 

568

TABLE 1 

TENTATIVE LIST OF MACROALGAE 

COLLECTED IN SUBLITTORAL ZONE OFF 

LATOUCHE POINT - DANGER ISLAND 

569



Page -4- 

corallines and non-calcareous forms such as Hildenbrandia grew on most of 

the cobbles and boulders. 

The macrophytic understory provided food and cover for the animal 

components of the system. It also served as living substrate for nestling 

orepiphytic forms such as Musculus spp., a small filibranch mussel common 

to the open coast of southern Alaska. Musculus was found attached to the 

marine vegetation; some of the kelps were almost completely covered. It 

also adhered to rock surfaces. Population structure is being examined 

and samples taken within 1/4 square meter quadrats. For example, within 

one quadrat that contained two attached laminarian kelps we removed 521 

Musculus. Individuals ranged from 4 mm to 13 mm in shell length (Figure 

2). Newly settled spat (

MUSCULUS 

SIZE CLASS DISTRIBUTIONS 

FROM A SUBTIDAL .25 M 2 QUADRAT 

OFF LATOUCHE ISLAND 

571



Page -5- 

feeders; therefore the amount of organic material that must be available 

to support the vast amount of biomass in the nearshore system is certainly 

impressive. 

Members of the ichthyofauna observed repeatedly in the shallow 

sublittoral zone off Latouche Point were the black rockfish, kelp and rock 

greenling, northern ronquil, Irish lord and juvenile tomcod. Marine mam- 

mals appear to be represented on either a transitory or year-round basis 

by the sea otter; harbor seal, Steller sea lion and killer whale (ADF&G, 

personal communication). Apparently this is an important feeding area for 

marine mammals. 

Macleod Harbor 

Macleod Harbor, situated on the southwest end of Montague Island 

is semi protected from the Gulf of Alaska; however, it does receive some 

ocean swell and storm surf. The northern shoreline from the entrance at 

Point Woodcock to about midway into the harbor is rocky and irregular. 

The southwest coast of Montague Island was raised by as much as 10 m during 

the Good Friday Earthquake of 1964 (National Research Council, 1971). One 

effect of the quake was to separate the pre-earthquake littoral zone from 

the post earthquake shoreline. At present, the shoreline is characterized 

by a narrow band of solid substratum with a number of small pro;;otories 

extending into the shallow subtidal zone. Bordering the rocks is a soft 

bottom composed of sand and moderate amounts of shell material. The surface 

572



Page -6- 

of the sand was covered by a thin film of benthic diatoms; sulfur bacteria 

discolored or spotted numerous areas of the sea floor. 

The rockweed Fucus distichus formed the most conspicuous algal 

belt in the intertidal zone during September 1975. Below this band, in 

order of relative abundance, were the kelps, Laminaria groenlandica, 

Agarum cribrosum, Alaria sp., Pleurophycus gardneri, Costaria costata, 

and Cynathere triplicata. Also scattered along the rocky shoreline were 

small beds of bull kelp. Within these same floating kelp beds, we esti- 

mated Nereocystis density at 0.46 individuals/m 2 

The sandy bottom adjacent to the shoreline supported an assem- 

blage of epifaunal invertebrates that are "characteristic" of this habitat. 

The snail Olivella baetica was very abundant in this location and appeared 

to spend much time on the surface of the sand plowing through the interface. 

The sabellid worm Chone sp. formed thick-walled, sandy tubes on the sea 

floor. It occurred in densities of approximately 1.0 individual/m2. Yellow- 

fin sole Limanda aspera were also common in this area. Frequently when the 

soft substratum was disturbed by our sampling techniques, the soles attacked 

and fed upon the exposed polychaetes. Along the reef complex where the sand 

and rock merged was a zone of high biological activity. Our observations 

and underwater sampling were conducted from the base of the rocky substratum, 

at a depth of 12 m below the sea surface, to the lowest reaches of the tide. 

573



Page -7- 

The conspicuous macroinvertebrates were examined within large 

quadrats varying in size from 10 n x 0.5 m to 25 m x 2 m, depending on the 

area of the reef we sampled or the organisms counted. We quantitatively 

examined 235 square meters of sea floor during this sample period. 

The sun star, Pycnopodia helianthoides was the most abundant 

macroinvertebrate in this assemblage with densities from 0.04 to 0.33 

2 2 

individual/m2, and a mean density of 0.17/m2. Other echinoderm species 

in order of numerical rank were Dermasterias imbricata, Henricia .eviuscula 

and Orthasterias koehleri. 

For smaller animals, particularly sessile or colonial forms, we 

sampled within 1/4 square meter quadrats. Data were gathered on density 

and percent cover. An example of the kinds of field data and groups under 

consideration is presented in Table 2. In addition to our quantitative 

information, we have a tentative list of the macroalgae, marine invertebrates 

and fishes that are known to inhabit this location. A species inventory will 

be presented in a later report following taxonomic confirmation of a number 

of species. 

Zaikof Bay 

During July 1975, we made dives in the shallow sublittoral zone 

adjacent to the NMFS intertidal station in Zaikof Bay. The bottom is char- 

acterized by relatively low profile reefs, boulders and a soft bottom com- 

posed of fine dark sand. A fine layer of silt covered much of the solid 

574

TABLE 2 

MACLEOD HARBOR 

(1/4 m 2 quadrats - sheer rock face) 

575



Page -8- 

substratum; silt also accumulated on the macrophyte understory. Shell 

debris was common between the rocks and boulders. Shells of the clam 

Humilaria kennerlyi were the major components of this debris. Many 

appeared to have been broken and eaten by sea otters. Drift macrophytes 

were present along the bottom. Patches of sulfur reducing bacteria were 

common in this location, forming a white film on the surface of the sand. 

On the shallow rocky substratum, the near bottom kelp assemblage 

was dominated numerically by Laminaria groenlandica and Agarum cribrosum. 

Beneath the algal understory was a coralline turf composed of both encrust- 

ing and articulated corallines. Arborescent bryozoans such as Microporina 

borealis were also common on the rocky substratum. A species inventory 

was started for this location. The list will be updated as more plants 

and animals are collected and identified. 

On July 24, 1975, a dense "red tide" moved into Zaikof Bay. The 

discoloration of the water and the reduction in available light made observ- 

ations along the bottom nearly impossible. When we returned to Zaikof Bay 

in mid-September, gale winds and rain storms lashed Hinchinbrook Entrance 

for more than three days. Wind speeds in excess of 60 mph were recorded 

by the "R.V. Montague." The overall weather and inability to anchor safely 

in the vicinity of the study site forced us to return to Cordova. 

SAMPLING AND STATISTICAL ANALYSIS 

Several types of quantitative data are being collected on the 

conspicuous species present in each study site. Included are estimates 

576



Page -9- 

of relative abundance (density-number of individuals per square meter) and 

some measurements of linear size (length, width, aperture width, etc.) and 

weight (wet or dry weight of soft tissue). This information will assist 

in describing variations in conditions at the study sites and will permit 

examination of differences between them. Specifically, we want to be able 

to compare population structure among different areas, or at the same site 

under different conditions. Accompanying biomass estimates will be gener- 

ated for selected species at these study sites. These data will provide 

information on temporal variations in population structure at specific 

sites and allow assessment of the effects of unnatural perturbation. 

We will employ several statistical techniques in data analysis. 

Size-frequency data will be compared with the Kolmogorov-Smirnov two- 

sample test (Siegel, 1956). Differences in density and biomass data gen- 

erally will be compared using the Student's t-test or analysis of variance 

methods (Sokal and Rohlf, 1969). Most of the biomass data will be recon- 

structed by using the size-frequency data in conjunction with site-specific 

size-weight regressions. This will only produce first approximations, but, 

in view of the nature of the study and the poor understanding of the quali- 

tative features of the various systems, it appears that the major portion 

of our initial efforts would be more usefully spent in general endeavors 

such as describing species composition and the natural relationships (e.g., 

predator-prey and other trophic relationships). 

577



Page -10- 

Population structure will be examined using a series of equations 

based on Brody-Bertalanffy growth curves (Ebert, 1973). This method, 

especially applicable to survey work, uses easily gathered size data to 

produce useful first approximations of growth and mortality rates, and also 

generates a life table. The parameters required for computation are the 

means of the size distributions from two large samples (300 measurements; 

the means must closely estimate the parametric mean for the sampled popula- 

tion), times of sample collection relative to the time of "recruitment" in 

the sampled population,-and maximum (asymptotic) size attained by the 

species at the collecting site. 

-o 0 o - 

Ebert, T.A. 1973. Estimating growth and mortality rates from size data. 

Oecologia 11:281-298. 

Siegel, S. 1956. Nonparametric Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences. 

McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York. 312 pp. 

Sokal, R.R., and F.J. Rohlf. 1969. Biometry. W.H. Freeman and Co., 

San Francisco. 776 pp. 

578



Page -11- 

Our fall survey in Prince William Sound is scheduled for the 

month of November. We have arranged to be in Juneau on October 29, 1975 

to discuss the project with you. However, if you have any questions re- 

garding the report before this time, please do not hesitate to call on us. 

RJR:DCL:lf 

cc: Mr. Ted Merrill 

579 

Yours very truly, 

DAMES & MOORE 




Senior Marine Biologist

Appendix II -- Species List for Code Through 1 October 1975 

PORIFERA CHONDROLLADIA ALASKENS 32 

MYCALE AWHERENS 

MYXILLA INCRUSTANS 

Leuconia heathi FORCEPIA USCHAKOWI 32 

Halichondria sp. 

32 

HYDROIDEA 

Endendrium rameum 3301080102 

Endendrium annulatum 3301080103 

Sertularia tricuspidata 3301130213 

TURBELLARIA 

RHYNCHOCOELA 

Emplectonema gracile 

POLYCHEATA 

POLYNOIDEA 

35 

40 

40030101C2 

480101 

Harmothoe imbricata 4801011002 

Gattyana treadwelli 4801010806 

Gattyana ciliata 4801010602 

SIGALIONIDAE 

Phloe minuta 

PHYLLODOCIDAE 

480105 

4801050101 

480112 

Phyllodoce maculata 480112 

Genetyllis castanea 4801120801 

Eteone longa 

4801120203 

Mysta barbata 4801120701 

Eulalia viridis 4801120301 

Eulalia sp. 48011203 

SYLLIDEA 

480122 

Exogone sp. 48012207 

Exogone lourei 4801220703 

Exogone Verugera 580 4801220706 

Exogone molesta 4801220704 

Exogone gemnifera 4801220702

SYLLIDEA (cont.) 

Typosyllis pulchra 

4801220505 

Typosyllis stewarti 

4801220506 

Typosyllis alternata 

4801220501 

Typosyllis variegata 

4801220512 

Typosyllis a. adamantea 

Typosyllis fasciata 

Typosyllis elongata 

Eusyllis bloomstrandi 

Shaerosyllis hystrix 

Odontosyllis parva 

Odontosyllis phosphorea 

Syllis armillaris 

Autolytus (R) prismaticus 

Autolytus trilineatus 

Autolytus cornutus 

Brania clavata 

Brania brevipharygea 

Paleontus bellis 

Amandia brevis 

Ammotrypane aulogaster 

Abarenicola pacifica 

Notophyllum imbricatum 

4801220509 

4801220507 

4801220504 

4801220601 

4801220803 

4801221102 

4801221103 

4801220502 

4801220103 

4801220105 

48012201 

4801220902 

4801220901 

4801070101 

4801560202 

4801560101 

4801600102 

4801120402 

NEREIDAE 

Nereis cf. zonata 48012304 

Nereis sp. 

48012304 

Nereis procera 4801230404 

Nereis vexillosa 

4801230405 

NEPHTYIDAE 

Nephtys cornuta 4801240107 

Nephytys ciliata 4801240102 

Nephytys coeca 4801240103 

GLYCERIDAE 480126 

Glycera capitata 4801260101 

SPHAERODORIDAE 480125 

Sphaerodoropsis minutum 4801250101 

GONIADIDAE 480127 

Glycinde picta 

58.1 

4801270101

GASTROPOD (cont.) 

Margarites helicinus M. GIGANTEUS 4905060302 

Margarites pupillus 4905060308 

Littorina sitkana L. ALEUTICA 4905090101 

Littorina scutulata 4905090104 

Lacuna marmorata LAMELLARIA sp. 4905100304 

Lacuna vincta 4905100305 

Lacuna sp. 49051003 

Odostomia sp. ONCHIDIDPSIS 

HANNAI 49054201 

Nucella lamellosa 4905310102 

Nucella lima 4905310104 

Nucella canaliculata 4905310101 

Buccinum baerii 4905320129 

Buccinum polare Volutharpa ampullacer 4905320126 

Velutina velutina Volutharpa perey 4905270201 

Mitrella tuberosa VELUTINA plicatilis 4905340202 

Searlesia dira 4905320201 

Cylichna occulta 4905490201 

Cylichna sp. 49054902 

Cylichna alba 4905490203 

Turbonilla sp. 49054202 

Collisella pelta C. instabilis 4905040201 

Alvinia compacta 4905110106 

Siphonaria thersites 4905760101 

AMPHIPODA 

Paramoera columbiana 5331201001 

Paramoera carlotensis 5331201002 

Ampithoe rubricata 5331040101 

Ampithoe rubricatoides 5331040102 

Anisogammarus subcarinatus 5331210101 

Anisogammarus lacustoides 5331210102 

Allorchestes maleolus 5331240101 

Corophiidae sp. 533115 

Oligochinus lighti 5331120901 

Parapleustes nautilus 5331430301 

Parapleustes pugettensis 5331430302 

Melita sp. 53312120 

Calliopiella pratti 5331121001 

Pontogencia Kondokovi 5331201201 

Ischyrocerus Krascheninnikovi 5331270201 

Hyale rubra frequens 5331510201 

Jassa pulcella 5331270301 

Parallonchestes sp. 53312404 

Photis reinhardi 5331260202 

Parallorchestes ochotensis 5331240401 

Photis cf. brevipes 53312602 

582

POLYPLACOPHORA 4903 

Cynoplax dentiens CRYPTOCHITON STELIERI 4903020201 

Kathorina tunicata 4903050301 

Tonicella marmorea 4903020603 

Tonicella lineata 4903020602 

Tonicella rubra 4903050401 

Mopalia ciliata 4903050401 

Mopalia mucosa 4903030408 

Hanleya hanleyi 4903080101 

Schizoplax brandtii 4903060101 

Leptochitona sharpei 4903020401 

PELECYPODA Pododesmus macroschisma 4904 

Hiatella arctica 4904290201 

Musculus discors 4904070402 

Mytilus edulis 4904070101 

Protothaca staminea 4904210701 

Macoma balthica 4094240117 

Macoma obliqua 4904240106 

Macoma sp. 49042401 

Clinocardium nuttallii 4904200102 

Clinocardium clilatum 4904200101 

Mya arenaria 4904280201 

Nucula tenuis 4904020201 

Dacrydium sp. 49040705 

Turtonia minuta 4904190101 

Axinopsida serricata 4904150201 

Modiolus modiolus 4904070601 

Saxidomus gigantea 4904210201 

Nuculana pernula 4904030201 

GASTROPOD 

Nassarius mendicus 4905350101 

Grepidula nummaria 4905230201 

Bittium mumitium 4905200101 

Amphissa columbiana 4905340101 

Irichotropis insignis 4905240202 

Fusitriton oregonensis 4905290101 

Acmaea rosacea 4905040105 

Acmaea digitalis 4905040202 

Acmaea persona 4905040209 

Acmaea mitra 4905040203 

Acmaea scutum 4905040209 

Acmaea fenestrata 4905040210 

Cerithiopsis stejnegeri 4905200201 

Cerithiopsis stephasae 4905030204 

Puncturella cucullata 4905030204 

Onchidella borealis 4905750101 

DIODORA ASPERA 

ANSALES ROSEA 

583 

DIAPHANA MINUTA 

BULBUS FRAGILIS

AMPHIPODA (cont.) 

Photis spasskii 5331260203 

Parhyle zibellina 5331240402 

Ampithoe delli 5331040103 

Pontogeneia andrijaskhevi 5331201202 

Metopelliodes sp. 53314804 

Caprellid 

ISOPOD 

Cleamis occidentalis 533000501 

Gnorimosphaeroma sp. 53300303 

Exosphaeroma sp. 53300304 

Dynemonella sheari 533003 

Synidotea sp. 53300202 

Sphaeromatidae 533003 

Exosphaeroma amplicauda 5330030401 

Dynemonella glabra 533003 

Parasitic Isopod (Bopyridae) 533008 

Pentidotea wosensenskii 5330020302 

Gnorimosphaeroma oregonensis 5330030301 

Munna stephenseni 5330070101 

Munna chromatocephala 53300701 

laniropsis kincaidi kincaidi 5330060201 

PYCNIGONIDA 

Achelia chelata 5200040201 

Ammothea alaskensis 5200040101 

ACMELIA Ammnothea gracilipes 5200040102 

SAmmothea latifrons 5200040103 

Ammothea pribilofensis 5200040104 

Phoxichilian fernoratum 520OO30102 

CUMACEA 

Cumella sp. 53280801 

Diastylis sulcata 5328050120 

Eudorella emarginata 5328040201 

Campylaspis affinis 53280701 

THORACICA 

Balanus balanoides 5318020101 

Balanus cariosus 5318020103 

Balanus glandula 5318020107 

Balanus rostratus 5318020111 

Chthamalus dalli 5318020201 

DECAPODA 

Cancer sp. 53331701 

Pagurus h. hirsutiusculus 5333100213

DECAPODA (cont.) 

Pagurus beringanus 

Pugettia gracilis 

Heptacarpus brevirostris 

Telmessus cheiragonus 

Chinocetes megalops 

DERMATURUS MANDTII 

ASTEROIDEA 

Evasterias troschelia 

Leptasterias hexactis 

Dermasterias imbricata 

Henricia cf. dyscrita 

Pisaster ochraceus 

Pycnopodia heliathoides 

ECHINOIDEA 

Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis 

TELEOSTEI 

PHOLIDIDAE 

Pholis laeta 

COTTIDAE 

Clinocottus acuticeps 

TANAIDS 

Tanais portiatus 

Tanais Loricatus 

Leptochalia sp 

ACARINA 

Halacaridae 

COPEPODA 

Harpactacoid 

ADDITIONS 

585 

5333100209 

5333160503 

5333050510 

5333180101 

53331603 

6801 

6801120302 

6801120409 

6801010101 

68010801 

6801120502 

6801121201 

79 

791613 

6802040201 

7916130305 

791504 

7915040701 

5329 

5329010102 

5329010101 

5101 

510101 

5310

CHLOROPHYTA 

Ulothrix laetevirens 0401010103 

Monostroma fuscum 0401030103 

Entermorpha intestinalis 0401030306 

Entermorpha linza 0401030309 

Ulva sp. 04010304 

Ulva fenestrata 0401030401 

Ulva lactuca 0401030402 

Rhizoclonium riparium 0404010102 

Urospira mirabilis 0404010302 

Cladophora flexuosa 0404010501 

Cladophora sp 

Spongomorpha sp 04040106 

Codium fragile 0405010101 

Monostroma zostricola 0401030109 

Lola lubrica 0404010201 

Ulothrix implexa 0401010102 

Chaetomorpha cannabina 0404010401 

Cladophora seriacea 0404010505 

586

ADDITIONS (cont.) 

Metridium senile 

Ostracod 

3303 

5308 

Lepidonotus squamitus 4801011103 

Autolytus verrilli 4801220106 

Prionospio cirrifera 4801420502 

Oligocheates 

480201 

Brachiopoda 67 

Terebratulina transversum 6702030102 

Psuedoscorpion 

Insecta 54 

5102 

Bryozoan 66 

Microporina sp. 66010801 

Black Blob = BB = Aglaja diomedium 

587 

4905790101

RHODOPHYTA 

Bangia fuscopurpuea 1301020101 

Porphyra sp. 13010202 

Cryptosiphonia woodi 1303010101 

Endocladia muricata 1303030101 

Gloiopeltis furcata 1303030201 

Neoagardhiella baileyi 1304020101 

Lithothamnion sp 13030610 

Bossiella chiloensis 1303060602 

Bossiella plumosa 1303060605 

Corallina vancouvenensis 1303060803- 

Hildenbrandia cf. occidentalis 13030402 

Calliophyllis flabellulata 1303080303 

Halosaccion glandiforme 1305010201 

Rhodymenia palmata 1305010304-- 

Callithamnion piklanum 1306010606 

Rhodymenia pertusa 1305010306 

Antithamnion Kylinii 1306010105. 

Antithamnionella pacifica 1306010202. 

Plocamium tenue 1304030101 

Ahnfeltia plicata 1304040101 

Ahnfeltia gigartinoides 1304040102 

Gymnogongrus platyphyllus 1304040401 

Constantinea subulifera 1303010703 

Gigartina papillata 1304050203 

Gigartina agardhii 1304050204 

Gigartina lalissima 1304050205 

Gigartina stellata 1304050206- 

Iridea sp 1304050301- 

Microcladia borealis 1306010901 

Microcladia coulteri 1306010902 

Ceramium 13060108 

Ptilota felicina 1306011001 

Ptilota tenuis 1306011003 

Neoptilota asplendoides 1306011101 

Neoptilota hypnoides 1306011102 

Iridea cornucopiae 1304050303 

Rhodoglossum californicum 1304050402 

Tokidodendron bullata 1306020602 

Polysiphonia hendryi 1306040101 

Polysiphonia pacifica 1306040107 

Pterosiphonia bipinnata 1306040202 

Pterosiphonia dendroidea 1306040204 

Rhodomela larix 1306040501 

Odonthalia floccosa 1306040603 

Odonthalia washingtoniensis 1306040606 

Smithora naiadum 1301010301 

Iridea lineare 1304050306 

Phyllospadix scouleri 3001010101 

588

Appendix III -- Example of Sorting Results Probided by the 

University of Alaska Sorting Center. 

589

CAPITELLIDAE 480158 

Capitella capitata 4801580101 

Heteromastus filiformis 4801580201 

OWENIIDAE 

Ammochares fusiformis 4801620301 

Myriochele heeri 4801620201 

AMPHARETIDEA 

Ampharete arctica 4801650201 

Psuedosabellides littoralis 4801681501 

Glyphanostomum pallescens 4801651101 

ORBINIIDAE 480165 

Haploscoloplos elongata 4801390102 

PARAONIDAE 480140 

Aricidea suecica 4801400103 

Paraonis gracilis 4801400301 

CIRRATULIDEA 480149 

Thryx parva 4801490303 

Tharyx sp. 48014902 

Tharyx multifilis 4801490203 

Cirratulus cirratus 4801490101 

Chaetozone setosa 4801490401 

SPIONIDAE 480142 

Spio felicornis 4801420701 

Spiophanes cirrata 4801421003 

Spiophanes bombyx 4801421001 

Polydora sp. 48014204 

Boccardia columbiana 4801420801 

Polydora ciliata 4801420405 

Rhyncospio sp. 48014212 

Pygospio californica 4801421301 

Polydora brachycephala 4801420403 

Boccardia proboscidea 48014208 

590

Appendix IV -- Literature Survey Forms and Results. 

581

may be necessary) 

11. DATA BASE(S) TO BE SEARCHED - (See user's guide for list of available data bases; consultation with OASIS personnel 

12. PURPOSE Of SEARCH - (PIes. Indlira rh. p.nupe IDM whirh thia i *ch wilt be Ued, iJrfnJ *peclC d.tlI that will put ywo 

requt Intle asteiL e.f.: 

pnte.mntl.d at manlere. e 

aienlng reenlch, projeilte 

r.) 

rrea, prteetuon of c, bec chptor. Jown·l rtiesjr p.pseJo be 

Ongoing research 

Preparation of research reports 

13. SEARCH REQUIREMEiNTlS (Pleao hek aon the b. below r tIo eIathe t. awr.r -p. rew'ul- 

I M 

] CONTIMNUNG CURENKT AWARKNE-SS (3DI) (ONE T E RETROSPECTIVE $SARCn 

[goTHR eR3,m. Current awarness through Septembn-rx 10Q76 .- . ) 

14. SCOR DESIRIED (Pt.... himLe et. the hob- h-I.) 

SBROAD SEtACH DESIONED TO RETRIEVE AS MANY A3 POSSIBLE OF THE RELEVANT CITATIONS, BUT WHICH MIGHT 

ALSO RETRIEVE MANY IRCELEVANT CITATIONS. 

j NARROW SEARCH DISIGNED TO RETRIEVE SOME OF THE RELEVANT CITATIONS, BUT WITH FEW ACCOMPANYING 

IRREiLEVANT CITATIONS. 

15. KNOWN RELEVANT PAPERS - e(Suppy hidliLUegophli litaIamu /.l a! the Ieanl sllju irteil 7 he, arrltd arya.ur as .ello.. 

4i no aL-ei e ep.-- Are b..e l.,, elae0 "NOHN".) 

16. APPgaVAL. AND ACCIPTANCE OP CHAR" FOR PERFORMANCE Of WORK 

NSATUR U ~4 %J 

_Q ý A Ago ORCANIATIO 

INDICATE ACCOUNT TO WHICH SERVIC-S SHOU.LD Bt p- ek e -eam p.yrb*. le U7e. IL>r.ejr Cwre... lwoAA) 

CHARGEO: 

OR'G. CODE __TASK NO. ] 1.L_______ 

SEND THIS FORN WITH PAYMENT, IF APPROPRIATEVTQ 

Techbical Infor=atido Dirisioa (DI32) 

Natiocal Oceanic Iad A~-os2 he:i Adia~iscratoa 

Vashinagon, D. C. 20235 

IP SP!CIAL ASSISTANCE IS HEEDED FOR COMPLETIOM OF THIS FORM, CALL- 

OASES Technical LIfor=3--oo Specialise 

Area Code (202) 343-6-454 

Workida Hou:s: 7:30 A. .J. :o 4:C0 P. M. Easre-a Time 

594 

6PO 87T-30s

MOAA FORM24-21 U.S. DEPAlTmENTT OF COMMERCE DATE 

|11 73) NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATNO5;PMEIC ADMINISTRATION 

REQUEST FOR OASIS SERVICES 

(OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION SYSTEM) 9-25-75 

ATTACHMENT NO. 2 

1. NAME OF PERSON SUSBMITTING REQUEST (Last. FuirL. Middl.) 2. PHOME HO. (lacl.te A.C.) 

Haugland. Palmer I Iron 71 7 

S (17 

3. ADDRESS - NUMBERI ANO STREET 

P. O. Box 155 

CITY STATE ZIP CODE. 

Auke Bay Alaska 99821 

4. INDIVIDUAL TO ACTUALLY USE THIS SEARCH (La. First. Middli) 

Koski, K. V. and Edson, S. A. 

5. TITLE AND ORGANIlATION 6. PHONE NO. (Lah.l A.r_ 

ich.. p TRini Ali'k Ba FiSheriq5 Lab. 1((9q7)7AQ-727l 

7. DETAILED SU&JECT AREA REQUIREMENTS - (Ple]*" d4.erl6b 7yi. n e need. .- darnr . spetfie.lr *a po.sibl. IncJrd. as m-n 

*ey werd. arilS ayon7Wt* as p4elibl,. indicatilng Wy temsa Luhe any lhave spcial Ima.inj to y0wr "equest. II spiCfit subfjt armens* 

o b. eas &>dd bfrm ti prehis. ple*. P et l foI rth *fepariely and cl e*rly izmi tl o er - *Ixcluiim*.)J 

Marine algae and seagrasses, intertidal and subtidal biota, benthic littoral 

flora, life history, growth, reproduction, predation, distribution, abundance 

taxonomy, methodology, beach sampling, enviromental factors. For all speci s 

of marine algae included in the following Phylla: Chlorophycophyta, 

Pheophycophyta, Rhodophcophyta. and the following flora of sea grasses: 

Phyllospadix, Ruppia, and Zostera 

& GEOGRAPHIC RUTRICTIO-xb - (7f en, nrf.inB a*.r c 01f AIntlet. li th bih-n 

Benthic littoral areas Cintertidal and subtidal) within the boundaries of the 

continental shelf of the North Pacific and Arctic Oceans adjoining the 

countries of Canada (British Columbia, Northwest Territories), United States 

(Alaska), Russia, and Japan. 

9. AUTHORS - (WlJa ary e b*hew W- sfr. w ttinnre am Intermee, prcifyng" firtin ad sidde ne - en fl a-rn) u 

M. J. Wynne 

Isabella Abbott 

10. LIST ANY JOURHALS WHOSE CONTENTS SHOULD SE EXCLUDED FRO, THIS SEAaC 

None 

Ut:. *.

pDATA AUi3) TO B« 51AMCHAo - 3*. tue.' a-J. I Ailso Use I .. iab deoe be; cen.«allte ti with OAsl » _ l ,7 

12. PURPS0 0P S3EARCH - (Pl**e* jAdJ·Wl* We* epop Iw M*ish bls *e*aru ,wU be us, glra. 

qutn 

apf-cjj 

I ll*.T.t 

d*.aitj 

.. 

u~ 

k« 

. -J t 

*u i 

pur yi 

alaa rusu»n p**,Iu-- ***eu, ampsedanhov be sh upk Sapl*a. n Aueu aril 1 

pwnIed at tooawm** e1s.) p. ar he 

- 

Ongoing research' 

Preparation of research reports 

13. SXARcQ Rsu9OIManrSe ( a. a w -0 U m*. bega hlw sbo w* * yr *eruJ.L yrw u-Va) 

COMTw m*se CURANTY AwAMXrdss 1 

(=Dao O N 

TIME RETOTSPCCTnVE SEANRC 

Q---F-.^ C-rr ffnlt i~t^mgnp'i g t«h hrnniea Con-cwtbpr 19)76i (ftz ct ) ---- 

14. 1caPS D pSLAO (pMr.. a-a -a o AS .. e- a .> 

1 s aOAQ SR ACM O3sGioCEO 70 ITO TRIEV AS MANY AS t5iK 

ALSO RETRIEVE MANY IRMLEVM.ANT CITATIONS. 

0 THE RELEVANT CITATIONS, BUT WWICH MaCNTr 

7 nNf OWKEARC aSIGNED TO RNTRETVC3 

S0M Of Tm RELEVANT CITATIONS. BUT WtiY FEW ACCOMiPANYIN 

-AtiKL.VA*T CIATIONa.- 

13. XMOWN MILIYANT PAPERS - fl hdm»aY lAw.ma.indl. Sakse. lar A law at As sirnan awre.lo a w. u" 

VU 

-rrl.ed 

- anry 

a.m wr Own ar-vt.. 

b - A isna -u : .1 "fl. OMEo 

Nakatani, Roy E., and Robert L. Burgner. 1974. Amchitka bioenvironmental . 

program research program on marine ecology, Amchitka Island, Alaska. Annual 

Progress Report and Summary Report 1967-1973. Fish. Res. Inst., U of Wash. 

Pavlovskii, E.N. 1955,- Atlas of the invertebrates of the Far Eastern Seas f 

the USSR. Translated from Russian by the Israel Program for Scientific 

Trczt, tirz, IP-^L OP * POEf-- PERPOENAN-CE OP WONK- 

17. PR I rai zs sa rram -- a pi) 17i, PAYMAGT po SE VICeYS gr-o oAA - 

OCSEP ncipal Investig ator- o- vas ew.a s -- 

Y17b PAYMENT POR SIEVICS3 (WOVAA On*-"OY) t( eaba u.a-dr ** wlr . - 

INQICATE ACCUNT TO WIC SX neVICES SWOULO * 0XECI*O e *U*- *.S. 1-. Du-t. rt CAM-..w.OAA) 

CHA*RED: 

ORG. Coot . TA3K NO. "*ILL. 

SND THIS PORM W*rr PAYMNMT, If APPROPRIATE.TO 

Technicjl Iniconstcoa Divisioa (Da32) 

NarioIal Oceaic and A=ospheric AdieidalE atio 

SWabshiaon, D. C. 20235 

SIP PECIAL. ASITAJNC IS MEEDID rOR COMPLETION OF THIS pORM, CALLI 

OASIS TechLical Lisrsaioa Specialisc 

Area Code (202) 343-6454 

Workiaa Hours: 7:30 A. M. to 4:00 P. m. Eastcc. Tiea 

596 

G596O 7-320

i____ 

Appendix IV 

NOAA FORM 24.L2 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE O^ AT 

H1z-n) NATIONAL OCEANIC ANO ATMOSPMERIC A3MIMI5TRATION 

REQUEST FOR OASIS SERVICES 

(OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION SYSTEM) 9-25-75 

ATTACHMENT No. 1 

1 NAME OF PERF OH SUBMITTING REQUEST (Las. First, Middl.) 2. PHONE NO. (Inli. A.C.) 

Haugland, Palmer I _ CrO7_7Qn-72-. 

3. ADDRESS - NUMaIK ANO STRCYT - 

P.O. BoX 15 

CITY STATE I2PCOOE 

Auke Bay, Alaska Alaska QQ8 

4. INOIVIDUAL TO ACTUALLY UIS THIS SEARCH (Last. FUi, Midl.) 

Koy;ki. K. V. and F.dqon, S. A- 

5. TITLE AND ORGAcAIZATION 

Fish. Res. Biol. Auke Bay Fisherpes T.artory 

6. PHONE N NO. 

)7 - 

lM. eA. C-) 

7. DETAILID SUIJICT ARSA RIQUIREMENT3.- (Plan ddartr y iear nl.olaq. nda a aprcJ llyr..tJI pon.ise . Includw. . aa 

key -jw witr a~rylrymna as peeibl, IdJeSA4jinlW aF leae lA ay OW here ajr nairning O( yr rlqu*r. It p*Jsi llis uke ,wa as. 

to be mcasd r m thl e l. prIWdle. 1** 8l th1A frtA sepmtIly and ssla Imentif theas e Xelallt.) 

Marine invertebrates, intertidal and subtidal biota,benthic littoral fauna, 

beach sampling, life history, growth, reproduction, predation, distribution, 

abundance, taxonomy, methodology, environmental factors. For all species in 

the following Phylla: Porifera, Coelenterata, Annelida, Echiuroidea, 

Sipunculidea, Arthropoda, Mollusca, Echinodermata, Chaetognatha, al Chordata. 

(See attached species list for an example) 

L. CEOGRAM#C RgSTRCTICONM tfy ap *S 0 *. anm .n *0 , Us- t'w4 ahm) 

Benthic littoral areas (intertidal and subtidal) within the boundaries of the 

continental shelf of the North Pacific And Arctic Oceans adjoining the 

countries of Canada (British Columbia and Northwest Territory), United States 

(Alaska), Russia and Japan. - 

9. AUTHORS - (Us4 ou M.# w nL* arnro. -a *I aln. nyS y has tIn a dlmriJ* "n'a f r.n r> 

NA 

10. LIST ANY JOURNALS WHOSa CONTENTS SHOULD Ba EZXCLUDID FROM THIS SEARC 

None 

597

I. Geographic Area 

(Subject) INDEX 

Arctic: Bering: Russia: Gulf of Alaska: 

Southeastern: B.C.: / Other areas: 

II. Zonation 

Intertidal: / Subtidal: Drift: 

III. Habitat Types: 

A. Exposed: Rocky: Sand-mud: - Other:- 

B. Unexposed: / Rocky: Sand-mud: / Other: 

IV. Taxonomic Groups 75 marine benthic algae species 

- V. Type of Study 

Survey and reconnaisance:/ Life history: 

Taxonomic keys:/ 

VI. Environmental Factors 

Oil:_ Ming:_ Logging:_ Estuary 

Nuclear tests: Pollution: Natral phenomenon: / 

VII. Methodology 

Bioassay: Transects: Culture__ 

AnalysisCOmmunity 

Field observations: Diving:__ Other 

VIII. Date 

techniques 

598

Citation: i, J -r -, S.

I. Geographic Area 

(Subject) INDEX 

Arctic: / Bering:_ Russia: Gulf of Alaska: 

Southeastern: B.C.: Other areas: 

II. Zonation 

Intertidal: Subtidal: Drift: 

III. Habitat Types: 

A. Exposed: Rocky: Sand-mud: / Other: 

B. Unexposed: Rocky: Sand-mud: _ Other: 

IV. Taxonomic Groups 

V. Type of Study 

Survey and reconnaisance: Life history: / 

Taxonomic keys: 

VI. Environmental Factors 

Oil: Mining: Logging:. Estuary:_ 

Nuclear tests: Pollution:_ Natural phenomenon:__ 

VII. Methodology 

VIII. Date 

Bioassay: Transects: _ Culture: 

Field observations: / Diving: Other:_ 

600

St c C7 T 31 4,1. - 1 s. 

Im an arctic ^mridal covirottment on Hudson Bay, Macoe balhica have a high--r 

-. -. j-t C. 

Abstrcty ro tfactor lveandsum r air te pay a major ro Th imated 

growth Ra- 1973.c Growth and mortality i an oarct 

aithiaz 

intertidal 

(Peletypod, 

population 

Tc)imdi4 


. Fish. 

iManw 

Rca. Board Can. 30: 1345-1348. . - 

In an arctic inttidal avironmet on Hudon Bay, 

growth 

Maca, 

rat 

a 

at 

balthica 

a tidal 

have 

level 

a 


hish- 

1.1 m above man low water than at the mean 

in terms 

low 


water 

both 

level, 

length and dry weight. Temperature, rater than 

mary 

food, 

proximate 

appears 

factor 

to be 

involved, 

the pri- 

and summer air temperarura play 

growth 

a major 

rats 

role. 

are 

The 

comparable 

etimated 

to reported growth rat for intertidal 

Scotland 

M'oman 

and 

populations 

the Netermland 

in 

A partial life table calculaed from the 

that 

detha 

Maes 

asemblae 

at 1.1 

indicates 

m above mean low water have an annual mortality 

* about 

which 

20% 

increase 

at a 

from 

2 a to about 50% at aga 7 ycr. 

601 

-

Gulf of Alaska 

Intertidal Sampling Sites Geographic Location 

1. Spectacle Island 55°07.2'N 159 0 44.6'W 

2. Chirikof Island 55°49.6'N 156 0 44.1'W 

3. Cape Nukshak 58 0 23.4'N 153°59.4'W 

4. Sundstorm Island 56°41.5'N 154 0 08.6'W 

5. Three Saints Bay 57 0 07.8'N 153°28.7'W 

6. Sud Island 58054.3'N 152°12.4'W 

7. Port Dick 59°13.3'N 151°10.0'W 

8. Day Harbor 59059.7'N 149 0 06.0'W 

9. LaTouche Point 59°57.1'N 148°03.4'W 

10. MacLeod Harbor 59°53.4'N 147°47.7'W 

11. Middleton Island 59 0 25.2'N 146 0 22.5'W 

12. Zaikof Bay 60°17.9'N 147°00.0'W 

13. Port Etches 60°21.2'N 146036.3'W 

14. Boswell Bay 60024.6'N 146 0 06.3'W 

15. Katalla 60°16.5'N 144°36.5'W 

16. Cape Yakataga 60 0 03.8'N 147 0 25.9'W 

17. Yakutat 59°32.3'N 139°52.5'W 

18. Kayak Island 59°48.2'N 144°35.9'W 

Bering Sea 

1. Akun Island 54°08.5'N 165°3S.7'W 

2. Ainak Island 55°24.1'N 163° 0 9.3'W 

3. Crooked Island 58039.3'N 160°1.6.5'W 

4. Cape Pierce 58°34.4'N 161°45.5'W 

5. Point Edward 5559.5'N 160°51.6'W 

6. Cape Mordvinof 54°55.8'N 164°26.S8' 

602

Boring Sea continued 

7. Makushin Bay 53°44.0'N 166 0 45.8'W 

8. St. George (Zapadni Bay) 56°34.1'N 169°39.8'W 

9. Otter island 57°03.0'N 170°23.8'W 

603

Plankton of the Gulf of Alaska - Ichthyoplankton 

Departmental Concurrence: 

(Research Unit #156/164a) 

First Semi-Annual Progress Report 


T. Saunders English 

Department of Oceanography 


Seattle, Washington 98195 

OUTER CONTINENTAL SHELF ENERGY Program 


P.O. Box 1808 


Francis A. Richards 

Associate Chairman for Research 

605


The task of primary emphasis is to determine the seasonal density distributions 

and environmental requirements for principal species of ichthyoplankton 

in the Gulf of Alaska. This program will also cooperate with the zooplankton 

program to examine organisms generally larger than copepods. 


Three field trips were planned within the period of this report: 

ACONA 29 August - 15 September 

SURVEYOR 29 September - 27 October 

DISCOVERER 21 October - 14 November 

A cruise plan for the ACONA is appended to this report. The cruise was 

aborted by engine trouble. The logistic support by the Seward station of 

the University of Alaska was exemplary. 

The SURVEYOR cruise accomplished as much or more than envisioned in the 

appended cruise plan. The appended cruise report contains dates, personnel, 

methods, sample localities and data collected. 

The DISCOVERER cruise is underway with Jerry Larrance as Chief Scientist. 

We expect to have taken at each station a bongo net haul taken in the MARMAP 

manner. Project Instructions RP-4-DI-75C describe the cruise to the best 

of our knowledge. 

III. Results 

The results of all of our work to date are qualitative. The ACONA appears 

to be a suitable vessel for work inside Prince William Sound. Some modifications 

would be necessary to tow larger nets from the stern. 

The SURVEYOR is a good working platform for our purposes. Slight modifications 

would make it easier and safer to handle gear such as NIO and bongo 

nets over the side. The hull-mounted Ross 105 kHz transducers, when compared 

with our usual research transducer, were found to be inadequate for the 

purpose of detecting smaller biological targets in the water column. 

We did catch larger zooplankton and ichthyoplankton in our net hauls. The 

samples are enroute to Seattle. 

IV. Preliminary Interpretation 

It is too early for any interpretation of our results. 

V. Problems/Changes 

Most of our problems have been start-up difficulties which have been settled 

in the course of our work. 

606

I am still concerned that I am not confident that my programs are optimally 

responsive to OCSEP aims and intentions. I am particularly in doubt about 

the geographic responsibilities and aims of the biological portions and 

the total program. 

Additional Information 

1. I continue to feel that future research should follow the directions 

we all discussed in our meeting of 1 July 1975 at the University of 

Washington in Seattle. We suggested a range of methods with which I am 

comfortable and which promise to be valuable for baseline, monitoring, 

and modeling purposes. 

2. The modifications of existing efforts I feel should be made were 

discussed on 1 July. I urge a geographic focus and a tight time series 

for the sort of biological program I envision (and the kind we do on 

Puget Sound). 

3. I feel that greater integration can be achieved by a plan imposed from 

the top management levels. I believe NOAA has employees perfectly 

capable of performing the program definition I envision. Most or all 

of us in the scientific community should be flattered and willing to 

offer advice, but in the crunch one or a few scientists must define the 

final, coordinated, integrated program. It seems to me that only NOAA 

management can finally match objectives, resources, and research-observational 

plans. 

4. The best way to focus efforts is to be explicit about objectives and 

the plan to meet them. If the plan is clear and rests on stated assumptions 

and available observations, external meddling by industry, politicians, 

environmentalists, and others becomes very difficult and must 

meet the test of comparison with our plan. I have a belief that the 

very best program is a respectable environmental and biological'baseline 

which expands with monitoring. We are providing input for ecosystem 

management, and in a managed ecosystem tradeoffs are necessary and all 

values cannot be preserved. The central aspect to be managed is 

biological populations--the key organisms are probably those harvested 

commercially and by sportsmen. Human health is of primary concern; 

recreation is secondary. 

5. I hope that our activities can generate a genuine constituency of user 

groups rather than misusers. Our data are useful only in context of 

our objectives and our plan. Within that context, our concern would 

seem to be that of format. In our research group we are constantly 

trying to devise and improve formats and find it both frustrating and 

rewarding. Our results can be in the most useful formats if we can know 

the potential applications and questions of the user groups. I have the 

sense that our program is well started with Mauri Pelto's considerations 

of basic data management. We use SPSS, SIMPLOT, BMD, PICTURE, and other 

packaged programs; earlier we have had written for our use composite 

frequency plotting and contour plotting programs. We will certainly 

modify some of our computer programs during the course of this work. 

607

Task Title: Plankton of the Gulf of Alaska - Initial Zooplankton Investigations 

PI: Dr. D.M. Damkaer, PMEL 

I. Task Objective (OCSEP A-23) --- To determine the seasonal density 

distribution of principal species of zooplankton. 


Five cruises were proposed in the Scientific Plan, 1 for Prince William 

Sound in September, 1975, on board ACONA (University of Alaska research vessel), 

the 2nd - 4th in the northeast Gulf of Alaska on board NOAA DISCOVERER, and the 

5 th in late summer 1976 on board DISCOVERER in the western Gulf of Alaska. 

CRUISE 1 

A. ACONA (29 Aug - ) 

B. Scientific Party (Zooplankton) 

Dr. D. M. Damkaer (Principal Investigator) NOAA/PMEL 

D. Dey (Oceanographer) NOAA/PMEL 

S. Wright (Physical Science Aide) NOAA/PMEL 

A survey of the distribution and abundance of zooplankton in Prince William 

Sound was planned for 29 Aug-15 Sept 1975. This was to take place in conjunction 

with an ichthyoplankton and sonic target survey by Dr. T. S. English, University 

of Washington. All preparations were completed and the ship was underway from 

Seward with the scientific personnel when serious engine damage occurred, 

necessitating the cancellation of the cruise. Repairs were not made for several 

weeks, by which time we had arranged to use NOAA SURVEYOR for this investigation. 

A'. SURVEYOR (Net Zooplankton Survey, Prince William Sound, 3-10 October 

1975). 

B. Scientific Party (as above) 

C. Methods 

1. Field Methods 

.Zooplankton was sampled primarily with closing ring nets of 60 cm diameter

and 211 µ mesh. These nets were hauled vertically through strata of varying 

thicknesses, obtaining discrete samples as follows: 25-0 m; 50-25 m; 100-50 m; 

300-100 m; 500-300 m; the bottom-500 m. In addition, some samples were obtained 

with Tucker trawl, NIO net, and bongo net. 

2. Laboratory Methods 

Each zooplankton sample is allowed to settle in a graduated cylinder, and 

the settled volume of the sample is recorded. The large or otherwise conspicuous 

organisms are then removed and enumerated. The smaller organisms are identified 

and enumerated from a subsample. 

This work has begun on 48 samples brought back from the cruise. The remaining 

95 samples were stored on SURVEYOR for delivery to PMEL when the ship returns to 

Seattle mid-November. 


Thirty stations were occupied in the Prince William Sound region (Fig. 1). 

The first 9 stations were at a single very deep locality well-within Prince 

William Sound, and were occupied every 4-6 hours for 48 hours. This series 

should give a good indication of the incidence and magnitude of zooplankton 

diel vertical migration. The next 20 stations were at various locations and times 

throughout the Sound and its major fjords. Station 30 was in the open Gulf at 

590 N, 147° W, during the return to Kodiak. 


Altogether 143 zooplankton samples were taken with the vertically-hauled 

net, 9 with Tucker trawl (by A. Adams, University of Alaska); 6 with NIO net 

and 8 with bongo net (by Dr. English's staff). 

CRUISE 2 

A. DISCOVERER (21 Oct-14 Nov 1975). 

B. Scientific Party (Zooplankton) 

D. Dey (Oceanographer) NOAA/PMEL 610

C. Methods 

Zooplankton will be sampled with 60-cm closing ring nets of 211 µ mesh. 

These nets will be hauled vertically through discrete levels as follows: 

25-0 m; 50-25 in; 100-50 m; 200-100 m; 500-200 m; each noon and midnight, regardless 

of the ship's position. In addition, a standard bongo net tow (200-0 m) will be 

made at each of ca. 42 stations (Fig. 2). 

OTHER DATA SOURCES 

A series of 100 samples (Figs. 3-4) from 1929 were selected from the plankton 

collection of the International Pacific Halibut Commission. These are being processe( 

as outlined in C.2 (above). The series represents ca. 28 stations from 30 Jan- 

21 Feb along the northeast Gulf and out from Yakutat, and ca. 22 stations from 

23 Mar-8 Apr in a rough transect from both Prince William Sound and Yakutat. Many 

stations represent samples from more than 1 depth. 


At the time the budget was submitted, no special Prince William Sound cruise 

was anticipated. At the last moment, it was seen that ACONA would be available for 

this, but no additional travel funds were asked for. This cruise required about 

half of the $3K travel budget. When the vessel broke down, this cruise was repeated 

a month later by our response to the sudden vacuum left in the SURVEYOR's schedule. 

Travel for this second cruise nearly exhausted the zooplankton travel budget. The 

planned DISCOVERY cruises would usually have required but 1 oceanographer to 

supervise the sampling (with the assistance of NOS technicians), but the Prince 

William Sound cruises on ACONA required and will continue to require other scien- 

tific personnel. 

It now appears that we can use ACONA in the spring 1976, which 

will be desirable. This project may, therefore, request additional travel funds. 

611

VI. Funds Expended (estimated) 

Equipment $10 K 

Supplies 5 K 

Services 8 K 

Travel and Shipping 3 K 

Salaries 80 K 

Response to Amended Instructions 

1. Recommendations for Future Research 

Because of the great variability in zooplankton abundance in time and 

space, it is clear that 2 cruises in Prince William Sound, 3 in the north- 

east Gulf of Alaska, and 1 in the western Gulf of Alaska will not be adequate 

to define distributions in these areas. It is essential to continue these 

seasonal "baseline" studies probably for a minimum of 4 more years. Also, 

the changes in zooplankton abundance can be very rapid at any one locality, 

so that even samples at each season will not suffice to define extremes of 

abundance, much less growth rates, reproductive cycles, and other smaller- 

scale features. Therefore, it would be desirable to have frequent sampling 

(bi-weekly to monthly) in one or a few selected localities to complement the 

broader coverage of the seasonal cruises. 

612

Figure 1. Sampling stations 1-30, Prince William Sound Cruise, 3-10 October, 1975, 

NOAA SURVEYOR.

Figure 2. Sampling Stations 1-42, Northeast 

NOAA DISCOVERER. 

Gulf of Alaska Cruise, 21 Oct- 14 Nov. 1975,

Figure 3. Sampling stations, International Pacific Halibut Commission Gulf of Alaska plankton 

collection, 30 Jan-21 Feb 1929.

Figure 4. Sampling stations, International Pacific Halibut Commission Gulf of Alaska plankton 

collection, 23 Mar-8 Apr 1929.

Task Title: Phytoplankton and Primary Productivity of the Gulf of Alaska 

PI: J.D. Larrance, PMEL 


- to describe the distributions of chlorophyll a and related 

pigments by season in the Gulf of Alaska 

- to describe the distributions of principal species of phytoplankton 

occurring in the Gulf of Alaska by season 

- to determine the seasonal indices of primary production in 

the Gulf of Alaska. 

II. Field and laboratory activities 

A. Ship schedule. NOAA ship DISCOVERER departed October 21 for 

sampling in the Gulf of Alaska and is due to terminate the 

trip on 14 November. 

B. Scientific Party - NOAA personnel 

Jerry Larrance - Oceanographer (Project Supervisor) 

David Tennant - Oceanographer 

Patricia Ruffio- Technician 

C. Methods. 

Water samples will be taken at about 40 stations from 7 depths down 

to the level where 0.1% of the surface irradiance penetrates. 

Aliquot portions will be drawn for phytoplankton species, pigment 

analyses, and primary productivity experiments. 

Phytoplankton samples will be preserved and returned to Seattle 

for microscopical examination, identification, and enumeration. 

The Utermohl inverted microscope technique will be employed for 

counting. Chlorophyll a and phaeopigments will be determined 

using fluorometeric techniques where fluorescence of the sample is 

determined before and after acidification. 

Primary productivity will be measured by the carbon-14 technique. 

Samples will be incubated under natural light on deck attenuated 

by neutral density filters rated to match the ambient light at the 

depth from which the sample was taken. Incubations will be for 

1/2 day; dawn to LAN (local apparent noon) and LAN to dark. 

Filtered samples from completed experiments will be fumed with 

acid, placed in liquid scintillation fluor solutions and returned 

to Seattle for radioanalysis by liquid scintillation spectrometer. 

617

Water samples for nutrient determinations will also be taken, 

frozen and delivered to the Institute of Marine Science for 

analysis. Standard wet chemistry methods will be used to 

determine phosphate, silicate, nitrate, and ammonia concentrations. 

D. Sample localities - see figure. 

E. Data collected - none yet. 

III. Estimate of funds expended. 

Salaries and Overhead $21,000 

Travel 1,000 

Supplies and equipment 23,500 

Computer costs 500 

Total $46,000 

618

Proposed locations of the primary productivity 

stations in-the northeastern Gulf.



P. 0. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 ... 


Project Title: Zooplankton and Micronekton Studies in the 

Bering - Chukchi/Beaufort Seas 



Principal Investigator: R. Ted Cooney 





This research addresses six (6) tasks (or parts thereof) 

pertaining to zooplankton and micronekton in the Bering- 

Chukchi/Beaufort Seas: 

1) A-9; describe the food dependencies of commonly 

occuring species of pelagic fishes as this task 

applies to dielly migrating bathypelagic species 

sampled with bongo nets and NIO Tucker midwater 

trawls. 

2) A-22; summarize the existing literature and unpublished 

data on the transfer of synthesized organic matter to 

zooplankton and micronekton (including ichthyoplankton). 

3) A-23; determine seasonal density distributions and environmental 

requirements of principal species of zooplankton, 

micronekton, and ichthyoplankton. 

4) A-24; identify pathways of matter (energy) transfer 

between synthesizer and consumers. 

5) A-25; identify and characterize critical regions and habitats 

required by egg and larval stages of fish and shellfish 

species. 

6) A-31; determine the relationships of zooplankton and 

micronekton populations to the edge of the seasonal 

icepack as it occurs in the Bering and Chukchi Seas. 

Of the.se tasks, all but A--23 (Organic matter transfer pathways) 

have been addressed in some manner. Pathway information is 

621

expected as a result of the major spring cruise (April-May; 

1976) at a time when the area is biologically very active. 

II Field or Laboratory Activities 

A) Ship Schedule 

Successful legs have been completed on two cruises of 

the NOAA vessel Discoverer in the Bering Sea; Leg I 

and II of the late spring and early summer (15 May - 

19 June, 1975) and Leg I of the late summer, and fall 

cruise (August 9-28, 1975). 

B) Scientific Party 

Mr. Al Adams, Mr. Ken Coyle, Ms. Patricia Wagner, 

Mr. Greg Malinky, and Mr. Ted McConnaughey were 

field representatives on one or both of the cruises 

described above. They were responsible for the collection 

and preservation of samples of zooplanktor and 

micronekton taken aboard the Discoverer in the Bering Sea. 

C) Methods 

Details of the methodology are available as a program work 

statement "Environmental Assessment of the Alaska Continental 

Shelf", No. 3; Fish, Plankton, Benthos, and Littoral; pp. 89- 

103. A bongo-net system was not available for use; 1-m net. 

tows (vertical) and NIO Tucker net hauls were utilized to make 

these collections. 

D) Sample Localities 

Station locations and cruise tackline have been submitted 

with cruise reports detailing the kind and amount of 

sampling at each geographic location. 

E) Data collected or Analysed 

l) Number and types of samples/observations: 

(a) 94 1-m net tows and 45 NIO hauls were made on 

Leg I and II of the May-June cruise. 

(b) 65 1 in net tows and 44 NIO hauls were made on 

the August cruise. 

622

III. Results 

-3- 

2) To date, approximately 80 1-m net tows and 10 

Tucker hauls have been sorted, and identified and 

enumerated. 

3) Miles of tackline; N.A. 

There are no "scientific" results to report to date. Lists of 

species by cruise and hydrographic regime, as well as 

variance and special numerical analyses will be forthcoming 

as the laboratory work is completed. At present the processing 

of samples is on schedule. 


N.A. 


Cruises aboard the Discoverer have been surprisingly free of 

"gliches". The vessel crew has demonstrated a willingness 

to "make the science go" and has been very helpful in this 

respect. 

The only difficulty I have encountered so far is in communications 

to and from the vessel. The lag time seenms to be inordinately 

long. I realize that once a cruise is underway with 

project instructions in hand, the scientific party is considered 

to be pretty much on its own. I can further understand that 

a big stream of "scientific" chatter flowing out each day is 

very unnecessary. On the other hand, as more junior scientists 

begin to assume leadership roles at sea (which I think has 

already occurred in a very competent way), I believe there 

should be provision for quick and accurate exchange of information 

between principal investigators and our representatives at sea. 

Messages I received from Mr. Adams (instructed to report progress 

twice weekly) were garbled and slow moving through channels. 

Also, there must be some provision (made clear to all investigators) 

for fairly restructuring the effort on a multidisciplinary cruise 

when days are lost to equipment failure or bad weather . We need 

some project office guidance on this matter. 

623


-4- 

(6 months) 


Salary & wages 82,764.00 14,556.44 68,207.56 

Staff benefits 13,970.00 2,425.97 11,544.03 

Equipment 40,000.00 9,051.25 30,948.75 

Travel 7,600.00 3,350.03 4,249.97 

Other 22,250.00 1,256.39 20,993.61 

Total Direct 166,584.00 30,640.08 135,943.92 

Indirect 47,341.00 8,326.28 39,014.72 

Task Order Total 213,925.00 38,966.36* 174,958.64 

* Preliminary data, not yet fully processed. 

624




P. 0. Box 188 



Project Title: Phytoplankton Studies in the Bering Sea 



Principal Investigator: Dr. Vera Alexander 






To study the dynamics of phytoplankton populations at the edge 

of the retreating ice pack in the Bering Sea in order to assess 

the significance of the ice edge in the productivity of the Bering 

Sea. Secondly, to assess the levels of productivity (phytoplankton) 

in the S. B. Bering Sea during the late summer in 

order to compare seasonal phytoplankton activity. 


Two major cruises were undertaken in the Bering Sea, in May 

and August. Both were on the Discoverer. The first cruise 

emphasized the dynamics of the ice edge, and a total of 62 

stations were occupied, 55 of them directly related to the ice 

edge study. A series of zig-zag transects were carried out 

in the 2 5-mile corridor adjacent to the ice and penetrating 

into the ice for several miles. At these stations, conductivity, 

temperature, chlorophyll concentrations were determined, with 

dissolved oxygen, nutrient, primary productivity and phytoplankton 

samples taken at selected stations. At three stations 

a depth profile of water samples was filtered for C:H:N and 

laser Raman carotenoid determination. In addition, stations on 

both sides of the shelf-break were sampled for chlorophyll 

and nutrient concentrations, with some phytoplankton samples 

and primary production measurements also carried out. 

625

III. Results 

-2- 

The second cruise, from August 9 to August 28, 1975 involved 

chlorophyll and nutrient sampling from 48 stations, 

with phytoplankton samples also collected at selected 

stations. Primary productivity ( 1 4 C) when measured at 

stations selected to represent areas with grossly different 

oceanographic characteristics such as the area north of the 

Aleutian Passes, the shelf bench area and the Bering Sea 

shelf area. A sediment core was obtained from the shelf 

region for nutrient analysis and 1 5 N uptake (N0 3 +NH 3 ) 

was used to evaluate the demand for nutrients in the nearbottom 

waters. C:H:N and carotenoid samples were 

collected from depth probes for several stations. 

Currently, the nutrient analyses from Leg I, Discoverer 

cruise, May 1975 have been completed and the data are being 

compiled for submission. Chlorophyll concentration calculations 

from the May Discoverer cruise have been completed. 

Phytoplankton enumeration and identification is underway from 

both cruises, and nutrient analyses are currently being run 

for the remainder of the May Discoverer cruise and for the 

August cruise. 

The ice-edge region of high primary productivity extends out 

to 40-50 miles from the ice edge. In this area, maximum 

chlorophyll concentrations occur in surface waters. This high 

production zone does not extend into the ice, nor was an epontic 

ice community observed. Presumably, the pulse of production in 

the ice had passed through some time ago. However, some growth 

of algae on the ice surface in melt-pools was observed. Outside 

the high-production ice-edge corridor, maximum chlorophyll levels 

were found in water immediately above the bottom, a situation 

typically found in the Bering during early summer after the ice 

has moved north and the predominant distribution during the 

1974 Alpha Helix cruise. Attemps are being made to determine 

the activity of this deep population, and preliminary data suggests 

that it is photosynthetically active and may be dependent on 

nutrients from the sediment surface. Sediment cores have been 

collected and the intestitial water squeezed for nutrient 

determination to estimate nutrient fluxes. By August, the 

bottom chlorophyll maximum was no longer evident over the 

shallow shelf region, and phytoplankton activity was essentially 

absent except in areas under influence of the Aleutian Passes 

and the area immediately to the south of the major shelf break. 

626


-3- 

No major problems have been encountered in this work. 


(6 months) 



Staff Benefits 20,912.00 3,714.99 17,197.01 

Equipment 13,200.00 626.19 12,573.81 

Travel 7,000.00 2,444.36 4,555.64 

Other 16,900.00 2,533.74 14,366.26 

Total Direct 181,869.00 36,042.65 145,826.35 

Indirect 70,846.00 15,285.77 55,560.23 

Total Task Order 252,715.00 51,328.42* 201,386.58 

*Preliminary cost data, not yet fully processed. 

627



P. 0. Box 180 NOV 06 1975 

Semi-Annual Report for the period July 1-September 30, 1975 

RU 174 -- Baseline Studies of Demersal Resources of the Northern 

Gulf of Alaska Shelf and Slope: An Historical Review 

Because of preoccuptation with completion of a final report on 

the NEGOA project, a demersal fish and shelfish otter trawl survey in 

the northern Gulf of Alaska in 1975, progress on 3RU 174 has been limited 

during this reporting period. 


A. Review existing data sources on the demersal fish and shellfish 

resources residing in Continental Shelf and Slope waters of 

the Gulf of Alaska between the Semidi Islands and Yakutat Bay. 

B. Provide growth and age composition information on certain 

demersal fish species of importance to man as food resources. 


A. Ship or Field Trip Schedule -- None 

B. Scientific Party (all are Northwest Fisheries Center Personnel) 

C. Methods 

Lae1 L. Ronholt (Principal Investigator) 

Herbert H. Shippen 

Ronald A. Payne 

Eric S. Brown 

1. Laboratory analysis of age structures will follow standard 

techniques. 

2. Literature and documentary research of published and 

unpublished materials will follow normal procedures. 

629

. ample localities 

-2- 

1. The area of eonsideration is the Continental Shelf and 

Slope off Alaska from the Semidi Islands (1570 W. long.) 

to Yakutat Bay (140° W. long.). 

2. The growth and age composition information to be provided on 

important food fishes is from specimens collected between 

Cape Clears (142° 30' W. long.) and Yakutat Bay. 

E. Data collected and analyzed 

1. Trawl catch data from the International Pacific Halibut 

Commission's survey of 1961-63 have been entered on ADP 

cards so that they may be analyzed for comparison with 

results of the 1975 NEGOA field survey. 

2. Approximately half (about 2500 observations) of the age 

structures (otoliths and scales) collected from 7 species 

of demersal fishes in 1975 have been read by the Age 

Deternination Unit of the Northwest Fisheries Center. 

F. Activities planned for the next six months 

1. Completion of age readings from age structures collected 

during the 1975 field study, and analysis of these data 

by species and sex. 

2. Compilation,and Analysis of historical data and preparation 

of report. 

3. Comparison of NEGOA field study results with historical 

data. 

630

III. Results 

-3- 

Alas ka catch and production statistics for fish and shellfish 

from the Copper River-Prince William Sound area have been 

tabul ated. 

IV. Preliminary interpretations of Results 

None 

V. Problems Encountered and Recommended Changes 

None 

631

SJUNEAU 

PROJECT OFFICE 

P. 0. BOX 1808 

Semi-Annual Report: April 1 to September 30, 

1975 

NOV 06 1975 

RU 175 Baseline Studies of Demersal Resources'of the Eastern Bering 

Sea Shelf and Slope. N E G A 

Principal Investigators: Walter T. Pereyra, PhD., Jerry E. Reeves, PhD., 

and Richard G. Bakkala. 

Task A-13 

I. Task objectives: 

Summarize existing literature and unpublished data on the 

distribution, abundance, and productivity of demersal 

fish, shellfish, and other epibenthic organisms. 

II. Field or laboratory activities: 

A. Ship or field trip schedule - none 

B. Scientific party 

1. J. R. Dunn, NWFC, Seattle.- Responsible for 

summarization of demersal fish literature and 

historical data. 

2. Doyne L. Kessler, NWFC, Kodiak. Responsible 

for summarization of shellfish literature and 

historical data. 

C. Methods 

1. Literature concerning the distribution, 

abundance and productivity of target species of 

groundfish and shellfish are searched, catalogued 

and annotated. 

2. Unpublished data on the distribution, abundance 

and productivity of target species of groundfish 

and shellfish are collected and examined for use 

as a historical base and for comparison with 

existing data bases. 

D. Sample localities/Ship or aircraft tracklines 

Not applicable 

633

III. Results 


1. Literature files in the NWFC have been catalogued 

and searches of North American Scientific Journals 

- have been started. 

2. Historical data from U.S. crab surveys (1965-70), 

joint crab-groundfish surveys (1971-75), Japanese 

research vessel surveys (1966-71), foreign fishery 

statistics (1964-73) and the U.S. foreign observer 

program (1972-74) exist either in documents or on 

ADP cards. 

F. Activities planned for the next six months 

As the current field season nears termination, efforts 

will be directed toward completion- of the literature 

survey and in collation and analysis of historical data. 

A. Approximately 500 pertinent bibliographic citations have 

been assembled on demersal fishes of the Bering Sea. 

B. Analysis of historical data has not begun. 


none 


none. 


Task A-14 

$250 salary, part-time temporary assistance. 

I. Task objectives: Determine the distribution and abundance 

of demersal fish, shellfish, and other epibenthic organisms. 

Estimate the productivity, length, weight, and age distribution 

of selected demersal fish and shellfish. To develop growth 

models and to provide a data base against which later changes 

in these parameters may be compared. 


A. Ship Schedules: 

1. Anna Marie (chartered), July 25-October 12 

(Seattle to Seattle), Bering Sea trawling. 

2. Pat San Marie (chartered), July 25-October 12 

(Seattle to Seattle), Bering Sea trawling. 

634

3. Miller Freeman (NOAA), August 11-October 24, 

(Seattle-Bering Sea-Kodiak), Bering Sea trawling. 


1. Anna Marie: Steve Hughes and Don Gunderson. 

NWFC, Seattle, Scientists in charge (SIC), and 

four technicians. 

2. Pat San Marie: Jack McBride and Doyne Kessler, 

NWFC, Kodiak, SIC; Don Day, NWFC, Seattle and 

four technicians. 

3. Miller Freeman: Robert Wolotira, Richard Bakkala 

and Kenneth Waldron, SIC, Dr. Michael Tillman, Fred 

Wathne, Rene Cerda and Bill Grondlund, plus three 

technicians, all of NWFC. 

C. Methods 

The survey utilized a modified 400-mesh eastern trawl 

fished for one-half hour periods. Catch composition 

determined by weight and numbers, and for selected 

species, data on size, sex, weight and age structures 

collected. Vertical water temperature profiles were 

obtained by XBT casts (Anna Marie and Miller Freeman). 

Six days of comparative fishing was conducted among 

the three vessels to adjust catches for differences 

in fishing power. 


The vessel tracklines are depicted in Figures 1-3. 


A total of 651 stations were successfully occupied 

by the three vessels. 

Data from all three vessels are now being checked 

for completion and correctness of IBM format. The 

data from the first legs of the three vessels have 

been keypunched and the printouts are being checked 

for accuracy. 

Computer programs have been written for analysis of 

catch by species which will illustrate various levels 

of abundance including plots of station location, 

distance fished, depth contours and catch per depth 

interval. Programs for biomass estimates and age and 

growth have either been written or are in the process 

of being written. 

635

Our attempts to copy field data sheets aboard the 

charter vessels proved impractical because of space 

limitations and the slowness of the reproducing 

equipment used. 

636

III. Results 

F. Activities planned for next 6 months 

Emphasis in the next six months will be directed toward 

analysis of the data collected this summer and in 

planning for the spring, 1976, Bering Sea survey. 

As the charter vessel surveys were completed on October 2 

and the Miller Freeman survey on October 24, none of the 

data has been analyzed. 

All the stations in the survey area were successfully 

sampled except those in sub-area V, a low priority area, 

and five stations north of 60°N in the western portion of 

sub-area IV. Certain stations in sub-area I were resampled 

to provide estimates of intra-area variation in 

catches. 

The successful completion of the survey was due to 

reasonably good weather conditions, lack of vessel breakdowns 

and particularly to the outstanding effort of the 

vessel captains, their crews and the'scientific parties. 


As none of the data have been analyzed and have only been 

cursorily examined to date, we can offer no preliminary 

conclusions. 


The surveys progressed very well and few problems were 

encountered. 

During the survey it became apparent that more effort was 

needed on the slope where rapid changes in species 

composition occurred with changes in depth. For the 1976 

spring survey, we plan to trawl five stations on the edge 

rather than the two stations sampled this year. 

Radio communication was very poor between the Pacific 

Marine Center and the Miller Freeman. This was a problem 

for us during the comparative fishing as we planned to 

analyze the data and transmit the results back to the 

Freeman. We recommend that the Miller Freeman be equipped 

with teletype equipment next year to improve frequency 

and speed of communication. 

63 7.

Fig. 1. Station Sampling Plan, Anna Marie, 1975

Fig. 2. Station Sampling Plan, Pat San Marie, 1975

Fig. 3. Station Sampling Plan, Miller Fr an, 1975

Data Management Plan for OCS Project RU 175 

Project Name 

Baseline Studies of Demersal Resources of the Eastern Bering 

Sea Shelf and Slope. 

Dr. Walter T. Pereyra and Richard Bakkala 


National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA 

2725 Montlake Boulevard East 


and 

Dr. Jerry E. Reeves 


National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA 

P.O. Box 1638 

Kodiak, Alaska 99615 

Identification of Data 

Schedule 

The items of data which will be submitted in partial fullfillment 

of this contract include: 

1. Field records on trawl catches of fishes and invertebrates, 

and associated data. 

2. Data on length, weight and age of selected species of 

demersal fishes. 

3. Data on size and weight of selected species of invertebrates 

and associated data. 

4. Interpretation and analysis of the above data. 

1. Field data will be submitted on tape to the OCSEP office 

no more than 120 days after keypunching. 

2. The interpretation of the data will be submitted no later 

than September 30, 1976. 

Data Format 

All data will be submitted on 9 track magnetic tape with the 

format corresponding to OCSEP data management plan. 

Data Documentation 

All documentation necessary to read the above data will be 

provided, including complete format description. 

641

Calibration and quality Control 

There are no instrument calibration requirements implied by 

this work. Comparative fishing among the three vessels used 

in 1975 (Anna Marie, Pat San Marie, and Miller Freeman) vill 

enable comparison of the relative fishing power of the three 

vessels, effects of differing towing times, and variation in 

size, age and sex composition of catches. 

Data uantities and Data Flow 

A. Quantities 

1. Approximately 300 cards per sampling station. 

2. Approximately 210 sampling stations per cruise. 

3. Approximately 6 cruises conducted by the contractor 

(3 cruises in 1975; 3 cruises in 1976). 

4. Therefore, approximately 380,000 cards will be 

submitted on tape. 

B. Data Flow (the dates given are for the first three 

cruises only). 

1. Last cruise, 1975, completed on October 24. 

2. Groundfish field data keypunched and proofed by 

January 24, 1976. 

3. Groundfish data, consisting of about 80,000 cards, 

submitted on tape to OCSEP by February 24, 1976. 

4. Invertebrate field data keypunched and proofed by 

February 26, 1976. 

5. Invertebrate data on tape submitted to OCSEP by - 

April 1, 1976. (Approximately 110,000 cards) 

642

DEPARTMENT OF FISH AND GAME 



Project Manager 

Arctic Project Office 




Dear Dr. Weller: 

Ru# 233 

1300 COLLEGE ROAD 


This report is intended to summarize our OCS Beaufort Sea fisheries 

studies during the first quarter of field work beginning July 1975. 

A total of 38 days was spent in the field, based out of VE Construction 

at Deadhorse. Two temporary employees were hired to assist in these 

studies. Mike Dean helped organize and implement studies in the field 

and Bonnie Friedman worked as a lab technician, collating meristic 

and life history information from fish samples sent to Fairbanks. 

An annotated bibliography of fisheries work conducted on North Slope 

drainages of the Brooks Range and the Arctic Ocean was compiled early 

in the season. 

Multifilament variable mesh gill nets measuring 125' by 6' were used 

most extensively throughout the study area. Bag seines and beach 

seines were used in the shallow waters of bays and lagoons. A fyke trap 

with a 150' lead attached to shore was used to live capture fish. A 

try trawl with a 10' headline was used in the vicinity of Prudhoe Bay. 

Tagging of char and whitefish was accomplished using both spaghetti 

and FD-67 internal anchor tags. 

All fish samples collected thus far have been preserved in 10% formalin 

or frozen and sent to Fairbanks via commercial airlines. Samples were 

then examined in the Fairbanks lab as time allowed. Fish were 

weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram on a triple-beam balance. Fork lengths 

were measured to the nearest millimeter. Sex and stage of maturity 

were determined by examining gonads. Both scales and o.oliths are 

being used to age the fish. Stomachs have been examined fcr fullness 

and the contents preserved in 10% formalin for future identification. 

The above life history information is recorded with the capture data 

and summarized by species on a single data form. The laboratory 

analysis of samples is continuing at this time. 

643

Thirty sampling stations were established between Point Sorensen 

and Brownlow point in the eastern one half of our study area. An 

attempt was made to sample all of the dominant habitat types within 

this area. This included outer islands, nearshore islands, spits, 

points, bays, lagoons, and river deltas. Chemical and physical 

parameters such as salinity, temperature, conductivity and depth of 

water were recorded for each station. Notes were also taken on 

beach type, wind speed and direction. Transportation to each station 

was via helicopter. 

A total of 1,200 fish representing six families and thirteen species 

has been captured. Following is a list of the species captured from 

Prudhoe Bay east to Brownlow point: 

Salmonidae 

Osmeridae 

Gadidae 

Cottidae 

Salvelinus alpinus 

Coregonus sardinella 

C. autumnalus 

C. nasus 

C. pidschian 

Thymallus arcticus 

Osmeris dentex 

Mallotus villosus 

Boreogadus saida 

Eleginus gracilis 

Myoxocephalus quadricornis 

Pleuronectidae 

Liparidae 

Liopsetta glacialis 

Liparis spp. 

The most wide spread group of fishes captured at our net sites were 

the salmonoids. Arctic char were captured at 74% of our gill net 

644

stations. Arctic cisco and least cisco were captured at 65% and 37% 

of the stations respectively. Least cisco, however, were captured in 

the greatest abundance, followed by Arctic cisco and Arctic char. No 

true pattern of abundance is indicated by our catches in the marine 

study area. Adults of these species have been captured in various 

near shore habitats and have shown no preference of one type over another. 

Arctic and least cisco fry were captured in bays, lagoons and along 

unprotected beaches in shallow water. 

Broad whitefish were captured at 35% of our net stations and showed an 

affinity for mainland lagoons and river deltas. Juvenile broad whitefish 

were captured in lagoons and along the exposed beaches of 

Prudhoe Bay. 

Three humpback whitefish were gill netted along the eastern margin of 

Prudhoe Bay near the mouth of the Sagavanirktok River in early August. 

Subsequent test netting, however, failed to capture any humpback 

whitefish throughout the rest of the study area. 

Demersal marine species represented by the flat fishes and a single 

member of the genus Liparis were the least frequently captured group 

thus far. Adult and juvenile liparids were captured in the try trawl 

and fyke trap. Fourhorn sculpin were captured at nearly all stations 

except those inside the large river deltas. They appear to be 

abundant along the mainland shoreline and lagoon areas and were 

present but less abundant at the barrier island stations. 

Capelin were captured in shallow water along exposed mainland beaches. 

Young of the year and juvenile capelin were captured in Prudhoe Bay. 

Rainbow smelt were captured at two stations, again along exposed 

mainland beaches. 

The most abundantly caught species thus far have been the cod. Three 

hundred and forty-nine Arctic cod were captured in one trap night 

(21 hours) with a fyke trap set adjacent to the west dock in Prudhoe 

Bay. In early September, cod fry (young-of-the-year) were captured 

throughout "rudhoe Bay. Adult saffron cod were captured in lesser 

abundance. 

Under ice test netting will be conducted this year to determine the 

presence or absence, and habitat requirements of overwintering fish 

in the near shore areas. Our initial work will be in the Sagavanirktok 

Delta at the marine-fresh water interface. We will also be continuing 

laboratory analysis of samples collected this past field season in 

preparation for an annual report. 

Sincerely, 

Eugene A. Roguski 

Acting Regional Supervisor 

By: Terrence Bendock 

Fishery Biologist 

Division of Sport Fish

DEPARTMENT OF FISH AND GAME 

August 20, 1975 


Project Manager 

Arctic Project Office 




Sir: 

1300 COLLEGE ROAD 


JAY S. HAMMOND, GOVERNOR 

As requested in your Bulletin #6, the following is the project status 

of the Beaufort Sea Estuarine Fisheries Study: 

April I - June 30, 1975 No work accomplished other than attendance 

at Seattle Work Statement Meeting. 

In July Mr. Terry Bendock was hired as project biologist. After an 

initial trip to the study area in July, Bendock commenced fish sampling 

in August. 

Thus far we have sampled approximately 15 sites, mostly from Prudhoe 

Bay east to Flaxman Island. Our Fairbanks lab has received approximately 

350 fish of 7 species: Arctic char, Arctic cisco, least 

cisco, broad whitefish, humpback whitefish, fourhorn sculpin, and 

Arctic flounder. 

Laboratory analysis of these fish is presently underway. 

A more detailed report on data collected and project status will be 

possible following the first quarter of work (September 30, 1975). 

Sincerely 

Eugene A. Rogus 

Mgt-Research Coordinator 

Division of Sport Fish 

646


P. 0. BOX 1808 

Quarterly Report for Quarter Ending September 30, 1975. 

Project Title: The Distribution, Abundance, Diversity, and Productivity 

of Benthic Organisms in the Gulf of Alaska 


Task Order Number: 20 RU 281 

Principal Investigator: Dr. Howard M. Feder 





A. Inventory and census of dominant species. 

B. Description of spatial and seasonal distribution patterns of 

selected species. 

C. Provide comparison of dominant species distribution with physical,. 

chemical and geological factors. 

D. Provide preliminary observations of biological interrelationships 

between selected segments of benthic marine communities. 

GRAB PROGRAM 


A. Ship schedules and names of vessels. 

1. 31 August 1975-13 September 1975, Silas Bent Cruise #343603 

2. USNS Silas Bent, Military Sealift Command and Naval 

Oceanographic Office. 


1. Grant E. M. M:thleke (Research Assisti-nt and Graduate Stu.'.-: t) 

Janice Hanscomb (Research Assistant). 

C. Methods 

1. 0.3M- van Veen grab was used on all stations. Five replic.te 

grabs were taken at all stations except stations 4, 30 ar;, 

42 where 10 grabs were taken in order to detern.ine the nu' l.e 

of grabs required for adequate stati:stical precjsi-;.on and 

stations 39, 44, 54 and 75 where fewer than 5 grabs were ti!:en 

due to incl r:re:nt weathelr aind/or unfavorIab] i ,;ustLirate 

composition. 

2. A separate si'c.irnint sairpl] was takein fromn one gTa of Cec;': 

s:tntion for si'diment si.ze cnanlysis. 

3. I,:.''lr"nr .o v^ a)r!]lyr;i's :at t'l(, .'l.M i-r ' i '6,7 ('e;r.:. , l': \' : 

o'f A 'l f: [ r;! , i,:.. v IT ' . rt .... ! i 1 l:I. ' '! I' 1 . - 

647


III. Results 

-2- 

The following stations on the standard station grid of the Gulf of 

Alaska Lease Area were taken: Station number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 

25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 48, 49, 50, 

51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59A. 

None of the material collected on the USNS Silas Bent cruise number 

343603 has been analyzed to date. 


Not available. 

V. Problems Encountered, Recommended Changes 

Surprisingly few problems were encountered on this cruise. Almost all 

of the planned stations were occupied successfully due to the seaworthy 

characteristics of the USNS Silas Bent and the cooperative and helpful 

attitude of the Captain, and crew, as well as members of the embarked 

Naval Oceanographic Office Survey Party. 

TRAWL PROGRAM 


A. Ship schedules and names of vessels. 

Leg I -- 25 April - 16 May 1975 

Leg II -- 21 May - 11 June 1975 

Leg III - 26 June - 15 July 1975 

Leg IV -- 20 July - 7 August 1975 

F/V North Pacific 


1. Names 

a. Legs I and II, Mr. Stephen C. Jewett, Research Assistant, 

Institute of Marine Science, University of Alaska, 

Fairbanks, Alaska. 

b. Legs III and IV, Mr. Max K. Hoberg, Research Assistant, 

Institute of Marine Science, Univcristy of Alaska, 

Faribanks, Alaska. 

2. Scientific Role - In charge of benthic collection of invr . 

brates and collection of fish stomachs. 

648

C. Methods 

1. Field Sampling 

-3- 

a. One hour tows were made at p redetermined stat ion locat ions 

using a 400 mesh Eastern otter trawl. Invertebrate 

samples were sorted, weighed and/or counted, identified 

or assigned a type number, and preserved for later 

examination. 

b. Fish stomachs were obtained for selected species. 

2. Laboratory Analysis 

a. Samples were returned for examination to the Marine 

Sorting Center, University of Alaska. Laboratory 

analysis has not been completed to date. 

D. Sample Locations (see Fig. 1) 

III. Results 

1. Stations Occupied (see Fig. 1, NEGOA F/V North Pacific) 

2. Station numbers: 70A-F; 71 B-D; 72 D-I; 73 A-E; 74 A-C; 

and F-I; 75 A and G; 76 A-C; 77 A,B,E,F,H,I; 78 A-C, E, F, 

H; 79 A-C, E-G; 80 A-F; 81 A-C; 82 A-F; 83 B,C,E-G; 

84 B-C; 85 A; 86 B-D; 87 D; 88 A,B,D; 89 A,C-E; 90 B.C; 

91 A-D; 92 C,D; 93 A-F; 94 A-G; 95 C-E; 96 A-G; 97 A-D; 

98 A-D; 99 B-E; 100 B-D. 

Neither the invertebrates nor the fish stomachs have been completely 

analyzed to date. 


Detailed analysis not available. Assessment of the ficld-notebook data 

indicates a broad spectrum of coverage on the shelf of the Gulf of 

Alaska in the projected lease areas. 

V. Problems Encountered, Recommended Changes 

No problems were encountered. The cooperative effort with the National 

Marine Fisheries Service program was most satisfactory. It was possible, 

as a result of this cooperation to collect much more data than was 

originally considered possible. I would highly recommend a continuation 

of this effort. 

649


-4- 

Total 3 mos 

Budget Expended* Remaining 


Staff Benefits 10,806.00 256.91 10,549.09 

Equipment 4,000.00 75.00 3,925.00 

Travel 5,200.00 0 5,200.00 

Other 95,700.00 107.00 95,593.00 

Total Direct 179,270.00 1,950.13 177,319.87 

Indirect 36,359.00 864.42 35,494.58 

Total Cost 215,629.00 2,814.55* 212,814.45 


650

OUTER CONTINENTAL SHELF ENERGY PROGRAt 

JUN!AJJ rOJLCT OFFICE 

P. 0. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 .... 


Project Title: 

Contract Number: . 03-5-022-56 

Summarizing of Existing Literature and 

Unpublished Data on the Distribution, 

Abundance and Productivity of Benthic 

Organisms of the Gulf of Alaska and 

Bering Sea. 

Task Order Number: 10 '., Z r 3 c/ 

Principal Investigator: Dr. -Howard M. Feder 





A. A summary of existing data, published and unpublished, 

for the Gulf of Alaska and the Bering Sea. 

B. Access to and loan of archived material from both of the 

above areas. 

C. Workup of archived data and material. 


IlI. Results 

Methods: 

1. Literature survey using standard Library Search 

techniques has been undertaken. Plans under way 

to utilize literature searching organizations; some 

correspondence will be initiated. 

2. Correspondence will be initiated to locate archived 

data and material. 

A. 300 references have been located pcirt:ii!iiing 1 t t(ull 'he 

of Alaska and Bring B and n Sa d the refere(,Inces cataloged . 

1? . 12 0 references have been recrivcd ;,ii! e:x:;!iin': l , Ith 

r el'c iecrc, l:iv'e been 'ec mN'(ri- d lt il>t,. 

' i Iro653 

653

-2- 

D. All of the Bering Sea benthic material c!ll ctccl by Sam 

Stoker is presently archived at the Marine Sorting Center 

and is available for this project. 

E. Biological Material collected by Hans Nelson and D. M. 

Hopkin during the course of the study - Sedimentary 

Processes and Distribution of Particulate Gold in Nol-thern 

Bering Sea - is presently being worked up at the Marine 

Sorting Center. The larger mollusks from this study have 

already been studied by Rowland of USGS. 

IV. Preliminary Interpretations 

No comments can be included at present. All work is in initial 

phases. 


None. 


(6 months) 

Budget Total Expended* Remaining 

Salary & wages 51,046.00 1,148.40 49,897.60 


Equipment -0- -0- -0- 

Travel 3,750.00 -0- 3,750.00 

Other 5,200.00 42.05 5,157.95 

Total Direct 68,621.00 1,385.68 67,235.32 

Indirect 29,198.00 656.88 28,541.12 

Task Order Total 97,819.00 2,042.56* 95,776.4,4 

*Preliminary cost data, not yet fully processed. 

,!

OUTER CONTINENTAL SHELF ENERGY PROGRAMy 


P. 0. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 / 


Project Title: Food and Feeding Relationships in the Benthic and 

Demersal Fishes of the Gulf of Alaska and Bering 

Sea 



Principal Investigator: Dr. Ronald L. Smith 

Assoc. Professor of Zoology/Biology 




Objectives for this quarter include archival of guts collected during 

the summer in the Gulf of Alaska and include arranging for gut samples 

to be taken in the Bering Sea during the fall cruise of the "Miller Freeman". 


Stomachs from Gulf of Alaska fishes were collected and preserved by personnel 

of the benthic program under the supervision of Dr. Howard Feder. 

These activities were carried out during three legs of the cruise of the 

trawler "North Pacific". 

Arrangements were made whereby personnel of NWFC would collect fish 

stomachs during trawling activities on board the R.V. "Miller Freeman" 

in the Bering Sea. Also, we were able to put one of our men aboard the 

"Miller Freeman" on Leg III of that cruise. 

III. Results 

Collections from the Bering (made incidental to Dr. Feder's invertebrate 

collections) include the following species and numbers of specimens: 

Yellowfin sole 111 

Alaska plaice 76 

Greenland Turbot 73 

Pacific herring 51 

Saffron cod 47 

Rainbow smelt 

42 

Sturgeon poaches 

42 

Rock sole 41 

Capelin 

32 

Wattled eelpout 30 

Longnose dab 28 

Pollock 

23 

Great sculpin 

Steller's grcnlinp 21 

14 additional speci ; w tiil 1 Ito 19 spec.inme'.s t, of" 

" 1 ]II i fl I' , [ ' (i6 i ) ! 1 t! ,', . 1. 0 '::; 

o l A li; ;; , . 'Til ; [oh i ;; "l'1 i' i 'i qp Let i on k it i 1i :;. i;; l 'I .i; 1 i \, i: ,; 

657 

20

formalin solution. We expect to buffer these collections in the near 

future. Collections from the Gulf include the following species and 

approximate numbers of specimens: 

Black cod 29 

Pacific cod 151 

Shortfin eelpout 115 

Wattled eelpout 62 

Eulachon 105 

Halibut 45 

Pollock 368 

Rougheye rockfish 65 

Springhead sculpin 67 

Yellowbrush lord 47 

Searcher 37 

Dover sole 142 

Flathead sole 247 

Rex sole 388 

Turbot 350 

In addition to these activities, we have made arrangements for and received 

a retrospective literature search through OASIS, searching five different 

data bases. 


The major problem encountered during this quarter was the very scanty 

collections from Leg I of the "Miller Freeman" cruise and the lack of 

collections from Leg II. The operational plan for that cruise called 

for the collection of 200-300 stomachs from the four or five most abundant 

fish species encountered. Instructions for sample collection and preservation 

materials including cloth bags, formaldehyde, labels and buckets were 

to be supplied by IMS personnel. The instructions and materials were 

supplied, yet the Chief Scientist of Leg I did not make any effort to secure 

the required samples. Our only samples resulted from the spare time activity 

of an IMS technician on board. This unfortunate situation has resulted in 

the loss of a great deal of information about food and feeding in these 

fishes. This situation seems to reflect a real disinterest on the part of 

Northwest Fisheries Center in cooperation to meet mutual goals in what was 

supposed to be an integrated program. 

Another problem has to do with the buckets we provided for storage of 

the stomachs. We had 120 four gallon pails with lids delivered to the 

R.V. "Miller Freeman" at least one week before it sailed for the Bering. 

Our supplier is reliable and has confirmed that he did deliver the pails. 

IMS personnel could not seem to locate these pails on board the "Miller 

Freeman" during Leg I. Since our supplies budget has been exhausted ans 

since these buckets will be essential for any further collections from: the 

Bering, it is critical that these pails be found and made available tL i . 

Lid'


Total 3 mos 




Equipment 490.00 0 490.00 

Travel 1,500.00 0 1,500.00 

Other 9,400.00 1,300.44 8,099.56 

Total Direct 54,223.00 6,823.69 47,399.31 

Indirect 20Q940.00 2,767.65 18,172.35 

Total Cost 75,163.00 9,591.34* 65,571.66 


659



P. O. BOX 1808 

Quarterly Report for Quarter EndiAHdSN E§~ mW021975 .. 

Project Title: Preparation of Illustrnted Keys to Skeletal Remains 

and Otoliths of Forage Fishes 



Principal Investigator: James E. Morrow 

Professor of Zoology and Biological Sciences 




To develop illustrated keys to skeletal remains and otoliths for 

forage fishes in the Gulf of Alaska and Bering Sea. 


Specimens were received from three cruises. The first two sets of 

material were preserved informalin rather than being frozen, so preparation 

of these materials is much slower than would be the case with 

frozen material. Considerable experimentation was needed to develop a 

fruitful technique for preparing skeletons from formaldehyde specimens. 

We finally settled on the rotting technique. The specimens are cleaned 

of as much flesh as possible, then put in jars of water. Eventually 

a bacterial culture develops, which rots away the flesh. This takes 

six weeks or more, but produces a good skeleton. We currently have 22 

skeletons in process by this method. 

III. Results 

Ninety five (95) sets of otoliths, representing 16 species have been 

taken and mounted. Length data for each specimen have been recorded in 

the hope that we will be able to include a relation between otolith size 

and fish size in the key. 

IV. Problems Encounctered 

Because of the long delay in receiving notice of approved funding and 

the difficulty of finding a qualified technician, said technician was 

not hired until 1 September. We were unable to find anyone who wanted 

to work full time on this project, so hired one half time person. It is 

anticipated that another half time person will be hired within the next 

week or so. 

661


-2- 

Total 3 mos 



Staff Benefits 4,134.00 0 4,134.00 

Equipment 0 444.00 (444.00)** 

Travel 0 0 0 

Other 1,600.00 0 1,600.00 

Total Direct 30,052.00 444.00 29,608.00 

Indirect 13,910.00 0 13,910.00 

Total Cost 43,962.00 444.00* 43,518.00 


**Request for fund transfer in contract officers hands. 

6'6\?

OUTER CONTINENTAL .HELF ENERGY PROGRAM 


P. 0. BOX 1808 

Quarterly Report for Quarter Ending SepMJCg UrASKAl602 .. . 

R q# 318 

Project Title: Preparation of Illustrated Keys to Skeletal Remains 

and Otoliths of Forage Fishes 








To develop illustrated keys to skeletal remains and otoliths of 

forage fishes in the Beaufort Sea. 


No cruise has been scheduled into the Beaufort Sea hence no material 

for analysis has been received. 

III. Results 

None. 


None. 


Total 6 mos 


Salary & wages 15,272.00 136.00 15,135.70 



Travel 750.00 0 750.00 

Other 900.00 0 900.00 

Total Direct 19,492.00 158.11 19,333.89 

Indirect 8,734.00 77.96 8,656.04 

Total Cost 28,226.00 236.07* 27,989.93 


6 63



P. 0. BOX 1808 

Quarterly Report for Quarter EndingJLRteUpiAA1A3(a875 .... 

Project Title: Literature Search on Density Distribution of Fishes 

of the Beaufort Sea 








To complete a literature search on the density and distrubiton of 

fishes of the Beaufort Sea. 


None. 

III. Results 

Mrs. Wilma E. Pfeifer, a well-qualified reference librarian, was hired 

in July on a half time basis. To date, Mrs. Pfeifer has located more 

than 400 pertinent references and has abstracted about 50 of them. 

Cooperative arrangements have been established with Ms. Bonnie Friedman, 

who is engaged in a similar project for the Alaska Department of Fish 

and Game, Fairbanks, and Mr. Andrew Grossman, working on a summary of 

literature on invertebrates of the Beaufort Sea for Dr. Howard Feder in 

an Atlantic Richfield Oil Company project. 


None. 


Total 3 mos 

Budget Expended Remaining 


Staff Benefits 1,844.00 0 1,844.00 


Travel 625.00 0 625.00 

Other 475.00 0 475.00 

Total Direct 13,795.00 0 13,795.00 

Indirect 6207.00 0 6207.00 

Total Cost 20,002.0(0 0 20, 002 .00 

665

Departmental Concurrence: - 

OtTER CONTINENTAL SHELF ENERGY PROGRAM J eC #gj 


W 

P, 0. Box 1808 027 19l 

UNEAU ALASKA 99802 NO 0 195 

S.GE OQA 

Alaska Marine Ichthyoplankton Key 

(Research Unit #349) 







/ 

I ( 1' -. 



667

Ichthyoplankton 

A key to the pelagic fish eggs of Alaskan waters has been constructed. 

This key covers 20 species of present commercial or possible commercial 

value. Several species could not be included at this time because no 

information is available. 

A list of commercially valuable Alaskan species has been prepared 

including 49 species of fish, 2 species of shrimps, 3 species of crabs, 

3 species of clams, 1 species of scallop, and 1 species of abalone. A list 

of references for these species is included. 

A list of Alaskan fishes with pelagic larvae has been prepared. This 

list comprises 173 species from 37 families. 

A bibliography has been prepared covering life history information on 

15 fish species of commercial value. There are approximately 100-130 

references dealing with pelagic life history studies of Alaskan commercial 

species although many of these species are also found in Californian, 

Japanese, or Northeast Pacific waters. There is little information available 

concerning fishes in the Beaufort Sea. 

In addition, a list of approximately 100 references to literature 

relating to ichthyoplankton and fisheries in Alaskan waters has been compiled. 

668



P. O. BOX 1808 

JUNEAU, ALASKA 99802 -.... 

Progress Report, BLM/OCS Research Unit #354 

NOV 06 1975 

.NEGOA 

Review of Literature and Archived Data on Non-Salmonid 

Pelagic Fishes of the Eastern Bering Sea 

by 

Martin 0. Nelson 



Seattle, Washington 


669

i. Task Objectives 

II. Background 

Review of Litera ure and Archived Data for Non-Salmonid 

SPel4piFishes of the Eastern Bering Sea 

A. Ley~ew pnfd sbamarize the published and unpublished scientific 

literature on the distribution, abundance, life histories and 

population dynamics of non-salmonid pelagic fishes of the 

eastern Bering Sea. 

B. Examine and summarize unpublished research vessel survey and 

commerical fishery data on the distribution, abundance and 

size composition of the subject species. 

C. Prepare data report on records of the distribution, abundance 

and size composition of the subject species. 

D. Prepare annotated bibliography and a narrative report which 

collates results of studies undertaken under objectives (A) 

and (B) and describes, within the constraints of the available 

data, observed temporal and spatial variations in the distribu- 

tions of the subject species. 

In-house meetings were held during the summer to define the geographic 

area of interest, prospective subject species, the types/scope of 

information to be included in the review and to make arrangements for 

employing new personnel. Attention was also devoted to the problem of 

how to treat semi-pelagic species, e.g., pollock and other cods, rockfish 

and sablefish, of interest to both this project and RU #175. 

A. Geographic Coverage 

The area which is being considered extends from 520 to 600 north 

latitude and from 1800 to the Alaskan coast. Examination of 

670

unpublished catch records is essentially confined to this area. 

The literature review work is also confined to this area to the 

extent that it is practical. 

B. Species 

A prospective species list is attached (Appendix A). This list 

is based on a preliminary examination of the literature and of 

unpublished data files from research vessel surveys. It has been 

decided that description of the life histories of all cods, all 

rockfish and sablefish, will be treated in detail by the demersal 

resource project (RU #175). However, all information on the 

pelagic occurrence, distribution, behavior and sampling/detection 

of these species will be examined and reported on by the present 

project. In addition, records are being kept of the pelagic 

'occurrence of flatfishes. 

C. Subject Areas 

The final report to be submitted for this project will include 

synoptic information from the literature on the life history, 

distribution and abundance, population dynamics and (where 

applicable) fisheries for the subject species. It will also 

include detailed records of the data on distribution, abundance 

and size composition obtained from the examination of unpublished 

data files. The outline below is being used as a guide in 

compiling literature on the subject species, but it should not 

be considered a report outline, since the report will necessarily 

be much less detailed. 

1. Distribution and abundance by life stage (eggs, larvae, 

juveniles, and adults) 

y71

a. total area 

b. relative abundance by time and area 

c. ecological/oceanographic determinants of distribution 

changes 

2. Life history and behavior 

a. Reproduction 

(1) Sexuality, mating and fertilization 

(2) Age and size at maturity 

(3) Fecundity 

(4) Spawning 

(a) Seasons, areas, frequency 

(b) Egg stage: structure, size, hatching 

type, predators and parasites 

b. Larval and juvenile histories 

(1) Rate of development 

(2) Feeding and movements 

(3) Predators, competitors and survival rates 

c. Adult history 

(1) Longevity 

(2) Hardiness 

(3) Predators, competitors, parasites and diseases 

d. Nutrition and growth 

(1) Food and feeding behavior 

(2) Growth 

(a) Food types and amounts 

(b) Feeding behavior: season, location, time 

(a) Age-length :nd age-weight relations 

(b) Ralative and absolute growth rates 

672

e. Behavior 

(1) Migrations 

(2) Bathymetric and vertical movements 

(3) Schooling characteristics 

(4) Behavior in relation to sampling/detection 

tactics and strategy 

3. Population structure and dynamics 

4. Fishing 

a. Sex ratio, size composition, age composition 

b. Abundance and density 

(1) Relative abundance and standing stock estimates 

(2) Density estimates and changes in density 

c. Recruitment 

d. Mortality 

(1) Natural mortality rate 

(2) Fishing mortality rate 

e. Yield models and estimates 

f. Population/community/ecosystem relations 

a. Vessels, gear and gear selectivity 

b. Areas and seasons 

c. History of fishery 

(1) Distribution of effort 

(2) Catch statistics 

5. Conservation/management regulations 

It is apparent that for most of the subject species, 

little or no information will be available on many of the 

items listed. This is primarily because most of the data 

673

available on non-salmonid pelagic'species (with' the exception 

of herring and semi-pelagic groundfishes) have been collected 

on an incidental basis, and also because most of the species 

are unexploited. 

It should be noted that the nomenclature, taxonomic status 

and morphology of the subject species will not be described 

in any detail. Speciation/subpopulation problems will be 

treated for those species in which they are important. 

No attempt will be made to include references on processing, 

utilization or marketing. Also, papers on the effects of 

contaminants on the subject species will not be included and 

no attempt will be made to predict the possible impacts of 

petroleum development activities on the subject species. 

D. Personnel and the Interaction with RU #64 

On September 12, Ms. Janet Wall was hired under the present 

project to work on the literature review studies. Ms. Wall 

is supervised by Mr. Paul Macy and it was decided that their 

work will cover both the eastern Bering Sea and Gulf of Alaska 

(RU #64) areas. Conversely, Mr. Nick Lampsakis, a GS-9 Fishery 

Biologist hired on September 29 under RU #64 to work on data 

records from the Gulf of Alaska, is also examining the eastern 

Bering Sea data sources. Mr. Lampsakis will be supervised by 

Mr. James Mason. Although not specified in the project proposals, 

this "cross-walking" of personnel between the two similar RU's 

eliminates the possibility of a significant amount of redundant 

effort, makes the best use of available talents, and should 

provide an efficient means of accomplishing the objectives of 

both RU's. 

674

III. Laboratory Activities 

A. Methods 


The literature review was begun by examining major literature 

indices and some of the more comprehensive references on the 

subject species. The sequence of steps which is being followed 

in the literature review process is as follows: 

a. Enter complete citation on file card and arrange by 

author and year 

b. Periodically duplicate accumulated reference cards and 

place in file sorted by publication 

c. Obtain and examine source literature and verify accuracy 

of reference 

d. Prepare annotation and, if necessary, select pages to 

be duplicated 

e. Papers and/or pertinent extracted information placed 

in file arranged in order of final report outline 

f. Foreign literature translated as necessary 

In order to avoid unnecessary duplication of effort, personnel 

from RU #175 are working with Ms. Wall and Mr. Macy. Although 

it has not yet been necessary, or practical, it is planned to 

take advantage of computerized literature retrieval services. 


The inventory of unpublished data was recently initiated and 

to date has included the incidental catch records of the high 

seas salmon purse seining conducted by the University of 

Washington's Fisheries Research Institute (FRI), the NWFC's 

high seas salmon gillnetting studies, and the Japanese 

675

B. Results 

Fishery Agency's high seas salmon gillnetting studies. 

The purse seine catch data on non-salmonid pelagic species 

were not entered on cards and it was necessary to examine all 

of the original field data and format it for preliminary ADP 

tabulation and analysis. Computer printouts of incidental 

catches made in gillnets were available. These data were 

recently reformatted. Decisions as to the final data report 

formats will not be made until a preliminary inventory of 

all data sources has been completed. 


To date, the literature search has produced approximately 

600 references on non-salmonid pelagic fishes of the eastern 

Bering Sea and Gulf of Alaska. Many of these deal with the 

life histories of the subject species and the information 

they contain is germane to both RU #354 and RU #64. It is 

expected that the total number of papers will not exceed 

about 1000 and that additional articles will be obtained 

mainly from the literature cited in the papers already located. 

Review and annotation of the papers available is just now being 

initiated. 


a. FRI high seas salmon purse seine records 

These are available for the years from 1956 to the 

present. Effort data is retrievable from IBM cards 

by year, INPFC area of sampling, set location, set 

number and vessel code. Within the area of interest, 

304 sets were made. Of these, 183 contain useable 

676

information for non-salmonid pelagic species. 

b. NWFC high seas salmon gillnetting records 

Records are available for the years 1955 to 1972. 

In the subject area, 213 sets were made, 92 of which 

contain useable data on incidental catches of the 

subject species. 

c. Japanese high sea salnon gillnetting records 

Japanese gillnetting effort in the subject area was 

limited and records presently available at the NWFC 

from INPFC contained no information on incidentally 

caught species. 

Iv. Preliminary Interpretation of Results 

Since results are limited to an inventory of selected data sources and 

the assembly of a literature file, no interpretation is feasible. 

However, it can be noted that the inventory of high seas purse seine and 

gillnet data, together with a rough estimate of the amount of information 

available in the data sources not yet examined, suggests that the total 

amount of catch data on all but a few non-salmonid pelagic species is 

quite small. 

Potential data sources to be examined during the next few months 

include the NMFS Auke Bay Fisheries Laboratory Bristol Bay salmon 

research records, Alaska Department of Fish and Game data, several U. S. 

groundfish survey data files, data from the U. S. observer program on 

Japanese commercial vessels, Soviet commercial fishery statistics, and 

the Japanese commercial catch and effort data on herring which is made 

available annually through INPFC. 

677


It is recommended, if it is administratively feasible, that this project 

and RU #64 be combined into one Research Unit. Except for the geographic 

areas of interest, the two projects are essentially identical. There are 

no major differences in the species groups of concern and putting 

information on the two areas together in one source would be advantageous 

to most people interested in obtaining information on the subject species. 

Combining the research units would also eliminate a highly significant 

amount of duplication when reporting, particularly with regard to objectives, 

methods, species life history descriptions, descriptions of gear types 

used on research surveys which covered both areas, etc. 

The inventory of data records which has been conducted to date 

suggests that in some instances: there may be significant errors with 

regard to the identification and enumeration of the incidentally caught 

non-salmonid species. Accurate enumeration was generally not attempted 

when the incidental catches were large. In most instances, errors in 

identification and enumeration cannot be corrected. However, in those 

cases where potential errors could significantly affect results and their 

interpretation, the data will be singled out and properly qualified. 

It should be noted that there were very significant gaps between times 

of sampling during most of the high seas salmon studies. Usually, effort 

was concentrated in the summer months. As a consequence, seasonal 

differencesin the distribution and abundance of the subject species will 

be difficult to describe in detail. 

Although it is perhaps obvious, it should be recognized that none of 

the fishing gearsused during the high seas salmon studies were designed 

678

Lamnidae 

APPENDIX A 

Proposed Species List of Non-Salmonid Pelagic Fishes 

Salmon shark (Lamna ditropis) 

Carcharinidae 

Clupeidae 

Osmeridae 

Gadidae 

Blue shark (Prionace glauca) 

Spiny dogfish (Squalus acanthias) 

Herring (Clupea harengus pallasi) 

Capelin (Mallotus villosus) 

Rainbow smelt (Osmerus mordax dentex) 

Eulachon (Thaleichthys pacificus) 

Pacific cod (Gadus macrocephalus) 

Pacific hake (Merluccius productus) 

Pacific tomcod (Microgadus proximus) 

Walleye pollock (Theragra chalcogramma) 

Arctic cod (Boreogadus saida) 

Saffron cod (Eleginus gracilis) 

Scomberesocidae 

Bramidae 

Pacific saury (Cololabis saira) 

Pacific pomfret (Brama japonica) 

Trichodontidae 

Sandfish (Trichodon trichodon) 

167 ,

to be effective for the subject species. Consequently, it will be 

necessary to be extremely cautious when attempting to describe distribution 

and abundance patterns from the data available. 


680

Zaproridae 

Prowfish (Zaprora silehus) 

Ammodytidae 

Icosteidae 

Pacific sandlance (Ammodytes hexapterus) 

Ragfish (Icosteus aenigmaticus) 

Scorpaenidae 

All species in the genera Sebastes.and Sebastolobus which occur 

in the study area. 

Anoplomatidae 

Sablefish (Anoplopoma fimhria) 

Hexagrammidae 

Atka mackerel (Pleurogrammus monopterygius) 

1+51

RU 356 

Littoral Survey of the Beaufort Sea 

Quarterly report covering July, August, September 1975 

was not received in time to be included in this volume. 

It will be included with the next quarter' reports. 

683

Beaufort Sea Plankton Studies 

(Research Unit #359) 


Departmental Concurrence: 



Rita A. Horner 




685 



RU 3S F

I. Introduction 

Emphasis of the Beaufort Sea plankton studies project for the period 

1 April to 30 September 1975 has been: 

1. To determine seasonal density distribution and environmental requirements 

of phytoplankton and zooplankton in the nearshore area of the 

Beaufort Sea from Barrow to Prudhoe Bay and at an offshore site on 

an ice floe station; 

2. To summarize existing literature on Arctic phytoplankton, zooplankton, 

and ichthyoplankton. 

In addition, we have made arrangements to obtain samples from the Auke 

Bay Fisheries Laboratory that were collected during the 1972 WEBSEC 

cruise in the Beaufort Sea and we have compiled lists of phytoplankton 

and zooplankton species known to be found in the Beaufort Sea. 

II. Field Projects 

a. Barrow to Prudhoe Bay 

1. Project Personnel and location 

Rita Horner 1 - 15 August NARL 

Mike Macaulay 4 - 18 August NARL 

Rich McKinney 4 Aug - 3 Sep NARL 

Debbie White 1 Aug - 2 Oct NARL, Oliktok, Prudhoe Bay 

2. Sampling program 

Unfavorable ice conditions and logistic difficulties hampered the nearshore 

field work. Despite problems, 10 stations for phytoplankton 

samples and acoustical observations were taken between Pt. Barrow and 

Oliktok; 37 phytoplankton stations were taken between Oliktok and Prudhoe 

Bay during August and September (Fig. 1, 2). 

Sampling between Pt. Barrow and Oliktok during August was accomplished 

using the USGS Beaver airplane on floats as a sampling platform. The 

plane landed near shore and surface phytoplankton samples were collected. 

The plane then taxied toward the ice for 5 min to obtain acoustic observations. 

Surface phytoplankton samples were collected near the ice at 

the end of each transect. Transects were made at Pt. Barrow (1), Scott 

Point (1), Ross Point (3), Tangent Point (2), Cape Simpson (2), and Drew 

Point (1). 

During September, a cooperative field program with the Morita-Atlas microbiology 

project was undertaken. Two samples were taken in Prudhoe Bay 

utilizing the Beaver. A Boston Whaler belonging to NARL was obtained at 

Oliktok and taken to Prudhoe Bay. Three surface phytoplankton samples 

were collected at Milne Point, Egg Island, and in Prudhoe Bay on this 

cruise. From 7 to 16 September, 36 stations were taken in Prudhoe Bay 

686

(Fig. 2) with surface and near-bottom water samples collected at each 

station. In addition, phytoplankton net tows were taken at some 

stations. In the laboratory the water samples were divided for phytoplankton 

standing stock, chlorophyll a, primary productivity, and 

nutrient determinations. 

One additional sample was collected in early August between Reindeer and 

Gull islands. The Beaver airplane moved approximately 8 km during the 

time a surface and a subsurface sample were collected at the same nominal 

site. 

3. Logistic support 

Logistic support was inadequate. Many more samples in the area of primary 

interest around Prudhoe Bay could have been collected if the field 

facility at Prudhoe Bay had been available to us in early August, with a 

Boston Whaler and a competent operator for the boat. The lagoon area 

was ice-free during most of the month. From previous work, we know that 

most biological activity occurs during and shortly after break-up. We 

were hampered by the lack of information concerning field operations 

that gets to the principal investigators and to the people in the field. 

We knew very little about the capabilities of the Beaver airplane before 

we arrived at Barrow. The necessity for the plane to be underway at all 

times made water sampling extremely difficult and limited sampling to the 

surface. It was also difficult to schedule the airplane. Even when the 

weather was good, field operations did not get underway until late morning 

because the planes were not ready. Gear, such as a winch, for use 

in the Beaver was also difficult to obtain. We finally used a large 

size NARL gas-powered winch that took up most of the interior of the 

plane, had to be vented to the outside with a piece of hot pipe, and 

would not start readily. 

We suggest that some person responsible for the logistics arrangements 

be in the field, at NARL or Prudhoe Bay, to provide field coordination 

and be available when field personnel have problems. Andy Heiberg at 

NARL provided some help, although this was not his principal project. 

Housing at V & E construction was adequate and the people there flexible 

and cooperative. Laboratory space is a big problem with the kitchen 

area used as a laboratory. This could be extremely troublesome if 

formalin or other preservatives were being used by one group while 

another had to work with live organisms. It is also a problem when radioactive 

isotopes are used even when all proper precautions are taken and 

only small amounts of radioactivity are involved. As a result, little 

experimental work can be done at this facility. More freezer space 

should be available, i.e., V & E should store its food elsewhere than 

the OCS freezer. We did not know the freezer belonged to OCS until late 

in the sampling period. If more than two groups are using the camp, a 

second truck should be available. 

The Oliktok DEW-line site personnel were cooperative and provided transportation, 

housing, food, and other support. Arctic Marine Freighters 

has always been extremely cooperative with scientific projects at Prudhoe 

Bay. They provided unofficial support such as docking space and trans- 

689

portation. 

3 

It would help if NARL and OCS could coordinate their activities. 

Adequate radios for field parties should always be provided, especially 

for use during small-boat operations at Prudhoe. These radios should 

be able to communicate with the regular Prudhoe Bay radio system in case 

of emergency. Having a boat operator who knows the area, as well as the 

boat, is a must. Much of our success at Prudhoe Bay must be credited to 

Joe Ningeok of NARL, who ran the Boston Whaler for us. 

b. Ice Floe Station 

1. Project personnel 

The personnel associated with the UW biology program on the ice floe 

station were: 

Clarence Pautzke 30 May to 2 October 

Jerry Hornoff 30 May to 18 September 

Kevin Wyman 30 May to 24 August 

Maureen McCrea 18 September to 2 October 

2. Sampling program 

The Beaufort Sea Plankton studies at the main AIDJEX camp, Big Bear, 

began 2 June 1975 and ended 1 October 1975, when scientific personnel 

had to be evacuated due to break-up of the ice floe on which the camp 

was located. During the period 2 June to 5 September (last position 

available) the ice station traveled more than 703 km in the geographical 

area bounded by lines drawn through 76 0 33'N/147 0 58'W, 74 0 00'N/139 0 02'W, 

76 0 26'N/149 0 43'W. A map of the cruise track will be made available to 

us (Figure 3). 

Biological studies included net sampling for zooplankton and water 

bottle casts for phytoplankton, chlorophyll a, primary productivity, and 

nitrates. Sampling of these parameters (except nitrates) was done every 

three days to give a continuous record over time at the specific depths 

sampled. Maximum depth of samples was 150 m, with the majority coming 

from the mixed layer above 60 m. In addition, light measurements were 

recorded for incoming radiation on the ice pack surface and observations 

of state of melt of the surface were also logged daily. 

In all, the following numbers of samples were taken: 

Type 

Number 

Net Zooplankton 994 

Preserved Phytoplankton 209 

Chlorophyll a 1096 

Primary productivity 2941 

Nitrates 272 

Particulate Carbon 44 

690

3. Expected results 

4 

The results of analysis of these samples will be used to describe qualitatively 

and to model mathematically the planktonic ecosystem of the 

pack ice zone of the Beaufort Sea area of the Arctic Ocean. The dependency 

of primary production on the incoming radiation and state of the 

ice cover, the seasonal response of the herbivore level to summer changes 

in primary production, possible effects of grazing on the phytoplankton 

populations, and the transition of the ecosystem at summer's end in preparation 

for overwintering will be emphasized. Interpretation of the 

results will be applied to other oceanic ecosystems that experience 

shows seasonal changes in environmental factors. 

4. Logistic support 

Generous help in getting required supplies was provided by Sally Manning 

at NARL and Andy Heiberg, the AIDJEX coordinator at NARL. Both of these 

individuals responded promptly and efficiently to requests throughout 

the summer and helped ensure the success of our program. In general, 

ice camp maintenance was excellent. 

111. chthyoplankton 

A key to the pelagic fish eggs of Alaskan waters has been constructed. 

This key covers 20 species of present commercial or possible commercial 

value. Several species could not be included at this time because no 

information is available. 

A list of commercially valuable Alaskan species has been prepared 

including 49 species of fish, 2 species of shrimps, 3 species of crabs, 

3 species of clams, 1 species of scallop, and 1 species of abalone. A 

list of references for these species is included. 

A list of Alaskan fishes with pelagic larvae has been prepared. This 

list comprises 173 species from 37 families. 

A bibliography has been prepared covering life history information on 

15 fish species of commercial value. There are approximately 100-130 

references dealing with pelagic life history studies of Alaskan 

commercial species although many of these species are also found in 

Californian, Japanese, or Northeast Pacific waters. There is little 

information available concerning fishes in the Beaufort Sea. 

In addition, a list of approximately 100 references to literature 

relating to ichthyoplankton and fisheries in Alaskan waters has been 

compiled. 

IV. Literature review 

The literature review for Beaufort Sea phytoplankton and zooplankton has 

begun. Approximately 250 references to Arctic zooplankton have been 

obtained and checked, and about the same number remain to be checked.

5 

Many of the references are taxonomic in nature and are not restricted 

to Arctic forms. The literature search has been designed to include 

references for the whole Arctic Ocean and peripheral waters including 

the northern Bering Sea, Norwegian Sea, Denmark Strait, Baffin Bay and 

Davis Strait because it is impossible to separate the Beaufort Sea 

biologically from the rest of the Arctic. 

Approximately 100 phytoplankton references are available, but thus far 

most of the attention has been toward zooplankton. 

A computer processing system, similar to that described by Bridges (1970), 

is being planned. This program, called INDEX, provides indexes to 

authors, key words, sources, and citations. The program is adaptable 

to allow new indexing schemes to be added using existing procedures. 

REFERENCES CITED 

Bridges, K. W. 1970. Automatic indexing of personal bibliographies. 

BioScience 20:94-97. 

693 

SU.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1976-677-347 / 1248 REGION NO. 8

Quarterly reports of principal investigators for July-September

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?